JP2020068958A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine made less susceptible to foreign matter which gets into a discharge ball path part.SOLUTION: The game machine includes a door frame, a body frame arranged behind the door frame, a tank rail part 553 connecting a ball tank provided above the body frame and a discharge device provided lateral to the body frame, and an open/close member 557 which can open/close a flow path of the tank rail part. A bottom portion of the tank rail part is provided with a hole part 553h for foreign matter to fall. An opening mode of the hole part is changed in association with an open/close operation of the open/close member. The tank rail part is constituted of a colorless member, and the open/close member is constituted of a colored member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 100

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game using a game ball (for example, “pachinko ball”) as a game medium.

A game machine (pachinko machine) using a game ball as a game medium is, for example, as described in Patent Document 1, a door frame located at the forefront (“front frame 2” in Patent Document 1), and the door frame. The main body frame (the same "mechanical plate 60") located after the, the game board (the "game board 30") that is detachably attached to the main body frame, and the ball tank (the same "the game board 30") provided above the main body frame. "Ball tank 65"), a payout device (the same "ball payout device 92") provided on the side of the main body frame, and a payout ball passage portion that connects the ball tank and the payout device and is bent in a substantially inverted L shape. Have and. In addition, the payout ball passage portion is a horizontal tank rail (upstream of the "ball alignment rail 69" and the "curve gutter 74") that guides the game balls of the ball tank to the downstream side, and a vertical direction that leads to the payout device. The guide passage (the downstream portion of the "curve gutter 74" and the "prize ball passages 86a, 86b") is formed. Unit 61 ").
Further, in the gaming machine, when the ball stopper member (the same "ball stopper metal fitting 71") that can open and close the passage of the payout ball passage portion (specifically, the tank rail) comes into contact with the game ball flowing through the tank rail. It has a ball rectifying member (the same "ball leveling member 70") that can be swung while applying an appropriate load to the game ball, and has a wire connection terminal for wiring above the tank rail (the same "terminal board 78"). )).

  Further, in the payout ball passage portion of the gaming machine, troublesome foreign matters such as metal powder generated by rubbing between the game balls and resin powder generated due to rubbing between the game ball and the cleaning pellets are included. For example, as described in Patent Document 2, a drop port for dropping the foreign matter and discharging the foreign substance to the outside is provided mainly in the passage bottom wall of the tank rail of the payout ball passage unit (in Patent Document 2, "dust falling hole"). 232a1-232a4 ...) are provided.

JP-A-08-10413 (page 6, FIG. 4) JP, 2002-66051, A

  However, the conventional tank rail cannot be said to have a sufficient structure for smoothly flowing down the game ball, and there is room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine provided with a tank rail having a configuration different from the conventional one.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides
Door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
A tank rail portion connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame,
An opening / closing member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the tank rail portion,
The bottom of the tank rail is provided with a hole for dropping foreign matter,
In association with the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, the opening mode of the hole changes.
The tank rail portion is composed of a colorless member,
The opening / closing member is composed of a colored member.

  In the above description, the "ball tank provided above the main body frame" includes the case where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the main body frame, the case where the ball tank is attached to the upper surface of the main body frame, and both. The same applies to the "dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame" when the dispensation device is installed on the rear side of the main body frame. Both the case of being attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case of being attached so as to straddle both of them.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine including a tank rail having a configuration different from the conventional one.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a), and (c) is a cylinder of a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 34A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the rear. is there. 34A is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A from the front, and FIG. 34B is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state in which the state is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. FIG. 7A is an enlarged front view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged perspective view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from back. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the aer line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (A) is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects horizontally at the site | part of a lower dish ball supply opening in a door frame, and (b) cuts the same site | part as (a) in the conventional door frame, and shows a main part It is sectional drawing which shows. It is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front in the state which turned the production operation button upward, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit of (a) from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front upper side. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end upward, and (b) is a effect operation unit unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production | operation production unit in the state which moved to the raising position. It is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member is at the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect | action operation part outer periphery decoration board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. It is a plan view of the effect operation unit, showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected several contact detection bodies to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and several contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the switching part between typically, (c) makes the plate left decoration unit of a plate unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the production operation unit etc. forward / backward movable, and a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and back side, such as. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has decoration, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another embodiment of a production | operation production unit typically. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the Woo line in FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. And (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-E in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and (b) is the inner layer as it is in (a) and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view which shows each decoration board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the site | part of the production operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decoration board provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. It is a top view of a main frame. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the B1-B1 line in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a sectional view taken along the line B2-B2 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including a main-portion cross-sectional view of FIG. 100 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site | part of a tank rail seeing from the back the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of another embodiment. 106A is a plan view showing the tank rail or the like of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. (B) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 by a cross section. (A), (b) is sectional drawing which shows another form which provided the protection wall of FIG. 109 in the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of a tank rail. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like, which corresponds to the cross section taken along the line KE in FIG. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form corresponding to the cross section along the line B3-B3 of FIG. 98A. It is a perspective view of the ball stopper member of another form. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail and the like in which the vicinity of a bent portion is cut. FIG. 126 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of the tank rail or the like showing a state where the ball stopper member of FIG. 115 in the retracted position is moved to the protruding position. 115A is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 115B is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 in FIG. (A) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of (a) from the right front, and (c) is the board unit of (a) from the left front. FIG. 118A is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118A as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118A as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 118A, FIG. 118B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 118A, and FIG. 118C is a view of FIG. 118A. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the cake line. It is a bottom view which shows the site | part behind a door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the board | substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example in which an out sensor is removable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 126 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 126 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of wiring of the function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of a game board in a state where a center accessory and the like are transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front constituent member and a game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent member and a game panel as viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in a game board from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starter unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a starter unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a center accessory and the opening part of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view showing a relationship between a center accessory, a game panel, and a back left decorative body of a back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). (A) is a top view of the third distribution device in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the third distribution device in the center accessory as seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center accessory, and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center accessory, and was seen from the front lower part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the 3rd distribution apparatus in a center accessory. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the protrusion part provided in the 2nd V winning opening and the 3rd losing mouth in the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center character, (b) is a 2nd V winning opening and a 3rd It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball when the protrusion part is not provided in the three loss mouth. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball on the right side in a table unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which circulates the 1st guide passage in a guide passage group, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which circulates the 2nd guide passage in the guide passage group. is there. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball received by the prize winning opening, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part of the 3rd distribution apparatus in (a) from a plane, (c) FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the second distribution device in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the operation | movement of the prize winning opening and the 1st distribution apparatus and the 2nd distribution apparatus according to the kind of "small hit". (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in an attacker unit, and is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of the guide passage group different from FIG. (E) And (f) is an explanatory view showing an embodiment of a different guide passage group. It is a front view of the back unit in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the light guide plate production unit of a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the light guide plate production unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and the board | substrate for patterns in a light guide plate production unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. It is a front view showing an arrangement of each decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the back right decoration board of the back front production unit in the back unit, the sub status display, and the site | part on the right side of a center accessory by a left side cross section, (b) is (a) It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decoration board | substrate of a back front production | generation unit in a back unit, a sub status indicator, and the site | part on the right side of a center character from the front. It is a wiring diagram which shows wiring of some LED of sub state LED in a back right decoration board. (A) is a front view of the out-ball detecting unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detecting unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detecting unit, and (d) is. It is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the front, (e) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the rear, and (f) is the perspective view which was seen from the out ball detection unit and the position of the lower right front. It is a figure and (g) is a perspective view which looked at an out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detecting unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detecting unit disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view showing a relationship between a game panel and an out-ball detecting unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state where the out-ball detecting unit is brought into contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view as seen from the right side, which is assembled in a game board and is vertically cut at the center of an out-out right sensor. It is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the outlet from the front in the state of being assembled on the game board. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is light-emitted and decorated in the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-emitted and decorated in the light guide plate of the light guide plate of the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection structure of each board | substrate in a game board, a motor, etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 175. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of set value confirmation display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 181. FIG. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 182. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the special design and special electric auditors product control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in lottery processing for big hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in lottery processing for types of big hits, (C) is a kind of small hits Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about processing during a small hit performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is an example of a mode of error notification. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing shown about the procedure which changes a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage. It is a specific example of an effect at the time of executing an alarm effect using the right detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a detection sensor is provided in a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is a concrete example of an effect when a warning effect is executed using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which has a ball clogging elimination hole in a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which has a ball clogging elimination hole in a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which has a 2nd out opening near the entrance of a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which has a 2nd out opening near the exit inside a 1st guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality generate | occur | produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality generate | occur | produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out mouth and a 3rd out mouth are provided separately from an out mouth. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when the 2nd out mouth and the 3rd out mouth are provided separately from the out mouth. It is a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light guide plate is set. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a plurality of ornaments are provided around the display area of the effect display device. It is a concrete example of a light guide plate and a plurality of decorative objects at the time of performing a light emission effect. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is a concrete example of the effect on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the setting information judging processing performed by the main control MPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of setting value holding suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display mode of a pending notice production and the display mode of a set value pending suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of setting value continuation suggestion production. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. 7 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state while the setting value is being changed. 8 is a time chart showing a monitoring status of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored while confirming and displaying the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while confirming and displaying the set value. 6 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a part of the activity is monitored while the setting value is being changed. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. It is an example of a table used in a lottery process. It is a modification of setting value suggestion production. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of wiring of the function display unit on the main control board. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part enlarged front view of a main control unit. It is the ZZ sectional view taken on the line of FIG. FIG. 264 is an enlarged partial front view of the main part of the main control unit showing a state in which the change suppressing means has changed to the second state from FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose top view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other to the left and right and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

  Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated to the front so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and opening and closing the door frame 3, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. In addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 63. A board unit 620 having a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a space between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. A locking unit 650 for locking.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. On the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is arranged and a predetermined effect image that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view. A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying includes a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect in accordance with a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B A general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can drive the game ball B by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. Thus, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 195.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the front side. It is possible to entertain the player by causing the production unit 3200 or the like to perform a light emission production.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling it into each main member. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side surface from a portion opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has strength and rigidity enhanced by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

  Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further to the front side. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The right upper connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and abuts the horizontal fixing portion 22a on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side being in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the horizontal fixing portion 23b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a contact the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the right end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted by penetrating the hooking piece 25b back and forth. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the left-right direction length is the same as the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thus, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a laterally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 forms a curtain inner space 40a which cooperates with the front curtain member 42 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a that is formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that is opened upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that is opened upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and that the upper surface inclines so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the upper end protruding portion 44e that is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and protrudes forward, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged from the first lower hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the discharge hole 60d. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, in a laterally spaced manner, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside (curtain plate inner space 40a) of the curtain plate front member 42 and the outside to communicate with each other through the gap between the blade portions 46b.

  The port member 47 connects the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by the two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass sound.

  The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

  According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the body frame speaker 622 are slanted by the plurality of slanted blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is located diagonally above and forward. Through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295, the handle unit 180 can be directed to the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure released from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. Therefore, it is released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players who are traveling around in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the production sound can be heard, it is possible to attract the player's interest also by the production sound, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

  Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 provided in the body frame 4, it is possible to increase the volume of the enclosure 624. Therefore, it is possible to output a more deep bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely leftward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that vertically penetrates the horizontal portion 60a and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, and rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the back.

  The door frame 3 is formed into a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the vehicle, a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit. Of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and rear, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. In the rear view, the speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner, the door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in the rear view, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. Door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the view, handle rear relay board 106 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay A door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the substrate 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay substrate cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable that covers the wiring cable. It includes a cover 109, a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference to shoot the game ball B in the upper plate 201. The device 540 is for playing a game that is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. ..

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear handle substrate and covers the rear handle substrate 106 from the rear side, and the case which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides forming an inner circumference, respectively, approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 includes a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) that is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly more forward than the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted by penetrating back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in front view on the left side. And a ball feeding opening 101e for penetrating the ball feeding unit 140 in the front and rear direction to allow the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate the front and rear sides. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower rear corner of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And FIG. 83) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangle extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and a door frame left side lower decoration board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, a door frame top relay substrate of the door frame top unit 450, and an interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

  The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear handle rear board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 extending from the left reinforcement frame 111; A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4. And a hooking member 116 to be hooked.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for mounting the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

  The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is located between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

  When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the upper portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. Can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotatable with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522 a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34A is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cylinder lock as shown in FIG. 34A from the front and rear, and FIG. 34C is a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 6 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the state of (a).

  The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used to open and close the lock with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular cylinder inserted in the key hole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates with a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and the cylinder mounting frame 115. Second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the front-rear direction around a lower portion of the cylinder body 131, and an upper end portion that rotates to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. And a lower end side of the second cam member 135 which is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and an upper end side of which rotates the first cam member 134. It is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and the lower end side is rotatable at a portion below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. A second arm 137 strip-shaped mounted, and a.

  In addition, the cylinder lock 130 is a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133). A rivet that rotatably attaches the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and.

  In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmitting member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. In the second cam member 135, the lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

  In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about each rotation axis. is doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. ..

  The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces in a cylindrical shape locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side thereof is not shown in the drawings. Thus, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  In the cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmitting member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are formed of metal. ..

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

  Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

  Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

  In a normal state of the cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 are respectively the center of rotation of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The second arm 137 is attached to the right side portion, and the upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 below the respective rotation centers. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by 90 degrees with a regular key.

  In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, let the first arm 136 rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 does not move the second cam member 135. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves counterclockwise. And the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is due to the position where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward in the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do it increases.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force exerted upward by the second arm 137 is larger than that by the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36B).

  In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state to be rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

  On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131, the upper end side is located at the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to one side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. The force to rotate in the direction of does not act.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in proportion to the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, while In the arm 137, the force to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes large.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state by an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36C).

  When the key is used to rotate 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state to rotate it 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the operation is performed in the opposite manner to the above. Will be done.

  As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are attached so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the rotation is transmitted by connecting at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 regardless of the rotation position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132). Thus, the rotation can be transmitted to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133), and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked or unlocked favorably.

  Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder main body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

  Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost.

  By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a cheating person who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front into the rear side of the cylinder body 131. Incorrectly rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool may open the door frame 3 and perform an illegal act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmitting member 133, the rotation transmitting member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmitting member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated from each other by the rotation angle of 90 degrees, to the first arm 136. A portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Will be in a state of being. Therefore, when one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a great resistance to the rotation, the unlocking / locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole is forcibly rotated. It can be prevented that the key is damaged, and the key can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. As a result, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

  Further, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (band-shaped) first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a possibility that the gear is rotated and the rotation transmission member 133 is rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the tooth of the gear. Since the arms 136 and the second arms 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the tool to be caught by the first arms 136 and the second arms 137 and to move the first arms 136 and the second arms 137. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmitting member 133 from being rotated, and the locking unit 650 is illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. It can be reliably prevented from being provided.

  In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 uses the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. , But is not limited thereto, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , And so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball discharge member 143 are rear-covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144 supported by the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. In addition, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper plate ball 241b. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

  The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-slotting button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and at the same time, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b includes the partition portion 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking section 144a from moving toward the ball holding section 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a), and remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip moves vertically due to driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which vertically rocks in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 is fed around the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 is rotated so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 173) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that the ball feeding unit 140 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the ball removing member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the side, and the ball outlet 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partitioning part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is separated by the partition portion 143a. Bounce can be prevented.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape in a front view extending to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a and an upper piece portion 148a that are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center for a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the provided string to move the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening 2002 and the like, the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launching device 540 The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal gaming ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit body 151. And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving passage 610b of the main body frame 4 that is open rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a and is communicable with the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched upward by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. The storage tank 150e is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing abutting portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and at the same time the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and sticks out from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, it can be detached by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along an outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 projecting forward of the main body 171 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Accordingly, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. 41A is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 41 (a). 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 46, only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted is shown in a sectional view.

  The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the dish unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player so that the game ball B in the upper dish 201 is moved. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

  First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, and a front end of the handle base 181. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later, and a disc-like shape attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle mounted on the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. Front lens 185 , And a.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. The shaft member 187 having the drive gear portion 187a, the transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and the detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 have the handle base 181 and the inner. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusion portions 291d can be respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. Is inserted, the handle base 181 is in a state of being unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

  The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c that connects the ends of the portion 195b to each other, and two outer peripheral ring portions 195c that extend in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrate the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. The slit 195d and a locking protrusion 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine.

  The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend in the counterclockwise direction from the portions having an angle of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend in a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

  The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped R side facing forward.

  The handle 195 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is rotated.

  The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b extending from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The handle decoration board 184 is one in the center, three are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The individual LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems and can control 10 LEDs 184a, which are divided into 5 groups, in full color, respectively, with 15 systems including 3 systems for one group. I am trying.

  Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying electric power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable composed of four electric wires is connected to each of the control signal line for receiving signals such as the above, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, when the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, it is divided into five groups according to the command. The ten LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of the LEDs 184a, which are larger than the number of the electric wires forming the wiring cable to be connected, is individually (here, combined). The number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

  The front surface of the front handle lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The front lens 185 of the handle has a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The front lens 185 of the steering wheel is made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the angle.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 195, and the player touches the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

  Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

  The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, the firing controller 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and also the one-shot button. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

  Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end of the handle cover base 291 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 having a cover and a rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; and an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface thereof. An annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 are provided.

  The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending forward and backward with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and the inner diameter becomes smaller from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a toward the front. An inner wall portion 291b, a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c that extends through the middle wall portion 291b and has an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and an inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. And a plurality of (here, three) protrusions 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

  In addition, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a and the same position from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the front end of the front tubular portion 291a. A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f that protrudes forward to the front, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and the front cylinder. And an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the part 291a.

  The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape whose cross section bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tubular portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting the three protrusions 291d into the groove portions 181c, the handle base 181 can be relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer tubular portion 291f.

  The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of an angle of 10 degrees. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 is inserted rearward of the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g, and the handle 195 is rotated, whereby a U-shaped guide portion is formed. By positioning the guide piece 291g inside 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder 291a to the vicinity of the flange 291e, and has a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder 291a. ..

  The inner 292 extends rearward from an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notch portions 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and which are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base portion 292a from the front, and the base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

  The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are in a set of two from the center, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can be controlled to emit light in full color, and 18 systems of 3 systems per group are controlled. I have to.

  Although not shown, the handle cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one is an earth wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and a command from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. There is. Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. Further, the twelve LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b having an outer peripheral edge extending shortly rearward. In this board cover 294, the front plate 294a is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a of the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and the spindle base (kamakura type or bowl type) bulges toward the rear. , Etc., and a plurality of (four in this case) notched opening portions 295b are formed in the circumferential direction by notching from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 is formed in two colors by using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two kinds of resin, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected to the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When the handle cover 295 is molded, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is provided. A portion on the rear side of the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the part of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover unit 290, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

  A central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 at the outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outer side of the central hub portion 195a by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front tubular portion 291a and the outer tubular portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

  The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the substrate cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have a light-transmitting property, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 emits light. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated and decorated.

  Since the handle cover unit 290 has the notch opening 295b and the notch 292c which are aligned with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side. A hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a can be made to appear to be open. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player by thrusting his / her hand (finger) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can

  The upper cutout opening 295b (upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) of the handle cover 295 is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h and is located below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295, respectively. It communicates with the cutout portion 292c and the cutout opening portion 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side Can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout 295b.

  In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters into the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the liquid is passed through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, and the lower side It can be discharged downward through the cutout opening 295b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower notch 292c of the inner 292, and the lower notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on an extension line of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional body 40 in the inclination direction. Accordingly, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened, the cutout opening 295b on the right side can be hooked with a finger to pull the door frame 3 and the like. It can be used as a handle when opening.

  Further, in the handle 195, since the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is plated, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed.

  Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b to grasp. It can be fixed and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the driving operation suitable for the player can be selected.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view, and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided so as to be openable and closable around the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. The handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, so that the handle of the conventional pachinko machine is provided. You can see the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 in the part where you have never seen before. In other words, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's attention strongly, and increase the player's motivation for playing with the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by a player who is traveling around in a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine with respect to the operation of the handle 195, and entertain the player by the driving operation of the game ball B with a new feeling. Can be suppressed.

  Then, when the player operates the handle 195, when a production sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is generated by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air in the enclosure 624 vibrates due to the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 becomes sound pressure through the curtain plate inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided to the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and can be introduced into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the game state in the game area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the fingers of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The player can be surprised, the chance of coming can be foreseen, the amount of steering wheel operation can be changed, etc., which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By cooling the inside of the unit 290 and making the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  Further, as described above, the handle 195 or the handle 195 is provided to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is generated by the grill member 46. Since the plurality of blades 46b are used to guide and apply the stimulus, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibration device. 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged. It is possible to make it difficult to break the 180, it can be avoided that uncomfortable feeling to the player by the breakage of the handle unit 180, a drop in interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the handle 195 has the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portion 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has the appearance of a steering wheel of an automobile, and thus the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is greatly different from, it is possible to let the player intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine is a pachinko machine that allows the player to play without hesitation. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion of the handle cover unit 290, which faces the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted, between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part than the handle cover unit 290 is opened through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. Since it is visible, the tubular handle cover unit 290 can be given a feeling of openness, so that the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating therethrough are provided in the downward facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened to the front, even if a liquid such as a drink or the game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the handle cover unit 290 can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to prevent the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h from entering the port member 47 easily.

  Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of front end diameters equal to those of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be operated by gripping it with a hand like a handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or the spoke portion 195b can be operated by only a finger, or an outer ring. The handle cover unit is operated by operating the portion 195c like a steering wheel of an automobile, operating by holding a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b, and straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The inside and outside of 290 can be operated with fingers. Can be various hammering operation of the gaming balls B (steering) provides pachinko machine 1 as possible. Therefore, according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to make the player tired. It is possible to enter the game ball B into the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 may be grasped by placing a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195b, or the outer peripheral ring portion 195c may be straddled to pinch the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with a finger. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be performed by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the operation of the handle and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 has a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, can be made to look good and attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming unnecessarily large and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrow, and it is possible to relatively increase the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

  Further, by appropriately emitting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emission decorations of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player.

  Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the door frame 3 look bad, and the door frame 3 can be made to look good.

  Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 rotatably in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction and The guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g or the like can restrict the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to hit the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided. The gaming ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching, and the pachinko machine 1 can perform various driving operations (handle operation) as described above, and the player can It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in without touching the handle 195, prevent the handle operation using a tool from being performed, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 has an upper tray 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. Mounted on the mounting base (not shown) protruding forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) mounted on the right side of the mounting base, and a ball mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. A lending operation unit 220, a unit for removing the upper bowl ball (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and a unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 installed behind the unit for removing the upper bowl ball, Is equipped with.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 so as to be laterally spaced from each other, And a plate right decoration unit 275.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact, and a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 mounted on the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. And a partial relay substrate unit 330.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit unit 350, which is capable of projecting upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the operation operation unit base 315. And a projection output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts an upward projection output of the production operating unit unit 350 by the production operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

  The whole dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is located below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 (a) is a sectional view showing a main part of the door frame, which is horizontally cut at a portion of the lower dish supply port, and FIG. 50 (b) is a sectional view of the conventional door frame cut at the same portion as (a). It is sectional drawing which shows a principal part. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball removal hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically and arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 is connected to the lower plate ball supply port 211j. On the other hand, a lower dish ball removal hole 202b of the lower dish 202 is provided in front of the central axis thereof. Then, the lower bowl ball supply port 211j has a cylindrical shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B ejected forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight to the lower dish ball ejection hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by the shortest distance movement.

  By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight to the lower plate ball removal hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265, Since the dish ball vent hole 202b and the lower dish ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower dish 202, the storage of the game balls B may be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower dish 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right side area in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B come from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. Since the tank is not discharged, the full tank detection sensor 154 operates and there is a risk that the lower tray 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room in the left side area in the lower tray 202. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the left side wall of the lower dish supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally forward left. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position directly behind the lower dish ball hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left front so that the distance becomes equal.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis (the line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (the ball discharge port 150d) of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. Are moving to.

  Accordingly, by moving the lower dish ball punching hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower dish 202 (the portion of the lower dish ball punching hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower dish ball punching hole is formed. It is possible to reduce that the game balls B are concentrated and stored on the right side in the lower plate 202 while the 202a is closed. Then, in the lower plate 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the site of the lower plate ball hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends obliquely to form a gap between the rear end of the lower plate 202 and the game ball B, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball. The game ball B discharged from the post-drawing unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and discharged. It is possible to properly store the game ball B in the entire lower plate 202.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game balls B remains in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 211. A main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner are provided.

  Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on an upper portion of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper dish ball mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit includes a unit before removal (not shown) and a unit after removal of the upper bowl 240 that is attached to the rear of the unit before removal of the upper bowl and behind the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear of the lower plate ball supply port 211c on the upper right side in front view. And an upper plate ball feed port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled in the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the ball is fed from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 through the ball feed guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c and the cutout portion 211d.

  The upper dish ball feed port is located in front of a ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper dish ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the dish base unit 210, and The game ball B is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges more toward the front than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the portion that bulges the most forward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

  The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the dish unit 200 so that the upper end portion near the right end of the upper dish main body 212 is closed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decoration board 273, the dish right decoration board 278, and the operation section relay board 332. It is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for subtracting and returning the amount of cash or a prepaid card thrown into the rented game ball B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 and has a light-transmitting property, and a ball lending button 224, which is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base portion 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

  The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a character of "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be favorably viewed from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been lent out are deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the amount of cash or the amount of the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

  The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for production such as music, voice, and sound effect output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a gourd shape of a double circle like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and between the two circles. A pattern that sounds like a sound coming from a speaker is applied to the part. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. When the volume adjusting button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

  The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light quantity adjusting button 228 is formed in a bi-circular gourd shape like a combination of two circles. The light amount control button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower side) circle. A light bulb design is applied to the part. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the “+” side is pressed and becomes dark when the “−” side is pressed.

  The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors from each other (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player does not make a mistake.

  By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted by using the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At this time, after operating the effect operation unit 301 as appropriate, a menu for setting for adjusting the volume, light amount, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes a lot of time (time) to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted directly (directly), and it is troublesome to adjust the volume and the light amount. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper bowl]
The unit before removing the upper bowl and the unit after removing the upper bowl 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper bowl removing unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper bowl removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game balls stored in the upper bowl 201. It is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removal unit 240 is attached to a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port from the rear, and is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removing slider 242, a spring (not shown) for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

  The rear base 241 is a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, as it projects upward from the site where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and a ball. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving slot downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a rearward direction on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding guide path 241b. The game ball B is guided downward from the position, and then the ball guide route 241c for guiding the game ball B to the right in rear view is provided.

  The ball receiving port, which is assembled to the plate base unit 210, opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. Is formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c protrudes rightward in rear view as compared with the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion and is moved rearward. And a projecting operation transmitting portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has the operation receiving portion penetrating the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protruding forward in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper tray removing ball is placed on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  In the upper bowl removal unit 240, the upper bowl removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper bowl removal slider 242 receives the upper tray ball through the operation receiving portion of the upper bowl removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upper moving end. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball removing member 143 can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143 causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate so that the partition 143a and the ball inlet 141a are removed. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, and the upper bowl ball removal button 222 moves up and abuts on the operation transmission portion 242b. The operating rod 143c that is rotating causes the ball-removing member 143 to rotate, so that the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b, and the original state is restored.

  In this way, by the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the dishes which are attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit main body 252 so as to be separated from each other in the left and right directions. The left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward of the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball-draining hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate body 251 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart from the left and right sides. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

  The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's finger to be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a at the center in the left-right direction and includes a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is mounted. .. The effect operation unit attachment portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the dish unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The dish unit body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 includes a lower dish ball removal button 263 and a lower dish ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower dish ball removal button 263.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b of the dish unit body 252, and the lower dish ball removal lid is provided. 265 closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower dish ball removal hole 202a, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a opens the lower dish 202 inside. The game ball B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

  In addition, when the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains moved, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pushed backward and then released, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is released. Returns to the position of the normal state, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the plate unit 200.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent dish left decoration 271, and a translucent dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. A lens 272 and a plate left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The plate left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left decoration 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The plate left decoration 271 is formed in milky white.

  The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 in a state of being coincident with the front surface of the plate left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  The plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical right and left translucent dish right decoration body 276 and a translucent dish right decoration body penetrating the dish right decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a plate right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The plate right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

  The dish right decoration lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the dish right decoration body 276 so as to match the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and the plate right decoration body 276 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end thereof is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate right decoration board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. It is possible to form a raised step between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his / her step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his / her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, the level difference between the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing out forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the lower front side. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a sectional view of the effect operation unit with the effect operation unit unit in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member in the position of the upper moving end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows the effect operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production | operation production unit in the state which the partial unit moved to the raising position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in the state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member is at the position of the moving end downward.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact operation, and a push operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player, and can accept the operation of the player or move the effect operation unit 301. (Vibration) can be performed so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 of the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside, and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a plurality of LED operation units 320 provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 for mounting the upper portion (unit upper cover 312) of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 with light emission decoration. Outer peripheral decoration board 320, outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to operation section base 315 so as to cover performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and operation section relay board unit attached to the rear surface of operation section base 315. 330 is provided.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for elevating the production operation unit unit 350, and the projection output of the production operation unit unit 350. And a thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 for The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is opened upward and backward, and an insertion port 312a that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. And a unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the bottom of the operation portion base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed into a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  In the effect operation unit cover unit 310, at least the unit upper cover 312 has a light-transmitting property, and light emission decoration can be performed by light emission of a plurality of LEDs of an effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 described later.

  The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section base 315 is attached on the rear side to the effect operation unit attachment section 212a of the upper dish body 212 of the dish base unit 210. The operation section base 315 is covered by the unit lower cover 311 at the front and the lower side, and is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 at the upper side. The operation portion base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

  The operation portion base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper side, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a accommodates the effect operation unit unit 350 inside. In addition, a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of a central shaft 366 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in a production operation unit unit 350 described later are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the substrate base 331 of the operation unit relay substrate unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

  The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 325.

  In the state where the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay substrate unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay substrate 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay substrate 332 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331.

  The operation section relay board 332 is a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outside decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor body 358, button inside decoration board 364, operation button. The lift drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Stage operation unit]
The effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Is.

  The effect operation unit unit 350 has a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 having an upper end side closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to an upper portion of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and that is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and is arranged above the button base 354. And a ring-shaped button outside decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  Also, the effect operation unit unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. And a contact detection sensor main body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

  The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter of about ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

  The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a constant width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and the inside thereof is formed flat. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes of punching metal to suppress the electrostatic capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 can be made excellent. It can be illuminated and decorated in various states.

  The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor body 358. Accordingly, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the upper surface or the side surface of the button body 351. You can That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

  The button sleeve 353 includes a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and the length thereof is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

  The button base 354 is a disc having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and a central hole protruding from the inner surface toward the center. And a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

  The button base 354 extends downward and further includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked on the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The bottom of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of a pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

  A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outside decoration substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a double circumference of a concentric circle. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided on a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately causing the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 to emit light, it is possible to make the area on the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 emit light.

  The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged such that the rotation axis extends in the direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided in a straight line portion that passes through the pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the performance operation unit 301. Further, the vibration of the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

  The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to the sensor IC including a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode included therein. Further, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the electrostatic capacitance by the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined electrostatic capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

  In the effect operation unit unit 350 of the present embodiment, the contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body with the effect operation unit unit 350 protruding upwards. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the side surface of 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit unit 350 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

  The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. In the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a sphere. Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state of protruding above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, it is possible to function as the pressing operation unit 303.

  More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move further downward, and it is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 to a state higher than the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched when operating the contact operation unit 302. This means that the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having the unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button main body 351, by forming fine irregularities, a plurality of streaks or the like on the surface (upper surface) of the button main body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation unit 302. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can be more entertained.

  Although the button body 351 is transparent in the above description, the button body 351 is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that it has a light-transmitting property. Accordingly, the button main body 351 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364, and the like provided below, and the player can be illuminated by the button main body 351. Can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Stage operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation section base 315, and is capable of moving up and down the effect operation section unit 350. The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 is mounted below the effect operation section unit 350 in the main body portion 315a of the operation section base 315, and includes an elevating mechanism base 361 having a substantially circular outer periphery and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically, the lower end is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper end penetrates the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354 and extends upward. The guide shaft 362 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are connected at their upper ends to each other, and the disk-shaped upper base 363 whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 so that light is emitted upward. And a button inner decoration board 364 on which a plurality of illuminatable LEDs 364a are mounted.

  In addition, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. And a central shaft 366 having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

  Further, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is mounted on the lower surface of the lifting mechanism base 361 such that the operation shaft lifting drive motor 367 is mounted so that the rotation shaft projects upward and the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367. A spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 and meshes with the lift driving gear 368, and is rotated by the driven gear 369. And a lifting cam drive gear member 370 that is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 therethrough.

  In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end thereof, is rotatably attached through the central shaft 366, and rotates to elevate and lower the button base 354. A member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

  In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361, and the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361. The projection output detection sensor 375 that detects the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385.

  The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a and an elevating spring. And a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button lift drive motor 367, a lift detection sensor 374, and a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the lifting mechanism base 361, the lower ends of the legs 361b are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at positions at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrates through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. Lower ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and upper ends thereof are attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by a metal rod.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 may form a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protrusion into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to emit light by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

  The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the guide shaft 362 is inserted in each of them. The lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 are in contact with the lower elevating spring holding members 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper ends are in contact with the button base 354.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 374. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354, and the elevating spring 365 urges the button base 354 upward (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

  The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

  The press detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). The pressing detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state when the effect operation unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 upward from the normal state, because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the push detection sensor 373 causes the button base 354. It is possible to detect the pressing piece of the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d.

  The up-and-down detection sensor 374 detects the up-and-down detection piece 370c of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370, so that the up-and-down cam member 371 is connected via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is being detected.

  The protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lower spring support member 385 in the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down through the button base 354 by the pair of front and rear guide shafts 362, and the button base 354 can be supported by the pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit unit 350 can be urged upward via the above. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button inside decoration board 364 to emit light.

  In the normal state, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, effect operation is performed. The sub-unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit unit cover 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 coincide with each other, and the effect operation unit unit cover 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

  When the raising / lowering drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367 in a normal state (the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position), it meshes with the raising / lowering drive gear 368. The lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55 (a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the engaging portion. While rolling from 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c of the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  Then, when the guide pin 354c that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

  The lower spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the vertical spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various vertical positions by the projection output adjusting drive motor 381, which will be described in detail later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit unit 350 is raised with a protrusion output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. Can be projected into position.

  In the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  When the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

  When the button body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in this raised position, the effect operation unit unit 350 causes the elevating spring 365 to move. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 against the urging force of the button base 354. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

  In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  In order to return the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c). Therefore, the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  When the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the lowered position, the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lower elevating spring holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also exerted. It becomes weaker, the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button lifting drive motor 367, an inexpensive one with low torque can be used.

  When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 is stopped and the guide pin 354c moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the original lowered position.

  In the above description, in the effect operation portion raising / lowering mechanism 360, by rotating the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d so as to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 causes the lifting cam member 371 to be viewed in plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the ascending / descending distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

  When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the guide pin 354c to move to the third cam 371e. Will move upwards along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed. Can function as.

  When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 should be moved downward to weaken the urging force of the lifting spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be lightened.

  In this way, the protrusion amount of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, so that it can be changed according to the game state (for example, the first starting opening 2002 or By varying the protrusion amount of the button main body 351 in accordance with the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004), the player can be made to suggest the expectation for the game.

  It should be noted that at least one shallow recess that can hold the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when the recess is provided at least at one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess so that the operation button lift drive motor 367 stops the lift cam member 371 from rotating. It is not necessary to continue, and the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. The projection output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 that biases the effect operation unit unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) projects upward ( The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

  The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshing with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshing with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that extends downward in a cylindrical shape and that has a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery and that has a central shaft 366 inserted therein and is rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw. 384 is engaged with the screw portion 384b, the pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate therethrough, and The lower end of the spring 365 is provided with an elevating unsprung holding member 385 abutting the.

  The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the protruding force adjusting drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding in a gap between the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

  The adjusting screw 384 is formed such that the upper and lower sides thereof extend from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

  The lower elevating spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b vertically penetrating at the center of the main body portion 385a, and screwed into the screw portion 384b, and the front and rear portions of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating and lower unsprung holding member 385 has the guide shafts 362 passing therethrough at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the bump output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

  When the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 to move the lower elevating spring holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

  In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit unit 350 upward.

  The detection piece 385d of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is most raised. That is, when the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is maximized, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the up-and-down spring holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the up-and-down spring holding member by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is detected. By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent further compression of the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to prevent damage to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380.

  Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit unit 350, so that the button main body is touched by the contact detection body 352 while the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position. Detecting contact or approach of a detection target (for example, a player's finger or the like) to 351 causes the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to project the production operation unit unit 350 and bring it into contact with the detection target. At this time, the vertical position of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is made different. As a result, when the button body 351 projects upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly contacts, something good for the player may occur. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game. Therefore, according to the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is pressed according to the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). By increasing or decreasing the thrust output of the main body 351, the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

  By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is different from the original use. Since various stresses will act on the compression coil spring, there is a risk that the internal tissue will deteriorate early and be damaged. On the other hand, in the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the up and down springs 365 by moving the up and down spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce early deterioration of the elevating spring 365, and the effect operation unit unit 350 can be provided. It is possible to stably project over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board, the button outer decoration board, and the button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. 58A is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of a player's hand, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation part 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation part 303 (button body 351).

  The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state where the pressing operation section 303 (effect operation section unit 350) capable of protruding upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. This makes it easier for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the effect operation unit 301.

  In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 has the pressing operation unit 303 (the production operation unit unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the production operation unit unit 350 has the production effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament and can be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit 300 has an effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged inside the outer periphery of the pressing operation portion 303, and a button middle decoration substrate 364 is further arranged inside thereof. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged with the button inside decoration board 364 as the center, and the button outside decoration board 355 and the operation operation unit outer circumference decoration board 320 in this order outward. The LED 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it has a light-transmitting property. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (on the player side).

  In the effect operation unit 300, the annular unit upper cover 312 can be illuminated and decorated by the LED 320a of the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. In addition, the LED 355a of the outside-button decoration substrate 355 allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated near the periphery of the upper surface and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 can make the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 emit light.

  The plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the middle button decoration substrate 364 are arranged in a row on the circumference, and therefore, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emission effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 is generated. It is possible to show the luminescent effect that converges to the player.

  In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is at a lowered position where the upper surface of the operation unit 300 is aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

  As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 to be touched is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process moves to the next presentation stage. When the contact is detected, the button main body 351 is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 or the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 to recognize that the contact operation is accepted by the player. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operation feeling. At this time, the expectation level for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, such as a “big hit” game) is expected to the player by the emission color of the button body 351, the emission brightness, the emission pattern, and the like. You may make it suggest.

  Alternatively, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356 when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation unit 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the touch operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game. good.

  Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the player to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound or a sound effect is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (the hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) up and down. It is caused to pop up (pop up) by the biasing force of the spring 365. More specifically, when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 causes the cam portion 371a (first cam) to move. 371b), the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 vigorously projects upward by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (Fig. 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 projects upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. This can greatly amaze the player, and It can attract a lot of interest.

  After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the player is allowed to enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (rendering operation unit unit 350) is opened. When the button body 351 is moved downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed triggered by the pressing operation to entertain the player by the player participation type effect.

  At the time of the above-mentioned production, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 strengthens or weakens the projection output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to project. May be suggested. Also, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

  In the effect of causing the effect operation unit unit 350 to project, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is pressed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, since the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers or the like and is given a shock, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may make the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output.

  Further, in the effect of causing the effect operation unit unit 350 to protrude, the touch detection body 352 causes the player's finger or the like to fall outside the protruding range of the button body 351 protruding upward within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body 351 is approaching. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection output of the button body 351 so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game due to the strength of the wind pressure on the player's fingers or the like. You may do it.

  Further, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is caused to project with a strong projecting force by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects vigorously and a sound (projecting sound) is generated, so that the projecting sound surprises the player. You can When the button body 351 is caused to project with a weak projecting force by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the projecting of the button body 351. The player can be surprised by the fact that the button main body 351 projects before it is noticed.

  As the effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is generally used. You may make it perform the same effect as a pressing button similar to a pressing button. Alternatively, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 may be increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the player may be made to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

  Further, as the effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), an effect may be executed in which a contact operation is performed on the protruding button body 351. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly, the side surface of the button body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation The contact operation of the portion 302) can be easily performed.

  In the above description, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction to cause the button base 354 to rotate. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d so that the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

  For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lift cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is moved up and down. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view by the drive motor 367, and the elevating cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. Alternatively, the button body 351 may be stopped from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

  As described above, even when the button main body 351 is made to project partway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed and operated, and the button main body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Thus, the player participation type production can be enjoyed by the player. In this case, the protrusion amount can be made different above the button body 351 depending on the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the expectation level for the game can be suggested according to the protrusion amount of the button body 351. Can entertain the player.

  Further, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), after the operation unit unit 350 is protruded, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can entertain. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is set. May be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can press the effect operation unit unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that it is possible to entertain the player due to the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit unit 350, and more versatile. The effect can be presented and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection object can be detected at a plurality of contact steps (approaching steps) with respect to the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351). It is also possible to provide a plurality of levels of threshold values according to the capacitance of 352 and change the effect according to each level. That is, attention is paid to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), and a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It is also possible to detect in multiple stages by providing the above, and to utilize it for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within the predetermined distance from the button body 351, and the game is played. The touch detection sensor main body 358 presents a variety of effects to the player by changing the effect according to each step, such as a step in which a person's finger or the like is in contact with the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member. Although the state in which 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be moved downward. As a result, in the normal state, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the elevating spring 365. Further, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that is strongly compressed.

  As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for player participation type effects of various patterns, it is possible to entertain various effects to the player and make the player tired. It can be made difficult and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, a ring-shaped (two arcs are combined) effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit outer circumference is provided. A contact detection sensor body 358 is provided in the effect operation unit unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit unit 350, a button inner decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, when the performance operation unit unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode). ) Approaches the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364, and the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364, and the contact detection sensor The main body 358 may make a false detection.

  Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. Accordingly, by moving the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358. And the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the button inside decoration board 364, the shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change. It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in electrostatic capacitance due to the approach of the button inner decoration substrate 364, and prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of Dish Unit]
Subsequently, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60B is a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the switching part between and typically, (c) is a plate | board left decoration unit of a plate unit, a plate right decoration unit, and a production operation unit etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and rear side of an operation unit etc. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a touch detection body having a decorative property, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into the left and right sides of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his / her fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, if the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. Becomes When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R change, whereby the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body. Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button main body 351, the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body left 390L returns to the original value and the contact detection sensor main body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detection body right 390R electrostatic. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detected.

  As described above, the movement of the player's finger or the like is caused by the combination of the detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and the change pattern. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with more various movements, and to present the player with a player participation type effect that enables the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. It should be noted that if a contact detector is added, it becomes possible to detect a more complicated motion.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392. According to this embodiment, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects the contact of a human body or the like with any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state where the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at different positions. can do.

  For example, by disposing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in a distributed manner inside (bottom side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like comes into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351, The contact can be detected by the contact detector 393, and the accuracy of detecting the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

  Further, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be parts that the player does not want to touch in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, parts where the player may be injured, and other players may be annoyed). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where fraudulent acts may be performed, etc.), and when any one of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or a warning may be given.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching is performed between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 so that only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392. This is an example in which the section 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only at a desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. As the switching unit 394, "switching by a switching circuit using a relay or transistor", "switching by another electronic circuit", "movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)) The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement thereof "and the like.

  For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type effect in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are sequentially touched is executed. At this time, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 can detect whether the player's finger or the like has touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a player-participation-type effect having a high game property by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first operation is performed on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, When the switching unit 394 connects the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392, and when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the switching unit 394 connects the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392. You may make it switch so that it may be done.

  Thereby, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects contact or approach of the player, and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To As a result, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and avoid causing the player to feel uncomfortable. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and in the state in which the player's finger or the like is inserted, the effect is produced. When the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 that has been moved to the front is moved to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped and the finger or the like is separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is in the non-detection state to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of the player's fingers or the like is formed into a star shape so as to have a decorative property (design property). The shape of the contact detection body 395 having the decorative property is not limited to the star shape, and a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item is imitated. The shape may be a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but the present invention is not limited to this. The contact detection body may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as the above can be obtained. The contact detection body is preferably provided on the back surface side of the transparent front surface member so as not to be directly touched by a player's finger or the like, and wear of the contact detection body can be avoided, and a tactile sensation can be provided by the surface member. It can be smooth.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the button inner decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), The contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and the decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 61 (b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397. good.

  Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be integrated with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of the finger or the like with the player or perform the contact operation. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and a player's finger or the like comes into contact with or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the presence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. And a door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. So as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed up and down at a certain interval on the front surface are mounted and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The door frame left side base 42 is arranged so as to cover the left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. A left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425. I have it.

  Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guiding member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 to the front, and upper and lower parts of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. From the left side middle light guiding member 428 that guides light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction to the front, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the up-down direction of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. And a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light in the forward direction.

  The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422.

  A total of 12 full-color LEDs, that is, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of emitting light in a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are in three sets of two above, three from the third to the fifth, and three from the sixth to the eighth. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 lines, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  On the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 is formed in the shape of a strip plate that extends vertically, and the right side is formed to be uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. The LED 423b is mounted. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame.

  In this door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs including six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into two groups, each of which is two in sequence from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, although not shown. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower left side decorative board 423c of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The left upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a contacts the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the light-guiding shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a cylindrical light-guiding shaft portion 427a of the left-side upper light-guiding member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 which penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and projects forward, the second side of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is applied to the light guide shaft portion 427a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

  Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The left side lower reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a contacts the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

  The columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 which penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 that faces the door frame 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a is evenly illuminated from above and below the door frame left side, and the door frame left side. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a or the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

  In the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The door frame left side decoration 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the left-right direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding barrel 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 and the holding barrel 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided. The respective tips of are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further has a decoration portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a and has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape. is doing.

  The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the upper left side reflector 424. The light guide shaft portion 427a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The left-side center light guide member 428 includes three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. The left-side center light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and irradiate the light outward from the tip, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction slightly protrudes forward from the lower portion, and a portion near the lower end is gently curved to the right. The door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end located below the door window 101a, and the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. Is located above the speaker opening 211b. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position somewhat rearward of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Since the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the light is radiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at the position rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light), so that the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other portions.

  Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadow becomes difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly arranged. It is possible to decorate the surface with light emission.

  Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 is provided with a decoration portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decoration body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the portion on which the shadow is projected has the decoration portion 426b, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emission decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along the line A-E in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. And a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a that are vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface, and are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. And a door frame right side lower decoration board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a that are vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface, a door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and a door frame right side lower The front side of the right side reflector 434 and the right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433 are covered. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 435 which is attached to the door frame right side base 431, to.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guiding member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 to the front, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 first. The right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from one LED 433a to the front side.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side surface decoration body 438, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and the door frame right side base body 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. A light-transmitting right-side left lens 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439, which are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and which penetrate right and left in a predetermined shape. The door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 having the decoration hole 440a, and the door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 are provided between the door frame right side right surface surface. Ornament 44 Includes a right side right lens 441, a having a decorative hole 440a translucent having a decorative portion 441a which is fitted to close the.

  The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. The rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side bends rearward when the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the vertical center. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically in the vicinity of the lower portion and extends vertically to the lower end.

  The door frame right side base 431 includes the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a, which are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end, are provided at the height of the decorative portion 441a). The rear end sides of the reflectors 431a, which are the insides of the decorative portions 439a and 441a, are inclined toward the side surface side and the bottom surface is curved.

  Further, the door frame right side base 431 is a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 at the rear side from the center in the front-rear direction. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to the (decoration portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441) has a front portion other than the portions inside the decoration portion 439a and the decoration portion 441a. , It penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right sides and is connected to each other).

  The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 is configured so that the light emitted rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later, is left and right. By reflecting in a direction, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are illuminated and decorated (see FIG. 70 and the like).

  The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. Further, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. In addition, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are in three sets of two above, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the first LED 432a is divided into two sets, the second LED 432b is divided into three sets, and the third LED 432c is divided into two sets, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets, respectively, so that each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, Since the third LED 432c and the third LED 432c are caused to emit full-color light, there are a total of 21 systems including 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 described later is used. A total of 24 systems of 3 systems for one group above the third LED 433c divided into 2 groups are controlled.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received in accordance with the command. The four first LEDs 432a divided into three sets, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 with 2 The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the grouped groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame lower right side lower decorative substrate 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. The LED 433b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 at intervals vertically. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433.

  On this door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs including six first LEDs 433a, twelve second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a having the second LEDs 433b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the second LEDs 433b). Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433, the six first LEDs 433a are sequentially divided into two sets from the top, two sets each consisting of three sets. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

  The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is divided into three sets of the first LEDs 433a, four sets of the second LEDs 433b, and two sets of the third LEDs 433c, respectively. Therefore, the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, Since the third LED 433c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit full-color light, respectively, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 has two sets of the third LEDs 433c. Of the above, one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the remaining 24 systems (the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

  Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 supplies two electric powers for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to one clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received in accordance with the command. Each of the six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into two sets. Light can be emitted with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

  The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through hole 434a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. At the same time, a tubular holding tube 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 or the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 has a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, inserted therein. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a penetrating the holding cylinder 434b and protruding forward, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing the through holes 434a on the upper and lower sides thereof, and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the 435.

  In the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side decoration 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the horizontal direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration body 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further has a decoration portion 435b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. is doing.

  The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending in the front-rear direction in a column shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided from above the right side reflector 434 at a fixed interval in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The lower right-side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending in the front-rear direction in a column shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided from below the right side reflector 434 at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This right side lower light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in a left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end side of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in two colors by synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resins of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, so that a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer surface (left side) of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decoration hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. The decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

  Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration portion 439a facing the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 has a radial pattern in which two colors are formed in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It looks similar to the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative portion 439a that is light-emitted and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

  The door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration holes 440a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (a radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the entire height of the door frame 3. Further, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed in two colors by synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 includes an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. Two-color resin is molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, and projects rightward to protrude to the right of the door frame. The side right side surface decoration body 440 has a decoration portion 441a that fits into the decoration hole 440a from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer surface (right side) of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The decoration part 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

  Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration portion 441a facing the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 has a radial pattern formed in two colors in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. It looks like the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a that is light-emitted and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the side base 421, and outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The color of the part is formed to be the same as the color of the part on the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction protrudes forward more than a portion of the opposite door frame left side unit 420 at the same height. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

  The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

  The door frame right side unit 430 largely projects forward from the top to a portion at a height of approximately half, forming a partition. As a result, in the island facility of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a partition shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making it difficult for another player to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel like being seen by another player, the other player can play the game without hesitation.

  According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a position somewhat rearward of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Since the light is emitted from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them, the light is emitted to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly illuminated.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate provided at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (guided) to the front by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 to guide the door frame. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other parts.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light, thereby reflecting the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. Through the 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left surface decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right surface decorative body 440 are fitted. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 that is present can be decorated with light emission. In addition, part of the left and right side surfaces of the partition-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the portions of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be illuminated and decorated, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and has a high appealing power to the player.

  Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to cause the front end side door frame right side decoration body 435 to emit light, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decoration substrate 433, the door frame right side left surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 that are on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Since the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are present, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the first LED 432a The light from the ED 433a and the second LED 433b irradiates the rear door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 to emit light, or is emitted from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c. It is possible to prevent the light from illuminating the front door frame right side decoration body 435 to cause light emission decoration or the like. Accordingly, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent for light emission decoration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting the player with a luminous effect having a higher effect.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. And the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, since the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is provided. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are hard to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured such that the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. .. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion where the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be difficult to see and the appearance of the door frame right side decoration body 435 in light emission decoration is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 that is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that is connected to the lower end of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456 which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover above the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

  The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length substantially the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 has a semicircular arc shape that projects forward in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends in the left-right direction in a semi-circular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the door frame top decoration 453 has a front surface formed in a semi-circular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

  The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 455a.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top left decoration substrate 456, the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decoration board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs 457a.

  The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters, and output the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker are radiated forward and downward.

  The door frame top relay board includes the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker, and the door frame sub unit of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are connected so as to sink from the front to a position behind the inside of the upper portions of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers and the pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71, and the like. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the two-color molded outer layer is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71 (b) is the outer layer with the inner layer left unchanged in (a). FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the state of FIG. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are in a half-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the unit upper cover 312, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By appropriately emitting light from the LED, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light, or the player is shown a light emission effect so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Door can be.

  In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper dish 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. Accordingly, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical performance operation unit 300 is located in the center, the appearance impact can be enhanced, and the performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 or pressing operation of the performance operation unit 300 can be improved. It is possible to make the operation unit 303) stand out.

  In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous with each other, thereby forming a single sphere, and thus the player. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 formed of a huge sphere allows the player to look at other things at a glance. This pachinko machine can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can enhance the appealing power to the player, and this pachinko machine is a pachinko machine for playing. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302). The upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301 to easily see the whole effect operation unit 301, and You can look big. In addition, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to operate the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to increase the expectation for execution of the player participation type operation that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can actively operate the effect operation unit 301, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 makes the player participation type effect entertaining. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Subsequently, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

  More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns provided on the outer surface are colored in two colors by using two kinds of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior portion of the door frame 3 where the pattern is applied is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

  For example, when the door frame right side unit 430 is described as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-shaped pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the inner portion of the circular pattern is inside. The honeycomb-shaped pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the parts other than the pattern, and the outer appearance is an appearance in which a circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and a relatively circular or The radial pattern becomes hard to see. That is, the outer appearance is such that the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

  In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration portion 441a fitted in the decoration hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main member forming the exterior of the door frame 3 is formed by two-color molding, the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (composite) By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, etc., it is possible to make a great difference in appearance without changing the shape.

  Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost.

  Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each manufacturing lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island facility to give a colorful feeling to the player. It is possible to increase the appealing power for.

  In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 of the two-color molding. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 and other decoration bodies are two-color molded (multicolor molded) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot pattern decoration is performed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration is formed into a desired shape at the same time as the decoration is applied to the decoration, a desired shape can be obtained like the decoration of a conventional pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to apply a desired decoration by coating or the like after forming it, it is possible to reduce the labor for decoration and suppress an increase in cost.

  Moreover, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, in the case of forming a polka dot pattern decoration by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot pattern circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are respectively light-transmitting. When formed in the same color with different ratios, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the circle with a polka dot pattern becomes difficult to see, and the appearance does not appear to be decorated with a polka dot pattern. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b The polka dot circles are now clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background with white polka dots. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. The cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. If you change the combination of synthetic resin used for each lot and ship different pachinko machines 1 of different lots to the same game hall and install them in a line at the island facility, make the island facility colorful Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that can give a strong impact to the player who is traveling around in the game hall and can attract the player.

  Further, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two-color molding with a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances is provided on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing the front, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side surface surface decoration body 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decoration body to improve the appearance. You can

  Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. This makes it possible to relatively clearly see the border of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a, and to make the decoration clearly visible.

  Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a should not be seen through from the outside as a low rate, and a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through when the model is changed. As a result, the way of viewing the decoration of the ornament can be changed greatly, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the ornament.

  Further, as described above, the inner layer 3a can be made invisible by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b and is transparent to the outer layer 3b when the model is changed. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a different synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the ornamental body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the ornamental body. , It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the model change.

  Further, inside the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board which can emit light. Since the inner layer 3a is provided with the third LED 433c of 433 and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than others, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 The portion of the layer 3a (the portion of the polka dots) can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be illuminated and illuminated to improve the appearance. Both the player to be able to entertain emission decoration door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Also, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c with which the outer layer 3b is irradiated through the inner layer 3a can also cause the outer layer 3b to emit light. The side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 can be entirely illuminated and decorated, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 can be displayed neatly and played. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of the person can be provided.

  In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is a two-color molding (multicolor molding of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances). Since it is formed by molding, LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, and the like. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is emitting light can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the player's interest. More specifically, for example, two-color molding will be described as an example of multi-color molding. When a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence state, only the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is not exposed to the inside. The hole shape of the layer 3a becomes visible, and the exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated and decorated. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit green (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are illuminated and decorated. The parts to be illuminated can be different, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. As described above, the decoration of the ornamental body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. Further, by causing the LED to emit light in accordance with the game state, it is possible to change the decoration of the ornamental body so that the player has a chance or changes the driving operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be made to suggest and which can produce various effects.

  In addition, since the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction, Since it is possible to have different impressions (visual appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the left front side and the right front side, the pachinko machine 1 is moving around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous migration, which attracts interest to the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached to the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal and can attract a player who is traveling around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. ..

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which drives the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by being rotated by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b with the central hub portion 195a extending outward, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the respective spoke portions 195b, And has an appearance similar to the steering wheel of an automobile.

  In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front lens 185 of the handle and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, there is provided a handle cover decoration substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface.

  The handle decoration board 184 is one in the center, three are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The individual LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. 72, and two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, which are respectively connected by the broken lines. , And two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LED 184a divided into these 5 groups is controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and the LED 184a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 72, these twelve LEDs 293a are connected to the lower left two from the center, the two left, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 sets, 2 at the bottom right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 groups are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293 are provided on the handle 195, a light-emission effect in which light rotates around the handle 195 and a direction toward the center of the handle 195 are provided. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emission effect in which the light is spread toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293 allows the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 to be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side decoration 426, and the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decoration body 435 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are in a half-tube shape. Since the door window 101a is formed, the player can see a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided toward the front.

  More specifically, the plate left decoration board 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and LEDs 273a of the plate right decoration board 278 described later to emit light. (Not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

  The plate right decoration board 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled by 6 systems by the LED driver of the plate left decoration substrate 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  On the decoration frame 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 422a. Eight second LEDs 422b and a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b for emitting light are provided. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected to the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second LED 422 of each group are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

  On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It is provided with 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for making a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, one by one in sequence from the top two as indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the top to the ninth and three from the top to the twelfth. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED 423a in each group are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b that are mounted and four third LEDs 432c that are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction are provided. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light. The LED driver 432d of FIG. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected to one another by a dashed-dotted line. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. One set of the third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set have an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

  The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 has six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b that are mounted, four third LEDs 433c that are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. And an LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, each of which is a pair of two in order from the top, as indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the top to the ninth and three from the top to the twelfth. Furthermore, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and one lower two third LEDs 433c divided into two sets The LED driver 433d is controlled in 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are also different from each other in the front-back direction. .

  The door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the front surface of each. The number of the one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b and the number of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). System connected by chain line and two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

  The door frame top central decoration board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decoration board 457. And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two LEDs from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a which are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit full color of an appropriate color.

  The door frame top right decoration board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a which are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in an appropriate full color.

  According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432. And light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the left side lower guide member. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 allow the opening portion of the door frame left side decoration 426. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, the player can be made to see the luminous effect of brightly emitting light in a dot shape on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and in a dot shape not present in the past pachinko machines. The player can be made to be “hatched” by the light emission effect of shining a spot light.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative substrate 273, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Second LED 423b of decoration board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decoration board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decoration board 433, LED 455a of door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are appropriately made to emit light so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and the light is emitted so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown or shown to the player.

  That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72 executes a light emission effect of spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface emission) by the system of LEDs connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. You can

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. With the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and from there the front side. Since the irradiation is performed on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, compared to the general surface of the opening frame 426a and the opening 435a, it is possible to make the spot light emission with high brightness and high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426. Also, even if the area of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a facing the door window 101a, and the game is performed through the door window 101a. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a in a good state.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are projected forward of the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are connected to the ridge portion that is the front end of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward (the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view are connected. Since it is provided on the vertical line), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the spots behind the door window 101a are reflected. The inside of the game area 5a will not be hard to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness can direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot-light-emitting portion is provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-light-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emission part is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emission light. As a result, when spot light emission is performed on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, high-luminance spot emission light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be selected for selection. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is traveling around to the pachinko machine 1.

  The spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spotting the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both sides. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pin (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guides the light of the spot LED. Since the surface LEDs are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided. The effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is divided into two, a front decoration substrate 321 and a rear decoration substrate 322.

  Eighteen LEDs 320a of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration substrate 321 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. The eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided such that six are spaced apart on the circumference close to the inner circumference and three are spaced on the middle circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. It is provided, and the remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

  The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration substrate 322 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322, 4 LEDs are provided in 2 pieces at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and 3 LEDs are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. It is provided at intervals on the circumference of the circle, and the remaining six pieces are provided at intervals of three on both sides of the arc on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

  The eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are three sets of two on the inner circumference, six on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference, as connected by a chain line in FIG. Are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine groups. In addition, the eighteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322 are connected in a two-dot chain line in FIG. 73, four on the inner circumference are two in pairs near the ends, and two on the middle circumference. There are a total of 7 sets, 3 sets of 3 each, 3 sets on the outer circumference, and 2 sets of 3 on the outer circumference. That is, in the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

  According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, by appropriately emitting the LEDs 320a of 31 and 48 systems, the effect operation unit 301 emits light such that the light rotates, or the light is concentrated in the center. It is possible to show the player and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads outward.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a outside one of the left and right sides of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so as to have different protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted behind each 435 and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted Substrate 423, and a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted on the door frame right side decoration substrate 432, a plurality of first LEDs 433a and a second LED 4. 3b is mounted on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, and light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower light guide which guide the light near the front surface of the frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. Since the light guide shaft portion 429a of the member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432 of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433. , The door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be made to emit light in a planar shape (surface emission) by causing the second LED 433b to emit light, and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are made to emit light, they are irradiated to the front. The door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in which the light is columnar. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface, they are radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), and are guided in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. A portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be made to emit light in a dot shape (spot light emission). ..

  Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a. The door frame left side decoration provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b. 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are entirely illuminated with light, or the door frame left side decoration body 426 and a part of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated with dot light, or the door frame left The side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be light-emitting decorated in a planar shape while part of the side decoration body 435 is light-emitting decorated. Because, it is possible to show the variety of emission effect to the player, it entertained while hardly get bored the player can be suppressed a decrease in interest in the game.

  At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LEDs 422b, the first LEDs 423a, and the second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side The side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are symmetric with respect to each other and the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, the first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 433b are separated from each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, and the first LEDs 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b are different systems, the door frame left side First LED 422a and second LED 4 on the side of the decorative body 426 2b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and when creating the data of the lighting pattern of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side, for example, the door The data for the frame left side decoration body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decoration body 435 side, or the same for the door frame left side decoration body 426 side and the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. Since it can be used as the flow data, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data and to construct more complicated lighting pattern data (at the same creation time). This makes it easier for the player to see a variety of lighting patterns with different lighting patterns, and also allows the player to show a variety of luminous effects with a high effect. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect against emission effect at the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 left and right outer sides of Tobiramado 101a.

  In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b that are provided with the first LED 422a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a in between are in the same system. , The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) are sandwiched. Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, Shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a due to light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b. The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, which becomes thin so as to be canceled and is projected on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

  Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are light-emitted and decorated by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. A part corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a is illuminated and decorated with dots by the one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as emitting light in spots while emitting light in a plane, and it emits bright dots. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player by means of lighting effects, etc., and to emit spot-like sparkles that are not available on conventional pachinko machines. The emission effect, the player can be a "hash" can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Further, one side (left side) of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the other side (right side) door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower. Since the decoration board 433 and the decoration board 433 are asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to avoid making a mistake in the right side lower decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Next, the door frame 3 will be taken as an example to identify in detail the various decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing the respective decorative substrates provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are shown. The side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as an example.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. other than white that are mounted on the decoration board are mounted on the rear surface side of the board. I am trying. With this, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the front decoration body and the like can be illuminated more brightly, and the front side (player side) Makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

  The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material of the substrate itself may be white.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identifying portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that the respective decorative boards can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a formed of characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b formed of different colors (shown by shaded areas in FIG. 74). And have.

  More specifically, as the character identifying portion 7a, the character "lower left" on the plate left decorative board 273, the character "lower right" on the plate right decorative board 278, and the upper left on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. Is "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and "right lower" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. On the door frame top central decoration board 455, the characters are "upper middle", on the door frame top left decoration board 456, the letters "upper left", and on the door frame top right decoration board 457, the letters "upper right". , Respectively.

  Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but is provided partially so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

  The identification portion 7 is provided on the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying paint, or the like.

  In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like. The decorative substrate may also be provided with the identification unit 7 such as the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification portion 7 (the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to form a decoration board having a similar shape. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembling work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made white as much as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be used. Light can be reflected on the front side of the decoration board to make the decoration body and the like in the front lighter and brighter, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (player side), which makes it look good. I can do better.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b as the identification section 7 is provided over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is possible to obtain a desired (desired color by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) It is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative substrate is a decorative substrate. Therefore, at the time of assembling, even if a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembling work can be reduced. Can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative substrate, when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color is used. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is out of colors, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an unprepared decorative substrate. Therefore, when preparing a decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required amount of the decorative substrate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identifying portion 7a as the identifying portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the character of the character identifying portion 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (the player side), the appearance of the decoration body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decoration board reflects the light from the LED forward. Therefore, it is possible to make the decoration body brighter and lighter, and entertain the player with a light-emitting effect having a high effect, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front side (the player side). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) from being deteriorated by being visible, and to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost for the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 is an assembly of the following units and the like, and a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. And is attached to the upper end on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. The main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame base unit 500 are attached to the lower end of the main frame base unit 500 on the left side in a front view and are rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. And a hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame, which is rotatably attached.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. The ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, the inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. And a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that can be opened and closed, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and extends upward in the shape of a box that extends left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553. It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape in which a front view extends vertically and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

[4-1a. Body frame base (1)]
The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placement portion 501c and a game board regulation portion 501d which projects upward from the center of the game board placement portion 501c in the left-right direction and which restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving to the left and right and to the rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the front and back on the right side of the front side of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and back, which penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view, the substrate unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a positive portion of the cable mounting recess 501h. And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a front view, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear surface of the base body 501a at the left end in front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 has a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the main frame 4. The detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the front side below the game board mounting portion 501c and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a that extends left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right sides that penetrate through the guide body 502a in the front and rear directions. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of 502, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (desirably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

  Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects the tangent line to the circle that passes through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, so that the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 is pressed in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have it.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving to the front and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side opened in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is an unauthorized tool. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4 as a game board. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the ball hammer 543, which has a base end attached to the rotary shaft of the firing solenoid 542, a firing solenoid 542 having a shaft, which extends forward through the firing base 541. The launch rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left, and the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launch device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is rotating, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

  Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, when the hit game ball B does not reach the inside of the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are connected. From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

[4-6a. Disbursement base]
The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500.
The dispensing base 551 is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. Left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with a width substantially the same as that of the right side portion, and a right side plate portion extending downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view in the front-rear direction with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a. 551c, a back plate upper part 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side. The back plate left part 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a constant width, the inner side plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the left side plate part From the front of the lower side of 551b to the right, the back plate left part 5 It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 1e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is opened inward of the front and the L shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

  The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and a groove that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward and extends leftward. And a tank unit composed of the tank rail 553 that is installed. Therefore, the top plate portion 551a, the right side plate portion 551c, and the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are formed on the main body frame 4 for attaching the tank unit including the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Make up the department.

  In addition, the payout base unit 550 is provided on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being separated from the first rail cover 554 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member that is attached to the upper edge of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. 556 and a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

[4-6b. Ball tank (1)]
The ball tank 552 that constitutes the tank unit is made of an electrically conductive opaque synthetic resin, and is formed in the left-right direction to have a length that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction. At the same time, the front-rear direction is formed to be shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction.
The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.
In the present embodiment, as shown in the broken line of FIG. 98A and the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98C, a through-hole-shaped opening notch 551ah is formed in a portion of the top plate portion 551a that constitutes the tank unit mounting portion and overlaps with the ball tank 552. It is formed so that the opening notch 551ah is closed by the ball tank 552. In the portion provided with the opening notch 551ah, the space for housing the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded by the thickness of the top plate portion 551a, so that the degree of freedom in designing the back unit 3000 is increased. ..
Generally, a transparent synthetic resin is more expensive than an opaque resin. However, even if the dispensing base 551 is not entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin but is made of an opaque synthetic resin, the amount of the plate thickness is However, the space for housing the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded, and the degree of freedom in designing the back unit 3000 is similarly increased, but conversely, the member viewed through the opening notch 551ah is transparent. It may be formed of synthetic resin. In addition to the above effects, for example, when the tank rail 553 is formed of transparent synthetic resin, the state of the game ball rolling in the tank rail 553 through the opening notch 551ah can be confirmed from the front of the gaming machine. it can.
Further, when the ball tank 552 is configured to be seen through the opening notch 551ah, it is preferable that the ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin and electrically grounded. The game balls flowing into the ball tank generally store high-voltage static electricity, but in that respect, if the ball tank is grounded with a conductive resin, it will always be discharged and discharged. It is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise caused by the noise from being emitted as much as possible. That is, it is possible to suppress the influence on the electronic circuit provided in the game board 5.
The tank rail 553 is not limited to the ball tank 552, and the tank rail 553 may be made of conductive resin. Of course, both are made of conductive resin regardless of whether they are integrated or separate, and a part of them is seen through the opening notch 551ah. Just do it.

[4-6c. Tank rail (1)]
The tank rail 553 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction.
In addition, the tank rail 553 is provided with a shooter-like stepped portion that rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side at the joint portion with the ball tank 552, and from the joint portion, a first step is formed. It is formed in a crank shape in plan view so that the flow path is changed obliquely rearward at the corner portion and the flow path is directed in the left-right direction at the second corner portion.
Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D, the tank rail 553 has a gutter shape in which a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y are raised in front of and behind the passage bottom wall 553z. An inner rounded arcuate portion 553r is formed on the upstream side of the ball stopper 557 at the corner portion, and a substantially right-angled valley-folded corner portion 553t is formed at the rearward corner portion of the passage bottom wall 553z. On the rear side of the bottom wall 553z, a plurality of (three in the embodiment) drop openings 553h capable of discharging foreign matters are formed in a state where the lower edge of the gutter rear wall 553y is also expanded.

In addition, it is possible to freely set how many such drop ports 553h are formed in the front and rear corners. For example, all of the drop openings 553h are formed at the rear corners, or a plurality of drop openings 553h are alternately formed at the rear and front corners, or the drop openings 553h provided at the front corners are the maximum. Although it is formed on the downstream side, it is preferable that at least the drop port 553h located on the most upstream side is formed on a corner portion 553t facing the arc-shaped portion 553r.
This is because even if there is a foreign object on the arc-shaped portion 553r of the tank rail 553, it is easy for air to stagnant on the rounded surface and easily move along with the air flow that accompanies the flow of the ball. Also, due to the vibration that accompanies the movement of the game ball, the arc-shaped surface is curved. Since the foreign matter is likely to move toward the opposite corner portion 553t along the rounded surface of the portion 553r, the foreign matter eventually gathers at the rear corner portion 553t and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h. Therefore, the foreign matter entering the tank rail 553 moves from the arc-shaped portion 553r formed in the upstream portion to the corner portion 553t, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the most upstream drop port 553h provided in the corner portion 553t. Therefore, the residence time of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 can be shortened as much as possible. Moreover, at the joint between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, a shooter-shaped step 553u (FIG. 98A, which rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side in order to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail 553). (See FIG. 98B) is provided, and vibration is likely to occur at the step 553u, and thus the vibration further promotes the fall of the foreign matter from the drop port 553h.
Further, the drop port 553h of the tank rail 553 is preferably formed at the corner portion of the crank (preferably, on the out-course side where the moving foreign matter makes a large turn due to inertia) as shown in FIG. 98A. By doing so, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail 553 tends to move in a direction to go straight through the corner portion of the crank of the tank rail 553 due to the inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h provided therein. .

The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is such that the width in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end connected to the ball tank 552, and the width is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of about one. After extending as described above, the width in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth.
The tank rail 553 is inclined so that the passage bottom wall 553z becomes lower toward the left side, and a rectangular vertically oriented short tube portion 553s is extended at the left end, and the rail outlet 553p is provided at the lower end of the short tube portion 553s. Is open, and its rail outlet 553p communicates with a guide inlet 570p that opens at the upper end of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a height of a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y that extend straight to the left, and on the ball tank 552 side, from the passage bottom wall 553z to the diameter of the game ball B 4-5. On the other hand, the diameter is about the same as the diameter of the game ball B on the left end (lower end) side, and the left end side is inclined at a steeper angle than the passage bottom wall 553z.
Further, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is attached in alignment with the passage seat portion 551z (see FIG. 98D) having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a.
Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are provided on the upper surfaces of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y which are straightly extended to the left. The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface on the left end side.

[4-6d. First rail cover and second rail cover]
The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached like lids to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y, which are portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are fixed to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the depth (width) of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y is The pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 prevents the game ball from expanding or narrowing, and further prevents the game ball from jumping out of the tank rail 553 and invading foreign matter into the tank rail 553 from the outside. Prevent also.

[4-6e. Sphere straightening member]
As shown in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 91, the ball rectifying member 556 is located on the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The rocking shaft 556b is supported on the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y corresponding to the ends, or can be rocked by extending in a cantilever shape from the first rail cover 554 (not shown). Installed. The ball rectifying member 556 is provided with a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556a protruding on the lower surface thereof into the tank rail 553. When the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B flowing in the tank rail 553 in a vertically overlapping manner contacts the lower surface of the straightening piece 556a, an appropriate load (resistance) due to its own weight is applied to the game ball B. In addition to swinging upward (see the phantom line in the enlarged view of FIG. 91), this delays the flow and makes it easier for game balls B on the upper stage side to drop (join) between the game balls B on the lower stage. By doing so, rectification is performed in a step-by-step manner to prevent ball clogging. Further, if the ball jam occurs in the upper and lower two-stage state, the ball straightening member 556 is pushed down by the fingertip to press the game ball B on the upper stage side with the straightening piece 556a, and thus the balance between the balls is lost. It is also possible to eliminate the ball clogging.

[4-6f. Ball stop member]
The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail 553 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to close the flow path leading to the rail outlet 553p of 553 and the guide inlet 570p of the guide passage 570a so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side. By doing so, maintenance such as cleaning, replacement, and repair of the downstream guide passage 570a and the dispensing device 580 can be easily performed.

Specifically, the ball stopper member 557 is a sliding base portion slidably supported by passing a support cylinder 553m vertically provided outside the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b. 557c, a ball stopper 557d that is substantially beak-shaped in a front view and is provided so as to project from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c toward the left, and is provided so as to project from the right end of the sliding base portion 557c toward the right side. The operation knob 557e is formed, and a cantilevered leaf spring-like elastic lock piece 557f is formed inside the operation knob 557e.
The elastic lock piece 557f is formed by engaging the mountain-shaped anchor portions 557g with the left and right side slopes of the inverted bulging portions 553q provided on the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553, thereby retaining the ball stopper member 557. Is anchored in a projecting position and a retracted position described below, thus preventing blind movement of the ball stop member 557.

  In addition, the switching of the projecting position and the retracted position of the ball stopper member 557 can be performed by an operation of sliding the ball stopper member 557 in the left-right direction by placing a finger on the operation knob 557e, and at this time, the elastic lock piece 557f is , Like a cam follower that comes into contact with the linear motion cam, the anchor portion 557g flexes and slides while making the anchor portion 557g contact the inverted bulging portion 553q, and when the anchor portion 557g reaches the side slope of the moving destination, it is engaged by its own elasticity. To meet. The anchor portion 557g of the elastic lock piece 557f is engaged and disengaged with the side slope of the inverted bulging portion 553q, so that the switching operation of the ball stopper member 557 has a click feeling of "click" and "click".

The ball stopper member 557 has a bent portion K of the tank rail 553 as a starting point, and an upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the passage bottom wall 553z and a downstream side (rail exit 553p side of the passage side wall 553w constituting the short tubular portion 553s). ), And a ball stopper slit 553v opened in an L shape which is substantially upside down as viewed from the front, and a ball stopper piece 557d having a substantially beak shape as viewed from the front is moved in and out of the short tubular portion 553s of the tank rail 553 to form a flow path. The opening and closing position, the ball stop slit 553v into the short cylinder portion 553s, the ball stop piece 557d is inserted to close the flow path of the game ball B (see the imaginary line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101), and By the function of the operation knob 557e and the elastic lock piece 557f described above in the retracted position (see the solid line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101) in which the ball stopper 557d is retracted from the tubular portion 553s to open the flow path of the game ball B. It can be switched to one basis.
Although the ball stopper 557 is supported by the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be supported by, for example, the payout base 551 of the main body frame 4.

[4-6 g. External terminal board (1)]
Further, the payout base unit 550 includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

  The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game sphere B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left part 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear side, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in the vertical direction in which the game ball B meanders and bends downward, and which is open to the front, and the front side of the guiding unit base 571. In the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 and the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. A ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the game ball B is provided (see FIG. 91).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a has a guide inlet 570p opened near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571 and opens upward, and extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571. , Bends to the right, repeatedly folds back and forth between the widths of the guiding unit base 571 in the left-right direction, extends downward in a meandering manner, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at the right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

  The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the guide inlet 570p at the upstream end of the guide passage 570a communicates with the rail outlet 553p at the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is The dispensing device 580 communicates with the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

  As is clear from the above description, the guide passage 570a and the tank rail 553 constitute a payout ball passage portion that bends in a substantially inverted L-shape as a whole. The ball tank 552 provided on the main body frame 4 and the dispensing device 580 provided on the side of the main body frame 4 are connected to each other. Therefore, the bent portion K of the payout ball passage portion is on the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, but may be on the guide passage 570a side. In that case, the downstream end of the tank rail 553 is just before the bent portion K, while the guide passage 570a has a shape such as a periscope whose upper portion is bent at the bent portion K, such as a ball stopper slit 553v or a ball stopper slit 553v. The ball stopper 557 is provided on the guide passage 570a side.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. Between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583, which has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a. A rotatably attached payout gear member 588 and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a are provided. The payout blade 589 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the payout device body 581 for detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 are provided.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the takeout passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a protruding rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from the top in the rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball passage passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage at a portion extending from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted by the blade piece 589a from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a toward the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and can be rotated clockwise in the rear view. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

  The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or to retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

  The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can be brought into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

  When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. Therefore, it will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

  Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contacting force moves the ball-removing movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from exerting a strong force on the ball removal movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From this, since it is possible to make it difficult for the ball-removing movable piece 592 to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the distance is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 which is attached to the dispensing base 551 and whose rear side is open, and a upper open tank base 601 which is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and whose front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover 640.

  Further, the upper tank bulb path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank full discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and is located near the right end in the front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 91).

  On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower full dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a front end of the lower full tank base 611 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

  In the lower tank full ball passage unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens rightward midway in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, front opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a shape of a short arc centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed in the upper fullfiller passage 610c. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

  Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are opened, and the lower ball dispensing unit 610a communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is opened. Is rotated clockwise in a front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of the game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball out by the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it is understood that the game balls B are stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout vane 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper tank ball unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper pay-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 is arranged in a normal state immediately below the upper pay-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

  When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side are reached. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set to the non-detected state of the full tank detection sensor 154. Temporarily stop until.

  When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c to the ball removing guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 outside (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine taken along the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 501 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side in the view, and the space front recess 621b which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The body frame speaker 622 is mainly a cone-type speaker that outputs a low tone.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the rear-side portion of the main body frame speaker 622 projects the most to the rear. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a sufficient space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 as viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 can form an enclosure 624 of a wide space, and the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 can be formed. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection tubular portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted, so that the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the main body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass sound. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. The ball guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and the discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open to the right in front view on the downstream side of the ball guiding part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

  The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state in which the ball guide member 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

  The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 96), and. The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

  The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost portion of the main body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the dispensing base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.
98D, the upper edge of the back cover 640 covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion of the body frame 4 (upper plate 551d of the dispensing base 551), On the other hand, a convex strip 551t capable of covering the upper edge of the back cover 640 like an eaves is formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
As a result, the foreign matter discharged from the drop opening 553h of the rear corner 553t of the tank rail 553 hits the ridge 551t and falls, or accumulates on the ridge 551t. Foreign substances hardly enter the inside of the main body frame 4 from the overlapping portion of the mounting portion. By the way, since the foreign matter contains the metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic components inside the body frame 4.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key, which is engaged with the transmission member 133 and is inserted into the key hole 132, is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Further details of the configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98A to 105.
98A is a plan view of the main body frame, FIG. 98B is a sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A, FIG. 98C is a sectional view taken along line B2-B2 in FIG. 98A, and FIG. 98D is FIG. 98A. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the B3-B3 line in. FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including the cross-sectional view of the main part of FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper portion of the main body frame in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A groove-shaped tank rail 553 extending leftward, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover. Of the second rail cover 555, which is attached to the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553 so as to be spaced from the left side in the front view from the front rail 54, the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553 at a position between them, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout. A payout device 580 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, which is attached to the rear side of the base 551 on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, is provided.

[4-11a. Ball tank (2)]
The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle that extends in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that its left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. Has been formed. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

[4-11b. Tank rail (2)]
The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .
The tank rail 553 has a trough-shaped main guiding portion 553a extending from the upstream vicinity to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left in front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 98A, the main guiding portion 553a is parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side to the left end in the plan view from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction. After extending, it extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes to the left, and from there extends to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed in a crank shape.
In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel to the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b on the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. From this, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball clogging) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows inside. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the rear of the body frame 4. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, which is of interest to the player due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed.
Further, since the tank rail 553 and the tank unit mounting portion (dispensing base 551) for mounting the tank rail 553 are transparent, the rear of the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 from the outside of the rear of the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553. Since the side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized, when a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, It is possible to check the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, and the like, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as the above.
Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98D, the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 is rounded, and the outside of the arcuate portion 553r is also rounded. When the game board 5 is formed and is removed from the front surface of the main body frame 4, the tank unit mounting portion can be seen from the front surface side as shown by the arrow in the figure.
Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 and replaced, the foreign matter in the tank rail 553 and the state of the game balls can be visually confirmed from the front side of the main body frame 4 over the tank unit mounting portion, and therefore maintenance can be performed. Easy to do. In particular, since the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 has a chamfered shape, the inside can be clearly seen, so that the accuracy of the visual check is improved. When the tank unit mounting portion is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, a window hole may be provided in the corresponding portion.

  As shown in FIGS. 98A and 99, the body frame 4 includes an overflow surface portion 501m along the front side of the ball tank 552, while the ball tank 552 has a detour that communicates with the overflow surface portion 501m on the left side wall 552d. A passage 552g is provided.

[4-11c. Overflow surface of body frame]
The overflow surface portion 501m extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end is raised.
Further, the overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 as shown in FIG. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

[4-11d. Detour passage of ball tank (1)]
The bypass passage 552g extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side becomes lower. In addition to the inclination, the side away from the ball tank 552 (left side) in the left-right direction is inclined so as to lower a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m. The tank rail 553 is guided to the bulging portion 553b.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides in the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 501m on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j having a height lower than that of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface overflows. And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

[4-11e. Body frame base (2)]
The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both laterally outer side, the upper ends are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is flush with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

[4-11f. Detour passage of ball tank (2)]
The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area | region enclosed by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also only called the ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end that is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end becomes lower 552h. And a weir portion 552i extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d in the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The bypass passage 552g has its rear end along the front end side of a portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in the crank shape in the left-right direction when assembled in the main body frame 4. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game ball B which is substantially vertical (right angle direction), the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction such that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIGS. 98A and 104, and thus the bypass passage 552g. When the game ball B is discharged from the tank rail 553 side, the rear end that extends obliquely makes the game ball B wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. It can be discharged to the upstream side, and by discharging to a wide portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball gam inside the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side can be secured on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, and thus the detour passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, in the front surface view, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extending in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c so as to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about ⅓ of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

  In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the right wall side end of the front wall 552b and the rear wall 552c. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Is formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends obliquely and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )is doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so as to be lowered stepwise rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after being extended to a nearby position).

[4-11 g. External terminal board (2)]
The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a mounted on the rear surface thereof in a state of being aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped by operating the lever. The external terminal board 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

[4-11h. Flow of game balls at the top of the main frame]
Next, mainly the flow of the game balls on the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface part 501m, and at the same time, to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface part 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball debris) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is set higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, so that the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and then flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and biting due to the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that the tank rails 553 line up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in the bulging portion 553b such that they are aligned in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in the height direction at a plurality of stages are circulated to the downstream side through a site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface section 501m, and to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by these inclinations, and a problem occurs due to the game ball B spilling outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, the ball stopper member 557, the payout ball passage portion, and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 117 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine provided with a tank rail or the like of another embodiment in an enlarged manner showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from the rear. 107 (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 107 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing in cross section the flow of the game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107. 111 (a) and 111 (b) are cross-sectional views showing another embodiment in which the protection walls of FIG. 109 are provided on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view of another form of the tank rail or the like corresponding to the cross section taken along the line KE in FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of another form of the tank rail or the like corresponding to the cross section taken along line B3-B3 of FIG. 98A. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of a ball stopper member of another form. FIG. 115 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like in which the vicinity of the bent portion is cut. FIG. 116 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of the tank rail or the like showing a state where the ball stopper member of FIG. 115 in the retracted position is moved to the projecting position. 117 (a) is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and FIG. 117 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. Is.
In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A of another embodiment different from the above includes the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, the ball rectifying member 556A, and the ball stopping member 557A. When the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 of FIG. There is also.

[4-12a. Another form of tank rail (meander and protection wall)]
Another form of the tank rail 553A is to rectify the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and deliver them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. On this tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A is provided so as to close the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y, and the second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front. And a ball rectifying member 556A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A are attached, and a ball stopper member 557A capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 107A, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. By the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. The first rail cover 554A is attached on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

  The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A so as to cover the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protection walls that extend upward in a fence shape from the front and rear ends upstream of the center of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. 555b and an opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a sphere rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

  The ball rectifying member 556A is attached so as to be vertically swingable by a swing shaft 556b that is provided on the upstream end side so as to project forward and backward. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A. It has a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts against the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above and swings the game balls B while applying an appropriate load to the game balls B, whereby the game balls B The steps are collapsed to facilitate the alignment in a line, and the upper gaming balls B are prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side to prevent ball catching on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A. There is.

According to this alternative form of the tank rail 553A, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. There is. Specifically, the protective wall 555b is connected to the electric wire Y (FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided above the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached. (Indicated by a broken line in FIG. 3) is set to a height that does not enter the swing region of the sphere rectifying member 556A, so that the electric wire Y can be prevented from coming into contact with the electric wire Y from above.
If the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a comes into contact with the sphere rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire Y, the ball rectifying member The member 556A may not be able to swing upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted.
On the other hand, in this another embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from contacting the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a from above. Therefore, the ball rectifying member 556A can swing upward when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556A, and the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted to the inside of the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

  Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. If the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, in the tank rail 553A, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, the upper game ball B is affected by the ball pressure from the upstream and the lower game If the game ball B is moved to the downstream side in such a manner as to get over the ball, the game ball B is likely to be caught between the inner surface of the second rail cover 555A and the lower game ball B, for example. On the other hand, in this another embodiment, as described above, since the flow velocity of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game ball B from moving to the downstream side first. Therefore, the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire Y from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, the tank rail 553A is often used. Or a terminal board (eg, an external terminal board 558) to which the electric wires Y are connected or a control board, or a terminal board or a control board to which many electric wires Y are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

Although the protection wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A of the tank rail 553A, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A. May be formed so as to extend upward, or may be provided on the main body frame 4 (specifically, the payout base 551) as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 112.
The front and rear widths of the protection wall 555b of the above-described different form are approximately the same as the distance between the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A, but as shown in FIG. 111 (b). The protective wall 555b corresponding to the gutter rear wall 553y side may be provided by being displaced rearward of the gutter rear wall 553y. The same applies to the case where the protection wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A instead of on the gutter rear wall 553y.
According to this configuration, the space above the ball rectifying member 556A expands in the width direction (front-rear direction) by the amount by which the protective wall 555b is displaced rearward, so that the ball rectifying member 556A is in a ball-engaging state. Even if the user rides on B and stops, the reset operation of pushing it back with his fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.
Further, in the above-described another embodiment, two protective walls 555b are provided at the same height before and after the ball rectifying member 556A. 556A and make the other higher than that), or as shown in FIG. 111 (b), only on one of the gutter rear wall 553y or the gutter front wall 553x (not shown). Good. Even in such a case, the desired effect can be achieved by appropriately setting the height and the shape.

[4-12b. Another form of tank rail (mounting structure)]
In the tank rail 553 of the embodiment described in the item [4-6c] and mainly in FIG. 98D, the portion that extends straight to the left is a passage seat portion having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed in the top plate portion 551a. It is attached to 551z in alignment.
On the other hand, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 112, the tank rail 553A of another form is provided on the opposing surface of the main body frame 4 (specifically, the passage seat portion 551z of the dispensing base 551) and the tank rail 553A. A gap SS is provided.
Such a mounting structure of the tank rail 553A can exhibit the following operational effects in comparison with the tank rail 553 having no gap SS.

First, in recent years, in the game board 5, the back unit 3000 such as an image display device has become larger, and the amount of protrusion to the rear is increasing.
Then, as the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 increases in protrusion amount, the body frame 4 surrounding it also increases in rearward amount, whereby the tank unit mounting portion above the main body frame 4 also moves rearward. It is in a state of being extended and protruding to the lower side of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, the overlapping portion of the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 increases.
Needless to say, the back unit 3000 of the current game board 5 is an assembly of electric components such as an image display device and a motor, and generates heat when operated. Therefore, it is necessary to radiate heat from the inside of the body frame 4 to the outside, but the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are superposed on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting portion of the body frame 4 as in the above embodiment. Since heat is likely to be trapped, the inside of the main body frame 4 may become hot.
On the other hand, like the tank rail 553A of another form, by providing the gap SS on the surface facing the main body frame 4, the heat released mainly from the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 to the inside of the main body frame 4 is Since it is discharged to the outside through the gap SS, it is hard to be trapped inside the main body frame 4. Further, by providing the gap SS on the opposing surface between the tank rail 553A and the main body frame 4, even if the tank rail 553A is distorted, rattling does not occur as long as it is within the range that can be absorbed by the gap SS. Then, there is also an effect that the accuracy in molding the tank rail 553A can be loosened.
The gap SS is preferably provided on the entire surface of the tank rail 553A facing the main body frame 4, but for example, the gap SS may be provided only on a part of the surface of the gutter front wall 553x facing the main body frame 4 for heat dissipation performance. Is effective in improving.

[4-12c. Another form of pay-out ball passage (foreign matter discharge bypass passage)]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D, the tank rail 553 of the embodiment described in the item [4-6c] and mainly in FIG. 98A has a plurality of (in the embodiment, capable of discharging foreign matter) rearward of the passage bottom wall 553z. (3 pieces) drop ports 553h are formed.
However, if the drop port 553h for dropping a foreign object faces the outside, a part of the electric wire Y wired on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 may enter the inside of the tank rail 553 from the drop port 553h. However, depending on the degree of penetration, the flow of the game balls may be hindered.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113, the tank rail 553A of another form is provided with a drop port 553h on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z and a trough rear wall 553y for receiving foreign objects falling from the drop port 553h. Also, a foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 that can be discharged to the outside from a discharge port 5530 that opens rearward is provided.
According to such a tank rail 553A, since the drop port 553h does not directly face the outside on the rear surface side, and the lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 is interposed between the drop port 553h and the outside on the rear surface side. Even if a part of the electric wire Y of the pachinko machine 1 enters the discharge port 5530 of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531, through the drop port 553h at the back of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 to the inside of the tank rail 553A. It rarely arrives. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game balls on the tank rail 553A will be hindered by the wrong entry of the electric wires Y or the like.
The foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 can also be applied to the guide passage 570a that constitutes the payout ball passage, and in that case, the discharge port 5530 is located on the rear surface side of the guide passage 570a such as the payout base 551. It may be configured with.
That is, in FIG. 113, the gutter front wall 553x is not extended downward from the drop port 553h, but instead, the space of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 is left and the passage seat portion 551z which is a part of the payout base 551 is discharged. Foreign matter may be guided to the outlet 5530. Alternatively, a part corresponding to the bottom surface of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 formed by the gutter front wall 553x may be formed so as to extend a member located below the bottom cover member 640, for example, the back cover member 640 to the passage seat 551z. Alternatively, the top surface of the case member of the device located below may be used.

[4-12d. Ball stopper member of another form]
In the ball stopper member 557 of the embodiment described in the above [4-6f] item and mainly in FIG. 101, the support cylinder 553m vertically provided on the outside of the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 is passed through its own long hole 557b. And a sliding base portion 557c slidably supported by the sliding base portion 557c, a ball stopper piece 557d that is substantially beak-shaped in a front view and protrudes leftward from a left end of the sliding base portion 557c, and a sliding base portion. The operation knob 557e is provided so as to project from the right end of the 557c toward the right side, and the cantilever spring-like elastic lock piece 557f is formed inside the operation knob 557e. A ball stopper piece 557d is moved in and out from the short tube portion 553s of the tank rail 553 through a ball stopper slit 553v opened in an inverted L-shape in a front view starting from the bent portion K to open and close the flow path of the game ball. Than it is.
On the other hand, the ball stopper member 557A of another embodiment shown in FIG. 114 is provided at the rear end portion of the ball stopper piece 557d and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553A in the state of being in the thrust position shown in FIG. A flow-out space portion 557h capable of dropping a foreign substance is formed between the ball stopper slit 553v and the starting end portion thereof. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, By providing a crank-shaped detour 557i between the ball stopper 557d and the sliding base 557c, the flow-off space 557h is formed.
Since the detour portion 557i shown in the figure has no bottom, the flow-off space portion 557h has a bottomless shape that vertically penetrates the ball stopper member 557A, but the rear bottom portion of the ball stopper piece 557d ( Even if a flat plate-shaped receiving bottom portion (not shown) is provided between the ball stopper 557d and the sliding base portion 557c to form the flow-off space portion 557h in a bottomed form so that foreign matter may collect therein. Good.

The ball retaining member 557A of the above-described different form can exhibit the following operational effects in comparison with the ball retaining member 557 of the embodiment which does not have the flow-off space portion 557h.
First, in the tank rail 553, there are foreign substances such as metal powder generated by rubbing between the game balls and resin powder generated by rubbing between the game balls and the cleaning pellets, and most of them fall as described above. Although it is dropped from the mouth 553h and discharged, some foreign matter may reach the edge of the starting end portion of the ball stopper slit 553v.
Then, when such a foreign substance is present even slightly at the starting end of the ball stopper slit 553v, the ball stopper member 557 is switched from the retracted position shown by the solid line in FIG. 101 to the projected position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. The force vibrates the surroundings, and the vibration causes foreign matter that has stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopper slit 553v to fall into the ball stopper slit 553v and travel along the upper surface of the ball stopper 557d. There is a risk of falling near the center of the short tubular portion 553s.
On the other hand, in the ball stopping member 557A of another embodiment, the ball stopping member 557A is at the retracted position in FIG. 115 and the foreign matter that has stopped at the edge of the starting end portion of the ball stopping slit 553v causes the ball stopping member 557A to move as shown in FIG. Thus, even if the vibration is dropped into the ball stopper slit 553v due to the vibration, there is a flow-off space between the rear end portion of the ball stopper piece 557d and the start end portion of the ball stopper slit 553v. Since 557h faces, it does not fall on the ball stopper 557d and slips downward. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that foreign matter on the edge of the starting end portion of the ball stopper slit 553v enters the vicinity of the center of the short tubular portion 553s of the tank rail 553A.
When the flow-out space portion 557h of the ball stopper 557A has a bottomless form, foreign matter is discharged to the outside through the flow-through space portion 557h and is hardly accumulated in the ball stopper member 557A, so that the foreign matter is not accumulated for a long time. The ball stopper member 557A is hard to be contaminated even when used.
On the other hand, when the flow-off space portion 557h of the ball stopper 557A has a bottomed configuration, for example, the density of parts below the tank rail 553A is high, which may cause obstacles due to intrusion and adhesion of foreign matter like a control board. Even if an electronic component that may cause the above-mentioned situation is forced to be placed directly below the flow-out space portion 557h, foreign matter is not discharged to the outside because it is collected in the receiving bottom portion of the ball stopper member 557A. It is possible to form a hole for heat dissipation in the board box that accommodates the board without worrying about the entry of foreign matter.

[4-13. Technical ideas included in the above embodiment and the above different embodiment]
The above-mentioned embodiment and the above-mentioned another form include the following problems and the following technical ideas as means for solving the problems.

[4-13-1a. Problem: Emission of foreign matter]
It has been known for some time that foreign substances such as metal powder and resin powder enter the delivery ball passage portion.As a countermeasure against this, a plurality of drop openings for dropping foreign matter are provided mainly in the passage bottom wall of the tank rail of the delivery ball passage portion. It was provided open (see Patent Document 2).
However, the conventional tank rail has a problem that it is difficult to smoothly discharge foreign matter because both front and rear corners of the bottom wall of the passage are in a valley fold shape at substantially right angles.
That is, inside the tank rail, an air flow is generated by the movement of the game ball, and it is considered that foreign matter not attached to the game ball naturally moves due to the generation of small vibrations. At the right and left corners of the front and rear of the bottom wall, the air tends to stagnant, so that the foreign matter that has entered such corners tends to stay.
Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the foreign matter, the accumulated foreign matter adheres to the inner surface of the tank rail and is easily soiled, and since the right-angled corners are not easily cleaned, there is a problem that soil is accumulated. .
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the foreign matter that has entered the payout ball passage portion can be easily discharged.

[4-13-1b. Technical idea ... Ejection of foreign matter]
"With a door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
A payout ball passage portion that bends into a substantially inverted L-shape connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout device provided on a side of the main body frame,
In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of drop openings capable of discharging foreign matter, which are opened in a corner of a passage bottom wall of the payout ball passage portion,
When the side close to the door frame is the front side and the opposite side is the rear side, the payout ball passage portion forms an inner rounded arc-shaped portion at least at a part of the front side corner portion of the passage bottom wall, and at least the A valley-folded corner is formed at a rear corner corresponding to the arcuate portion, and at least a part of the plurality of drop openings of the passage bottom wall is arranged at the rear corner. A gaming machine to do. "
In the above description, the "ball tank provided above the main body frame" includes the case where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the main body frame, the case where the ball tank is attached to the upper surface of the main body frame, and both. The same applies to the "dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame" when the dispensation device is installed on the rear side of the main body frame. Both the case of being attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case of being attached so as to straddle both of them.
Further, the ball tank and the payout ball passage portion may be integrated or separated.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a foreign matter enters the arcuate portion on the front side of the payout ball passage portion, the air is hard to stagnant in the arcuate portion, so that the foreign matter easily flows along with the airflow, and also accompanying the flow of the game ball. Due to the vibration, the foreign matter is likely to move to the rear corner portion side along the inner rounded shape of the arcuate portion, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop opening of the corner portion. Further, as described above, it is difficult for foreign matter to remain in the arcuate portion on the front side of the payout ball passage portion, and the inner surface of the arcuate portion which is in the inner rounded shape is easy to clean, so it is easy to maintain a clean state, And so on.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The payout ball passage portion includes a substantially horizontal tank rail connected to the ball tank, and a substantially vertical guide path leading to the payout device,
The arc-shaped portion is formed in at least an upstream portion on the ball tank side of the tank rail,
Further, at least one of the drop openings formed at the corners may be located at the most upstream of all the drop openings.
This is because the joint between the ball tank and the tank rail has a shooter-like step that descends rapidly from the ball tank side toward the tank rail side in order to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail. Is more likely to occur, and the vibration further promotes the fall of foreign matter from the drop port.Also, the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port located in the uppermost stream, and diffused throughout the tank rail. This is because it becomes difficult.

Also, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The upstream side of the tank rail may be formed in a crank shape in a plan view, and the drop port may be formed in a corner portion of the crank (preferably, an out course side of the corner portion).
In such a case, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner portion of the crank of the tank rail due to the inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port provided therein.
The technical idea of providing a drop opening at the corner of the crank of a tank rail can be applied to a normal tank rail in which arcuate portions and corners are not mixed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the preceding paragraph,
One of the drop openings may be provided at a front corner downstream of the tank rail.
By doing so, the foreign matter that flows down along the arcuate portion on the front side of the tank rail and remains without being discharged can also be reliably discharged here.

Also, in the gaming machine described in any one of the preceding paragraph to the preceding paragraph,
The main body frame includes a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the ball tank and the tank rail on an upper portion thereof,
The tank rail is formed transparent and the outside of the arc-shaped portion is also formed in a round shape,
Furthermore, by opening a window hole in at least a portion of the tank unit mounting portion corresponding to the arcuate portion of the tank rail or forming at least a corresponding portion transparent, the tank unit mounting portion can be mounted from the front surface side of the main body frame. The inside of the tank rail may be visible through the part.
According to such a game machine, when the game board is removed from the main body frame and replaced, foreign matters and game balls in the tank rail can be visually confirmed from the front side of the main body frame over the tank unit mounting portion, which facilitates maintenance. Especially, the inside and outside of the front side of the tank rail are rounded, so that the visibility is further improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in any one of the preceding paragraph to the preceding paragraph,
The main body frame has a rear cover that can be opened and closed on its rear surface, and the upper edge of the rear cover covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, an eave-shaped convex strip may be formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit attachment portion along the upper edge of the back cover.
According to such a gaming machine, the foreign matter discharged from the drop opening at the rear corner of the tank rail hits the eave-shaped ridge and falls, or accumulates on the ridge, so that the upper edge of the back cover is There is almost no risk of foreign matter entering the inside of the body frame through the seam of the body frame. By the way, since the foreign matter contains the metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic parts inside the body frame.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the foreign matter that has entered the payout ball passage portion can be easily discharged.

[4-13-2a. Problem: Incorrect entry into the drop port]
It has been conventionally known that foreign matters such as metal powder and resin powder enter the payout ball passage portion, and as a countermeasure against this, a drop port for dropping the foreign matter was provided on the bottom wall of the payout ball passage portion (Patent Document 2).
However, if the drop hole for dropping a foreign object in the payout ball passage portion faces the outside, a part of many electric wires wired on the rear surface of the gaming machine enters the inside of the payout ball passage portion from the drop opening. There is a possibility that the flow of game balls may be hindered depending on the degree.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine provided with a payout ball passage portion that can keep the flow of gaming balls smooth.

[4-13-2b. Technical idea ... Preventing accidental intrusion into the drop port]
"With a door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
In a gaming machine provided with a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout ball passage portion that bends in a substantially inverted L-shape connecting a payout device provided on a side of the main body frame,
The pay-out ball passage portion is a foreign substance drop port provided downward on the bottom wall of the passage, and
A game machine having a sideways foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion capable of receiving a foreign matter falling from the drop opening and discharging the foreign matter from its own discharge opening that opens rearward to the outside on the rear surface side. "
According to such a gaming machine, the drop port of the payout ball passage portion does not directly face the outside of the rear surface side, and the lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion is interposed between the drop port and the discharge opening which opens rearward. Therefore, even if a part of the electric wire of the gaming machine enters the discharge port of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage, it rarely reaches the inside of the payout ball passage through the drop opening. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game balls in the payout ball passage portion will be hindered by the wrong entry of the electric wires.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The drop port for the foreign matter may be provided at an edge of the bottom wall of the passage far from the discharge port.
By doing so, a distance can be provided between the drop port and the discharge port, so that the end of the wire or the like is hard to reach by the drop port, and the foreign matter dropped from the drop port is temporarily stored in the foreign matter discharge bypass passage section. Therefore, for example, even an electronic component or the like which may cause a trouble due to invasion / adhesion of foreign matter can be arranged below the drop opening without any trouble.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a payout ball passage portion that can keep the flow of gaming balls smooth.

[4-13-3a. Problem: Insufficiency of ball rectifying member]
As described above, the conventional gaming machine is provided with a ball rectifying member that can swing while a proper load is applied to the game ball when the game ball flowing through the tank rail comes into contact with the ball, and the ball clogging in the tank rail is prevented. It's hard to get up.
On the other hand, the gaming machine may be provided with a wire connecting terminal for wiring (“terminal board 78” in Patent Document 1) above the tank rail, specifically, on the side of the ball tank of the main body frame. Some of the electric wires connected to the electric wire connecting terminal cross the ball rectifying member in the vertical direction.
Therefore, ball clogging may occur even in a tank rail provided with a ball flow regulating member. It is thought that there are multiple causes, but one of them is that when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, part of the wire enters the rocking region of the ball rectifying member and the rocking occurs. It has been found that As a result, the ball flow regulating member does not operate normally, and if this happens, ball clogging tends to occur.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly maintaining the flow of gaming balls in the tank rail.

[4-13-3b. Technical idea: securing the swinging area of the ball straightening member]
"With a door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank for storing game balls provided at a high place of the main frame,
A tank rail that guides the game ball of the ball tank downstream,
When a game ball flowing through the tank rail comes into contact, a ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball,
An electric wire connection terminal for wiring arranged above the tank rail,
In a gaming machine having an electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal,
A game machine having a fence-shaped protection wall capable of preventing the electric wire from entering the swing region of the ball rectifying member. "
In addition, in swinging the ball rectifying member, not only the case where one end is rotatably pivoted and the other end swings up and down, but the free end side is moved up and down due to the elasticity of the plate by cantilevering. Including the case of swinging.
According to such a gaming machine, even if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the sphere rectifying member, the protective wall prevents the rectifying member from entering the swinging region, so that the electric wire interferes with the sphere rectifying member. Can swing normally without. Therefore, the flow of the game balls in the tank rail can be maintained smoothly.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The tank rail includes a passage bottom wall, and a gutter front wall and a gutter rear wall that are erected in front of and behind the passage bottom wall,
The protection wall may be formed on at least the trough rear wall of the tank rail.
According to such a gaming machine, the protective wall can be easily formed only by extending at least the trough rear wall of the tank rail upward.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the paragraph before the preceding paragraph, the protective wall may be provided at a position displaced rearward from a gutter rear wall of a portion of the tank rail where the ball rectifying member is located. Good.
According to such a gaming machine, the upper space of the sphere rectifying member expands in the width direction by the amount by which the protective wall is displaced to the rear side, so that even if the sphere rectifying member rides on the game ball in a ball biting state and stops. , Reset operation such as pushing back with fingertips can be performed without inconvenience.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the paragraphs before the preceding paragraph, the protection wall may be formed on the main body frame.
According to such a gaming machine, since the protective wall is not formed on the tank rail side, not only the tank rail can be molded but also the ball rectifying member can be easily assembled.
According to the above technical idea, the flow of the game balls in the tank rail can be maintained smoothly.

[4-13-4a. Problem: High temperature inside the body frame]
In recent years, in game boards, a back unit such as an image display device has become large, and the amount of protrusion to the rear is increasing.
In addition, as the amount of overhang of the back unit of the game board increases, the amount of overhang of the body frame surrounding it also increases to the rear. And it will be in a state of overhanging under the tank rail. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the tank unit mounting portion and the ball tank or the tank rail increases.
Needless to say, the back unit of the current game board is an assembly of electric parts and generates heat when operated. Therefore, it is necessary to radiate heat from the inside of the main body frame to the outside, but as the ball tank and the tank rail are superposed on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting part of the main body frame as described above, heat is likely to be trapped. Therefore, the temperature of the inside of the main body frame may be high.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which heat is less likely to be trapped inside the main body frame.

[4-13-4b. Technical idea ... improving the heat dissipation performance of the main frame]
"With a door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank for storing game balls provided above the main frame,
In a gaming machine having a tank rail disposed above the main body frame for guiding a game ball of the ball tank to the downstream,
A game machine, characterized in that a gap is provided on a surface where the main body frame and the tank rail face each other. "
According to such a gaming machine, the heat radiated mainly from the back unit of the gaming board to the inside of the main body frame is radiated to the outside through the gap provided in the facing surface of the main body frame and the tank rail, so that the main body frame The heat is hard to stay inside.
In the gaming machine, the gap may be provided in a part of the facing surface between the main body frame and the tank rail. This makes it possible to achieve both stability and heat dissipation of the tank rail.
In the gaming machine or the gaming machine described immediately above, the gap may be formed at least in the vertical direction so that the upper end is opened to the outside. As a result, the gap functions like a chimney and heat can be efficiently radiated to the outside.
According to the above technical idea, the heat generated inside the main body frame can be released to the outside, so that the heat is less likely to be trapped.

[4-13-5a. Challenge: Larger game board]
In recent years, in game boards, a back unit such as an image display device has become large, and the amount of protrusion to the rear is increasing.
In addition, as the size of the back unit of the game board has increased, the amount of overhanging the main frame surrounding it has increased, but there is a limit to the installation space for the game machine, making it difficult to design the back unit. Is becoming
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing a back unit of a gaming board.

[4-13-5b. Technical idea ... Expansion space for tank unit mounting part]
"A tank unit consisting of a ball tank for storing game balls and a tank rail for guiding the game balls of the ball tank downstream,
In a gaming machine having a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the tank unit above a main frame,
A game machine characterized in that a through-hole-shaped opening notch is formed in a part of a portion of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps the ball tank, and the opening notch is closed by the ball tank. "
According to such a gaming machine, in the portion provided with the opening notch, the space for accommodating the back unit of the game board is substantially expanded by the plate thickness of the tank unit mounting portion, so the degree of freedom in designing the back unit Will increase. Further, since the opening notch is closed by the ball tank, there is no risk of foreign matter entering there.
In addition, in such a gaming machine, the opening notch may be formed so as to correspond to a front wall and a bottom wall which are located on a side closer to the player of the ball tank.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a larger accommodating space connected in an L shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the ball tank.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing the back unit of the gaming board.

[4-14. Another Embodiment of Board Unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front right, and FIG. 118 (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the lower right rear side. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 118 (a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 118 (a) as seen from the back. 122 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 118 (a), FIG. 122 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 118 (a), and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line K. FIG. 123 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 118 (a).

  The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the board unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

  The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and the power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface. A rear base 662, an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 flows, and a game circulating in the out ball passage 663. An out sensor 664 for detecting the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling-out guiding section 627 for receiving the game ball B discharged from the lower ball-passing passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 and guiding it to the right in a front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removing guide portion 627 circulates, and the ball removing is provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662. And exits passage 665, and a passage wall member 666 is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball 抜排 out passage 665, a.

  The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and is long in the left and right. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending in the left-right direction at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is opened rearward.

  In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660, the insides of the ball guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well, and it becomes easy to check the ball clogging and the like. There is.

  The out-ball passage 663 is formed in the front side in an open state on the front side of a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends in the left-right direction in the rear base 662 at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

  The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is opened upward and extends left and right at a position substantially centrally in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the lower guide portion 663c, an out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guide portion 663c that guides the game balls B that are rectified in a row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b, and a lower guide portion 663c. It is opened downward, and has an out ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

  The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

  The out-ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle so that the left end becomes lower from the position on the right side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a. It is deep. Further, in the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, the portion on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower height as it goes to the downstream side (left side), and near the downstream end, the gaming ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

  The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partitioning wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is curved in a small curve toward the rear so that As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guiding portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. The lower guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the crank-shaped portion does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, and therefore passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in the crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing part, it does not bounce upward to the side of the out sensor 664, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

  The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life because the game ball B frequently passes therethrough.

  The ball pulling-out guiding portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out-ball passage 663. In the hollow guide portion 627, the upstream end is opened to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, the downstream side is bent backward, and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , And is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 122 (a), etc.).

  The ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The ball discharge passage 665 has a rear end located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed.

  An upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to a downstream end of the ball discharge guiding portion 627, the inclination is the same as that of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge receiving portion 663a is more inclined than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. The horizontal guiding portion 665a extending rightward, the vertical guiding portion 665b vertically extending downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guiding portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guiding portion 665b. ), A ball discharge outlet 665c opening downward. The ball discharge outlet 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123).

  In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b at regular intervals in the vertical direction. In the ball discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward alternately abuts the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and flows. It is possible to suppress an increase in speed, and it is possible to suppress the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge outlet 665c.

  Since the ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball discharge lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , A lot of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

  According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is received. It is detected by and is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharging lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated, and the game ball B discharged to the ball discharging passage 580b side is replaced with the out ball passage 663. The balls are discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through a ball-hole guiding part 627 and a ball-ball discharge passage 665 which are independent of each other. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is accurately performed. Can be counted. Therefore, by the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, an accurate game ball B It is possible to use the pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating the payout rate (ball payout rate).

  The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, The number of game balls B received from the winning holes such as the large winning hole 2005, the winning prize hole 2006, etc. and discharged from the game board 5 and which winning hole is received after being hit in the game area 5a. The number of the game balls B received in the out port 1008 without being discharged and the number of the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and the number of the game balls B hit in the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). That is.

  Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the gaming state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is "payout within a predetermined period. The number of out-balls within a predetermined period = the payout rate within a predetermined period ”is calculated.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 circulates, and the out ball. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the "out ball" is detected on the game board 5. It is not necessary to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration related to the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the rear base 662. Therefore, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are separated from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are filled with many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to the electrical noise caused by the distribution of the static electricity and the induced current, and the pachinko machine 1 which is less likely to malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out sensor 664 is worn out and damaged early.

  Furthermore, when the payout rate per predetermined time (ball output rate) calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player, Since the player desires to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a lot of game balls B. It is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. Further, in the case where the payout rate is visibly displayed from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out, the displayed payout rate becomes higher than usual. , Other players, staff members of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are more likely to notice the fraudulent activity, and can therefore hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity. Can be

  In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player, the same reason as above can be seen by the staff of the game hall. Can detect fraud. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, etc., the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay) is displayed. Since it is possible that there is a problem with the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030), the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the discharged game ball B. By providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be more entertained by the player.

  In addition, since the ball discharge passage 665 has the vertical guiding portion 665b in which the plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B flows through the vertical guiding portion 665b, so that the game ball B flows. Since the speed can be suppressed, the inside of the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged by the impact of the circulating game ball B, and the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged. Etc. can be prevented.

  Further, a meandering out ball rectifying portion 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are protruded is provided in the ball discharge passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the electric ball, it is possible to reduce the electric noise emitted from the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, so that it is provided nearby. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like that are present, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B.

  Further, the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passage 665 have their respective out-ball discharge port 663d and ball-out discharge port 665c opened downward. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with other pachinko machines and walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

  Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with the game. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B driven into the area 5a downward to the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, the structure for discharging the game ball B on the game board 5 is set. , A simple (simple) configuration can be achieved, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  Further, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are not provided. Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 vigorously collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged.

  Further, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to move the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-14a. Another Embodiment of Sphere Ejection in Board Unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 125 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 125 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball discharge passage 665 is provided near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is opened downward, and its opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball-removal discharge port 665c). Then, the guide piece 667 is short and protrudes rearward from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

  According to the embodiment of FIG. 124, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward. .. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, a portion (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island facility) of the island facility. It is possible to easily release the game ball B to the side), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island facility side.

  Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided in a position near the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position near the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, so that the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 moves away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, and due to static electricity and electric current generated by a large number of gaming balls B flowing through the out-ball path 663, electrical noise is generated. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B can be provided.

  Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from the bottom of the out ball passage 663 at a position of the out ball discharge port 663d. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out-ball passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. And a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664.

  The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has a base end rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 and a detection of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f of the main body 668a. A through hole 668b that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a. Have

  The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side.

  The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663 so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g to close it, the main body portion 668a abuts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 125 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the gaming ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then the through hole 668b. It passes through and is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

  When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c and release the locking with the locking part 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the main body portion 668a and opened so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, whereby the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is placed on the lower surface of the out sensor 664. Then, the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 125 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end (for example, the outer frame 2) of the contact threatened object indicated by the chain double-dashed line. To the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, or the lower end of the main body frame 4 to some extent. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the dangerous objects and the damage of the sensor cover 668 is prevented. be able to.

  According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. However, as described above, since the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is opened, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with the contact-respecting object such as the outer frame 2. Instead, the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, contact of many game balls B is made. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may be disengaged due to the vibration due to, and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. When the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls off downward, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B despite the fact that the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Since this is not done, the occurrence of an abnormality will be notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Due to the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a clearance between the sensor cover 668 and the like, the main body frame 4 can be opened and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact concern.

  Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer side portion of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be satisfactorily viewed from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, and thus the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright in an upside down state, and the work of replacing the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom surface side through the transparent base unit 660 are possible. It is possible to easily perform a check operation inside or inside the ball discharge passage 665.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted early. , It is possible to alleviate the frustration of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress a decrease in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the gaming hall side. it can.

  Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even when the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 can be removed from the base unit 660. The sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being lost because it is in a suspended state and does not fall off.

  Further, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the base unit 660 is an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which a large number of game balls B flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the game balls B are rotatably attached to each other, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 by the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side. Of the base unit 660 and becomes relatively small on the side of the locking claw portion 668c (the other end side) that is locked by the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is exerted on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as a result of many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the one is rotatably mounted on the one end side. Since a large amount can be received, it is difficult to release the locking by the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 136. FIG. 126 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 127 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 seen from the right front side, FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 seen from the left front side, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back side. . FIG. 130 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring of the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory and the like made transparent. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 126, and FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 126. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a normal winning opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B The mouth 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. In order to be accepted, the game is to entertain the user with the operation of driving the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, in which a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 134 and 173, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And are further provided.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , First V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first swing. Minute distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution middle drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, third Distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, magnetic sensor 2010, Movement sensor 3003 and out the sensor 664, is for relaying the connection with the like.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a. And, the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the normal winning port 2003. A special winning hole 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2004, and the first start port 2002 or the second start. Mouth 2 Game balls B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball B to 04. The first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, which are given an opportunity to accept the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting the magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. I have it.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is attached slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 in front view. An attacker having a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005, which is attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. Above the unit 2400, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, the center of the game area 5a in the front view is substantially central. And the upper attached to and character object winning opening to close 2006 includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 frame-shaped center won game 2500 has the.

  In the attacker unit 2400, a normal winning hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is provided. The center prize 2500 includes a prize winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and a first V prize hole that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first lose mouth sensor 2516 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lose mouth 2535 are provided.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape that is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. It is provided with a first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in one starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 173).

  Further, the back unit 3000 is installed from the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010, and the front surface of the lower portion of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 from the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower back sphere discharging unit 3150 that receives the game sphere B and discharges it downward, and a first sorting device 2530 and a second sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500 that are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. It is provided with a back right ball discharge unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges it downward.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and extends along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and the back front rendering unit 3200 and the light guiding plate rendering unit 3100. Back front lower left production unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, back front lower right production unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of light guide plate production unit 3100, and back decoration on back front production unit 3200 A sub status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of 3211 so as to be visible at all times.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

  The entire front component member 1000 is transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 penetrates the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1103 so that the lower full tank path unit 610 is provided. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b face forward.

  Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a functional display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the functional display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed almost entirely transparent, and the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The game panel 1100 is made of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000 at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, the game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the game panel 1100 includes a notch 1103 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward. Although not shown in detail, on the front surface of the game panel 1100, a decorative sheet having a pattern or decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion and a front portion, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is provided on the rear surface. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. From the discharge portion 1201 formed in the above, it can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 122) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control unit (1)]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 173) for controlling the game content and payout of the game ball B, and a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 130) capable of setting game performance. A main control board box 1320 that accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

  The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of a polycarbonate resin, the states of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 on the front surface side and the back surface side (whether unauthorized modification is performed, Or, whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrent against the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first Distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution middle drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, Third shake left rotation detection sensor 2564, third shake right rotation detection sensor 2565, magnetic sensor 20 0, and it is connected to the vibration sensor 3003, and the out-sensor 664, etc.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirmation of the set value, a setting switch button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value, The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness. Through, may be electrically connected). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right side and left side of the main control board 1310. The center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, which are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the centerlines passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder for rotating a setting key by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a setting including a pressing operation portion above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that is provided with a change button 1311b and can emit a single color (for example, red) to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b) on the center line of the setting change board 1311. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g composed of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged near the connector MSCN above the center line of the main control board 1310, and the center line of the main control board 1310 is arranged. A base monitor 1310h that is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line from the center to the right side is arranged below the main control board 1310 toward the center. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged in the.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening extends in the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, another line is installed in a row opposite to the island facility of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

  When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and then the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is set. Input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and then the second ON operation can be performed to set the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the original position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder 1311a is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned off so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned to its initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder 1311a is turned off). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions that are completely different from each other, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by only the setting key switch 1311a.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are inserted through the openings formed in the corresponding cover bodies of the main control board box 1320. "Gap" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the openings corresponding to each other, though they are exposed. In order to prevent modification of the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 by intruding a wire or the like from the wire, a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch As a routing of the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, do not bring them close to each other on the setting change substrate 1311 (separate from each other). In addition to being formed, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. In the main control board 1310, various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key switch 1311a Wiring pattern for transmitting setting key ON signal, wiring pattern for transmitting setting key switch 1311a decision key ON signal, and wiring pattern for transmitting setting key switch 1311a OFF signal) and setting switching button 1311b The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f are arranged so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other).

  The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a brief description will be given of the case of changing the setting of the set value, and a brief description of the case of displaying the confirmation of the current set value. In addition, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values, etc. in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the body frame. 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. The "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the outer frame 2 Setting is performed by opening the main body frame 4, then inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotating clockwise by 60 degrees, and performing the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. The “predetermined set value change permission condition” may be a condition that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 and power restoration at the time of power restoration after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and is turned on for the first time, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and The setting change of the set value may be executable when the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the main frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation for setting. The key switch 1311a turns on the setting key. Then, the power switch 630a in FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

  When the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 causes the setting change board 1311 to change to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input to. Every time a person who performs setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a causes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the set value 6, which is the maximum value, is reached, the value returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and the set value is increased again by 1 to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the cylinder rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then perform the OFF operation. The setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON key by operating the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  It should be noted that the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the setting key cylinder). When the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position (turning off), the decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting key switch 1311a is simply turned off to determine the setting value and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key cylinder 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a lighted state to a lighted state.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

  When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the external frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the “predetermined set value display permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state where power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). , The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first operation. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

  The person who confirms and displays the set value currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the first ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key switch 60 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, even if the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is still performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  After confirming the currently set setting value, the person who performs confirmation display of the currently set setting value turns the setting key switch 1311a to the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the setting key cylinder turning position (turning position). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the current setting. Complete the confirmation display of the set values.

  As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by being turned by 60 degrees and then turned on by the first ON, the predetermined set value display permission condition is that the pachinko machine is operated as described above. After the power is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Key cylinder Set jack key is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder insertion port. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is inserted into the setting key, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned ON by the first ON operation. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the preset setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

  Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" means, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit and the lottery, whether it is a small hit or not It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires Probability (the degree of advantage) in which the number of game balls B that can be played can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern). Big hit symbol determination table that stipulates the ratio of determination values, small hit determination table that stipulates the ratio of small hit determination values that indicates that you have won a small hit, percentage of determination values for the determination of small hit symbols The small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability change time to the normal time is defined) is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. You can select various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.) That. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. It should be noted that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used at various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. Some of them may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, the six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set, but the set values may be set in a smaller range or set in a larger range. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a when the power is restored to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side does not end normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM incorporated in itself (or you trust it). Cannot be done), and an error message is displayed to inform that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls B shot in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B shot in the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 173, etc.), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but set the setting key switch 1311a from the initial position to set the setting key switch 1311a. Rotate only the range up to the rotation position of the set key cylinder when the key is turned on. It may be used as the setting key switch 1311a 'that can be. In this case, the counterclockwise clock is used to return the setting key switch 1311a ′ from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a ′ can be turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a ′ by rotating the setting key switch 1311a ′ in the direction of 60 degrees, and the signal of this setting key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be referred to as “modification (1) of the enter key” in some cases).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body against the opening so that it is not possible to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 by intruding wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. The structure will be molded. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The setting key button may be arranged on the setting change board 1311 in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a or in the vicinity of the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker in which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation part of either the enter key button or the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the setting change button 1311b are laid out. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted do not come close to each other ( (Separated from each other). Further, when the determination key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be used may be described (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (2) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the handle unit 180 in the handle unit 180 has a palm or a hand. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the person's will is branched in the payout control board 633, and the main control is performed via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is not touching the handle 195. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON when not touching, and / or the decision key is ON when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194. On the other hand, when it is possible to determine that there is, the determination key is not ON when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) Good)) may be referred to as a “variation example (3) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633 to be described later. A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b in the payout control board 633 to pay. Through the control board 633, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B per minute to be launched toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification of decision key (4)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. Although the signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. A distance measuring sensor capable of being provided is provided on the game board 5, and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is used for peripheral control via a relay board. When input to the plate 1510, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and is determined based on this detection signal. The presence / absence of the key ON may be determined. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension, The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, whereby the motion of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no motion, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (5)”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is returned so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It was supposed to be, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311. However, instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the serial circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (6) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is returned so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It was supposed to be, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311. However, instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width of 1 ms when it is information for transmitting the setting key ON, and a pulse width of 3 ms when it is information for transmitting the determination key ON. If the information is OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the enter key ON, from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the two is OFF or OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (7) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is returned so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It was supposed to be, but the setting key O The voltage level of the signal of, the voltage level of the signal of the decision key ON, and the voltage level of the signal of the OFF key are set to the intermediate potential (for example, from 0 V to 5 V) between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. (A potential of 2V to 3V) is used, a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a. You may judge ON / OFF, ON / OFF of the signal of the determination key ON, and ON / OFF of the signal of OFF. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as a “variation example (8) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation section of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation section of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent the wire or the like from entering the opening and the open control part to modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The position of the determination key button on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 is provided with a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the decision key button with the error release switch, a button with a cover for covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation part is operated. Is required to be opened.), The color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the decision key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part. Different from each other may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision control button 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the decision pattern is provided as a wiring between the decision key button wiring pattern and the error release switch wiring pattern. The control board 633 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be used may be described (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation example (9) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and is sent through the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power-on of various control boards is turned on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in the state where no error has occurred as a state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (10)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 outputs the logic of the signal from the error release switch to the power supply of the payout control unit described later. A command is created by monitoring in the port input processing of the hour processing, the command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that receives this command The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power-on of various control boards is turned on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in the state where no error has occurred as a state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and informs that effect. When the command is received, it is possible to determine that the decision key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to that effect. If so, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant (11) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is turned to the OFF position by turning the setting key cylinder to the OFF position), and is turned OFF by rotating counterclockwise by 60 degrees, and further turned by 60 degrees counterclockwise) Second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and R The operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, is branched in the payout control board 633, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, The presence / absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input by the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can turn on the enter key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. In That. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the wire and the like cannot be penetrated through the "gap" formed in the part and the opening corresponding to the part to modify the dispensing control board 633. The structure will be molded into.

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused with each other. Affixed (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the pressing operation unit It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the payout control board 633, and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error clear switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (mutually). Are formed separately. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a ′ capable of performing the above (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “a modification key (12) of the decision key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is turned to the OFF position by turning the setting key cylinder to the OFF position), and is turned OFF by rotating counterclockwise by 60 degrees, and further turned by 60 degrees counterclockwise) Second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and R When the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later and creates a command, and when the payout control unit power-on described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f included in the payout control board 633 can be used. Operation of It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine that RAM clear switch 1310f pressing element when is not being operated dispensing control MPU of based on No.. Thus, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) is described in “Modification example of the enter key (13)”. May be stated).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key cylinder. From the original position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the OFF operation, and further counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward the front), and the decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. It was supposed to be input to the MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the left outlet sensor 30 2 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via (through) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input to the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3032. The presence / absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from 3033. The game ball B shot in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008 is detected by the out mouth left sensor 3032 or the out mouth right sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is in the case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and the left outlet sensor 3032 or right outlet sensor 3032 is used. Based on the detection signal from 3033, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the game ball B is collected from the outlet 1008. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (that is, closed) with respect to the main body frame 4, and / or based on a detection signal from the out-out left sensor 3032 or the out-out right sensor 3033, both It can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the out port 1008 does not collect the game ball B. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out switch). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (14) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key cylinder. From the original position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the OFF operation, and further counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward the front), and the decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. It was supposed to be input to the MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the left outlet sensor 30 2 and the logic of the detection signal from the outlet right sensor 3033 are monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the power-on process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command may determine whether the enter key is ON. The game ball B shot in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected by this out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects the game ball B by the out-port 1008 based on the detection signal from the left-out-out sensor 3032 or the right-out-out sensor 3033 in the frame command receiving process in the after-mentioned main control timer interrupt process. When the payout control MPU judges that the command is received, it can be judged that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU judges that the game ball B has not been collected through the outlet 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out switch). Mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ') may be referred to as "a modification key (15) of the decision key"). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb cutting detection sensor 574 or when a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. At the same time, it is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. Alternatively, the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 may be used by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. And sends a command created in the command sending process of the pay-out control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command determines the command. The presence / absence of a key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (of the payout unit). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification key (16) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can It is determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal of While it is possible to, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It is determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal of While it is Rukoto can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame opening). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn the decision key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again and remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON). Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON position. The decision key ON can be turned on and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 may be provided (the mode of the setting key switch is “Modification of decision key ( 8) "and there is a case to be described).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON). Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON position. The decision key ON can be turned on and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A setting key with which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while preparing for 1310 The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the binder from the rotational position to the initial position and turning it off, and by inputting this OFF signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key switch 1311a ′). Mode 2 (including the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′) may be referred to as a “variation example (19) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent modification of the main control board 1310 by intruding wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The position of the enter key button on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation part. It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the determination key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other). When the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a 'may be provided (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as a "variant (20) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM contained in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. Can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′) is sometimes referred to as a “variation (21) of the enter key”). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is output from the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f also has a function of an error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). It was possible to input this decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a normal winning opening provided on the game board 5 2003 regular winning opening sensor 2401, various winning opening sensors (eg, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening) Sensor 2403, accessory winning opening sensor 2513, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), and main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4 are input, based on these detection signals. The presence / absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (22) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening or send the game ball B to the out opening 1008.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a uses a stepping motor, a DC motor, It controls the operation of a movable body (feature) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and When determining the original position or operating position of the movable body (feature) based on the detection signal from the sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. May determine whether the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (optical type). The aspect of the object sensor (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation (23) of the decision key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor causes the optical sensor to move to its original position. It is necessary to move the movable body (feature) so as to detect the operation position and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, detect an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input Whether the decision key ON based on the output signal may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “variation (24) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. Although the signal of the decision key ON can be inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. By vibrating the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed. When the vibration sensor 3003 that detects an illegal act in which various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a detects a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. The presence / absence of fraudulent activity may be determined based on the above, and the presence / absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (25) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. The game ball B is caused by malfunctioning various sensors of various winning openings provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. When a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent activity to be obtained is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent activity based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and The presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on the detection signal of. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the radio wave sensor). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (26) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350. Signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 for detecting the pressure operation of the touch operation unit of the effect operation unit unit 350 The detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the contact of 02 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, is branched in the peripheral control board 1510, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the above, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (production operation button The mode of the unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (27) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked by a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 as described above can be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by intruding a wire or the like through “clearances” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the decision key button. In order to prevent this, the wire intrusion prevention portion is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening. As the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, when the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, An opening / closing switch for the setting change substrate cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be performed. Based on the detection signal from the opening / closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the preset setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box). May be referred to as a “decision key modification (28)”).

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal, and a setting switching button 1311b The wiring pattern to which the signal from is transmitted is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the setting change board 1311 as a wiring arrangement, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection of the board 1310 to the connector MSCN terminal) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern in which various signals are transmitted from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). (The wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also kept close to each other ( Although the wiring patterns are formed apart from each other, of the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a For one of the wiring patterns, the setting change board 1311 Through another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN, connector connection (inter-board connection) with another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected to each other via a harness (a wiring pattern is routed). It may be described as "Modification of decision key (29)").

  Further, among the modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key described above, a mode in which they are appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the modification combination mode of the modification example is referred to as “modification example of determination key (30) May be stated).

  In addition, in the setting value described above, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big jackpot or the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small jackpot, for the lottery determination when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of balls of the game ball B that the player can obtain is increased. Probability (advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player for other pachinko machines is high. In some cases, there is a single preset value that is preset. In other words, like the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists in advance as a plurality of setting values and the game specification that requires setting change is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and setting change is not required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Is dependent on the game specification, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided according to the game specification. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists in advance with only a single set value, and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) of the setting value being advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use it as, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are dealt with by the design change by the software that assigns the following contents. You can

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (the area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein (after clearing the RAM). The pachinko machine 1 can be started up in various ways) and can be used as a set value. In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the setting value 1 is "all operations (movable body (role)". Object operation, lighting of the light emitter)) is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, and the setting value 2 is assigned to actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies the "movable object (role) operation" and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed value of the movable body (role) (variable moving speed, movement over the entire operation area, other The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operations such as interference check with a structure or another movable body (feature) and operation order with another movable body (feature)" is assigned, and "5" is set as the set value. Light emitter 1 port unit (Main control MP The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating "lighting of the light emitting body for each predetermined output port of 1310a (that is, lighting of the light emitting body for each output port)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation for designating "no operation" as the setting value 6 The operation pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clear may be referred to as “variant (1) with common hardware configuration”). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (role) and the lighting of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs by repeatedly performing the main-machine-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 178) from the main control MPU 1310a controls the peripheral control with the contents (actual device confirmation operation pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitting body. Due to the mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the variation of the symbols to the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the time setting pattern 2 is set as “20 seconds”. , A time setting pattern 3 designating “25 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 designating “30 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 5, The time setting pattern 6 designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the time from the end of the variation of the symbol to the player waiting state is set to "a modification example (2) based on the common hardware configuration". ) ”May be described). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Due to the mode of changing and setting the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to have variations in the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the demonstration.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state) performed after the fluctuation of the symbols. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” is set as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is allocated, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “serial effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” is assigned as the setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies “period play style production” as the setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies “period play style production, movable body (role)” as the setting value 6 The pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect may be referred to as “variant (3) with common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the variation of the symbols.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by a sound volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as set values capable of being set. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 designating "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 designating "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. , A volume setting pattern 3 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and a volume setting pattern 5 designating “volume 5” is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 designating "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of default volume change setting may be described as "variant (4) with common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default volume is set with the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Also, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the minimum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the sound is stopped in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (in the direction opposite to the direction to decrease the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume, or the volume may be a predetermined rate (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This default volume change setting mode allows the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to have variations.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sound in error notification of various troubles, spots, and errors. The various error notification sounds are those that cannot be adjusted (that is, those that are not dependent) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound when the volume is set to the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although a clerk such as a store clerk can easily notice it, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification sound volume setting pattern 3 that specifies “error notification sound volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 4 that specifies “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and the setting value 5 is “ The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound In some cases, the aspect of the change setting of (1) is described as "Modified example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (a volume that does not mute, and a volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to a setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the sound volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to emit the error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied depending on the mode of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default brightnesses of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light-emitting body that is the target controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “brightness 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies “brightness 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “ The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of default brightness change setting may be referred to as “variant (6) with common hardware configuration”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, thereby performing lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a becomes a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the existing light-emitting body so that the light-emitting body can be turned on, blinking, and gradation points. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of luminances of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification of various problems, spots, and errors. The error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification brightness 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and “error notification brightness 2” is set as the setting value 2. The error notification brightness setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 to specify "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness to specify "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 The brightness notification pattern 4 is allocated, the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification brightness 5” as the setting value 5 is allocated, and the error notification brightness that specifies “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as the setting value 6 The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification is set to "common hardware"). It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low but the brightness of the lamp is low and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) goes to the setting value 6 (maximum brightness) of the lamp. The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification by the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. To do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant that is turned on, turn the illuminator on, blink, gradation points, and so on. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitter such as the lamp or the LED in the error notification can be varied.

  Further, the various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy the preset set value display permission condition in the set value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to the power-off (setting value display). May be referred to as a “modified example (8) based on a common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary for the setting key to be turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to specify a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM in main control side power-on processing. The game is progressed by clearing except for, and then setting interrupt permission. Further, when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 returns to power, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and executes the setting change process in the main control internal RAM. The game is advanced by clearing all areas except a specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the preset setting value change permission condition described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), power is restored to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (in some cases, it may be referred to as a “variation of a predetermined set value change permission condition”). is there).

  In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary for the setting key to be turned on. When this preset set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value that is set in the set value confirmation display process that is performed as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later. It is displayed on the vessel 1310g. As described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the pressing period is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined set value display permission condition described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs) The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (in the case of "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, and the main control side power supply described later. In the process at the time of throwing in, the game is advanced by performing before the initial setting and the starting setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modified example of the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. Without performing, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a being turned 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and being turned on first. A signal for turning on the setting key from the setting key switch 1311a and the RA with built-in main control are read as input information to be described later. Not stored in the input information storage area of the. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the preset value display permission condition is modified and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

  By adopting both the modification of the preset setting change permission condition described above and the modification of the preset setting display permission condition described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power restoration at the time of power recovery after a momentary power failure (occurring), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the assumption that the key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and then the first ON operation is performed to set the key ON. In some cases, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, and excludes a specific area from the entire area of the main control internal RAM. Oh, and then, while proceeding with the game by performing the interrupt permission setting, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU1310a, the main control side power supply to be described later The set value confirmation display processing is performed in the time processing, and then the game is advanced by performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process even once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of balls of the played game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the power-on process of the main control side which will be described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 is monitored by the base monitor 1310h. To display. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (may be referred to as "variation of usage method of base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set during the period from the power recovery to the start of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. It is possible to display the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after power recovery. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  In addition, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately used. You may select and may employ | adopt in the modification (30) of the determination key mentioned above.

  Further, any one of the above-described modification of the preset setting change permission condition, the modification of the preset setting display permission condition described above, and the modification of the base monitor using method described above is appropriately used. You may select and may be employ | adopted by the modifications (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 126 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator including three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result selected by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display device composed of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display device composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like. Equipped with an indicator.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 133. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 accommodates the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 173 and 174) and the peripheral control board 1510, which controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. And a peripheral control board box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see FIGS. 173 and 174, etc.). ).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the substantially center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit in the front unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit viewed from the rear.

  The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and part of the rear end projects into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and the game ball B which is attached to a further different position in the game area 5a so that the game ball B is always open to be received. The normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 that allow the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by accepting the game ball B at the normal winning opening 2003. Alternatively, the first winning opening and the special winning opening 2005 in which the gaming ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting mouth 2004. 002 or a winning prize hole 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and the character product It is provided with a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, which are provided with an opportunity to accept the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006.

  A plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The normal winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002. The prize winning port 2006 is arranged above the normal winning port 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged right above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and a front view left of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is attached slightly to the upper left of the side unit 2200 in front view. The attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a and has the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005. And above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. And character object winning hole 2006 attached to Ri, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 has a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, the.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The starter unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a immediately above the outlet 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and is opened upward, so that the left and right directions of the center accessory 2500 can be achieved. Located just below the center.

  The starting opening unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 in a state where it is attached to the game panel 1100, and the back lower ball of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side open upward.

  The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward.

  The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a at the lower right corner of the front view of the starting opening unit 2100, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 148 and the like).

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view is formed in a triangular shape whose height from the lower side increases toward the right side. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward in the upper right corner. The second starting opening 2004 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 with a distance larger than one gaming ball B, and is always open toward the front. The special winning opening 2005 is provided near the lower left end of the second starting opening 2004 and can be opened and closed forward.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a size slightly larger than the game ball B, and the special winning opening 2005 is approximately 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. The width is open.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large size. It is provided with a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 173 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second winning opening door 2411 and the second winning opening door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. A start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, a big winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the special winning opening 2005, and a big winning opening door 2413 of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. And an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by acceptance.

  As shown in FIG. 148, FIG. 149, FIG. 152, etc., the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left. Of the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421, the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 provided on the left side of the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421, and extending vertically. The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421, and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 are provided to the right of the special winning opening 2005, And a special winning opening guide shelf 2424 that is inclined so as to decrease toward the left.

  The second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 extends from the right side of the right end of the second starting opening 2004 to the center of the second starting opening 2004 and the special winning opening 2005 across the left end of the second starting opening 2004. It extends to the left to the vicinity. By this second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421, acceptance of the game ball B from above into the second starting mouth 2004 is blocked.

  The 2nd starting opening left standing wall part 2422 is provided with the space | interval which one game ball B can pass from the 2nd starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to the left. The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 vertically extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is bent to the right.

  The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically from the right end of the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. By this second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423, acceptance of the game ball B from the right side to the second starting opening 2004 is blocked.

  The special winning opening guide shelf 2424 has a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and is located to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004, from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 to one game ball B. At a height lower by a minute, the left-right direction extends in the left-right direction to the left of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and substantially the same as the right end of the special winning opening 2005 so that the left end becomes lower. As shown in the drawing, the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes tighter toward the right side.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 is opened to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and guides the game ball B to a position lower than the special winning opening 2005 below the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is between the first winning opening 2003 and the second winning opening guide shelf 2421 and the first opening 2431 that is vertically long and opens to the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003. A second opening 2432 opening upward to the left, a third opening 2433 opening upward below the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening below the special winning opening guide shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long and opens to the left on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and an outlet part that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and also has the discharge opening 2435. The game ball B can be released to the outside only.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side lowered. More specifically, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the normal winning opening 2003 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and is a portion below the normal winning opening 2003 to the left. After bending and wrapping around to the lower side of the normal winning opening 2003, and below the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 is bent downward as a part of the left side wall, and then the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. At a position lower than that, it bends to the left again and bends downward to the lower side of the part on the right side of the center of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 and extends to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2436 projecting into the passage and extending to the left and right on the front and rear inner walls of the vertically extending portion at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of ridges 2436 are provided such that the front side and the rear side have different heights. The plurality of ridges 2436 can guide the game ball B downward in a zigzag manner while suppressing an increase in the downward speed of the game ball B when the game ball B contacts.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is on the right side of the special winning opening 2005, and a plurality of ridges 2436 provided at a portion where the fourth opening 2434 is vertically long and is open, the end on the fourth opening 2434 side is provided. Further has a protrusion 2437 protruding into the passage (see FIG. 152 and the like). Due to the presence of this protrusion 2437, it is possible to prevent the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 from being discharged to the outside (left side) from the fourth opening 2434, and to pass through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long at a portion passing to the right of the special winning opening 2005, so that the game ball released to the left from the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. B contacts a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the special winning opening 2005, and flows the game ball B that flows to the right above the special winning opening 2005 to the fourth above the big winning opening 2005. The opening 2434 can be received to enter the attacker right passage 2430. Then, as described above, since the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged to the outside only from the discharge port portion 2435 at the lower end, it is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B does not bounce back to the special winning opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B released from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the special winning opening 2005 by the obstacle nail N, it is in the attacker right passage 2430. It does not enter and is not accepted in the special winning opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the special winning opening 2005, the wall (fourth opening 2434) of the passage is provided with the special winning opening 2005 side. It is not possible to bounce back to the special winning opening 2005 and receive an excessive amount of the game ball B into the special winning opening 2005, while a passage for the game ball B can be provided adjacent to the special winning opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has not been found in the conventional pachinko machines can be provided.

  The second starting port door 2411 is a plate-like member that extends from the lower side of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 in the left-right direction, and is moved forward and backward by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second start opening door 2411 is inclined so as to be lower from the left end side toward the right second start opening 2004 side, and is also inclined so as to be lowered rearward at a portion of the second start opening 2004. is doing. The second starting opening door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 drops onto the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 without contacting the second starting opening door 2411. Therefore, it does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second starting opening door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422. Comes into contact with the second starting opening door 2411, is guided to the second starting opening 2004 side by the second starting opening door 2411, and enters (is accepted) into the second starting opening 2004. In this way, the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed by moving the second starting opening door 2411 back and forth. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is a rectangle that is long in the left and right, and is attached so as to be rotatable around the axis in the left-right direction with the long side on one side as the axis. The big winning opening door 2413 can close the big winning opening 2005 that is open toward the front by setting the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side is forward. By rotating so as to move, the special winning opening 2005 can be opened, and the game ball B can be received. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (non-energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (energized).

  In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Further, the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening decoration substrate 2451 for illuminating the second starting opening 2004, a special winning opening decoration substrate 2452 for illuminating the special winning opening 2005, and an attacker right passage 2430. And a lower right decoration substrate 2453 for light emission decoration (see FIG. 174). The second starting port decoration board 2451 is provided behind the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted. This second starting opening decoration substrate 2451 changes the light emission mode when the "normal winning" is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and changes the light emitting mode to the second starting opening 2004. I try to attract.

  The special winning opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the special winning opening 2005 and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon. The special winning opening decoration substrate 2452 causes the special winning opening 2005 to emit light when the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern due to a "big hit game" or the like, so that the game balls received in the big winning opening 2005 B is easily visible. The table lower right decoration board 2453 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and to the right of the special winning opening 2005 and behind the attacker right passage 2430, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the normal winning opening 2003 is below the first starting opening 2002 (below the two outlets of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 described later. It is located at a height higher than the third distributing device 2550) of the center accessory 2500, and the second starting opening 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and is located at the third distributing device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. It is located at a height slightly lower than the triple distribution table 2554, and the special winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Further, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a portion above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421), and the special winning opening 2005. It is set up.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147 and the like. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center accessory and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel board, and the back left decoration of the back unit, and FIG. 142 (b) is a front view of (a). FIG. 143 (a) is a plan view of the third distribution device in the center accessory, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of the third distribution device in the center accessory as seen from the front. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the third distributing device for the center accessory disassembled as seen from above and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the third distributing device for the center accessory as disassembled as seen from the lower front. It is a figure. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of game balls in the third distribution device in the center accessory. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the action of the protrusions provided on the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third distributing device for the center character, and (b) is a second V winning opening. And, it is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball when the protrusion is not provided in the third loss opening.

  The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly in the center of the front view, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the back front effect unit 3200 provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. It is possible to visually recognize the back front lower left effect unit 3300, the back front lower right effect unit 3400, the sub state indicator 3500, and the like from the front.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped center base 2501 attached to the game panel 1100. The center base 2501 has a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 that extends in a plate shape in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant thickness, and extends in a plate shape in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502. A flange portion 2503, a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 that extends backward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 in a plate shape with a substantially constant thickness, and a flange portion 2503 that penetrates through the center accessory 2500. And a mounting hole 2505 for mounting on the panel 1100.

  The center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 has a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2503 extending in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction with respect to a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 and a rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the flange portion 2503 can reinforce and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are less likely to be distorted. Further, in the center accessory 2500, at least the center base 2501 is transparently formed.

  The front frame part 2502 is formed in a frame shape with its smooth surface bent. The front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is linearly inclined so that the front frame portion 2502 becomes lower toward the right from the position on the upper side of the frame on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. . The front frame upper right part 2502a of the front frame part 2502 has an upstream space part 2506 of a predetermined size in which the game ball B can flow between the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 and the front space upper right part 2502a assembled to the game board 5. To form.

  The rear frame portion 2504 is provided with a plurality of line-shaped decorations extending in the front-rear direction on the inner peripheral surface side in the circumferential direction. This makes it difficult to see the other side through the rear frame part 2504, and the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative substrate 3222 in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It can be made to appear to be emitting light by being irradiated with light from etc. The rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is on the player side. It can be made difficult to see from the front.

  The center base 2501 is a mounting hole with the rear frame portion 2504 inserted from the front into a large opening 1102 in the center of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 being in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is attached to the game panel 1100 with machine screws screwed into the game panel 1100 through 2505. In a state where the center base 2501 (center accessory 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. However, it is not possible to enter the frame.

  Further, when the center base 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100, the rear frame portion 2504 is located so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100. The inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is made difficult to see from the player side (front side) by a plurality of streak-like decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504.

  At the frame-shaped left side portion of the center accessory 2500 (center base 2501), a flange portion 2503 extends inside the front frame portion 2502 as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. In addition, the front frame portion 2502 has an inner side surface that substantially coincides with the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and a part of the front frame portion 2502 is positioned outwardly of the opening 1102. . Then, a mounting hole 2505 for mounting on the game panel 1100 is provided in the flange portion 2503 at a portion located outside the opening 1102 in the front frame portion 2502.

  In other words, in the portion of the frame-shaped left side of the center accessory 2500, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 projects more inward than the front frame portion 2502, and the game is performed in that portion. A center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel 1100.

  As a result, the flange portion 2503 is extended to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 and nothing is extended to the outside of the front frame portion at the left side of the frame of the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to implant the obstacle nail N at a position as close to 2502 as possible. Therefore, the area in which the game ball B is substantially distributed in the game area 5a can be set to a position in contact with the front frame portion 2502, so that the distribution area of the game ball B is made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement itself of the game ball B.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the flange portion 2503 extends in the direction orthogonal to the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction, the front frame portion is formed by the flange portion 2503. 2502 and the rear frame part 2504, that is, the center part 2500 as a whole can be reinforced, and by attaching the center part 2500 to the game panel 1100 via the flange part 2503, the front frame part 2502 and the rear frame part 2504 The strength can be further improved. Further, even in the portion of the flange portion 2503 that extends inside the front frame portion 2502, since it is attached to the game panel 1100 through the attachment hole 2505, the game ball B in the game area 5a is the front frame portion. Even if the flange portion 2503 of the 2502 comes into contact with the portion extending inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by attaching the flange portion 2503 and the attachment holes 2505 to the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the flange part 2503, when the game ball B abuts, the front frame part 2502 elastically deforms and an elastic body. It is possible to prevent the player from playing the game ball B like (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the front frame portion 2502, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to implant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame part 2502, the front frame part 2502 in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Even if the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 defined by is enlarged, the substantial distribution area of the game ball B does not become smaller unlike the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, by suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, by enlarging the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, an effect display provided behind the inside of the frame The effect image of the device 1600 and the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, etc. of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 can be made more visible, and the movement of the game ball B within the game area 5a. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the various effects that can be seen through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as described above, the flange portion 2503 can increase the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504. When pulling out, it is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product.

  In the above embodiment, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is illuminated and decorated with light from the LED mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3222 of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, Although the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500, a surface facing the center of the opening 1102 along the inner circumference of the opening 1102. Alternatively, a decorative board for an opening having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon may be provided. As a result, the same effect as the above can be achieved, and the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be hidden by the opening decorative substrate, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. You can In this case, by making the surface of the opening decorative substrate white, it is possible to make the opening decorative substrate less conspicuous, and to make the rear frame portion 2504 lighter and brighter when the LED is made to emit light. You can Alternatively, the surface of the decorative substrate for the opening may be colored with a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effect as the above can be obtained. In addition, the decorative substrate for the opening may be provided over the entire circumference of the opening 1102, and the center accessory 2500 is made to emit light in a frame shape (annular shape), or “right hit” or “left hit” is performed. It is possible to present the player with a variety of light emission effects by causing the player to emit light so as to orbit in a predetermined direction so as to be entertained and entertaining.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner of the center base 2501 and includes a guide passage group 2520 including two passages through which the game ball B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and the first special lottery is performed when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. According to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the game ball B can be accepted, and the game ball B accepted in the prize hole 2006 is stored in the accommodating portion 2531a side (V prize side) and the second. A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to one of the one loss mouths 2535, and a game ball B housed in the housing unit 2531a (distributed to the V winning side) by the first distribution device 2530 to the first V winning mouth. The second distribution device 2540 that distributes to either 2007 or the second losing mouth 2543, and the game ball B that has been distributed to the second losing mouth 2543 by the second distributing device 2540, the second V winning opening 2008 and the third. And the struck component 2550 to distribute to any deviation port 2555, and a.

  In addition, the center auction 2500 receives the award winning entrance door 2511 that can open and close the award winning opening 2006, and the award winning opening door 2511 to receive the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. And a prize winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, which is opened and closed according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result drawn by , A first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects a game ball B that has been distributed by the second distributing device 2540 and received in the first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning that is distributed by the third distributing device 2550. The second V winning opening sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2008, and the game ball B received by the first losing mouth 2535 after being sorted by the first sorting device 2530. First loss sensor 2516 for detecting (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)) and second loss for detecting game ball B sorted by second sorting device 2540 and received in second slot 2543. It is provided with a mouth sensor 2517 and a third lose mouth sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B sorted by the third sorting device 2550 and received by the third lose mouth 2555.

  As shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the upper entrance is the first guide passage 2521 provided at the portion of the stop portion 1006. , An upper inlet is formed adjacent to the left side of the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

  The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically downward from the stopper portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends rightward at a right angle. When it hits the right rail 1005, the first guide passage 2521 bends downward to the right rail 1005. Along the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, bent to the left in the vicinity of a height of 3/4, and extended to the left so as to be lowered at a gentle angle, and to the left of the second guide passage 2522. It bends downward at a position on the left side by one ball B and extends to the height of the center of the game area 5a, then bends rightward and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward and the exit goes downward. It is formed in a shape that is open toward the side. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The accessory winning port 2006 is provided in a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521, extends leftward and rightward over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. ing. The accessory winning opening door 2511 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left / right direction so that the left end of the door 2511 is lowered. Can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2511 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and in the state where the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, it extends to the left in the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the outlet side of the first guide passage 2521 by forming the bottom surface of the.

  The prize winning opening door 2511 is opened by opening the prize winning opening 2006 by retreating by driving the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, and the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the prize winning opening 2006. Can be accepted by This accessory winning opening door 2511 closes the winning portion winning opening 2006 when the winning portion winning solenoid 2512 is OFF (non-energized), and wins when the winning portion winning solenoid 2512 is ON (energized). The goods prize opening 2006 is opened.

  On the right end side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a, the second guide passage 2522 has an inlet opening upward at a portion spaced from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 leftward. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then plays the game. A portion of the panel 1100, which is bent rearward from the front side and is aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, extends downward to the left of the accessory winning port 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide with each other, bends to the right in a crank shape at a central height portion of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and to the lower right of the first guide passage 2521. After being bent forward at a portion lower than the portion extending inward, the first guide passage 2521 extends to the lower right of the first guide passage 2521 in the same plane in the front-rear direction. Along the underside of the part Bent rightward in the building so, then bent downwards so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is formed in a shape of the outlet is open downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are overlapped from the front by being lined up in the front-rear direction at the portions of the first guide passage 2521 that extend vertically to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006. It has a portion 2520a. In this weighted portion 2520a, both the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B circulating in the second guide passage 2522 can be visually recognized well from the front, It is difficult for the player to determine which passage the gaming ball B circulating in the weighted portion 2520a is circulating.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weighted portion 2520a, and on the lower side of the weighted portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis in the direction opposite to the upper direction. The respective outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are opened above the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 and downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are respectively provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b spaced apart in the circulation direction of the game ball B, and when the game ball B contacts the protrusion 2520b, the distribution speed thereof is increased. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 131).

  The first allocating device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory winning port 2006 and a portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending to the lower right side, and the first guide passage 2521 (game). It is provided behind the panel 1100 (front surface).

  The first distribution device 2530 has a housing portion 2531a capable of housing only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and a distribution rotor 2531 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction and a distribution rotor 2531. A first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 173 etc.) for rotating the distribution rotor 2531 between a state in which the housing portion 2531a of the device is facing right and a state in which the housing part 2531a is facing upward. The cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the minute rotation body 2531 and the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 penetrate the upper portion of the distribution rotation body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 and are shaken. The first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the division rotation body 2531 and the rearward opening at the lower portion of the first distribution guide path 2534 are provided in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotation body 2531. Game not accommodated The first loss port 2535 into which B enters and the ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 circulates, passes through the portion on the right side of the distribution rotor 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533, and goes to the right. It is provided with a first atari passage 2536 extending to and a first lost mouth sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)) for detecting the game ball B that has entered the first lost mouth 2535.

  The distribution rotor 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface constricted rearward. The right end side of the first atari passage 2536 is bent rearward and then downwardly so as to communicate with the second distribution device 2540 side.

  In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 faces right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 contacts the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer periphery of the distribution rotor 2531. Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that is constricted rearward, the game ball B is guided rearward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first losing opening 2535.

  On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotor 2531 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the housing portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 150 (a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one is stored in the storage portion 2531a. When the game ball B is further guided from the prize winning opening 2006 side by the first distribution guide path 2534 in a state where the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531, the game ball B is concerned. After B comes into contact with the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the rear first losing opening 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first lose opening 2535 is delivered to the back right ball delivery unit 3170 of the back unit 3000, and then delivered onto the substrate holder 1200.

  When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a, the distribution rotor 2531 is rotated clockwise by the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the housing portion 2531a faces right. The game ball B housed in 2531a rolls from the housing portion 2531a to the first atari passage 2536 on the right side, and circulates in the first atari passage 2536. The game ball B flowing through the first atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

  As described above, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006 is located on either the second distribution device 2540 side (accommodating portion 2531a side) or the first loss mouth 2535 side. It can be distributed to crabs.

  The second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and behind the exit of the guide passage group 2520, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 148. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide passage 2534 and the first atari passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second distribution device 2540, the game balls B stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to the first atari passage 2536 side flow. The second distribution guiding path 2541 extending vertically, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side surface of the lower portion of the second distribution guiding path 2541, and the right extending from the first V winning opening 2007 to the right. The first V winning passage 2542 that extends downward after playing, and the first V winning opening sensor that is provided in the first V winning passage 2542 and detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007 2514, and.

  In addition, the second distribution device 2540 is provided at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541, the second loss opening 2543 that opens upward, and the upper side of the second loss opening 2543. A distribution door 2544 that can open and close the loss opening 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 that opens and closes the second distribution opening 2543 by moving the distribution door 2544 forward and backward, and extends to the left from the second loss opening 2543. A second lost passage 2546 that is bent downward later, a second lost mouth sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second lost passage 2546 and that detects the game ball B received in the second lost mouth 2543, Is equipped with. The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side becomes lower.

  In the second distribution device 2540, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted and the second loss opening 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it enters the second loser opening 2543 and passes through the second loser passage 2546 to make the second It is sent to the three-sorting device 2550 side.

  On the other hand, in a state where the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second loss opening 2543, and the distribution door 2544 closes the second loss opening 2543 to play the game. The ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 and then the distribution door 2544. It is guided to the right by the inclination and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 flows through the first V winning passage 2542, is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and is then detected by the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the.

  When the ball game ball B from the first allocating device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. The "big hit game" of opening and closing is executed. The second distribution device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

  As described above, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 is transferred to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening. It can be distributed to any of the 2543 (the third distribution device 2550) side.

  As shown in FIG. 140 and the like, the third distribution device 2550 is provided in the lower side portion within the frame of the center base 2501 in the center accessory 2500. The third distribution device 2550 communicates with the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and guides the game ball B detected by the second loss sensor 2517 to the left. A distribution guideway 2551 and a klune 2553 which is provided at the left end of the third distribution guideway 2551 and which discharges downward while rotating the game ball B around an axis in the vertical direction, and is provided below the klune 2553. A third V distribution table 2554 in which a second V winning opening 2008 is provided which penetrates downward near the front end of the center in the left-right direction and in which the game ball B can roll, and a third distribution table 2554 Two third losing ports 2555 penetrating downwards on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, and a third third opening provided near the rear end of the center of the third distribution table 2554 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a central rotating body 2556, and a third distributing left rotating body 2557 and a third distributing right rotating body 2558 which are respectively provided near the front ends of the left and right ends of the third distributing table 2554 (Fig. 143 to FIG. 146).

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the lower side of the third distribution table 2554 and is attached to the third distribution base 2559 attached to the center base 2501 and the third distribution base 2559. The third distribution drive motor 2560 for rotating the third distribution rotor 2556 and the third distribution left rotor 2557 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559. And a third distribution right drive motor 2562 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 for rotating the third distribution right rotating body 2558. I have it. The third distribution drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173). ).

  The rotation axis of the third distribution drive motor 2560 penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and projects upward. The third distribution left drive motor 2561 has a rotation shaft that penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and projects upward, and a third distribution left rotation body 2557 is attached to the rotation shaft. The third distribution right drive motor 2562 has its rotation shaft penetrating the third distribution base 2559 and protruding upward, and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is attached to the rotation shaft.

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the third distribution base 2559, and the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution rotation body 2556, A third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558. And a second V winning hole sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008, and a third losing mouth sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing mouth 2555. Is equipped with. These second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing mouth sensor 2518, third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are on the panel. It is connected to the main control board 1310 via the relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped drive gear 2566 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution drive motor 2560 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. And a transmission gear 2567 in the form of a spur gear, which meshes with the drive gear 2566 and is attached to the shaft portion 2556a of the third distributing rotor 2556 that protrudes downward. The transmission gear 2567 has a diameter larger than that of the drive gear 2566, and decelerates the rotation of the third distribution drive motor 2560 to transmit the rotation to the third distribution rotation body 2556. Further, the transmission gear 2567 has a detection piece 2567a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563.

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. 2568, a left rotation detection gear 2569 meshed with the left transmission gear 2568 and rotatably attached by a third distribution table 2554 and a third distribution base 2559, and a third distribution table 2554. Between the table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, a spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 is meshed with the right transmission gear 2570. It includes a spur gear-shaped right rotation detection gear 2571 rotatably mounted by a distribution table 2554 and a third distribution base 2559.

  The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561. The counterclockwise rotation detection gear 2569 has a detection piece 2569a that protrudes downward from the middle in the radial direction in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a detection piece 2571a that protrudes downward in the flat direction from the middle in the radial direction and is detected by the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565.

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 is provided between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 below the third distribution-rotating body 2556 so that light can be emitted upward. Between the third distribution medium rotating body decoration substrate 2572 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and the third distribution medium rotating body 2556 and the second distribution medium rotating body 2556. A third sorting table decoration substrate 2573 is provided below the portion between the V winning opening 2008 and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward is mounted.

  The third distribution device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third distribution base 2559, and cooperates with the third distribution base 2559 to receive the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. A passage forming member 2575 forming a third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding the discharged game ball B downward and discharging it, a third distribution middle drive motor 2560, and a third distribution left drive motor. 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are covered from below from the lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third distribution base 2559, the clune 2553 and the third distribution table 2554 from above. And a transparent upper cover 2577 (see FIG. 134).

  The third distribution table 2554 is transparent. The outer shape of the third sorting table 2554 in plan view is a semi-circular shape on the rear end side, and is formed in a cannonball shape whose length in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the semi-circular arc. The length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the rotating member 2556 during third distribution. In other words, the diameter of the third sorting rotary member 2556 is 0.4 times the length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front-rear direction. Further, the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is about 4 times as large as the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. It is about 10.5 times. Further, in the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554, the length (width) in the left-right direction is about 5 times or more the diameter of the game ball B, and the length (depth) in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. Is 5 to 7 times.

  The third distribution table 2554 is provided in front of the third distribution medium rotating body 2556 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a substantially quadrangular central table 2554a that is inclined so that the front end side becomes lower, and the central table 2554a. Left and right outer tables 2554b and 2554c that are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central table 2554a and extend from the position rearward of the front end of the central table 2554a to the position rearward of the rear end of the third distributing rotor 2556, It is provided in front of the central table 2554a, and is tilted so as to be lowered to the left and right sides with the center in the left-right direction as a boundary, and then is bent backward at the left and right outer portions of the central table 2554a and left table 2554b and right table. 2554d, the left table 2554b and the right table, which are inclined so as to be lowered toward 2554c. It provided one step higher in the left and right outer sides of the respective table 2554C, has a side table 2554e front end side and the inner is inclined to be lower, the.

  The third distribution table 2554 surrounds the weir portion 2554f protruding upward from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, the rear end side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. As described above, it has a peripheral wall portion 2554g which is higher than the diameter of the game ball B and extends upward. The dam portion 2554f suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both left and right sides of the central table 2554a. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2554g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game ball B from falling off the third distribution table 2554.

  The length of the central table 2554a in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the third allocating rotator 2556, and the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the central table 2554a has a rear end side extending to a portion in front of the center of the third distribution medium rotating body 2556, and both right and left sides are obliquely bent toward the third distribution medium rotating body 2556. ing. The central table 2554a is only inclined in the front-rear direction and is horizontal in the left-right direction. In the vicinity of the front end of the central table 2554a, a third loser opening 2555 is opened on both left and right sides with a second V winning opening 2008 in the center in the left-right direction in between. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are round holes having the same diameter. The second V winning opening 2008 has a rounded chamfered peripheral edge.

  The front end sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are the same in the front-rear direction as the front ends of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555, and are more than the same portion in the front-rear direction in the central table 2554a. It is located at a height as low as the diameter of. Further, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined in the front-rear direction such that the distance from their respective front ends to the same part in the front-rear direction as the rear end of the central table 2554a becomes lower toward the outer side in the left-right direction. And the rear side is almost horizontal. Furthermore, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the vicinity of the center of the third distribution medium rotating body 2556 and the site in the front-rear direction are the same height as the general surface of the third distribution medium rotating body 2556, and The rear side is higher than the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. A third distribution left rotating body 2557 and a third distribution right rotating body 2558 are provided at the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on the left and right outer sides, respectively.

  Further, the third distribution table 2554 extends back and forth from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V winning opening 2008 at the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction such that the width becomes narrower toward the front. It has a bulging portion 2554h that bulges slightly upward. By this bulging portion 2554h, the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction can be directed to the outer side in the left-right direction, and it is difficult to enter the second V winning opening 2008. is doing.

  Further, the third distribution table 2554 projects upward from the front end side of each of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loss openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protruding portion 2554i. The projecting portion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape at the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a rod shape having a narrow left and right width at the third losing opening 2555. Further, the protrusion 2554i of the third loss opening 2555 slightly protrudes into the third loss opening 2555. As will be described later in detail, these projections 2554i are rolled outward around the edges of the opening when the game ball B contacts the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. This is for preventing the player from jumping out and entering the other third losing opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008.

  Furthermore, the third distribution table 2554 projects lower than the protrusion 2554i at the center in the left-right direction between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protrusion 2554j.

  The third distribution medium rotating body 2556 is rotatably supported by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 while protruding downward from the center of the disk shape, and has a shaft portion 2556a to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached. Have Further, the third distribution-in-rotation body 2556 includes three inner projecting portions 2556b that project in a fan shape near the center and an outer projecting portion 2556c that projects in an arc shape near the outer peripheral edge and higher than the inner projecting portion 2556b. ,have. The inner protrusion 2556b and the outer protrusion 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and each is provided on the same radiation. The outer projecting portion 2556c has a constant width in the radial direction, the outer peripheral side matches the general surface of the third distributing medium rotating body 2556, and the outer projecting portion 2556c is inclined in the radial direction so that the inner peripheral side becomes higher. There is. In the state of being assembled to the third sorting device 2550, the general surface of the third sorting medium rotation body 2556 is parallel to the surface of the central table 2554a in the third sorting table 2554, and slightly above the central table 2554a. Is located in. The third distribution-in-rotation body 2556 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the third distribution-increase drive motor 2560 via the drive gear 2566 and the transmission gear 2567.

  The third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558 each have a protrusion 2557a and a protrusion 2558a that extend in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction and extend in the axial direction. ing. The protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are the most in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c in the state where the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third distribution device 2550. With respect to the game ball B located on the left and right outer sides of the lower front end, the game ball B is projected to a position approximately at the center of the game ball B. These projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a have rounded tips in plan view. Therefore, the projection pieces 2557a and the projection pieces 2558a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 make it hard to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

  Further, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third distribution device 2550, and the lower ends of the projecting pieces 2557a and the projecting pieces 2558a are the left table 2554b and the left table 2554b. It is located above the center of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B located at the left and right outer sides of the lowest front end of each of the right tables 2554c. That is, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are provided so as to contact the upper portion of the game ball B. As a result, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a do not come in contact with each other so as to scoop up the game ball B, and make it difficult for the game ball B to jump up.

  The third distribution left rotator 2557 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right rotator 2558 is rotated by the third distribution right drive. It is rotated in a clockwise direction in a plan view by a motor 2562. Therefore, the projection piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the projection piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are adapted to play the game ball B of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c backward.

  The third distribution base 2559 holds a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and two third losing opening sensors 2518 in cooperation with the passage forming member 2575. In addition, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 to be discharged downward. A sphere separation discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 divides the game balls B received into the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing openings 2555 on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, without merging them with each other. It is formed so as to guide the player as it is, and a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and a third losing mouth sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is low, and is provided rearward when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks inside the game area 5a. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like are not blocked.

  The third sorting device 2550, in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, has a front end located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly behind the front surface of the front component member 1000, and a rear end in a back surface described later. It is located behind the light guide plate 3102 of the unit 3000 and slightly ahead of the front surface of the effect display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In the third distribution device 2550, the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the third distribution left rotating body 2557, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are the third distribution middle driving motor 2560 and the third distribution left. It is constantly rotated by the drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third distribution center rotating body 2556 and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 rotate counterclockwise in a plan view, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the third sorting middle rotating body 2556 is at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are far more than the third sorting middle rotating body 2556. It is rotating at a high speed of 625 rpm. As described above, since the rotation speeds of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are high, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are provided with detection pieces. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected by the sensor, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. More specifically, since the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece, for example, if the rotation cycle of the detection piece and the detection cycle of the sensor are the same, Since it may not be possible to detect a piece at all, it is necessary to make the detection cycle of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation cycle of the detection piece. Then, if the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation cycle becomes shorter, the detection cycle of the sensor needs to be further shortened. Therefore, the load on the control unit is increased, and the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 (the third distribution left drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562) are used. , The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are attached respectively, and the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are engaged with the large diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively, for rotation. The left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, which have been decelerated and decelerated in rotation, are provided with a detection piece 2569a and a detection piece 2571a, respectively, and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation It is detected by the detection sensor 2565. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is set to 250 rpm.

  As a result, the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a for detecting the rotations of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 becomes slow, so that the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 can be reliably detected, and the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 can be determined. Further, since the rotation speeds of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a are slowed down, it is not necessary to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. An appropriate detection cycle can be set, and an increase in load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  The third distribution device 2550 is supplied with the game balls B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 to the second losing mouth 2543. More specifically, the game ball B distributed to the second losing mouth 2543 is detected by the second losing mouth sensor 2517, and then supplied to the clune 2553 through the third sorting guideway 2551, and in the clune 2553. After turning around the vertical axis, it falls near the right end of the recovery table 2554d in the third distribution table 2554 below. At this time, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550 is executed based on the detection of the game balls B by the second losing mouth sensor 2517.

  The game ball B dropped from the clune 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the right table 2554c on the rear side, and then rolls toward the lowest right part of the front end on the right table 2554c to rotate. It comes into contact with the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 that is operating. After that, the game ball B hitting the projecting piece 2558a and being flipped backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556, and the inclination of the central table 2554a. Will roll forward. Then, either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a is accepted, or it passes through them and enters the collecting table 2554d. The game ball B that has entered the recovery table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part that entered. Note that the game ball B rolled from the recovery table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the protruding piece 2557a of the rotating third sorting left rotation body 2557, similarly to the movement of the right table 2554c described above. From the rear end side of the left table 2554b, the center table 2554a passes through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556.

  Thus, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third distribution medium rotating body 2556. After rolling the central table 2554a, the game table B is accepted by the recovery table 2554d to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. To be repeated.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, since the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are rotating at high speed, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the game ball B has a protrusion 2557a or The projection piece 2557a and the projection piece 2558a hit the game ball B depending on the timing when the projection piece 2558a enters the contact area where the projection piece 2558a can contact and the timing when the projection piece 2557a and the projection piece 2558a contact the game ball B. The game ball B is abutted against or hits the game ball B, and the momentum of the game ball B flipped backward varies depending on the contact condition of the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a.

  Therefore, even if the game ball B is flipped backward by the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a, if the abutting condition is weak, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c that are higher toward the rear cannot be completely climbed, The game ball B may come back and go back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c without entering the rotating body 2556 side during the third distribution. Alternatively, even when the game ball B flipped backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a reaches the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the three outsides of the rotating body 2556 during the third distributing distribution are rotating. Depending on the timing at which the protrusion 2556c is located, the game ball B may be blocked from entering by the outer protrusion 2556c and may not be moved to the central table 2554a side, but may be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. . Furthermore, when the game ball B enters from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the third distribution medium rotating body 2556, the third distribution medium rotating body 2556 is rotating, so that the three outer protrusions 2556c. Since the part between is moving, the game ball B may be carried to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side by the rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Further, when the game ball B is strongly struck backward by the protrusion 2557a or the protrusion 2558a, it passes through the third sorting rotor 2556 and enters the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side. It may enter the side table 2554e. The game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is in contact with it.

  Therefore, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the third distribution portion is repelled by the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, and the third distribution is performed. The game ball B that has entered the middle rotating body 2556 will enter the central table 2554a with a certain probability. At this time, since the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is rotating, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a from various positions in the left-right direction depending on the rotating position.

  The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a will roll forward due to its inclination, but it will enter from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both outer sides in the left-right direction through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556. In addition, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, it has a movement vector in the left-right direction and rarely rolls straight forward. Become. At this time, since the bulging portion 2554h bulges upward in the center of the central table 2554a in the left-right direction, the bulging portion 2554h weakens the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction or returns to the opposite side. It will be done. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end, or the side thereof. It will pass through the recovery table 2554d.

  By the way, in the central table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B may be the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening. By contacting the circular opening of 2555, the game ball B may move like a swing by turning around the edge of the opening. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), when there is nothing in the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rolls along the edge of the opening to roll. If there is another second V winning opening 2008 or a third losing opening 2555 at the tip that has been changed in direction and jumped outward from the edge of the opening, a game ball is placed in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, if the player thinks that the game ball B has entered the second V winning opening 2008, he or she will go around the edge of the opening and enter the third loss opening 2555 next to the player, and disappoint the player to entertain. There is a risk of lowering it. Further, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the probability of winning (winning probability) of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 in the third sorting table 2554 (third sorting device 2550) becomes large, and thus the player has a great deal of variation. There is a risk of giving distrust to them.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projection portion 2554i is projected on the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, so that the game ball B tries to rotate along the edge of the opening. Also, in the middle of that, it can hit the projection portion 2554i and can be repelled from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening. It is possible to prevent entry into the third loser opening 2555. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from unnecessarily entering the third losing opening 2555 and disappoint the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the unintended receipt of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, it is possible to reduce the variation in the probability of accepting the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, and to play the game. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to feel distrust.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i is projected to the inside of the opening at the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rolled along the edge of the opening can be reliably played. Further, since the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is rounded into a rounded R, the movement vector of the game ball B can be easily directed toward the outside or inside of the opening by the chamfering, and the game ball B is It is difficult to turn along the edge of the opening.

  When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it enters the collecting table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. . At this time, there is a possibility that the front end of the central table 2554a may come into contact with the protruding portion 2554j protruding upward. The game ball B may be reflected rearward depending on how the game ball B abuts on the protrusion 2554j, and depending on the reflection angle, the game ball B can be received in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. There is a nature. On the other hand, when the game ball B is reflected toward the front side by coming into contact with the protrusion 2554j, it means that the game table B enters the recovery table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. In addition, in the central table 2554a, when the game ball B passes between the third loss opening 2555 and the dam portion 2554f, it enters the recovery table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without contacting the protrusion 2554j. .

  In this way, the game ball B that has entered the recovery table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the entered site, and the third distribution left rotating body. 2557 or by the third distribution right rotator 2558, it is sent to the central table 2554a again through the third distribution rotator 2556, and either of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Until it is accepted, the above-mentioned movement is repeated and the third distribution table 2554 is patrolled. In this embodiment, the game balls B are distributed (accepted) to the second V winning opening 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is guided by the third distribution ball discharging passage 2574, detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2515, and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing mouth 2555 is guided by the third sorting ball discharging passage 2574, detected by the third losing mouth sensor 2518, and then discharged downward. The game ball B discharged downward from the third sorting device 2550 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

  In this way, in the third allocating device 2550, the game ball B distributed by the second allocating device 2540 to the second losing mouth 2543 is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing mouth 2555. Can be distributed to.

  Further, according to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the height and the protrusion amount of the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are set as the game balls. Since B is hard to hit and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotated at high speed, the game ball B enters the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. At times, it is possible to make it unpredictable to the player as to how strong the game ball B is flipped backward, and the player's line of sight is nailed to the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B moving back and forth on the third distribution table 2554, and to increase the sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and to lower the excitement. Suppress It can be.

  Also, unless the game ball B is repelled to some extent by the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B does not enter to the center table 2554a and the game ball B does not enter the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the collecting table 2554d causes the left table 2554b or the right table. Since it is returned to 2554c, the game ball B remains on the third distribution table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the game ball B is distributed for a longer time than a distribution device such as a clune in a conventional pachinko machine. It is entertaining, and the game ball B is distributed to the second V winning opening 2008 so that "big hit game" Let me enhance expectation for generation thereby suppress the reduction of interest. In other words, since the “big hit game” occurs due to the movement of the game ball B, which is the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, the first display opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are displayed on the effect display device 1600. When a "big hit game" occurs when an image effect is displayed in which multiple symbols are variably displayed to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by acceptance. In comparison, even if it takes a long time to determine the occurrence of a "big hit game", it can keep the player from getting tired and at the same time reduce the discomfort at the time of "miss" to suppress a decline in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the distribution device using the clune or the like in the conventional pachinko machine, the acceleration of the game ball B is not essential in order to reach the distribution destination such as the V winning opening or the losing opening, and the rolling path or the rolling speed. The structure was such that the game ball B could reach the distribution destination even if the change was not given to. Therefore, with the conventional pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to some extent, the player is tired of getting used to the game, and there are problems as illustrated below. That is, for example, when the rolling path of the game ball B is not changed and is guided to an unfavorable distribution destination, the distribution destination can be predicted from the rolling path, so that the player's interest before reaching the distribution destination. Could be reduced. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, as a result, when it is guided to a disadvantageous distribution destination, it is originally advantageous distribution (unless the rolling path is changed). If the development that could have reached earlier is hindered by the means and suffers a disadvantage, the player may feel the distrust and the player's interest may be lowered.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the third distribution device 2550, with the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 that rotate at high speed, with what strength Whether the game ball B is accelerated and played cannot be clearly predicted from the player, and moreover, the game ball B is played by the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. The number of times is not limited to once, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B is distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Since it will be accepted, it is possible to make the player feel that the distribution destination has been selected by random dispatch. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movement of the game ball B by natural flow-down is not only enjoyed without causing the above-mentioned problems in the conventional pachinko machine, but also a random allocation destination is selected. It is possible to entertain the development of the game by, and to make the player have a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

  Further, in the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the two third losing openings 2555 are provided side by side on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is received in the loss mouth 2555, it is possible to make the player feel that the advantageous / disadvantageous results are divided due to a slight difference. As a result, even if the game is distributed to the unfavorable third losing mouth 2555, it is possible to expect the effect that the player feels regrettable and can continue to increase the motivation of the game.

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment is provided with one second V winning opening 2008 as an advantageous distribution destination, while two third losing mouths 2555 are disadvantageous distribution destinations. It is provided that the third distribution table 2554 shows that it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the advantageous distribution destination rather than the disadvantageous distribution destination. By being visually indicated, the player can be strongly urged to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination, and the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B can be increased and the interest can be improved. You can expect an effect.

  Further, in the third allocating device 2550 of the present embodiment, since the central table 2554a is tilted so that the front end side becomes lower, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end, the third distributing device 2550 enters the central table 2554a. The second V winning opening 2008 is located between the game ball B and the player, and it is easy for the player to see whether or not the gaming ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B can be further enjoyed. Further, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V winning opening 2008, the player is made to think that the game ball B is drawn to the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and to enjoy the distribution in the third distribution table 2554.

  According to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B sorted by the second distribution device 2540 to the second losing mouth 2543 side is the second of the third distribution table 2554 by the clune 2553. It is designed to be supplied to the collection table 2554d on the downstream side of the V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and a game ball is provided on the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are provided. In order to reach B, a certain amount of strength by the third distribution right rotating body 2558 (third distribution left rotating body 2557), such as overcoming the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b), is used. It has a feature that requires contact. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B is supplied from the second distribution device 2540 side when the rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 is stopped for some reason, It stays at the lowest position of the right table 2554c in the third sorting table 2554 through the cluone 2553, and does not go to the central table 2554a provided with the second V winning opening 2008, The game ball B is not illegally accepted into the second V winning opening 2008.

  The center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center base 2501 and the third sorting device 2550, and is capable of radiating light to the front center decoration substrate 2591 and the guide passage. A table upper right decoration board 2592 provided above the accessory winning opening 2006 in the group 2520, and a table provided between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the first atari passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530. The right middle decoration substrate 2593 and the lower right front decoration substrate 2594 provided below the second loss passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540 are provided (see FIGS. 131 and 174, etc.).

  A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on each of the front central decoration substrate 2591, the front upper right decoration substrate 2592, the front right middle decoration substrate 2593, and the front lower right decoration substrate 2594. By causing the LEDs mounted on the front central decoration substrate 2591 to emit light, the lower side of the center base 2501 can be illuminated. When the LEd mounted on the table upper right decoration board 2592, the table right middle decoration board 2593, and the table lower right decoration board 2594 is caused to emit light, the guide passage group 2520, the first distribution device 2530, and the second distribution device 2540. Is decorated with light so that the game ball B in circulation can be easily seen from the player side.

  The table center decoration board 2591 and the table top right decoration board 2592 are connected to the effect relay board 3026, respectively, and the table right middle decoration board 2593 and the table right bottom decoration board 2594 are connected to the table right decoration board 2592. That is, the front right middle decorative board 2593 and the front lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 through the front upper right decorative board 2592.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136, FIG. 148 to FIG. FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. FIG. 149 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls circulating through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanation showing the flow of the gaming balls circulating through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. It is a figure. FIG. 150 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game balls received in the prize winning opening, and FIG. 150 (b) is an explanatory view showing a part of the third distribution device in (a) from a plan view. FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the second sorting device in FIG. In addition, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing operation timings of the accessory winning port, the first distribution device, and the second distribution device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a).

  When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left side and a lower portion of the center accessory 2500 and a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted on the left side of the center character 2500 are such that the game ball B driven into the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enters the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted to a position on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. The wind turbine W is a plurality of obstacle nails that are arranged in a row so that most of the game balls B that have entered on the right side of the center are lower toward the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center accessory 2500. N is made to enter above, and the remainder is made to flow down to shelf part 2301 of side upper left unit 2300.

  Below the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a row so as to become lower toward the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The game ball B is adjusted so that it can be received in the first starting opening 2002 with a higher probability than the game ball B.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are distributed in the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. The ball B is adjusted so as to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability, and the second guide passage is provided. The game ball B flowing through 2522 is adjusted so as to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is driven by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is struck so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 136, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role object 2500. Due to N, it is guided so as to mainly enter the portion on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability than that, it is guided to enter the portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002.

  The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is a center in the left-right direction (first starting opening) by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility of being guided to the (2002) side and being accepted by the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B circulating on the left side of the center accessory 2500 has little possibility of being accepted in the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400.

  The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002. The above is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. Then, the game ball B that has not been received in either the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is unlikely to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and in rare cases, the large winning opening 2005 is opened. May be accepted.

  In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

  On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with the strength with which the game ball B enters above the front frame upper right part 2502a (upstream space part 2506) of the center accessory 2500. , The game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 149 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide path group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the side of the attacker unit 2400 below.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is a normal opening with the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the attacker unit 2400. The player is guided to enter either the mouth 2003 or the part on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates in the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and the first guide passage in the weighted portion 2520a. After being aligned with 2521 in the front-rear direction, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is a normal winning opening 2003 or a part on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the attacker unit 2400. Of the attacker, and rarely, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning hole 2003 is on the lower right rail 1004 from the outlet part 2435 which is below the special winning hole 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. The detection of the game balls B by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 gives a privilege such as a normal lottery and a payout of a predetermined number of the game balls B.

  Further, the game ball B that has entered the left side portion of the normal winning opening 2003 further abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails N, and flows down onto the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the part on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flown down on the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421 passes down between the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting mouth left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the special winning opening guide shelf 2424. .

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003 and “normal hit” is selected as the normal lottery result, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second starting is performed. The game ball B passing between the oral guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 may be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  The game ball B that has flowed down on the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 through between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is the big winning opening 2005 from the left end of the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. Is released to the site above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and is used as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and thus the big winning. The game ball B discharged to the left from the mouth guide shelf 2424 will be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B is given. In addition, the game ball B discharged to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is received in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  In the above, the case where the player hits the ball to the right has been described, but the gaming ball B that is hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. , The first guide passage 2521 is entered, and the same result as above is obtained.

  As described above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the gaming ball B that has flowed through the second guide passage 2522 more than the first guide passage 2521. , There is a high possibility that the regular winning hole 2003 will be accepted.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. The provided prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "small hit" is drawn, the winning a prize hole 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, in order to allow the player to receive the game ball B in the winning a prize hole 2006, the winning a prize “Right hit” can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the mouth 2006.

  In the present embodiment, the “small hit” has a higher probability of being drawn than the “big hit”. Three patterns are set, and in any of the patterns, the accessory winning port 2006 is roughly divided and opened and closed twice.

  First, the opening / closing of the accessory winning hole 2006 in each “small hit” will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 151, in the “first small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the accessory winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed. After a short time (1252 ms) has passed, the open state is again set for a short time (80 ms) and then the closed state is completed. In the "second small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning hole 2006 is in an open state for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, from "first small hit". After a long time (5420 ms), the open state is maintained for a long time (9414 ms) and then the closed state is completed. In the "third small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state for a short time (80 ms) and then in a closed state from "second small hit". After a long time (19366 ms), the open state is maintained for a long time (9404 ms) and then the closed state is completed.

  The second open state of the accessory winning port 2006 in the "first small hit" is started after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the bonus prize hole 2006 in the "third small hit" is started after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution.

  In FIG. 151, in the second long open state of the “second small hit” and the “third small hit”, the open state of eight times (80 ms) is repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). .. That is, the accessory winning hole 2006 is opened and closed twice (in the first small hit) and nine times in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" (opened state).

  Next, the operation of the distribution rotator 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the “small hit” is rotated counterclockwise at the same time as the execution is started, and the housing portion 2531a is directed upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After the predetermined time (4560 ms) elapses after the first time (4560 ms) in which the accommodation section 2531a cannot be accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a to the right by rotating clockwise, the second time. After the short-time (500 ms) non-accommodable state, the third time accommodable state (the same time as the second time (13446 ms)), and then the non-accommodable state.

  The distribution-rotating body 2531 is put into an unaccommodable state when the accommodating state for the first time ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hit”. Further, the distribution rotor 2531 becomes the accommodating state for the second time after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, in the case of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotor 2531 is completed before the second accommodable state, and the second and third accommodable states are not executed. In the distribution rotor 2531, the second accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the accessory winning port 2006 in the “second small hit”, and the second opening state is the closed state. After that, it becomes unacceptable.

  Further, the distribution rotor 2531 becomes the accommodable state for the third time after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, in the case of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotor 2531 is completed before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. That is, the distribution rotor 2531 is in the accommodable state once in the “first small hit”, twice in the “second small hit”, and three times in the “third small hit”. In the distribution rotor 2531, the third accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the second opening state ends. After it is closed, it becomes unacceptable.

  Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the “small hit” project at the same time as the start of execution and projects forward to close the second loss opening 2543 for a predetermined time (3020 ms). It becomes a state where it can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then moves backward and is in an open state in which the second loser opening 2543 is opened (a state of distributing to the third distributing device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ), The second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

  The distribution door 2544 is in the open state when the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning port 2006 in the “small hit”. Further, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is started in the middle of the second opening state of the character prize winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the character prize winning opening is After the second open state of 2006 is changed to the closed state, the distribution door 2544 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is executed only when the "third small hit" is made, and when the "first small hit" or the "second small hit" is made, the distribution is performed. The second closed state of the minute door 2544 is not executed.

  Because of this, in the "first small hit", the opening and closing of the accessory winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so that the game is distributed in the first guide passage 2521 by "right hitting". It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted through the prize winning port 2006. Further, since the first opened state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" is also a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the winning prize opening 2006. Is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotator 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the “small hit” is the winning prize opening. Since it is shorter than the time of the first open state of 2006, the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 at the time of the first open state of the winning a prize winning opening 2006 is the accommodating portion of the sorting rotor 2531. 2531a is less likely to be accommodated. Since the first accommodating state of the distribution rotator 2531 and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 are the same, the distribution rotator 2531's In the first accommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side.

  On the other hand, since the second opening state of the character prize winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit” is long, the game ball B passes the first guide passage 2521 and wins the character prize. It is likely to be accepted by mouth 2006. At this time, the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in the accommodating state before the character prize opening 2006 is in the open state, and the character prize opening 2006 is in the open state to the closed state. Since it becomes an unacceptable state after it becomes, it is highly possible that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second opened state is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531. ..

  As described above, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B will be accepted through the winning a prize hole 2006 in the first open state of the winning a prize hole 2006 in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit”. In addition, in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006, the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is less likely to be housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531. Nevertheless, at the same time as the execution of the small hitting game state, the sorting rotor 2531 is rotated counterclockwise so that the accommodating portion 2531a can be accommodated with the accommodating portion 2531a facing upward, and the accommodating portion 2531a is held for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it is rotated clockwise so that the housing portion 2531a faces the right and cannot be housed. That is, immediately after the small hitting game state is started, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first atari passage 2536 side, but the distribution rotor 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first atari passage. The distribution operation to the 2536 side is executed and the distribution operation by the distribution rotator 2531 is shown in advance.

  Similarly, immediately after the small hitting game state is started, the distribution rotor 2531 is less likely to distribute the game ball B to the first atari passage 2536 side, but the second distribution is started at the same time when the small hitting game state is started. By making the distribution door 2544 of the device 2540 project forward and closing the second losing mouth 2543, the state can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (3020 ms), the second losing mouth is returned. When 2543 is opened, the state is such that it is distributed to the third distribution device 2550. That is, immediately after the small hitting game state starts, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side, but the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening. The distribution operation to the 2007 side is executed and the distribution operation by the distribution door 2544 is shown in advance.

  In this example, the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are the same as the start of execution of the small hitting game state, that is, the effect at the start of the small hitting game state (the opening effect of the small hitting game state, for example, Aiming at 2006, etc.) is performed during execution of a game in which a small hitting game state is explained, etc.), and the accessory winning port 2006 is the first time after the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are operated. Is opened. Thereby, the possibility of distribution of the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544 is low. is doing. There is no possibility of distribution of the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544, Alternatively, as long as it is as low as possible, the accessory winning port 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the operation of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

  Further, only one of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544) for distributing the game balls B that have won the prize winning hole 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. The other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, do not operate the distribution door 2544 that is likely to move the game ball B into the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example) by operating (high V winning expectation). In advance, only the distribution rotor 2531 that is less likely to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (the second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the distribution door 2544 (the V winning expectation is low) is set in advance. You may make it operate. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance some distribution destinations of the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006, other distribution destinations can be in an unknown state, and other distribution destinations are apparent. When the number of distribution destinations increases, it is possible to surprise the player and increase the expectation, and it is possible to entertain the movement by focusing on the distributed game ball B, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Also, the movable part (sorting door 2544) having a high degree of expectation of V winning is hidden in advance by not operating it, and the player is convinced that the game ball B enters the third sorting device 2550. When the "third small hit" is executed, the movable part (sorting door 2544) having a high degree of expectation of V winning operates to move the game ball B to the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by allowing the game ball B to enter a distribution destination, which is unexpected, as well as providing unexpectedness by making the game ball enter. Also, the distribution to the first V winning opening 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two, the first losing mouth 2535 side and the third distributing device 2550 side. Even if the game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side by executing a “second small hit” having a lower V winning expectation than that, the player will not be discouraged.

  Further, in this example, the distribution rotor 2531 is arranged in a manner that can be easily viewed by the player, whereas the distribution door 2544 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward from the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Is narrow, so it is hard to notice the movement even if it is working. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, in the case of the "third small hit", when the distribution door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B. It is possible to give the player a sensation as if the 15R jackpot was executed due to the sudden occurrence of the V prize without noticing that B has entered the first V prize opening 2007.

  In addition, the distribution rotator 2531 is operated in advance during the opening effect in the small hitting game state, so that the distribution rotator 2531 is added to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, “Aim for the prize hole 2006”. By the operation of, the player can easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed during the small hitting game state.

  As described above, the “small hit” is selected by lot, and when the winning a prize opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted into the winning a prize opening 2006. Then, after being detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  Among the “small hits”, in the “second small hit”, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the open state when the accessory winning port 2006 is in the second open state, so the distribution rotation is performed. When the body 2531 is rotated from the accommodable state to the unacceptable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari passage 2536 and the second distribution guide passage 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Is flowed through the second loss opening 2543 at the lower end, flows through the second loss opening passage 2546, is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517, and is then sent to the third distribution device 2550 side.

  The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is supplied to the tune 2553 through the third distribution guideway 2551, turns inside the tune 2553, and then drops to the third distribution table 2554 below. To do. The game ball B dropped from the clune 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the right table 2554c on the rear side, and then rolls toward the lowest right part of the front end on the right table 2554c to rotate. It comes into contact with the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 that is operating. After that, the game ball B hitting the projecting piece 2558a and being flipped backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556, and the inclination of the central table 2554a. Will roll forward.

  Whether the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the third sorting rotor 2556 is received in any of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. , And passes through them to enter the collection table 2554d. The game ball B that has entered the recovery table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part that entered. Then, the game ball B rolled from the recovery table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the protruding piece 2557a of the rotating third sorting left rotation body 2557, similarly to the above-described movement of the right table 2554c. From the rear end side of the left table 2554b, the center table 2554a is entered through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556.

  Thus, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third distribution medium rotating body 2556. After rolling the central table 2554a, the game table B is accepted by the recovery table 2554d to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Until the third distribution table 2554 is circulated.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 passes through the third sorting ball discharging passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and is discharged from the back lower ball of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing mouth 2555 passes through the third sorting ball discharging passage 2574, is detected by the third losing mouth sensor 2518, and is then in the lower back ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern.

  On the other hand, in the “third small hit”, since the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state when the accessory winning port 2006 is in the second opened state, the distribution rotating body 2531. When is rotated from the accommodable state to the unacceptable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first atari passage 2536. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, and then the board through the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege that the special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern is given.

  From this, in order to open and close the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and "small hit", "big hit", etc. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result must be drawn. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is an opportunity to be accepted in the first starting opening 2002, but there is no opportunity to be accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

  On the other hand, when hitting the game ball B so as to flow down on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 composed of two first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Although there is an opportunity to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 even if it passes through the passage, either of the first guidance is given by "right hitting" which is easy to drive. When the passage 2521 is circulated, there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430 which is normally sent to the outlet 1008 without being accepted by the winning opening 2003 and the like, and the game ball B is circulated in the second guide passage 2522. In order to do so, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Further, in order to receive the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004, it is necessary to allow the game ball B to be received in the normal winning hole 2003 and derive the normal lottery result of "normal win". The acceptance probability of the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to perform an operation and to show the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N to entertain the original game by the pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, and the "small hit" is selected as the first special lottery result, the character prize opening 2006 opens and closes. In order for the ball B to be accepted, the driving operation of the game ball B can be changed to “right hit”, and the game ball B can be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in which the prize winning port 2006 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the accessory winning hole 2006.

  Even if the game ball B hit on the right side of the center character 2500 is not accepted in the character prize hole 2006, the game ball B may be accepted in the downstream normal prize hole 2003, and further, the normal prize hole 2003. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the second starting opening 2004 that has been opened according to the result of the ordinary lottery that was drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to May be drawn by lot.

  When the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 is received by the accessory winning port 2006, the game ball B is sent to the first distribution device 2530. Players can be thrilled by whether or not they are accommodated.

  When the game ball B sent to the first distribution device 2530 is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second distribution device 2540, so that the second The player can be excited and excited by whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In the second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loser opening 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loser passage 2546 and is provided with the second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to have an expectation for the second V winning opening 2008 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  The game ball B distributed to the second losing mouth 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the third distribution table 2554 from the clune 2553 of the third distribution device 2550. Then, the third distribution table 2554 is hit by the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, passes through the third distribution middle rotation body 2556, and enters the central table 2554a to the front. When the player moves to, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the second V winning opening 2008 is accepted, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  Then, when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When the “big hit” is selected as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, since the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, an opportunity for many game balls B to be paid out comes. It is possible to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the open / close special winning opening 2005.

  At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the special winning opening 2005 is higher in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. By refraining from "right hitting", the driving strength can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the weighted portion Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is flowing through, so the player should have entered the second guide passage 2522 but entered the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to think that the game ball B is circulating in the guide passage group 2520. In addition, the player can get excited by whether or not the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and when the player comes out from the exit of the unexpected first guide passage 2521, the player can be surprised by adding unexpectedness, and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character]
Next, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154. 153 (a) to 153 (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that of FIG. 136, and FIGS. 154 (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that of FIG. Is. Note that, in FIGS. 153 and 154, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (a), the distance at which the inlet at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 is separated leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 is longer than that in FIG. 136. It was done. This guide passage group 2520 can also achieve the same effect as the above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (b), the angle of the stopper 1006 is such that the abutting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 can easily bounce off the abutting game ball B toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. The second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered so that the portion between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right part 2502a of the front frame is changed. It is a slanted one. As a result, since the game ball B easily enters the second guide passage 2522 side, the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B in which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 becomes wide, so It is possible to facilitate the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIGS. 136 and 153 (a) and 153 (b), the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. In contrast to the openings, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are arranged vertically. In this state, the opening is made to the left.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the front frame upper right part 2502a of the second guide passage 2522. It constitutes a part. In addition, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2506 between the front frame upper right portion 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (the peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the first from the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. The length to the inlet of each of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is smaller than that of the upstream space portion 2506 shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength is such that it comes into contact with a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right part 2502a of the front frame. , It is necessary to hit the game ball B with the driving strength to directly enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 which is open to the left, and therefore, compared to the embodiment of FIG. The adjustment range of the striking strength of the ball B becomes narrow. In addition, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 on the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 separates the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it abuts on the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2506 depending on the momentum and the angle of the bouncing game ball B to the left. That is, even if the player hits the game ball B with the strength of entering the upstream space 2506, it does not deviate to the left from the upstream space 2506 and enter either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. The center accessory 2500 may be distributed on the left side. As a result, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B is increased, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the driving medium of the player can be driven. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (d), in the embodiment of FIG. 153 (c), a branch portion 2524 communicating with the second guide passage 2522 in one-way communication is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. Is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion that is bent downward from the right end of a portion (front frame upper right portion 2502a) that extends left and right in the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength of entering the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is secondly moved at the branch portion 2524 depending on the strength of the hit (when the hit strength is weak). Since it branches to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than that in the embodiment of FIG. 153 (c).

  In order to enter the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B and the first guide passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is a portion that is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (on the side of the branch portion 2524) and does not enter the side of the first guide passage 2521 through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates with the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the first guide passage 2521 enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flows through the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 side is located at the branch portion 2524. Alternatively, since the player will branch to either side of the second guide passage 2522, the player can be throbbing and pounding depending on which side the game ball B branches into at the branch part 2524. It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Since there is a possibility of branching to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521, the player is harassed by whether or not to branch to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524. It is possible to excite the player and entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 is branched to the second guide passage 2522 side, the mistake of the driving operation of the player is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is covered. Since the game ball B is distributed, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she got it, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (e), the second guide passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 above the front frame upper right portion 2502a flow through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since it is possible to make the distribution of the game ball B stand out from the player, it is possible to make the player think that something good may happen after the game ball B flows through the bypass section 2525, and It is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (f), the inlets of the second guide passages 2522 are provided behind the first guide passages 2521, and the respective inlets are lined up in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in the upstream space 2506, and the game balls that have flowed along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is inclined so that a portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes rearward, and faces the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to reflect the game ball B that has been driven in by force toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are seen to overlap side by side in the front-rear direction, the game is driven into the upstream space 2506 above the center accessory 2500. It can be difficult to determine which path the ball B has entered, and it is possible to draw the player's attention.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. 155 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in one starting opening 2002 and a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600, and a connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, which is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. The relay panel relay board 1710, the relay panel board cover 3025 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. Performance that relays the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the right side and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. It includes a relay board 3026, and a rendering relay board cover 3027 attached to Urabako 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the presentation relay board 3026.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is opened in the front and penetrates the back wall in a square shape, and a flat plate frame-shaped that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame to the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the right side of the right side of FIG.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be vertically slidable.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface abutting on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 and the like formed at appropriate positions. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion inside the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is installed from the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010, and the front surface of the lower portion of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 from the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower back sphere discharging unit 3150 that receives the game sphere B and discharges it downward, and a first sorting device 2530 and a second sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500 that are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. It is provided with a back right ball discharge unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges it downward.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and extends along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and the back front rendering unit 3200 and the light guiding plate rendering unit 3100. Back front lower left production unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, back front lower right production unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of light guide plate production unit 3100, and back decoration on back front production unit 3200 3211 and a sub status indicator 3500 provided near the right end of the reference numeral 3211.

[5-9a. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162. FIG. 160 (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate rendering unit. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and FIG. 162 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 has a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. And a first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted, and the left side of the light guide plate 3102 is mounted on the unit base 3101. And a second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

  In addition, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes an upper substrate cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first design substrate 3103, and a unit that covers the front of the second design substrate 3104. A left substrate cover 3106 attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 separated from each other in the left-right direction.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 162 (a)) formed by an innumerable first concave and convex portion that reflects only the light from above, and the light from the left only. And a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 162 (b)) formed by an innumerable second concave / convex portion that reflects the light. That is, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3110 to emit light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 emits light, and can display the second pattern when the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 emits light. The 3120 can be made to emit light.

  The light guide plate 3102 serves as a reflection portion forming the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, and emits light in a dot shape by light emitted from the corresponding direction (dotted portion 3102a in FIG. 162). And a linear light emitting unit 3102b (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 162) that linearly emits light emitted from the corresponding direction, and a spectral light emitting unit that emits light by splitting the cocktail light emitted from the corresponding direction. 3102c (the spotted portion in FIG. 162). That is, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point light emitting portion 3102a, the linear light emitting portion 3102b, and the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. Although illustration is omitted, the dot-shaped light emitting unit 3102a, the linear light emitting unit 3102b, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c also form the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 by making the respective densities different. There is.

  Here, the cocktail light is light of a color including two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, as cocktail light, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green lights, is irradiated to the spectroscopic light emitting unit, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red or green light is emitted at the site. The part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is radiated to the spectroscopic light emitting portion as cocktail light, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and a portion that looks red, green, or blue in the part or However, light of a color in which they are appropriately mixed appears, and a rainbow-colored sparkle can be displayed. It should be noted that when the light of only one of the three primary colors of light is applied to this spectral light emitting unit, the light emits the light of that color because there is no spectral component. Due to this, the spectral light emitting unit can emit light of a single color or multiple colors depending on the color of the light to be emitted, which allows more diverse light emission effects. it can.

  In the light guide plate 3102, innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3110 and innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3120 are formed with fine irregularities, respectively. In a state in which the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not lit, the effect image or the like displayed transparently on the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side is displayed. , Can be visually recognized in good condition.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the first design 3110 is a design made up of the characters “decision battle”. In this first pattern 3110, a portion where the shadow of “decision battle” extends radially outward with the character of “decision battle” as the center and a plurality of arc-shaped portions are arranged radially outside thereof. ing. In the first pattern 3110, the part of the character of "decision battle" is formed by the point light emitting part 3102a, and the part of the character of "decision battle" is formed by the linear light emitting part 3102b in the shadow on the outside, and the outside thereof. The arc-shaped portion of is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c and the linear light emitting portion 3102b.

  The second design 3120 is a design imitating a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 162 (b). The second pattern 3120 is studded with a central pattern portion 3121 formed of a character, a radial pattern portion 3122 extending radially outward from the central pattern portion 3121, and petals flying outside the central pattern portion 3121. And a scatter pattern portion 3123 which is displayed. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by a point light emitting portion 3102a whose periphery is framed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. The radiation pattern portion 3122 is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c framed by the linear light emitting portion 3102b. The scatter pattern portion 3123 is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c.

  The radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation decoration portion 3212b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200 (which will be described later). See FIG. 172). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is displayed in a light emitting manner, the radial pattern portion 3122, the radial decoration portion 3212b, and the radial decoration portion 3213b appear to be connected to each other, so that the second pattern 3120 can be made larger and the radial decoration portion can be made larger. Since the 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b project forward, a depth feeling can be given to the second pattern 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 includes a lower cutout 3102d that is cut out upward from the lower side and a right cutout 3102e that is cut leftward from the right side. The lower cutout 3102d is for preventing contact with the third distribution table 2554 or the upper cover 2577 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right cutout 3102e is for the center accessory. This is to prevent contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted rearward in the guide passage group 2520 of 2500.

  The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction, such as a light guide plate upper left decoration substrate 3103a, a light guide plate middle decoration substrate 3103b, and a light guide plate upper right decoration substrate 3103c. A plurality of full-color LEDs that emit light downward are mounted on the lower surface of the. The first pattern substrate 3103 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the effect relay substrate 3026. To the effect relay substrate 3026, the light guide plate upper left decoration substrate 3103a, the light guide plate upper middle decoration substrate 3103b, and the light guide plate upper right decoration substrate 3103c are connected in a string in order (see FIG. 174).

  The second pattern substrate 3104 is vertically divided into two parts like a light guide plate upper left decoration substrate 3104a and a light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3104b, and a plurality of right light is irradiated to the right side of each substrate. The full-color LED of is mounted. The second pattern substrate 3104 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the effect relay substrate 3026. To the effect relay substrate 3026, the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decoration substrate 3104a are connected in a string in order (see FIG. 174).

  The two left cooling fans 3107 and the right cooling fans 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 are a third distribution middle drive motor 2560 and a third distribution left drive of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are for cooling. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and are obliquely attached to the front of the center in the left-right direction. Each of the left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 has a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a which are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 (see FIG. 174). .

  This light guide plate rendering unit 3100 has a back lower ball discharging unit 3150, a back right ball discharging unit 3170, a back front rendering unit 3200, a back front lower left rendering unit 3300, and a back front lower right rendering on the front surface of the outer periphery of the unit base 3101. A unit 3400 is attached. That is, to the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, all the rendering units in the back unit 3000 are attached. Thereby, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), by attaching all the other performance units of the back unit 3000 such as the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 to the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the light guiding plate rendering All effect units can be attached to the back box 3010 simply by attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010.

  Further, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is unitized by mounting the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern substrate 3103, the second pattern substrate 3104, etc. on the unit base 3101 having a rectangular frame shape. As a result, when assembled in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to avoid touching the light guide plate 3102 with fingerprints, stains, scratches, and the like on the light guide plate 3102, and it is possible to easily handle the light guide plate 3102.

  By the way, in the case where a light emitting decoration is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, the light due to the light emission decoration of the decoration is radiated to the front player side through the light guide plate. The light guide plate may appear to be partially shining, or a pattern that is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate may be seen. When the light guide plate shines or the pattern is seen, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body becomes difficult to see because the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body overlaps with the decorative body that is light-emitting decorated at the rear, which may reduce the effect of the light-emitting decoration. There is. In addition, if the light emitting display of the decorative body provided behind the light guide plate makes it possible to see the pattern to be displayed on the light guide plate in advance, when the pattern on the light guide plate is actually displayed by light emission, the player can see the pattern. The impact given may be reduced, and the effect of the light guide plate may not be sufficiently obtained. Also, when a decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when the pattern is displayed on the light guide plate by light emission, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern, and therefore, depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, There was a risk that the light-guide plate design that had been illuminated would be difficult to see.

  On the other hand, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010 when assembled to the game board 5, and is more than the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). There is no decoration on the rear side. That is, since the back front rendering unit 3200, the back front lower left rendering unit 3300, and the back front lower right rendering unit 3400 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back top decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and Even when the back right decoration 3213 and the like are light-emitted, the light can be hard to reach the light guide plate 3102.

  Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) looks shining even when the decorations such as the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are illuminated. Since it is possible to suppress the above, the luminous decoration of the decorative body does not become difficult to see, and the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be shown in a good state, and the effect of the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be sufficiently exerted. be able to.

  Further, even when the decorations such as the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are light-emitted, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) looks shining. Since this can be suppressed, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen by the player before the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed in a light emitting manner. It is possible to avoid a reduction in the impact on the player when the two patterns 3120 are light-emissively displayed, and it is possible to sufficiently exert the effect of the light emission display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. it can.

  Further, since no ornament such as the back decoration 3211 is provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 by light emission, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 is displayed. The decorative body does not appear to overlap on the rear side of the two patterns 3120, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission. The effect can be fully exerted.

  In addition, as described above, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like cannot be seen overlapping the rear side of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, the first pattern irrespective of the shape and color of the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213. The 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition. Therefore, the shapes and colors of the decorations such as the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are considered in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. It is not necessary to increase the degree of freedom in designing the ornament, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 including the ornament having a higher decorative effect.

  Furthermore, since the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is provided on the rearmost side in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close to the rendering display device 1600 as possible, Since the direction of light is substantially perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 does not appear to be partially illuminated, or the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 does not appear to be illuminated. Instead, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, depending on the effect image (including the screen color) to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 that is light-emitted and displayed. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be made to stand out or be enhanced, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. Further, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are made to illusion of an effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the effect effect of the effect display device 1600. The image can be made to be an illusion of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and a player can be presented with a variety of effects.

  The effect display device 1600 may be attached to the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. Accordingly, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered with the effect display device 1600, which makes it more difficult to touch the light guide plate 3102. The same effect can be achieved.

[5-9b. Back lower ball discharge unit]
Next, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The lower back sphere discharging unit 3150 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101. The lower back sphere discharge unit 3150 receives the game sphere B received in the first starting mouth 2002 of the starting mouth unit 2100 and the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below. Is. The lower back sphere discharge unit 3150 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 for individually detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. It has a first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the received game ball B.

  In addition, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B which is received by the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555 and discharged downward in the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. , To the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Further, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 has an out ball detection for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It has a mounting portion 3155 to which the unit 3030 can be mounted. By mounting the out ball detection unit 3030 to the mounting portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9c. Back right ball discharge unit]
Next, the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The back right sphere discharging unit 3170 is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. This back right sphere discharging unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first losing mouth 2535 of the first distributing device 2530 and the first V winning opening 2007 of the second distributing device 2540 in the center accessory 2500. For discharging to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9d. Front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, 163, and the like. FIG. 163 is a front view showing the arrangement of the decorative boards of the back front effect unit in the back unit. The front front rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100.

  The front-rear production unit 3200 is formed in a U shape whose front view is open downward, and is attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate production unit 3100, and the front side of the upper side of the ornament base 3201. On the back side decorative body 3211 that is attached and extends to the left and right, the back left side decorative body 3212 that is attached to the front side of the left side of the ornament body base 3201 and that extends vertically, and on the front side of the right side of the ornament body base 3201. And a back right decoration 3213 which is attached and extends vertically.

  Further, the back front rendering unit 3200 is provided between the back decoration 3211 and the decoration base 3201, and is provided with a back decoration substrate 3221 for illuminating the back decoration 3211 and a back left decoration 3212. And a decoration base 3201 and a back left decoration substrate 3222 for illuminating the back left decoration 3212 and a back right decoration 3213 and a decoration base 3201. And a back right decoration substrate 3223 for illuminating the right decoration 3213.

  Further, the back front production unit 3200 suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and at the same time, those A sub status indicator 3500 for displaying the number of reservations is provided. The sub status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back decoration 3211.

  The upper back decorative body 3211 has translucency as a whole. The back decoration 3211 includes a logo portion 3211a in which three circles are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a bead shape along the outer circumference of the logo portion 3211a. Have The logo portion 3211a is formed with a predetermined logo character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 as a relief. The front surface of the back upper decorative body 3211 is inclined so as to project forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b constitutes the sub status display portion 3501 of the sub status indicator 3500.

  The back left decoration 3212 has translucency as a whole. The front surface of the back left decoration 3212 is inclined so as to project forward as it goes to the left. The back left decorative body 3212 has a main decoration portion 3212a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by igniting a flame over the entire surface, and extends radially around the right outside so as to cross the main decoration portion 3212a. The radiant decoration portion 3212b is included. The main decorative portion 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) portion, a red portion, and a yellow portion are mixed. The radiation decoration portion 3212b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decorative portion 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is displayed in the light guide plate 3102 for light emission.

  The back right decoration 3213 has translucency as a whole. The back right decorative body 3213 is slightly inclined with respect to the front-rear direction surface so that the front surface is oriented substantially leftward and the front side is located slightly to the right rather than the rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 has a main decoration portion 3213a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by igniting a flame over the entire surface, and extends radially around the left outer side so as to cross the main decoration portion 3213a. The radiation decoration portion 3213b is included. The main decorative portion 3213a is formed in red. The radiation decoration part 3213b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decoration portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102.

  The backside decoration substrate 3221 is a flat plate shape having a substantially constant top and bottom and extends to the left and right, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the backside decoration body 3211. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The back decoration substrate 3221 has a white surface. The upper back decorative substrate 3221 is connected to the effect relay substrate 3026 via the rear left decorative substrate 3222.

  The back left decoration substrate 3222 is a flat plate extending vertically and is attached with the substrate surface facing forward and backward, and the surface thereof is formed in white. The rear left decorative substrate 3222 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative portion 3212a of the rear left decorative body 3212 and a plurality of rear LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative body 3212 of the radiation decorative portion 3212b. 2nd LED3222b of this. The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back left decoration board 3222 is connected to the effect relay board 3026. This back left decoration substrate 3222 can cause the main decoration portion 3212a of the back left decoration 3212 to emit light when the first LED 3222a emits light, and the emission decoration of the back left decoration 3212 can emit when the second LED 3222b emits light. The portion 3212b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3212b at the site of each radiation decoration portion 3212b.

  The back right decoration board 3223 is a flat plate extending vertically, is attached with the board surface facing left and right, and has a white surface. The back right decoration substrate 3223 is mounted on the right side of the main decoration portion 3213a of the back right decoration body 3213 and on the right side of the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213. Two LEDs 3223b. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back right decoration board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back top decoration board 3221 and the back left decoration board 3222. This back right decoration substrate 3223 can make the main decoration part 3213a of the back right decoration 3213 emit light by making the first LED 3223a emit light, and can make the second LED 3223b emit light to make the emission decoration of the back right decoration 3213. The portion 3213b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction or front-back direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3213b at the site of each radiation decoration portion 3213b (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  The back right decoration board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing the right side and has a plurality of third LEDs 3223c capable of illuminating the right side portion of the center accessory 2500. The third LED 3223c is a full-color LED. By making the third LED 3223c emit light, it is possible to brightly illuminate the accessory winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, and the like in the center accessory 2500.

  Further, on the back right decoration board 3223, a plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 for displaying sub-symbols and the like on the sub-state display 3500 are mounted on the board surface facing the left side in the upper part. The sub-state LED 3510 is a side-view type LED that emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the mounted substrate. The light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by the light guide pins 3520 to the sub-state display portion 3501 at the right end of the logo decoration portion 3211b of the back decoration 3211 and emitted forward. The sub-state LED 3510 is one first sub-pattern LED 3511 made of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result, and one second sub-pattern LED 3512 made of a full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. And two first sub-holding number LEDs 3513 consisting of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of first special lottery results held, and two second single-color LEDs for displaying the number of second special lottery results held And a sub-holding number LED 3514.

  This front-front effect unit 3200 is installed in the game board 5, and is provided at the rear through a space surrounded by the back-side decoration body 3211, the back-left decoration body 3212, and the back-right decoration body 3213. To visually recognize the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 displayed on the light guide plate 3102 in the light plate rendering unit 3100, the rendering image displayed on the rendering display device 1600, and the like from the front (player side) in a good state. You can Further, by the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, it is possible to decorate around the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the effect image, and look good in the game area 5a. Can be better.

  Further, according to the back front rendering unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back decoration board 3221, the back left decoration board 3222, and the back right decoration board 3223 are appropriately made to emit light, so that the back decoration body 3211, the back left The decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 can be decorated with light emission, and the light emitting effect using them can be shown to the player.

  Further, according to the back front rendering unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the back left decoration substrate 3222 and the second of the back right decoration substrate 3223 are matched with the light emission display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. The LED 3223b is caused to emit light so that the radiation decoration portion 3212b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213 are light-emitted and decorated. The decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b can be made to appear to be continuous.

  In addition, since the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are inclined so that the front end side projects forward as going from the center side of the game area 5a to the outside in the left-right direction, The radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b that are continuous with the radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 can give a sense of depth to the second pattern 3120.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy a wide and large light emission decoration (light emission effect) that spreads left and right by the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200. Since it can be shown as, it can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, and I think there is something good for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back left decoration 3212 of the back front effect unit 3200 is located behind the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, the first LED 3222a of the back left decoration substrate 3222 and the back LED 3222a. When the two LEDs 3222b are made to emit light, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be made to emit light by the light, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see from the player side (front side). You can

[5-9e. Front lower left production unit]
Subsequently, the back-front lower left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, FIG. 163, and the like. The lower front left lower production unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 and above the left cooling fan 3107.

  The back front lower left effect unit 3300 guides the translucent back lower left decoration body 3301 and the back lower left decoration body 3301 which are formed so that the letters of “decision” have a relief shape and project obliquely upward. It is provided between the decorative body base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light board rendering unit 3100 and the decorative body base 3302 and the lower back left decorative body 3301. Lower left upper decorative substrate 3303 for illuminating the above portion and the lower lower left decorative substrate 3304 attached to the lower surface of the decorative body base 3302 for illuminating the outer periphery of the lower lower left decorative body 3301 (Fig. 174)).

  The lower back left upper decorative substrate 3303 and the lower back left lower decorative substrate 3304 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of each of the lower back upper left decoration substrate 3303 and the lower lower left decoration substrate 3304. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper left decoration board 3303 and the lower lower left decoration board 3304, the portion of the character "decision" of the lower back left decorative body 3301 is illuminated and decorated. The outer periphery of the part of the character "" can be decorated with light emission, or the entire lower back left decoration 3301 can be decorated with light emission.

[5-9f. Front right lower production unit]
Next, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, 163, and the like. The lower front right lower performance unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 and above the right cooling fan 3108.

  The back front lower right production unit 3400 includes a translucent back lower right decoration body 3401 and a back lower right decoration body 3401 which are formed so that the letters “battle” are projected in an obliquely upward shape. It is provided between the decorative body base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 and the decorative body base 3402 and the lower back right decorative body 3401. A lower back upper right decorative substrate 3403 for illuminating a character portion and a lower lower right decorative substrate 3404 attached to the lower surface of the ornament base 3402 for illuminating the outer periphery of the lower lower right ornament 3401. (See FIG. 174).

  The back lower right upper decorative substrate 3403 and the back lower right lower decorative substrate 3404 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the respective upper surfaces of the lower back lower right decoration board 3403 and the lower lower right decoration board 3404. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper right decoration board 3403 and the lower lower right decoration board 3404, the portion of the character "war" of the lower back right decoration 3401 can be illuminated and decorated. The outer circumference of the part of the character "war" can be decorated with light, or the entire lower back right decoration 3401 can be decorated with light.

[5-9 g. Sub status display]
Next, the sub status indicator 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165 and the like. FIG. 164 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a left side cross-section of the relationship between the back right decoration board of the back front effect unit, the sub status display, and the right side portion of the center accessory in the back unit, and FIG. a) It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decoration board | substrate of the back front production | generation unit in a back unit, a sub status display, and the site | part on the right side of a center accessory from the front. FIG. 165 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring of some LEDs of the sub-state LEDs on the back right decoration substrate.

  The sub-state indicator 3500 is selected by the production display device 1600 by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, separately from the production image for suggesting the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The first special lottery result, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 are displayed to suggest, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The number of reservations is displayed.

  The sub state indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back decorative body 3211 in the back front effect unit 3200 so as to be always visible from the front (player side). The sub status display unit 3500 includes a sub status display unit 3501 forming a part of a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres of the back decoration body 3211 in the back front rendering unit 3200 are arranged in a beaded shape, and a back front rendering. A plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the back right decoration board 3223 of the unit 3200 and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 for guiding light from the sub-state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-state display portion 3501. And are equipped with.

  The sub state display portion 3501 extends vertically in an arc shape along the outer circumference of the logo portion 3211a in the upper decorative body 3211. Further, the sub state display portion 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

  The plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are side-view type LEDs that are vertically arranged on the back right decoration board 3223 and emit light in a direction parallel to the surface of the board on which they are mounted (front side here). Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decoration board 3223, they are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decoration board 3221 and the back left decoration board 3222, and are connected to the effect relay board 3026. Light emission is controlled by the connected peripheral control board 1510.

  The sub-state LED 3510 is one first sub-pattern LED 3511 made of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result, and one second sub-pattern LED 3512 made of a full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. And two first sub-holding numbers LED 3513 made up of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of first special lottery results held, and a single-color LED (for example, a red LED) for displaying the number of second special lottery results held It is composed of two second sub-reserved number LEDs 3514.

  The light guide pin 3520 has a rear end located on the front surface of the sub status LED 3510, and a front end penetrating one sphere in the sub status display portion 3501 and located near the front end of the sphere.

  The sub status indicator 3500 is configured to display the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, luminescent color, etc.) of the sub status LED 3510 as a sub symbol. Specifically, when suggesting the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are made to blink in red for a predetermined change time. In the present embodiment, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every 2F (2/30 sec).

  Then, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn is “miss”, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are turned on in red as the “miss” symbol. On the other hand, when the selected first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win”, as the “win” symbol, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in green.

  In addition, the display of the number of holdings of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that has been drawn by the sub-state display 3500 is displayed by the two first sub-holding number LEDs 3513 and the second sub-holding number that are respectively arranged vertically. The number of holdings is displayed by the combination of the lighting states of the LEDs 3514. Specifically, when the number of holdings is "0", the upper and lower two are turned off, when the number of holdings is "1", the upper part is turned on and the lower part is turned off, and when the number of holdings is "2". The upper and lower two are lit, the upper one is blinked and the lower one is lit when the holding number is "3", and the upper and lower two are blinking when the holding number is "4". In this way, the number of holdings is displayed by the combination of the lighting states of the two LEDs in each of the first sub-holding number LED 3513 and the second sub-holding number LED 3514.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are emitted in red or green as the sub-symbol. It does not emit blue light. Therefore, in the back right decoration substrate 3223, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and the cathode of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited (short-circuited). Thereby, even if some malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-pattern is not displayed in blue, which normally does not emit light, and it is possible to avoid giving the player a feeling of distrust, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. it can. Moreover, since the anode and the cathode of the unused blue light emitting element are connected and short-circuited, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being accumulated in the light emitting element, and the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and second It is possible to prevent the sub-symbol LED 3512 from being damaged and surely display the sub-symbol.

  As described above, according to the sub status indicator 3500 of the present embodiment, a sub symbol indicating the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by the sub status indicator 3500 is displayed. Therefore, even if you miss the display of the main symbol by the effect image on the effect display device 1600, or if you do not understand the special lottery result suggestion by the main symbol, you can see the sub-symbol to select the special lottery. The result of the lottery can be recognized by the player.

  Further, in the sub status indicator 3500, since the sub status display section 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration section 3211b in the back decoration 3211, the sub status LED 3510 is caused to emit light to display a sub design or the like. Then, it seems that the logo decoration portion 3211b is decorated with light emission, but the game ball is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. When is selected by lottery, the light emission mode of the portion of the sub state display portion 3501 in the logo decoration portion 3211b changes. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the light emission mode is changed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn, and it is possible to recognize the sub symbol. At this time, since the sub-state display portion 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b is used to decorate the sub-design suggesting the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is conventionally selected. The sub-pattern does not seem to be inorganic like the technique of (1), the sub-pattern can be blended into the decoration, and the appearance of the sub-state display 3500 and thus the game area 5a can be improved.

  Further, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the back right decoration board 3223 is guided to the sub-state display portion 3501 provided at a position apart from the back right decoration board 3223 by the light guide pin 3520. Because of this, it is possible to guide the light to the front end of the sub state display portion 3501 in a good state and display the sub symbol or the like. Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the logo decoration portion 3211b provided along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a of the back decorative body 3211 can be formed. The light can be guided to the position of the sub-state display portion 3501 that constitutes a part of the sub-state display portion 3501, and the sub-pattern can be blended into the decoration of the back decorative body 3211 to improve the appearance.

  Further, on the back right decoration substrate 3223 on which the sub-state LED 3510 for displaying sub-patterns and the like is mounted, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b for illuminating the back right decoration 3213 and the center accessory 2500. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the first distribution device 2530 and the like is further mounted, the back right decoration body 3213 is illuminated and decorated, or the first distribution device 2530 is lit and the game ball is in circulation. It is possible to make B easily visible.

  In the above embodiment, the sub-pattern for suggesting the special lottery result is shown by the red light and the green light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the red light is not limited to this. The blue and blue light may be used to display the sub design, or the green and blue lights may be used to display the sub design. Further, the sub symbol may be displayed by only one of red light, green light, and blue light. At this time, by connecting the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting element of a color not used (not emitting light) in the full-color LED to short-circuit (short-circuit), the same effect as the above can be obtained. It is desirable that the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting element of the color not used are connected to each other to be short-circuited (short-circuited) and then connected to GND (ground), and static electricity can be released to GND to escape.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the sub-status indicator 3500, as shown in FIG. 165, among the three light emitting elements of the full-color LED, the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element which is not used are connected and short-circuited. Although the example of use is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body is illuminated and illuminated, a predetermined portion is illuminated, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are luminescently displayed. It may be applied to a full-color LED like this. Specifically, for example, when a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color, or a decorative body that has a portion that does not transmit light of a specific color, is configured to emit light with a full-color LED, and Since it is not necessary to emit light, the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of the color are connected and short-circuited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting decoration of the ornamental body from appearing unnatural by emitting light in a color that does not need to be emitted due to a malfunction or the like, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above. .

  More specifically, for example, the back decoration member 3211, the back left decoration member 3212, and the back right decoration member 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are formed in red (main decoration portion 3212a and main decoration portion 3213a). ), When only red and green light is allowed to pass therethrough, when the full-color LED (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the part emits blue light, the part is blue. The area is not illuminated because it does not pass through, but the area adjacent to the area with a different color will be illuminated by the blue light, and the intended effect due to the unintended illumination decoration will be obtained. There is a risk that it will not be able to exert its full potential. On the other hand, by connecting the anode and the cathode of the blue light-emitting element to short-circuit the full-color LED provided corresponding to the portion that does not transmit blue light, the full-color LED It is possible to prevent unintended light-emission decoration from being performed on a part adjacent to the part due to a malfunction, and it is possible to prevent unnatural light-emission production from being performed, A staging effect can be exerted, and the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back right decoration substrate 3223. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a substrate different from the back right decoration substrate 3223 (for example, The sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the (status display substrate), or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the back decorative board 3221.

[5-9h. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the lower-back sphere discharging unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170 and the like. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the out-ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit, and (d). ) Is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the rear, and (f) is a view of the out-ball detection unit and the right front lower position. FIG. 4G is a perspective view of the out-ball detecting unit as viewed from the lower right rear side. FIG. 167 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 167 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  Further, FIG. 168 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and FIG. 168 (b) is a perspective view showing the out-ball detecting unit in contact with the game panel. FIG. 169 is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side after being cut up and down at the center of the out-out right sensor after being assembled on the game board. FIG. 170 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the outlet from the front in a state of being assembled on the game board.

  In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so that it can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the lower back ball discharge unit 3150. When the game board 5 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 is driven into the game area 5a, and has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening 2006. This is for detecting a game ball B that has not been accepted (a game ball B to which a privilege has not been granted, also referred to as an "out ball"). In this embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is detected.

  The out-ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the rear into the out-recess 1101 in the game panel 1100, and is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. 3032 and an out-out right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033.

  The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and has a cylindrical tubular portion 3031a extending cylindrically in the front-rear direction, and a partition portion 3031b dividing the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into left and right. A flange portion 3031c protruding in the left-right direction from the rear end of the cylinder portion 3031a in a flat plate shape, and a recessed portion from the rear end side of the cylinder portion toward the front are inserted with the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. Insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end that is substantially the same size as the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000, is long in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the lower inner surface becomes lower toward the rear side.

  The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on the left and right sides. The partition portion 3031b is curved so that the front end side thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion concave portion 3031d is inclined so that the front surface side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a and moves backward as it goes upward.

  The out-out left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B flowing through the left side of the partition section 3031b in the tubular section 3031a of the unit body 3031. The out-out right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B flowing through the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Out-out left sensor 3032 and out-out right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

  The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed through the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a at the center in the left-right direction.

  In this out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front surface of the lower-back sphere discharging unit 3150 (see FIG. 169). Also, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the gaming panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is the gaming panel 1100. Abuts the rear surface (see FIGS. 168 and 169).

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, and the upper front end of the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (FIG. 169). See). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 169).

  This out ball detection unit 3030, in the game area 5a, after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000, the game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003, It is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031a, detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without contacting the board holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and Since it is possible to detect the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been received in any of the prize winning ports 2006, for example, the acceptance of the game ball B into a specific winning port is continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected despite the presence, it means that a fraudulent act is being performed on a specific winning opening, and it is possible to notify that the fraudulent act is being performed.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory The ratio of “safe balls” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B received in the winning opening 2006.

  Further, in the out-ball detection unit 3030, the space between the left and right out-mouth sensors 3032 and 3033 provided on the left and right is partitioned by the partition part 3031b, so that the gaming ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the out-out left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role object 2500 can be guided to the out-out right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B flowing down on the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B flowing down on the right side of the center role object 2500 can be mainly detected by the out-out right sensor 3033. Therefore, it is determined whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the out-mouth right sensor 3033. Based on the determination, the driving operation most suitable for the game situation can be promoted and the intended game can be enjoyed.

  Further, since the projection of the partition portion 3031b to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, when a lot of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per hour, the game ball of the partition portion 3031b is relatively large. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 1008 without any delay.

  Further, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is projected downward from the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening. The game ball B (“safe ball”) received in 2005 and the accessory winning hole 2006 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detecting unit 3030, and the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor are detected. It can be prevented from being detected by 3033, and only the “out ball” can be accurately detected.

  In this embodiment, the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this. The out-ball detecting unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) that have been driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, only the “out ball” is detected by the out ball detection unit 3030, so the numbers of the “out ball”, “safe ball”, and “all ball” are compared. Therefore, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172. FIG. 171 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. The game board 5 produces the light guide plate of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The unit 3100, the back front production unit 3200, the back front lower left production unit 3300, and the back front lower right production unit 3400 perform a predetermined light emission production.

  Specifically, as the light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 171, mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 in front view. The plurality of LEDs that are provided are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, the characters "decision battle" are illuminated and decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and behind the back-front effect unit 3200, thereby instructing the player that an opportunity has arrived. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by making it think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 172, a plurality of LEDs mounted on a second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 in front view are emitted. Then, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the player can be surprised and a strong impact on the player. It is possible to give an impression that an advantageous game state such as a “big hit game” occurs, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the game.

  When the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 of the back front production unit 3200 are light-emitted when the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed by light emission, the radiation pattern portion of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. 3122 and the radiating decoration part 3212b and the radiating decoration part 3213b of the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 appear to be continuous, and they form one pattern (special pattern) together. Therefore, a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Since the decoration of 3213 is located on the front side of the second pattern 3120, a feeling of depth can be given to the special pattern, and the special pattern can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in the special pattern, entertain the player, and It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can also be combined with an image (display effect). With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the player. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174 and the like. FIG. 173 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection configuration of each board, a motor, and the like in the game board. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error display, and a partition on the game board 5 A base for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. Includes a Sumonita 1310h, the. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the content of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the content of the register changes inconsistently, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly determined to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit that resets. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism in which it cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main power supply side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM will always occur as described later, and the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware") that updates the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state, from among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. Random number circuit "). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as the value (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values in 1 have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning a prize sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, a normal winning hole sensor 2401 which detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2003, and a large winning hole 2005 The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B, the winning prize sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning prize hole 2006, and the gaming ball B accepted in the first V winning hole 2007 First V winning mouth sensor 2514 for detecting, first losing mouth sensor 2516 for detecting gaming ball B received in first losing mouth 2535, second V winning The second V winning hole sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2008, the third loss mouth sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B received in the third losing mouth 2555, and the game discharged from the game board 5. The out sensor 664 (or the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033) that detects the ball B, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration that acts on the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the vibration sensor 3003 and the like are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, the respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, a payout control input circuit and a payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When it is input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention), it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control board 1310. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are the panel relay board 1710. Via the main control board 1310 and indirectly via the main control input circuit to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs the start opening solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , The prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545, the respective drive signals are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the predetermined signals thereof are output. From the output terminal of the output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal reserved display, the first special symbol display, the first special reserved number display, the second special symbol display, the second special The respective drive signals are output to the hold number display and the round display directly, that is, without passing through another board. Or, to. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or a game ball B from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that allows the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal that allows the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the firing permission signal that informs that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is obtained by inverting the firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to. The logic of the launch permission signal is, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power restoration), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to this point, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic is set.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the second A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one-way mouth sensor 2516, the second V winning mouth sensor 2515, the third losing mouth sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning mouth sensor 3001. For this, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the normal winning opening 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the normal winning opening. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning opening sensor 2401 use proximity switches with high durability and long life.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered, so the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is provided. B is also frequently detected. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. Further, since a large amount of the game balls B shot in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out sensor 664 is frequent. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. It should be noted that a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral controller 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a ball feed control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. The game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the upper plate 201) and a ball removing switch for starting the ball removing operation. , Are provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout are also input. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error canceling signal from the error canceling switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the payout device 580 is informed that there is no game ball B), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, "Count It is an "itch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full tank" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154) and the number "7" is displayed. At some time, it informs that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is cut off at any portion from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "Suspend" is displayed. Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial system, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle 195, and whether or not to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B according to the player's intention. The detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that notifies the launch of the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit establishes firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and determines the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal. If the firing condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and cannot fire the game ball B.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the accepted game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with the firing control section 633b for performing the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not exist.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, has a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs a high-quality sound, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control ICs are controlled based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 to the serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decoration drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 or for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 36 , And door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, etc., and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. A screen for transmitting door-side drive emission data composed of the door-side emission data for outputting to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port or displaying on the effect display device 1600. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) shown to the display control unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is generated as the sound source. It outputs to IC.

  The detection signal from the second missing mouth sensor 2517 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the bump output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit The operation of 1512 is being monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control circuit board box in which the peripheral control circuit board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, a sound signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information is output to the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By transmitting a 2.1 ch surround signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are different from the display command in a plurality of serial input / output. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in the present embodiment.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviated to Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral controller 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

  The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, houses, mountains, roads, and the like that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

  It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning for sequentially setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136, FIG. 148 to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

  When the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view (the left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame) from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. While contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the windmill W and is above or below the plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Supplied to either side.

  The game ball B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 is the left-right center of the game area 5a along the row of the obstacle nails N. When the central portion is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, the central portion is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus is highly likely to reach the first starting port 2002. Accepted. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game balls B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. There is a possibility that the special winning opening 2005 in the open state may be accepted.

  By the way, the game balls B supplied to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are due to the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nails N. There is a possibility that it will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 is on the right side (upstream of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame) with respect to the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. When entering the space portion 2506), it is discharged above the normal winning hole 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted above the normal winning opening 2003, the winning is accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522 that opens. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of abutting against the stopper 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2506, and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than a right hit), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the strength of the drive.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured that the second guide passage 2522 that is circulated than the first guide passage 2521 can be accepted into the normal winning port 2003 with a higher probability.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003 and detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games are paid out from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is dispensed to the upper plate 201 and the ordinary lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the ordinary lottery result of the lottery is “ordinary winning”, the second start opening closed in the attacker unit 2400. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by accepting the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from starting the ordinary lottery to suggesting the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  In addition, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003 between the time the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003 and the result of the normal drawing is suggested, the suggestion of the normal drawing result may be started. Since it is not possible, the start of suggesting the result of the ordinary lottery is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning hole 2003 is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 without any chance of being accepted by the second starting hole 2004 or the special winning hole 2005, It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and then through the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , Passes in front of the closed special winning opening 2005 and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

  Then, when the game ball B passes between the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting mouth left standing wall portion 2422, the ordinary lottery result selected by the acceptance of the game ball B at the normal winning port 2003 is " In the case of “normal hit”, when the second starting opening door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B is guided by the second starting opening door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game ball B which is not guided by the second starting opening door 2411 falls on the special winning opening guide shelf 2424, and passes from the left end of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 to the front of the closed special winning opening door 2413 to the right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that was guided to the second starting opening 2004 side by the second starting opening door 2411 but was not accepted by the second starting opening 2004 due to the second starting opening door 2411 retracting in the middle, It enters into the attacker right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 under the starting opening 2004, is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed special winning opening door 2413, and is discharged from the out opening 1008. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting mouth upper guide shelf 2421, the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is opened. The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered this attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a regardless of the special winning opening 2005.

  From the above, the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 is rarely received in the normal winning port 2003, and therefore the second starting port 2004 is accepted by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning port 2003. The ordinary lottery result in which is open is rarely derived, and the game ball B is not received so much in the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 with a higher probability than that of the first guide passage 2521. Therefore, when the game ball B passes through the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004 There is a high possibility that a normal lottery result (“normal win”) in which the game ball is opened will be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

  As a result, the player will perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, and thus the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. I won't. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the driving operation of the game ball B to prevent the player from getting bored, and to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the main control board 1310 causes the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”). , "Small win", "Time reduction (time reduction) win"). Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). In addition, in the special lottery results that are drawn by the game balls B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, "miss", "first small hit", "second small hit", " There are "3rd small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", etc. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result is more likely than the first special lottery result to have a lottery probability of “small win” (“first small win”, “second small win”, “third small win”) Is set high.

  When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is "small win", "small win" The prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern (see FIG. 151). Since the prize winning hole 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center prize 2500, when the "small hit" is drawn, "right hit" is performed to make the first guide passage. The game ball B is hit at 2521.

  When the “small hit” is the “first small hit”, the opening / closing time of the accessory winning hole 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be accepted. In the case of “second small hit” or “third small hit”, the game prize winning opening 2006 is open for a long time, and the game ball B is accepted into the prize winning opening 2006 by “right-handed”. Probability is high. When the game balls B are received in the accessory winning hole 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  When the "small hit" is "second small hit" or "third small hit" and the game ball B is accepted into the prize winning slot 2006, one of the accepted game balls B is firstly distributed. It is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 in the device 2530. Then, when the “small hit” is the “second small hit”, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 passes through the second distribution device 2540 and the third distribution device 2550. It is supplied to the third sorting table 2554 through the clune 2553. The game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 is flipped by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. The central table 2554a rolls in a circulating manner to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and either of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided in the central table 2554a. Be distributed. When the game ball B is received (distributed) to the second V winning opening 2008, "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third losing mouth 2555, "15R big hit" or the like is not executed and the state returns to the previous state.

  On the other hand, when the “small hit” is the “third small hit”, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 is directed to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. It is distributed and "15R jackpot" is executed.

  The first special lottery result and the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 (2) If the special lottery result is "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot", a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the special winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is set to a closed state in which the game balls B cannot be received) A "big hit" game is executed in which the "one round" is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, 2 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Since this special winning opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role object 2500, the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role object 2500. You can When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 while the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633 cause a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 pieces) from the payout device 580. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to perform the driving operation than the second guide passage 2522 side, while the second guide passage 2522 is used. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to allow the player to select which passage is targeted for the driving operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with various games. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the "15R big hit" or "2R big hit" occurs during the time saving state, after the "big hit" game is finished, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is made shorter than usual until the predetermined variation number (for example, 100 times) is reached, and then To shorten the time until the "win" is drawn.

  Further, in the “big hit” game aiming at the special winning opening 2005, since the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 are present on the way until the game ball B reaches the big winning opening 2005, the big winning opening 2005 is aimed at. It is highly possible that the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004, and when the next “big hit” or “small hit” is drawn during the “big hit” game, the advantageous game state advantageous for the player is obtained. It will last a long time and can make the player more entertaining.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three or more picture rows each including a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and each picture row is changed to display the variably displayed picture row. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective three rows of the stopped and displayed picture rows are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture columns stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player operation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the front effect unit 3200 and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the contact operation section 302 or the push operation section 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Main effects of game board]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the periphery is the first in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When it is accepted into the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, a predetermined privilege (with the payout of the predetermined number of game balls B, Since a normal lottery on whether to open or close the second starting opening 2004) is given, the player is allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role object 2500 having the normal winning opening 2003. A game can be played.

  Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction in the weighted portion 2520a in the middle lined up in the left-right direction, On the inlet side of the upper part, the respective first guide passages 2521 and the second guide passages 2522 are lined up in the left-right direction, so that the respective first guide passages 2521 and the second guide passages 2522 can be clearly discriminated. It is possible to make the hitting easy by the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

  On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since it is twisted so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction in the weighted portion 2520a, the player with respect to the game ball B flowing through the portion. It is difficult to determine which of the guide passages is in circulation from, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. it can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 allow the game ball B being guided (distributed) to be visually recognized from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of transparent members. Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other in the portion of the weighted portion 2520a arranged in front and rear, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at first glance. Can be one. Furthermore, on the outlet side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction. Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly discriminated, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the inlet side are aligned because they are twisted twice on the upstream side. The relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the outlet side is difficult to determine and can be made unclear.

  Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is difficult to know where the game ball B comes out from when it is hit (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the guide passage It can be difficult to recognize what the game result will be after passing through the group 2520. Of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, which guide passage is hit with the game ball B is a normal prize. Since it is difficult to know whether the game ball B is likely to be accepted in the mouth 2003, when the game ball B is hit, it is possible to make the player aware of which guide passage the game ball B is circulating, and distribute the player. It is possible to draw attention to the playing game ball B.

  In addition, when the player pays attention to the game ball B flowing through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (the second guide) that is likely to be accepted in the normal winning hole 2003 It is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521). ), The player can be surprised by adding unexpectedness to the game, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in order to enter the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is highly likely to be received in the normal winning hole 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. With respect to the game ball B, the driving strength can be adjusted and the game ball B can be driven. Therefore, it is possible to add a degree of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored due to a change in the driving operation of the game ball B, and the game ball to the player. The driving operation of B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have the portion of the weighted portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction can be set at that portion. Since the space can be made as narrow as possible, it is possible to easily secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning port 2006, the first sorting device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. It is possible to arrange a game device and a performance device, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 in which the game area B for hitting the game ball B is provided on the front side has a frame-like shape that divides the game area 5a. As the center accessory 2500 is attached, and at the lower side of the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500, a third sorting device 2550 having a front end protruding forward from the game panel 1100 is provided. The distribution device 2550 can be made conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 can be strongly interested, resulting in a game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, since the third distribution device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that divides the inside of the game region 5a, the third distribution device 2550 is in the game region 5a. It is possible to enjoy both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 without interfering with the game ball B in circulation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c provided on the outer sides of the center table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is the right table. When it is supplied to the 2554c via the recovery table 2554d, it rolls to the lower front side of the right table 2554c, and then to the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 provided on the front side of the right table 2554c. It will be hit and move to the rear side. At this time, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the timing when the game ball B reaches the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution right The strength and situation in which the projecting piece 2558a of the rotating body 2558 strikes the game ball B varies. Therefore, when the hit by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is strong to some extent, the gaming ball B climbs the right table 2554c toward the rear side, passes through the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, and reaches the rear side. Will enter the central table 2554a communicating with each other. At this time, in the third-distribution-in-rotation body 2556, since the communication state between the central table 2554a and the right table 2554c (the left table 2554b) is changed by the rotation, the protrusion of the third distribution-right rotation body 2558 is formed. Even if the game ball B reaches the rear side third distribution rotator 2556 by being hit by 2558a, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a side depending on the rotation timing of the third distribution rotator 2556. Instead, it may be returned to the right table 2554c. Further, since the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are provided on both right and left sides of the central table 2554a, when the game ball B is strongly hit to the rear side by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, There is a case where the vehicle passes through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution and enters the left table 2554b on the opposite side.

  On the other hand, if the hit by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is weak, the game ball B will return to the front side without being able to climb the right table 2554c to the rear side, and the timing to return to the front side and the third Depending on the timing of the projecting piece 2558a of the distribution right rotating body 2558, the game ball B may be hit again weakly, and the right table 2554c may move back and forth between the rear side and the front side. Then, when the game ball B is hit by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and enters the central table 2554a from the rear side through the third distributing medium rotating body 2556, the central table 2554a is directed to the front side. It will be rolled, and it will be accepted by either one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. Instead, the front end of the central table 2554a passes through the recovery table 2554d and enters the front side of either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and again the protrusion 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558 (or The projecting piece 2557a) of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 is struck and moves to the rear side.

  In this way, the game ball B supplied to the third distribution device 2550 is the projection piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558 on the front side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. By being hit rearward by the projecting piece 2558a, the central table 2554a is moved from the rear side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third sorting medium rotating body 2556 to the central table 2554a. The movement of sequentially moving around the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d such that the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is supplied again via the collection table 2554d is performed. The second V winning opening 2008 or the second opening on the table 2554a So that the repeated until it is accepted in any of the loss port 2555.

  Therefore, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is rotated to strike the game ball B from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, Since the game ball B is sent to the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are opened, how is the game ball B supplied when the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is supplied? It is possible to make it unpredictable to the player whether or not the game ball B is hit to the rear side with various strengths, and the line of sight of the player is moved between the left table 2554b, the right table 2554c, and the central table 2554a. It is possible to entertain the game ball B by nailing it.

  Also, the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 plays the game ball B. If the conditions such as the timing of hitting, the timing of the third sorting medium rotating body 2556 that makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the central table 2554a, and the like, the game ball B moves from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. Moreover, depending on the strength of the hit of the game ball B by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distributing right rotating body 2558, the third distribution is generated on the rear side. Since it may pass through the middle rotating body 2556 and enter the right table 2554c or the left table 2554b on the opposite side, the protrusion 25 of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 It is possible to make it difficult to predict the movement of the game ball B when the game ball B is hit to the rear side by the projection piece 2558a of the 7a or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, and the game ball B moves to the central table 2554a. Depending on whether or not to enter, the player can be harassed, the player can be entertained, a premium feeling can be given to the central table 2554a, and the game ball B entering the central table 2554a can be provided. It can entertain and entertain the player with a strong interest and interest. At this time, since the game ball B enters the central table 2554a through the third sorting rotor 2556, the rotation of the third sorting rotor 2556 when the gaming ball B enters the central table 2554a. Depending on the position, the game ball B may be sent to the center side or the end side in the width direction of the central table 2554a, and the game ball B can be guided in various directions on the central table 2554a, so that it can be varied. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B that rolls along a different path, prevent the player from getting bored, and prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Then, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a is accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 that is opened near the front end of the central table 2554a, a privilege that is advantageous to the player (here, "big hit game"). ) Is given, the player can be strongly urged that the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the third sorting rotor 2556 is accepted into the second V winning opening 2008, It is possible to increase the player's excitement depending on whether or not the second V winning opening 2008 is accepted, and to increase the expectation for the second V winning opening 2008 being accepted. The distribution of the game balls B on the device 2550 can be made to have a strong interest, the distribution of the game balls B can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, unless the gaming ball B supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is strongly hit to some extent by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distributing right rotating body 2558, Even if the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, it does not reach the central table 2554a depending on the rotation position of the third allocating rotary body 2556 and the third allocating rotary body 2556. If neither the V winning opening 2008 nor the third losing opening 2555 is received, the central table 2554a is returned from the front side to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collecting table 2554d, so that it takes a relatively long time. , The game ball B will remain in the third distribution device 2550, the conventional ball in the pachinko machine Longer than a sorter as down, it is possible to entertain the distribution of game balls B, and reduction of the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is impossible for the player to predict how strong the gaming ball B is hit in the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558. The number of times the game ball B is hit by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is not limited to once, and a complicated rolling path. After being passed, either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 is accepted, so that the player strongly feels that the distribution destination of the game ball B has been selected by a random assignment. You can Therefore, even if the time (sorting time) until the game ball B is received in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 in the third sorting apparatus 2550 (sorting time) is long, it is naturally flowing down. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and to enjoy the development by selecting a random distribution destination (rolling destination), and to get tired of having a player with a strong interest and interest in the game ball B. It can be made difficult.

  In addition, after a relatively long time, the game ball B rolls so as to circulate among the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the recovery table 2554d, and then is received by the third losing mouth 2555 ( However, as described above, since it is possible to strongly make the player feel that the distribution of the game balls B in the third distribution device 2550 is random, it is simply unlucky. As a result, the distribution result can be easily accepted, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed and deteriorating the interest.

  In addition, the game ball B goes back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and circulates between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, so that the game ball B is Even if it takes a long time to be accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and the distribution is determined, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, the second V winning opening 2008 is provided. The player's interest will not be reduced due to the expectation of acceptance, and the player can be kept entertained, making it harder for the player to get bored and fully entertaining the player. Even if it is accepted by the third losing mouth 2555, it is possible to alleviate the feeling of disappointment and prevent the player's interest from decreasing. That.

  Furthermore, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a and rolled to the front side is not received in any of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, from the front end of the central table 2554a. Since it enters the recovery table 2554d and is guided to either the left or right outer table 2554b or the right table 2554c, is the game ball B guided to the desired left table 2554b or right table 2554c in the recovery table 2554d? Whether or not the player can be excited, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 abut on the upper side of the center of the game ball B to strike, When the game ball B is hit from the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to float up from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and the third distribution device. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out of 2550. In addition, the projection piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the projection piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are projected into the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with a length substantially the same as the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a just meet the game ball B, and hit the game ball B unnecessarily to left table 2554b or right table 2554c (third sorting device 2550). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out of the central table 2554a because the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a easily blows the game ball B, and the left table 2554b can be prevented. It is possible to make it easy for the game ball B to move back and forth between the rear side and the front side on the right table 2554c.

  In addition, since the projection 2554i is provided at the front end of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B has a circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. Even if it tries to rotate along the edge of, it comes into contact with the projection 2554i in the middle thereof, and by contacting the projection 2554i, the game ball B can be repelled from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening. It is possible to prevent the player from jumping out from the edge of the second and being accepted by the third losing mouth 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being unnecessarily received by the third losing opening 2555 and disappoint the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, the projection 2554i causes the game ball B to be received by the third losing mouth 2555 and the second V winning mouth 2008 around the edges of the circular openings of the second V winning mouth 2008 and the third losing mouth 2555. Since it can be prevented, the probability of acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 can be made substantially the same as the designed one, and the variation of the probability of accepting into the second V winning opening 2008 in each pachinko machine 1 can be made. The number can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that is unlikely to give the player a feeling of distrust can be provided.

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, and the central table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c are arranged side by side so that the rear side becomes higher. Since it is tilted, the third distribution device 2550 is located below the eye level of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the central table 2554a and the left side of the third distribution device 2550 are located. The table 2554b and the right table 2554c can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball B rolling on the central table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c can be easily seen, and the second V winning opening 2008 or It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B that is distributed to the three losing openings 2555.

  Further, since the central table 2554a is inclined so that the rear side becomes higher, the game ball B that has entered the rear side of the central table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c and sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are located between the player and the player who is playing, it is determined whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008. The game ball B can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the movement of the game ball B can be further enjoyed, and the player can be made to think that the game ball B is attracted to the second V winning opening 2008. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the game table B is rolled forward by inclining the central table 2554a and the like so that the rear side is high, the central table 2554a is compared with the case where the gaming ball B is rolled in the left-right direction. Since the left and right widths of the game balls B can be widened, the rolling path of the game ball B on the central table 2554a can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 can be more enjoyed in the movement of the game ball B. .

  Further, in the third sorting apparatus 2550, first, the game ball B is supplied to the right table 2554c through the collection table 2554d, and at the same time, the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008. Since the hitting of the game ball B by the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is a necessary condition, when the third distribution right rotating body 2558 or the like is stopped for some reason, the right table 2554c of the third distribution device 2550. Even if the game ball B is supplied to the second V winning opening 2008 and the game ball B is illegally received, the game ball B is not hit by the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, so The game ball B does not enter the table 2554a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being illegally accepted into the second V winning opening 2008.

  In addition, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are provided via the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571. The presence / absence of rotation of the distribution right rotator 2558 can be detected, and the presence / absence of rotation of the third distribution middle rotator 2556 can be detected by the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563 via the transmission gear 2567. Therefore, it is detected that the rotation of the third distribution left rotator 2557, the third distribution right rotator 2558, the third distribution rotator 2556, etc. has stopped for some reason, and the rotation is stopped. Can be notified, and can be notified to a player, a staff member in a game hall, or the like.

  In addition, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 that are being rotated by decelerating the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is changed to the third rotation. The minute left / right rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution / right rotation detection sensor 2565 detect whether the third distribution / left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution / right rotation body 2558 is rotating. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is increased, the presence or absence of the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is determined. Since the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571 for detecting are rotated by decelerating the rotations of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, Third distribution left rotating body 2557, third distribution Since the rotation speed is slower than that of the rotating body 2558, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 can be reliably detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 through the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571.

  Further, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is increased (even if it is high), the rotation speeds of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 are increased. Is slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the detection cycles of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are unnecessary. It is not necessary to shorten the length of the main control board 1310 to an appropriate one, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the main control board 1310.

  From this, in the present embodiment, the rotation speeds of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are increased (increased), so that in the third distribution device 2550. The third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 that rotate at a high speed can surprise the player, and have a strong interest in the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550. You can make it happen. Further, by rotating the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 at high speed, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 hit the game ball B. It is possible to make it more difficult to predict the timing to be played, and it is possible to hit the game ball B even if the position of the game ball B is slightly different or the timing is misaligned. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, no light is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the back provided near the periphery thereof. The decorations of the back decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the pre-production unit 3200 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the back decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and The back right decoration 3213 is used to decorate the pachinko machine 1 to improve its appearance. In this normal state, if the back decoration member 3211, the back left decoration member 3212, and the back right decoration member 3213 are decorated with light emission, the outer peripheral side of the light guide plate 3102 can be decorated with light emission when viewed from the front. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the light emitting decorations of the body 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and the player's interest is the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right. The decoration body 3213 can be attracted. On the other hand, in a normal state, when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently displayed, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 becomes visible from the player side and the outer peripheral side. Since the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are not light-emitted, the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 look dark, and Therefore, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 looks brighter, and the player's interest can be attracted to the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102.

  Then, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently displayed, and the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 are illuminated and decorated. Since the decoration of the decorative body 3213 and the decoration together form one pattern (special pattern), a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Since the decoration of 3213 is located on the front side of the second pattern 3120, a feeling of depth can be given to the special pattern, and the special pattern can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in the special pattern, entertain the player, and It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 has a radiation pattern portion 3122 that reaches the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 have radiation patterns. Since the radiating decoration portion 3212b and the radiating decoration portion 3213b, which are decorated continuously with 3122, are provided, in the back unit 3000, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and the back left decoration. When the body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 (at least the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b) are light-emitted, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b appear to be continuous. Therefore, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b It is possible to further enhance the sense of unity, and it is possible to make the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 appear to the player without a feeling of discomfort. It is possible to surely obtain such an effect.

  In addition, as described above, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b can enhance the sense of unity of the special pattern. Therefore, after the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102. By radiating the radiating decoration portions 3212b and the radiating decoration portions 3213b of the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213, it is possible to show the player a luminescence effect in which the second pattern 3120 spreads outward. It can surprise the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the left and right sides of the second pattern 3120, the second pattern 3120 seems to spread laterally to become a special pattern, and thus wide. The three-dimensional special pattern can be shown to the player, and the powerful special pattern can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213, which form the special pattern, are inclined so as to project forward toward the outer peripheral side, the inside of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 is increased. The light guide plate 3102 (the second pattern 3120) in FIG. 3 can be seen to be recessed in the back and further enhance the depth feeling of the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the decorations of the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects.

  Further, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and displayed by the cocktail light on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the portion of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the radiation pattern section 3122 of the second pattern 3120 constitutes the cocktail light. Since it is decomposed into the components of light that are emitted and emits light in a plurality of colors, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110), which strongly interests the player. Can be attracted. More specifically, for example, when yellow light including red light and green light as cocktail light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, a portion of the second pattern 3120 excluding the spectral light emitting unit 3102c. Then, the light is emitted in yellow, whereas in the part of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the second pattern 3120, the yellow light is split into red light and green light, and the red light and green light are mixed to emit light. Therefore, the second pattern 3120 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in a portion that emits yellow light and a portion that emits light in a mixture of red and green. On the other hand, when light of one of the three primary colors of light (for example, red light) is emitted from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the light is further dispersed at the portion of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the second pattern 3120. Since it is not possible, the light of the emitted color is emitted, and the entire second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed in the same color. In this way, since the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110) to be displayed by light emission can be changed depending on the color of the light with which the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102 is irradiated, a wider variety of light emission effects can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c can entertain the player by glittering in a plurality of colors, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a higher staging effect. can do.

  Further, in the spectral light emitting unit 3102c, since the light is dispersed by using the difference in the refractive index due to the difference in the color (wavelength) of light, for example, when yellow light is emitted from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the player Depending on the difference in the position where the second pattern 3120 is viewed, one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks red, green, or yellow between red and green. Since one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c on the light guide plate 3102 is very small, one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks red or green or red and green even if the player slightly moves. Since it looks like a yellow color, the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c appears to shine in a plurality of colors, and the above-described effects can be achieved. For this reason, when the white light containing all the three primary colors of light is emitted from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks rainbow-colored and glitters, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect with a high effect that can be achieved.

  Also, the spectral light emitting portion 3102c is provided in the radiation pattern portion 3122 in the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 which is continuous with the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213. When the cocktail light is radiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the radiation pattern portion 3122 glitters in a plurality of colors, and thus the radiation pattern portion 3122 emits light from the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213. The light emission mode is similar to that of the decoration, and the sense of unity between the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b can be further enhanced, and the discomfort of the special pattern displayed integrally can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player more.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 having the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the game panel 1100, and the outer periphery of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. On the front side of the frame-shaped unit base 3101 which holds the back side decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front production unit 3200 are attached so as to surround the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 via the back box 3010. Therefore, in a normal state, the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 can be seen through the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be seen inside the back right decoration 3213, when the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, or on the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern is displayed. Even when 3120 is not illuminated, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good. At the same time, the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are made to emit light to make them visible. Taseru it can, it is possible to attract the interest of the player.

  At this time, since the back decoration member 3211, the back left decoration member 3212, and the back right decoration member 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back decoration member 3211, the back left decoration member 3212, and the back right member are provided. Even if the decoration body 3213 is light-emitted, the light from the back decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration body 3213 does not pass through the light guide plate 3102 and is not irradiated to the front side. It is possible to prevent the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 from shining and rising due to the light emitted by the light emission decorations of the upper decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration body 3213. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102 until the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 are luminescently displayed. Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are in a state as close to each other as possible. It is possible to prevent diffuse reflection of light from occurring with the device 1600, and it is possible to reduce the appearance of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shining and floating due to the diffuse reflection. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, the LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are caused to emit light to cause the first pattern of the light guide plate 3102 to be emitted. By causing the 3110 and the second pattern 3120 to emit light, the player becomes aware of the existence of the light guide plate 3102 for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, and there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by wondering whether it is there or not, and it is possible to entertain the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 that are displayed in a light-emitting manner and suppress a decrease in interest, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 is produced. Can be fully exerted.

  Further, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate is formed by the LEDs of the first design substrate 3103 and the second design substrate 3104. Even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of 3102 are displayed in a luminescent manner, the light does not brightly illuminate the front surface of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213. The back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 cannot be seen through the light plate 3102, and the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 can be luminescently displayed in a good state. Therefore, as in the conventional art, the light-emission display of the pattern on the light-guide plate makes the back of the light-guide plate brighter, so that the pattern on which light-emission is displayed does not become hard to see, and the first pattern displayed on the light-emission screen is displayed to the player. The design 3110 and the second design 3120 can be visually enjoyed in a good state, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exerted.

  Further, since the back side decorative body 3211, the back left side decorative body 3212, and the back right side decorative body 3213 capable of performing light emission decoration so as to surround the periphery of the light guide plate 3102 are attached to the front side of the unit base 3101, the back side decoration Since the body 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 can decorate the periphery of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 which are light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3110 can be decorated. It is possible to make the pattern 3120 stand out and to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to entertain the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 to suppress the decline of interest, and at the same time, decorate the back side. By appropriately decorating the body 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 with light emission, the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back Colorful effect in the decorative body 3213 and the light guide plate 3102 can show the player and it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, a back upper decorative body 3211, a back left decorative body 3212, and a back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are decorated on the light guide plate 3102. Since it is related (or continuous) to the second pattern 3120 that is displayed in a luminescent manner, the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen as one body. The second pattern 3120 to be displayed by light emission can be made larger, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 outside the second pattern 3120 are located in front of the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, a sense of depth can be given to the second design 3120, and the second design 3120 can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player and to make the player think that something is good, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the game and suppressing the decline in interest. You can

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to prevent diffuse reflection of light between the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600, as described above. It is possible to reduce that the front surface of the effect display device 1600 shines due to diffused reflection and it is difficult to see the effect image, and the effect image can be visually recognized in a good state. Therefore, both the effect by the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect by the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be shown to the player in a good state, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be darkened when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. The first design 3110 and the second design 3120 can be made more visible, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exerted. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is caused to display effect images (for example, imitation patterns) of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 that are light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102, or the first pattern 3110 and the first pattern 3110 of the light guide plate 3102. By displaying an effect image that is integrated with the two patterns 3120, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. ..

  The unit base 3101 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 with the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 in between, and the rear side of the unit base 3101. Since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the back box 3010, the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, the back right decoration 3213, and the game panel 1100 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102. In addition, since the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is closed by the effect display device 1600, when the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (the pachinko machine 1 or the game board 5) is handled, the worker can use the front side as well as the rear side. Also, the light guide plate 3102 can be made difficult to touch, and the light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from being soiled or scratched.

  Therefore, at the time of manufacturing, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 3102 from being easily soiled or scratched without paying attention to prevent the light guide plate 3102 from being soiled or scratched. The production unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) can be handled easily, the workability during manufacturing can be improved, and the occurrence of defective products due to scratches during manufacturing can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall or when maintaining the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall, it is difficult for an operator to touch the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 is less likely to get dirty or scratched. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player to play a game on the pachinko machine 1 without the light guide plate 3102 being dirty or scratched, and the first pattern 3110 displayed on the light guide plate 3102 by light emission or The second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the transparent center accessory 2500 is attached via the flange portion 2503 to the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a in which the game balls B are distributed on the front side. Along with the flange portion 2503 to the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, and the rear frame portion 2504 has a constant cross-sectional shape. Since a decoration is provided in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction are provided in the circumferential direction of the frame, light is irregularly refracted by the lens action of the decoration, and the opening 1102 passes through the rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of is visible unclear. In addition, the decorative portion including a plurality of irregularities includes light from the LEDs and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and other pachinko machines. The rear frame portion 2504 looks shiny by reflecting the light from the. In this manner, the lens effect or the reflecting effect of the decoration of the rear frame portion 2504 makes it difficult to see the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 through the rear frame portion 2504 and suppress the deterioration of appearance. it can.

  Further, the outside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center role object 2500 is the game area 5a in which the game ball B flows, the center role object 2500 is transparent, and the rear frame part 2504 is substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Since the size of the inner periphery of the rear frame portion 2504 approaches the size of the opening portion 1102, the range in which the rear of the game panel 1100 can be seen can be at least the same size as the opening portion 1102. Rear visibility can be improved. Therefore, through the frame of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to make the range in which the back front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc., provided behind the game panel 1100, visible is wider than before. The front front effect unit 3200 and the like can be favorably viewed through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the effect of the front front effect unit 3200 and the like can be sufficiently exerted.

  Further, by the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the front surface (game area 5a) of the game panel 1100 can be clearly divided into an area (outside the frame) where the game ball B flows and an area (inside the frame) where the game ball B does not flow. Therefore, the back-front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc., provided behind the game panel 1100, of the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a outside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a without impairing the visibility and can suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the decoration of the rear frame portion 2504, which is formed of a plurality of irregularities, causes the light from the LEDs and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, the game in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since light in the hall, light from other gaming machines such as pachinko machines, etc. can be reflected, the rear frame part 2504 and the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 will appear to shine, and the pachinko machine It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can improve the appearance of the machine 1 and can attract the player's attention and which has a high appealing power.

  Further, as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500, so that the opening 1102 of the opening 1102 is formed as the game panel 1100. Even if a plywood whose inner peripheral surface (cut surface) is not clean is used, it is possible to suppress deterioration of appearance. Therefore, relatively inexpensive plywood can be used as the game panel 1100, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  By the way, when the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is apart from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 to some extent, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 is rear frame. Since it looks displaced with respect to the portion 2504, it becomes easier for the player to notice the presence of the inner peripheral surface. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102 of the game panel 1100, the opening portion 1102 visible through the transparent rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of the rear frame part 2504 can be seen to substantially match with the rear frame part 2504, and the rear frame part 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening part 1102 can be made to be an illusion that they are integrated with each other. By making the presence of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 less noticeable, deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Further, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102 visible through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 is the rear frame. The rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be made to appear as if they are integrated with each other so that the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 are integrated, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be seen by the player. By making it hard to notice the presence of, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of appearance.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b of the back left decoration substrate 3222 in the back front rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 for lighting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222a are provided. The rear frame part 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be made to emit light together with the back left decorative body 3212 by the light emission of the second LED 3222b, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be made difficult to see by the light emission decoration of the rear frame part 2504. In addition, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are appropriately made to emit light in accordance with the game situation (game state) and the rear frame portion 2504 is made to emit light, so that it is possible to show a light emitting effect to the player, It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for illuminating and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, LEDs are mounted between the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. As compared with the case where the decorative substrate is provided, the rear frame portion 2504 can be brought as close as possible to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, so that the transparent center accessory 2500 does not pass through the frame. The range that can be seen through can be made wider, and the visibility behind can be improved.

  Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for illuminating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the light for illuminating and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is forward. Therefore, the light of the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b can easily reach the eyes of the player, and the rear frame part 2504 can be illuminated and decorated brighter and the rear frame part 2504. Since the plurality of irregularities forming the decoration are extended in the front-back direction, the rear frame portion 2504 is illuminated and decorated by the light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b. The light from the second LED 3222b and the second LED 3222b can be guided to the front end of the rear frame portion 2504, and the center role 2500 Front and front frame portion 2502 also becomes possible to emit light decorations, it is possible to improve the appearance.

  Further, since the rear frame portion 2504 has a decoration in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction with a constant cross-sectional shape are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction of the frame, the center accessory 2500 is resin-molded. When removing from the mold, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the mold simply by pulling it out in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is not necessary to use a complicated mold for molding the center accessory 2500, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress such an increase in cost.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the center role object 2500 that is partitioned on the front side of the game panel 1100 having the opening 1102 penetrating in the front and rear to prevent the game ball B from entering the inside. In the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501, a flange portion 2503 that extends inward from the rear end of a portion that is located at least vertically and outside the opening 1102 is provided. Since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 by attaching it to the panel 1100, nothing is extended to the outside (game area 5a side) at the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502. Will not be. Therefore, it becomes possible to implant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, so that the substantial game area 5a is set in the front frame portion 2502. The game area 5a can be made larger even if the size of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is the same.

  Further, in the game area 5a, in an area outside (on the left side) of a portion of the center accessory 2500 extending vertically on the left side of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502, the area where the game ball B mainly flows downward. Since the flange portion 2503 extending inward is provided at the relevant portion of the front frame portion 2502, the width in the left-right direction of the region in which the game ball B flows downward (the region on the left outer side of the center accessory 2500). Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball B to flow down while largely moving in the left-right direction by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in that region, so that the game ball B can be given a complicated movement, or the game ball B can be given a complicated motion. The flow time of the ball B can be lengthened or lengthened, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the flange portion 2503 is attached so as to extend inward from a portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2503 is opposite to the game area 5a. Since it extends to the side, the game ball B always flows on the game panel 1100, and the game ball B can be distributed in a stable state without causing any strange behavior. More specifically, for example, the flange portion attached to the game panel in the center accessory is extended inside the opening portion of the game panel, and the peripheral wall portion is extended forward from the inner end portion of the flange portion. By doing so, it is conceivable to enlarge the game area outside the peripheral wall portion. However, in the above case, in the portion located inside the opening in the flange portion, since the game panel does not exist in the rear, when the game medium flows (rolls) through the portion in the flange portion. However, there is a possibility that the part vibrates and may behave differently from the game medium circulating on the game panel, or the flange may be fatigued and damaged early due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the game ball B always flows on the game panel 1100, the game ball B does not behave strangely and flows in a stable state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the strange behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball B does not flow on the flange portion 2503 extended inward. The circulation of the game ball B does not cause fatigue and damage of the relevant portion of the flange portion 2503 at an early stage.

  Further, since the flange portion 2503 is extended inward from the portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening portion 1102, the flange portion 2503 can be securely attached to the game panel 1100, and is described above. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having the action and effect.

  Further, a part of the flange portion 2503 that attaches the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 is made to extend inward from the front frame portion 2502, and the game ball B circulates over the relevant portion of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the transparent flange portion 2503 does not become dirty or scratched due to the circulation of the game ball B, and the transparency is not deteriorated. The action and effect of the object 2500 can be continuously exerted.

  Further, in the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the front frame portion 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame by the flange portion 2503, so that the inside of the game area 5a Even if the game ball B contacts (contacts) the relevant part of the front frame part 2502, the flange part 2503 can maintain the strength of the front frame part 2502, and the deformation of the front frame part 2502 (center accessory 2500). And damage can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion can be increased by the mounting portion, when the game medium comes into contact with the peripheral wall portion, the peripheral wall portion is elastically deformed to allow the game medium to be treated like an elastic body (rubber or spring). You can prevent it from being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium circulating in the game area from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion, and preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Then, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame portion 2502 can be increased by the flange portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be maintained at the same strength and rigidity as the conventional product, and the center accessory 2500 can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the deformation of the molded product when the resin is resin-molded and is removed from the mold, and it is possible to increase the yield and suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, the front frame portion 2502 and the like can be made invisible to the player, and the player is illusion that the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed is large. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 in which the game area 5a looks large can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

  In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, light from the LED or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, By the reflection of the etc., the center role object 2500 looks shiningly, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the interest of the player is provided. be able to.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, even if the front frame portion 2502 is positioned outside the edge of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 is at the same position as the edge of the opening 1102. It is possible to make an illusion like this, and it is possible to make the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed look larger than it actually is.

  Further, as described above, since the game area 5a can be enlarged by extending the flange portion 2503 inward, the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is enlarged, and the position where the flange portion 2503 is extended is set. By devising it, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game area 5a while increasing the inside of the frame. Therefore, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the front effect unit 3200, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel are in a good state from the player through the inside of the frame of the central accessory 2500 and the opening 1102. Can be visually recognized in the game area 5a, entertaining both the game by the game ball B and the performance by the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the back front rendering unit 3200, the rendering display device 1600, and the like. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing the above.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the main decoration portion capable of transmitting only two of the three primary colors of light to the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. Since the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) has the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) is colored in a predetermined color. Even if the body 3213) is not illuminated, the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) can be conspicuous by the color of the main decoration 3212a (main decoration 3213a), and the back left decoration substrate 3222 (back) The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b), which are full-color LEDs on the right decoration substrate 3223), are It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 high player's interest to be able attract an appeal even when you do not have light. When a game is played in the game area 5a by the player's operation, a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted on the back left decoration board 3222 (back right decoration board 3223) and the back left decoration board 3222 according to the change of the game situation. The second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) appropriately emits light to decorate the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) with light emission. ) Can be shown neatly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be made aware of the change in the game situation and think that there is something good. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) is light-emitted and decorated, in the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a), which is a full-color LED corresponding to the main decoration 3212a (main decoration 3213a), Since the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element that emits a color that does not pass through the decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) are connected and short-circuited, the light emitting element does not emit light due to a malfunction. Therefore, due to a malfunction of the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) corresponding to the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a), the radiation decorative portion 3212b (adjacent to the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) ( Since it is possible to prevent the radiating decoration portion 3213b) from being luminescently decorated with an unintended color, the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) can be reliably luminescently decorated with the intended color. It is possible to sufficiently exert the decorative effect by the light emission decoration of the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213).

  Further, in the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a), which is a full-color LED corresponding to the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a), the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting element of the color that does not emit light are connected in the one full-color LED. Since it is short-circuited, static electricity can be prevented from being charged in the light emitting element, and the charged static electricity adversely affects other light emitting elements in the same package, and the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) is It is possible to prevent breakage, and the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) can be illuminated and decorated in a good state.

  Further, since the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light, the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a). ), The second LED 3222b (second LED 3223b), which is a full-color LED corresponding to the radiation decoration portion 3212b (radiation decoration portion 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), does not pass through. When the light is emitted, it is possible to brightly light-emit the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) and the adjacent radial decorative portion 3212b (radiative decorative portion 3213b). Therefore, even if a partition (for example, a reflector) that blocks light is not provided between the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) and the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223), the main decorative portion 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) and the adjacent radiant decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) can be clearly separated for light emission decoration, and the light emission decoration of the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) It is possible to simplify the configuration of the above and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the back left decoration board 3222 (back right decoration board 3223) is white, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a) mounted on the back left decoration board 3222 (back right decoration board 3223) are mounted. And the light from the second LED 3223b) can be reflected by the surface of the white back left decoration substrate 3222 (back right decoration substrate 3223), and the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) emits brighter light. Can be made Further, since the surface of the back left decoration substrate 3222 (back right decoration substrate 3223) is white, it is colored like the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) in the back left decoration body 3212 (back right decoration body 3213). It is possible to improve the color development of the part where the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be more easily exhibited, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). Through, the back left decoration substrate 3222 (back right decoration substrate 3223) can be made inconspicuous from the player side (front side), and deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b), which are a plurality of full-color LEDs, are mounted on the back left decoration substrate 3222 (back right decoration substrate 3223), all the first LEDs 3222a are mounted. Since the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) can be a full-color LED, all the first LEDs 3222a and the second LEDs 3222b mounted on the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) can be mounted. By making the (first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) full color LEDs of the same type (model number), it is possible to reduce the cost for manufacturing the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) by unifying the parts. Pachinko machine 1 The increase of such costs can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit, the effect display device 1600 provided in the center and the first starting opening capable of receiving the game ball B. 2002, the center role object 2500 as a special distribution area in which the game ball B received in the right side decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 and the character prize opening 2006 in the back unit 3000 adjacent to each other can be distributed. A first distribution device 2530 and a sub status display unit 3501 of a sub status display unit 3500 that is continuous with the logo decoration portion 3211b of the back decoration 3211 are provided, and the game is operated by the player. When the game ball B driven into the area 5a is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 (second starting opening 2004), a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is obtained on the main control board 1310. The second special lottery result) is performed, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the special lottery result that has been drawn. Therefore, in order to obtain the privilege, aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. The driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 (second starting opening 2004) and the special lottery result is drawn, the effect display device 1600 provided in the center of the game area 5a is selected. According to the special lottery result, a design (also referred to as a main design) suggesting the special lottery result is displayed, and the sub-state LED 3510 of the back right decoration board 3223 emits light appropriately and the light is guided by the light guide pin 3520. The light is guided to the sub state display unit 3501, and the sub symbol is displayed on the sub state display unit 3501.

  Therefore, in addition to allowing the player to recognize the special lottery result drawn by the main symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub state display portion 3501 (sub state display device 3500) on which a predetermined decoration is formed Even in the case, because the sub-symbol that suggests the special lottery result that was drawn is displayed, even if you miss the display of the main symbol or you do not understand the special lottery result suggestion by the main symbol By looking, the player can be made to recognize the result of the special lottery that has been drawn.

  Since a predetermined decoration (the same decoration as the logo decoration portion 3211b) is formed in the sub state display portion 3501, the decoration appears to be illuminated by the display of the sub pattern. When the game ball B is received in the one starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is drawn, the light emitting mode of the decoration changes, It is possible to make the player recognize that the light emission mode is changing according to the special lottery result selected by lottery, and it is possible to make the sub-symbol (indication of the special lottery result selected by lottery) recognized. At this time, since the sub-pattern indicating the special lottery result selected by the lottery is decorated in the sub-state display portion 3501, the sub-pattern does not look inorganic like a conventional pachinko machine, and the sub-pattern is decorated. It is possible to improve the appearance in the sub-state display portion 3501 (sub-state display 3500) and in the game area 5a.

  Further, on the back right decoration board 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying the sub pattern is mounted, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the first allocating device 2530 for making the back right decoration 3213 emit light. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the etc. is further mounted, the back right decoration body 3213 is made to emit light and the first distribution device 2530 is made bright to make it easy to see the game ball B in circulation. can do. In addition, as compared with the case where the sub state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on separate substrates, respectively, one back right decoration substrate 3223 is enough, and therefore, space for that is provided. Since it is possible to secure the space, it is possible to increase the size of the back right decoration 3213, the first sorting device 2530, etc., or arrange another decoration or accessory, etc., depending on the reserved space. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the person.

  Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 on the back right decoration board 3223 is guided to the sub-state display section 3501 by the light guide pin 3520, the sub-status display section 3501 is separated from the back right decoration board 3223. Even if it is provided at a different position, the light guide pin 3520 can guide light to the sub status display unit 3501 in a good state to display the sub pattern. Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the portion where the sub-pattern is displayed can be positioned to match the shape of the decoration. The design can be blended into the decoration to improve its appearance.

  In addition, the substrate surface on which the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c on the back right decorative substrate 3223 are mounted is turned to the direction perpendicular to the front-back direction (left-right direction). Since the right decoration board 3223 is provided, and the side surface in the thickness direction of the back right decoration board 3223 faces the front-back direction, the back right decoration board 3223 can be made difficult to see from the front, and the back right It is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative substrate 3223 from being deteriorated and improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since the surface of the back right decoration board 3223 is white, the light from the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b mounted on the back right decoration board 3223, and the light from the third LED 3223c is emitted from the white back right decoration board 3223. It can be reflected by the surface, the back right decoration 3213 can be illuminated and illuminated more brightly, and the first distribution device 2530 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated more brightly, and the back right decoration substrate 3223 can be It can be made inconspicuous from the front, and the deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Further, since the back right decoration board 3223 is provided between the back right decoration body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3223a is provided on one board surface of the back right decoration board 3223. Since the second LED 3223b is mounted and the third LED 3223c is mounted on the other substrate surface, light from each of them is not blocked by the back right decoration substrate 3223 and is radiated to the opposite side. The first sorting device 2530 is illuminated when the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are illuminated, and the back right decoration 3213 is illuminated and decorated when the third LED 3223c is illuminated. The body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 can be separately light-emitted and illuminated in a clear state, and a light emission that is comfortable It is possible to show an effect on the player, the presentation effect by the light emission effect can be exhibited sufficiently, the reduction of interest to delight the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the prize winning port 2006 and the first sorting device 2530 are provided in the special distribution area, when the third LED 3223c of the back right decorative substrate 3223 is made to emit light, the accessory provided in the special distribution area. Since the winning hole 2006 and the first distribution device 2530 are illuminated brightly, the player's interest can be directed to the character winning part 2006 and the first distributing device 2530, and the character winning part 2006 It is possible to open the game ball B so that the player can open the game ball B so that the game ball B can be opened so that the game ball B can be received. Then, when the gaming prize B is accepted and the game ball B is accepted and sent to the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B is randomly selected in the first distribution device 2530 according to the special lottery result. Since it is distributed to either the first losing mouth 2535 side or the first atari passage 2536 side, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not it is distributed to the first atari passage 2536. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. At this time, by causing the third LED 3223c to emit light and illuminating the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B in the first distribution device 2530 can be made easier to see, and in the first distribution device 2530. You can entertain the distribution.

  Furthermore, the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 in the sub-state LED 3510 are full-color LEDs in which three light-emitting elements of red, green, and blue are combined into one, and then the anode of the blue light-emitting element. And the cathode are connected to make a short circuit, and the blue light emitting element that does not need to emit light is connected to the anode and the cathode to make a short circuit. The element is not supplied with electricity and does not emit light in the color (blue). Therefore, the sub-pattern is not displayed in a color that does not normally emit light, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. it can.

  Further, the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, and in one full-color LED, the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting element of the color (blue) that is not used are connected and short-circuited. It is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged, and it is possible to prevent the full-color LED from being damaged by adversely affecting other light-emitting elements in the same package due to the charged static electricity, and the sub pattern is surely secured. Can be displayed.

  Further, in one full-color LED, since the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of the unused color are connected and short-circuited, it is not necessary to connect the light emitting element to the LED driver for driving (emittering) the LED. Therefore, the channels of the LED driver can be saved by the number of short-circuited (the anode and the cathode are connected) light emitting elements. Therefore, the number of LED drivers is reduced relative to the number of full-color LEDs to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, or an LED driver is driven by driving another LED by using an extra channel in the LED driver. It can be effectively used without waste.

  In addition, while using full-color LEDs as the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the third LED 3223c are also full-color LEDs, so the type of LED used is single. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 includes two guide passages, that is, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the guide passage group 2520 is not limited to this. It may be constituted by one or more guide passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is twisted by 90 degrees and then twisted by 90 degrees in the opposite direction to show the same arrangement of inlets and outlets. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the entrances and exits may be twisted so that they are different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to be spiral.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are respectively provided with the opening 426a and the opening 435a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the opening 426a and the opening 435a are guided to each other. Although the optical axis part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, the light guide shaft part 429a, the light guide shaft part 436a, and the light guide shaft part 437a are inserted, the invention is not limited to this, and the door frame left side A recess recessed from the rear is provided in the opening 426a and the opening 435a of the decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft are provided in the recess. The portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, after the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 not provided with the opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are formed, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be extended forward to the rear surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. With these, the surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made into a clear surface without the opening 426a and the opening 435a, while the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 428a. The optical axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can emit spot light in a dot shape, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the radiation pattern portion 3122 is provided on the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation pattern which are continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 are provided on the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213. Although the decorative portion 3213b is provided and one large pattern is displayed by the radial pattern portion 3122, the radial decorative portion 3212b, and the radial decorative portion 3213b, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 may be omitted and a light guide plate may be provided that is curved so that both left and right ends project forward. Thus, by causing a predetermined pattern to be displayed on the light guide plate in a light-emitting manner, a special pattern in which the outer peripheral side projects forward with respect to the center side can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that a wide feeling with a wide feeling to the left and right can be obtained. It is possible to display a high special pattern in a light emitting manner, and to give an extremely strong impact to the player. Moreover, since the light guide plate provided in the conventional pachinko machine is not curved and is flat, the curved light guide plate can greatly amaze the player, and Can be strongly attracted and the decline in interest can be suppressed. At this time, it is desirable to bend the light guide plate in an arc shape or an elliptical arc shape centered on the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 173 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change processing, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display processing, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the set value confirmation display processing. First, we will explain various random numbers used for game control, and then move the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on process, main control side timer interrupt process, setting change process, error display process, set value confirmation The display process will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to reach (out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol display and the second special of the function display unit 1400. Random display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device, and the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot gaming state is generated. Design random numbers to be used for determining big hit symbols and small hit symbols (decision of hit type) that are derived and displayed on the symbol display, and for determining the initial value of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that allows the game ball B of the second starting port 2004 to be opened and closed, and this normal symbol Normal to be used to determine the initial value of the random number for determination Judgment initial value determination random number per symbol and normal to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is normally displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers and the like for the pattern variation display pattern are prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the other values within the specified numerical range are extracted one after another and all values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the specified numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value as the special random number. It is supposed to do.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter usually counts up from the initial value determination random number for symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determination of normal symbols. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hitting determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hitting determination.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when various types of data are stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power-on processing described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as a numerical value and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off process (power-off) of the main control side. When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, normally, the random number for initial determination for symbol determination is the ID from the non-volatile RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a. The code is taken out, and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the normal value per determination for initial value determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area. By doing so, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and the two-step security measure are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage that an ID code is taken out from a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and the taken ID code is used as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination will be described. For example, an ID code pre-stored in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by a person who attempts to illegally acquire the game ball B paid out as a prize ball, obtains the game board 5 and disassembles it by some method. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is added, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a 'included in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball B is passed through the normal winning port 2003 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to move the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a game state in which the game can be accepted.

[9-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the main control side power-on process is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed, and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated. It should be noted that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is actually pressed because it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination of step S14. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). A flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc., and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key cylinder 1311a is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and then turned on for the first time. The setting key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch, it is determined that the predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied. Then, and / or it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  When determining in step S18 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the preset setting change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, when determining in step S18 that the main control MPU 1310a does not satisfy the preset setting change permission condition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation, and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby processing, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. At the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is ready to receive various commands from.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power outage notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal is continuously input. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a does not input the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted and a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

  In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. It is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

  In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a indicates that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been normally terminated, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  In addition, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 after the first ON operation by rotating the clockwise 60 degrees. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch in the determination of step S18 described above, and the setting key ON signal causes the setting key to turn ON. By determining that the switch 1311a is set to the ON key, it is determined that the preset setting change permission condition is satisfied, and the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. In order to set, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change process of step S37 described below is performed. Subsequently, in the process of step S38 described later, a specific region is excluded from the entire region of the main control internal RAM. To release the RAM error by clearing has become possible to proceed a game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, so that the main operation is resumed. The main control side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above step S16A. In the determination in step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various types of information are to be erased. Except for this, by clearing the RAM error, the game can be progressed (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error canceling method").

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines When the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been normally completed, an error display in step S33 is displayed and the main control internal RAM is displayed. When notifying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in (or something that cannot be trusted), there are two releasing methods, a first RAM error releasing method and a second RAM error releasing method. It can be done by. Thus, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control-side power cutoff process has normally ended, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates the main control as the power recovery. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery time information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sets this power recovery time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will progress the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person has The main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, it is cleared except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. Perform (step S37). In the setting change processing, which will be described in detail later, the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g for each time, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The changed setting value is determined based on the signal of (1) and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that various types of information are to be erased. Of all areas except for the specific area are cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specific area of the entire main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, the RAM with built-in control does not fail. The specified area of the main control built-in RAM (the area other than the specified area of the main control built-in RAM) is cleared except for the specified area. Here, the "specific area" is the area for exclusive use of the set value in which the set value is stored and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value that is changed in a setting changing process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of spheres is stored.

  The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value as an initial value from the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f to instruct RAM clear, and erases various information, when the thumb values do not match, or the main control side. When the power-off process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the normal symbol per-judgment determination random number is updated based on the taken-out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used as the normal value for determining the normal symbol for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol described above. Set to the decision random number.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will progress the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as " WDT control register ".), The timer setting value is set, the main control built-in WDT is activated, and the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts time measurement, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watch dock timer clear register ( Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and the timekeeping is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the processing of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). Corresponding to the above), the transmission serial port prescaler is set with the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set with the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

  Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing organization, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, of various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state is set in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by hardware. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and the hard random number setting register is set to activate the hard random number circuit with built-in main control. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined value is determined in advance. When all the values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the specified numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is set at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit when obtaining a random number (random number value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit, and the main control internal hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command that are divided into Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. It The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a does not input the power failure advance notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs the non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, the random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win / win random number updating process.

  After step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an input of the power failure notification signal. If there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the non-win random number updating process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has received the power failure advance notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S12 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops, for example, the drive signals output to the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information of the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the RAM with built-in main control, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RAM with built-in main control from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. Since it becomes impossible to do so, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a undergoes a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the power-off process on the main-control side immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the power-off process on the main-control side is not executed. When the power is turned off, the checksum value (sum value) stored after the power-off process on the main control side is executed and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted. The value (sum value) cannot match with the checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM without fail, and a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control internal RAM in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

  Further, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, it is completely erased (cleared) except the specific region in the entire region of the main control built-in RAM, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various kinds of information are to be erased, in the process of step S38, the main control internal RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific region. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is changed and determined. When performing a setting change that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability change)) when the game hall is closed. If it is a hit state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business starts. Therefore, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is required to clear the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit. In addition, when changing the setting value, if the setting changing process is performed, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, it is possible to obtain the setting value before the setting changing process is performed. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to carry the item, and the number is limited to 2 to 3. In the present embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall needs to erase the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). Clear switch 13 By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing portion is pressed in 0f, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, description will be made on the point that the presence / absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is performed Described below are the problems.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to the power failure or the instantaneous power failure. It is adapted to be applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even when the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, so that the island in the game hall is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power source is cut off. This is an island facility in the game hall due to a power failure or momentary interruption when the player is playing the game, that is, while performing the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. When the power supply from the power source is cut off, the main control side power cutoff process can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the standby time until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted) (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set), and if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the waiting time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Although the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

  Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the checksum value based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. However, in step S38, the entire main control RAM is cleared except for the specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall and there is no intention to clear the RAM by an attendant such as the clerk in the game hall. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game. Before performing the wait time standby process of step S22, although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and fluctuations do not occur in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power outage advance notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) A backup for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is processing, and the processing when the main control side power source is cut off, which is configured by an infinite loop, the main control board 1310 is completed. When the main control MPU 1310a of the above is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the calculated checksum value in step S64). Since it is determined that the game information is stored, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored in the main control RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control internal WDT forcibly resets the contents of the main control internal RAM. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the main control side power-off process within the "instantaneous power failure or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, when the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is input. If the power failure notice signal is input, the determination in step S24 is made. Returning again, as long as the remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game in.

  Since the progress of the game is prevented by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52). The contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are set by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It is possible to avoid updating various kinds of information) including information indicating the counter value). When the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information) (including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By dividing the other information (for example, various information including the information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) that is covered by hardware so that it is not changed at all, , It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). In order to transmit, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is included as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, there is a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed will be described.

  For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control in the work area setting of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to open / close the special winning opening 2005. The member is changed from the closed state to the opened state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the shortened state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state. It is not possible to display at which round of the time. That is, for example, the game ball B enters the special winning opening 2005, is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the main winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball B entering the big winning opening 2005 is mainly displayed. Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and ends the special winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member when, for example, ending the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the rounds of the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400). When the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005 from the state closed by the opening / closing member. To the state of being changed (that is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, for example, a screen informing that a game state in which the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, a game that the movable piece is open is played). The main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece to perform the second start while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the display screen of the person) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the mouth 2004 is open and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area setting of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of, by restoring to the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, the start port solenoid 2412 is started to drive the movable piece. So that the migrating second start hole 2004 is operated to the state for closing.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can be returned, the game state becomes a game state in which the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a message to that effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure has occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball B is moved to the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the power failure or the power failure occurs. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is acceptable, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery is returned to the game state in which the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting opening 2004. Despite that, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he or she plays.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the 4 rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member as the return destination of the main control board 1310. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is four rounds of the big hit game state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is). Although it cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the attacker solenoid 2 is in the big hit game state. A screen that tells that 14 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, "This is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. The game ball B is placed in the big winning opening." Please display a message saying "Please play the game so that the player can enter the ball.") In the display area of the effect display device 1600 and give the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine a big winning opening after power recovery. It is possible to instruct the game to enter the game ball B in 2005, and for example, in the above-described example, the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player. When a momentary power failure or a power outage occurs in a state of being in a different game state, and then power is restored, the starter solenoid 2412 is started to drive and the movable piece is opened as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that it is in a state where the second starting opening 2004 is opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game ball B into the second starting opening. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that conveys a message to the player) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and after the power is restored to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine, the game is sent to the second start opening 2004. A game of entering the ball B can be instructed.

  This allows the main control board 1310 to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, the checksum values must be cleared except for the specific area in the entire main control RAM.

  As a result, when the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first sent a power-on state command, then a power-on main control return destination command, and then a power-on main prize ball count. The information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command operates the RAM clear switch 1310f at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information for instructing that when the RAM is cleared and the above description at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Specify the pachinko machine model code and information that indicates which state (probability and time saving state) to recover from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non-time saving state. And information to indicate. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine, to which the so-called Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310), is the copyright for which work? What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misconceptions that it is flowing to the production line.

  Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) is used for the same product copyright. It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs).

  As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, also when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In step S50, a power-on state command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command for transmitting a power-on state command including information indicating A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type of sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, probability fluctuations will occur with a limited number of fluctuations of special symbols Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) of slipping, and by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, the main control board 1310 can control the copyright of which work. It is possible to determine which is the model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to discriminate whether or not it is a game specification or ST machine in which when a probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs.

  As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[9-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the present routine, the first register bank to the second Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbolic variable display pattern determined by the ordinary electric auditors product control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. Performs time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 normally receives various commands is input. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, from the second starting opening sensor 2402. Detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the detection signal from the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second Detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 2515, detection signal from the third loss opening sensor 2518, detection signal from the out sensor 664 (or out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor 3033), detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 , Operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch The payout control board 633 includes a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the out sensor 664, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the command has been normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding starting port winning commands classified as other are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 3002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and from the second starting mouth sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when this switch input process is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process). First, it is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if the game ball B is not entered or if the input is ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the ones subjected to the vacant terminal process) is repeated from the first time to the third time. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Since it is made possible, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, first c Detection signal from the outlet sensor 2516, detection signal from the second V winning opening sensor 2515, detection signal from the third loss opening sensor 2518, detection signal from the out sensor 664, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, RAM clear Operation signal from switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch, detection signal from body frame opening switch, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting switching button 1311b, out sensor 664 It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs that the payout control board 633 normally receives the detection signal and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal process is applied among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display indicating that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a defect. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In the winning random number updating process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for initial value determination for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number updating process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol hitting random number, the normal symbol hitting initial value determination random number are also updated by the winning random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value is set. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. Ordinary symbol hitting determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, then from the minimum value normal symbol hitting determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hitting determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hitting determination.

  In this embodiment, Random number for initial value determination for big hit symbols, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol, In the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, the non-winning random number updating process of step S56, And the random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, Each time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions is random, Random number for initial value determination for big hit symbols, And, the mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hitting symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a sphere counting process (step S107). In this sphere counting process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the left outlet sensor 3032 is input, and the game area 5a is partitioned and formed in the game board 5. When the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the out port left sensor 3032 is detected, the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 A game ball B collected by an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 by inputting a detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033 while performing an operation of adding (incrementing) 1 When the out-out right sensor 3033 detects, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out-out 1008 is counted. The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball counting process, the out-out left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008, and the out-out right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008. In order to perform, the value 2 is added to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, and is a dedicated area for counting out balls in a specific area of the RAM with main control And the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control MPU1310a, when the value of the recovery ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, each time the number of game balls B collected in the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a sphere recovery command to that effect is issued. Created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 65535), and when the value of the collected ball counter is further incremented by 1, the collected ball counter is incremented. The value of the counter overflows to a value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out the game ball B is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are provided. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the board and the board. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. Since it has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 balls based on the input information. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command that is divided into other parts is created to convey that fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, which is provided on the game board 5. Based on the game ball B entered into various winning openings (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. The number of balls of the game ball B to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. To the value of, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value. When the number exceeds 10 (that is, when the number of game balls B to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted in order to inform that fact. The value is stored in the output information storage area as information, and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is stored as the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter in the award ball schedule information storage of the main control RAM described above. It is adapted to store updates to pass.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information that informs the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that an illegal act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter, referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1. The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the misconduct detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). The radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into the notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, a fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is performed. The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (1). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the misconduct detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for notifying that radio wave irradiation is being performed is stored and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible for a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. Has become.

  Further, in the misconduct detecting process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the jackpot gaming state is not set (the big winning opening) When a special winning opening abnormal prize occurs (such as when the game ball B enters the ball 2005), a prize abnormal display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. To do.

  In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave irradiation goto and / or a magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 1 as detection of fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and magnet are detected. When the goto is not detected, the value of 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud has not been detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, when the occurrence of an abnormal winning of the special winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraud.

  Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the gaming ball B is fired is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected. Sometimes the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch detects that the body frame opening switch is detected, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and when the body frame opening switch detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, The logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), that the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt processing which is the main routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery) is performed. It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic until the start.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance (big hit). Whether or not to generate a gaming state (called "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number, is stored in advance in the main control ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (whether the hit type is determined) whether or not any of the hit type determination values that match.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting mouth sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting mouth sensor 2402. If it is due to the above, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it is a big hit game state, various commands classified as big hit related (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big A winning hole 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area, or, for example, a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening / closing an opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (rounds) the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, 2 of the round indicators of the function display unit 1400 are displayed. To turn on the round indicator lamp, turn on the lighting signal for the 2 round indicator lamp. A force is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to turn on the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400. Output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the output of a lighting signal to the status display unit of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. Is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the normal winning a prize winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining the above normal symbol is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning award winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

  The 0th to 3rd compartments (4 compartments) are provided in the normal winning opening prize information storage area, and the 0th compartment, the 1st compartment, the 2nd compartment, and the 3rd compartment are in the order of the normal winning mouth. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th partition to the 2nd partition of the normal winning opening winning information storage, it is normal when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. The winning award winning information is stored in the third section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage.

  The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning award winning information is set, the ordinary winning award winning information storage of the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information is stored in the 0th section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage and the second of the ordinary winning award winning information storage. The regular prize opening prize information of the section is stored in the first section of the regular winning hole prize information storage, and the ordinary winning opening prize information of the third section of the ordinary prize opening prize information storage is stored in the second section of the ordinary winning hole prize information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage that has been shifted becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal prize opening prize information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal prize opening prize information storage, the normal prize opening prize information in the first section of the normal prize opening prize information storage is the normal prize winning information. In the 0th section of the ordinary winning award information storage, the ordinary winning award winning information of the second section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage is respectively shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information storing, and the first award of the ordinary winning award winning information is stored. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, if the normal prize hole prize information is stored in the first to third partitions of the normal prize hole prize information storage, the total number of the stored normal prize hole prize information is set as the reserved ball, and the normal of the function display unit 1400 is stored. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number per ordinary symbol is determined from the read normal winning opening winning information to perform the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open / close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area as information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value prestored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above. , Create various commands related to the universal figure synchronization effect, and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information. Remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of being a normal win) is 1/2.

  Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In the setting value confirmation display processing, a detailed description thereof will be given later, but for reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). ) From 60), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a turns on the setting key ON signal. 2, it is determined that the body frame 4 is open, and the setting key switch 131 By determining that the setting key is turned on for a, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, while the detection signal from the body frame opening switch causes the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Is determined not to be opened, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is determined not to be set to ON by the setting key ON signal, and thus the preset set value display permission condition is not satisfied. judge. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM on the set display 1310g. Output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends as it is and returns to this routine.

  Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a sends a main payment ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, or outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. Besides, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, ordinary symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633. Or, the firing permission signal set in the firing permission logic or the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633, or the counting result of the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 (total number ) Is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, or a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM on the setting display 1310g. To do.

  Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and jackpot related Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball B entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected. ), Various commands classified for power-on, various commands classified for general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified for normal electric figure performance, various commands classified for notification display, classified for status display Various commands, various commands related to test, and various commands classified to others (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided on the game board 5). Every time the number of game balls B to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls B entered into various winning holes reaches 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal indicating that fact as the main prize ball number information Via the external terminal board 558, the main prize ball number information output command for instructing to transmit to the hall computer, and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, game ball B collected at the outlet 1008). Every time the number of balls reaches 10 balls, there is a ball collection command to that effect, a setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, or there is an abnormality in the content stored in the main control built-in RAM (or trust). Error display command to notify that the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area, which will be described later, in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is transmitted. ON operation command or the like of the setting key) it is stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as peripheral circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. The main control serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as the main serial data. You can do it. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is restored and power is restored after power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is transmitted at step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. In the reserved setting of the command, in order to notify that power is restored, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on status command is configured as main circumference serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command at power-on. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

  Whenever the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 For each received ball collection command, the number of balls of the game ball B collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information (counted value (that is, out port The information in which the total number of balls of the game ball B collected in 1008) is associated with the updated date and time) is updated. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after the opening hours of the game hall are not received without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008). The ball collection information in which the total number of balls of B) and the updated date and time are associated is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of the game hall business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 operates the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and held as the sphere collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the total sum of the counted values so far may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT is not forced to reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off while the game is progressing. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the drive states of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. Is able to. In other words, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on of step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area, the power-on status command classified as power-on is transmitted to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main-circulation serial data, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value are then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power outage or power outage and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 for notification, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a lumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has seen a failure. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

  Also, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown in the main control side, all the areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared except for the specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on. When the power is turned on, a power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, the power-on state command is configured, and the status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and subsequently the power-on main control return destination command is configured. Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination at power-on is configured. The data is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-described max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code to specify the machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process. It has become.

[9-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is acquired, it may be read out or may be taken out. When the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

  Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various information stored in the RAM with built-in main control as numerical values. The same process as the calculation of

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) in the main-control power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) is equal (step S204). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG contains various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off processing which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the data is stored and held in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not normally completed. To be done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a indicates that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been normally terminated, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the content of the main control internal RAM due to the flow of the flow chart to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting values 1 to 6 which are the normal ranges of the setting values stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200. It is determined whether or not any of the values is set, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S208 that the main control MPU 1310a is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting value 1 which is the initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). Note that in the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is a value, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. When it does, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 which is the initial value is set to the setting value acquired in step S200. It may be.

  In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, or determines in step S208. When the MPU 1310a determines that it is in the normal range or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switch button 1311b is operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is input, while the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

  When determining in step S216 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b is operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the setting value and updating the setting value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the setting value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value to the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the decision key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a in the setting key cylinder insertion port, and sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotational position) and then turned off, and further rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees) 1311a is turned on by the decision key, and the decision is made from the setting key switch 1311a. Based on the ON signal, the determination key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is determined to have been operated, while the determination key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, it is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

  When determining in step S222 that the main control MPU 1310a has not operated the enter key, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S216 and determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is operated. When it is determined that there is not, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and when the setting switch button 1311b is operated until the enter key is operated, the set value is incremented by 1 each time the operation is performed, and the setting display is updated. If the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the display 1310g and the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting value updated immediately by operating the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time it is determined that the enter key has been operated in the determination in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the set value set in the above is updated, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. After the processing of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the Enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in an area dedicated to the set value in the specific area of.

  Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting key). When the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the switch 1311a to the OFF position of the setting key cylinder, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes the setting key is off It is determined not to have been created.

  In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S226 again and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is operated to OFF.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates that the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is set to the first ON state) stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time of being operated, and when permitting to perform setting change of the set value The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, and thereafter, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as the one determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a normally checks the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is the range, and when it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  When it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the normal range is set, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. It is transmitted as peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This is prioritized before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 is notified by a setting change command that the setting value has been changed. The setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the set value history information (information that associates the set value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[9-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 179 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. It is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the turning operation and the first ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a outputs the setting key ON signal, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. It is determined that the setting key is open, and the setting key switch 1311a causes the setting key O By determining that the main frame 4 is open, the main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame open switch. By determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a ends the routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 215. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 2 are set. Values 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a checks the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value). (Set value stored in) is a value within the normal range of any of set value 1 to set value 6, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

  When it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 to the setting display 1310g and outputs the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

  Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM with built-in main control, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), And ends this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display process of this routine has been started (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key (the set value is confirmed and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC not shown) is confirmed. Information that associates the purpose with the date and time) is updated.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the specific history information such as is permitted to be displayed is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510, the person who confirms the specific history information in the state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied is rotated by the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation by the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG, that is, when the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, is there a setting key OFF operation? It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose decision key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a performs an OFF signal. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Set key switch 1 Setting key when the signal OFF from 11a is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  When it is determined in step S362 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, the main control MPU 1310a ends the routine as it is, whereas when it is determined that the setting key has been operated to OFF, the main control MPU 1310a does not confirm and display the set value. The value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden on the setting display 1310g (step S366), and subsequently, an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , The setting key OFF operation command is set (step S368), and this routine is executed. To the end. The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been confirmed) Is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Up to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is switched back to the original control.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU 1310a is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs the interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT is continuously cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. Therefore, by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, By setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Also, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is ended is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[9-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 17) is the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 of launching the game ball B, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is started. While the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permission). .

  The error display processing of this routine is one of the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. (Specifically, when started as the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display processing which is the present routine of the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a returns the power in step S400 and then displays an error message which is the present routine. Even after the processing is started, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port. Output from the output terminal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function. That.

  When the error display process which is the present routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to execute the step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are abnormal. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, it is already shown in FIG. 179 before the error display process of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is made in step S370 in the set value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing which is the present routine is completed, as described above, the infinite loop is entered. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display process which is the present routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a causes an abnormality in the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being launched in a certain state, the logic of the launch enable signal is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the emission control part 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

  Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various display devices of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), subsequently creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting changing process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 includes the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). When the process is started and ended as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 17) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the endless loop is entered as described above. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the peripheral control board. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) is stored and held in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a blue background image "RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." While performing the control to display the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled not to depend on the volume, but forcibly set to the maximum volume, and the sound is output from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of issuing the RAM error notification by the error display command has the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command for transmitting another error, the RAM is notified. Error notification is given the highest priority.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 183 is a payout control unit following FIG. 182. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[10-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This judgment is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is judged that the RAM clear is not instructed. If the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW while it is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the RAM clear is judged to be an instruction to perform the RAM clear. It is determined that the switch is operated.

  When it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU is operating the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU has not operated the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (e.g., prize ball information storage area). The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored in, and the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. The PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information regarding the payout is to be erased. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU makes a setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power shutdown process (power shutdown) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPUs match each other, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

  In the determination in step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU determines that the power is restored and the payout control internal RAM is used. The work area of is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this power recovery time is read. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, The information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to delete the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When it is determined in step S540 that the power outage notification signal is not input, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU inputs the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various kinds of information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command or self-check command) are normally received, and drive control of the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls from which the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the game ball B, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the payout motor 584 actually uses the number of balls from which the game ball B is paid out as an award ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558. The output or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls B.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the prize ball number information is provided, and the prize motor number information output determination counter is actually the payout motor 584. The number of balls of the game ball B paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is calculated. The processing (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the payout motor 584 adds the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out and stores and updates the value.

  In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 ( That is, while the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded). The indicated value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), And a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a blade rotation detection sensor 590 detection signal, a payout detection sensor 591 detection signal, a full tank detection sensor 154 detection signal, a CR unit BRQ signal, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later have been normally received by the main control board 1310 are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is caused by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. It is determined whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number according to the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition at that time, the number of balls of the game ball B received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and Whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the discontinuity of the game ball B due to the disagreement are repeatedly performed At the time of making a judgment, time management of the mismatch counter reset judgment time set as the judgment condition is performed. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer updating process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball-game determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, when the payout operation of the gaming ball B by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls B can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and while paying out the game ball B to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, a momentary power failure or a power outage causes CR. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and the payout of game balls B cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. The communication of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration. It is, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls B.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, that is, the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and the payout ball gami operation determination setting process is performed. , Set the error status output to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit The dispensing operation for out There are a PRDY signal informing of a possible logic state (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power recovery, so it is extremely effective after power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device is provided to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the fact that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible is notified. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not B is full, and the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. Is determined. For example, to determine whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls B, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used, and the full tank detection sensor 154 performs the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank (2 ms before) and out-of-bulb check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON from OFF. When the state transitions to, the timing of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the game ball B stored in the lower bowl 202 is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is not full in the stored game ball B is stored in the state information storage area.

  To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to check whether the tank is full or out of ball. When the detection signal from the ball cut switch is ON in the processing, when the detection signal from the ball cut switch is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball cut check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. When is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and a ball to that effect is transmitted. While the cutout information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. If not, the out-of-ball information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball defeat are set, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. To do. For example, when the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the information about the ball cutting described above being read from the state information storage area, it is handled. Display data (display value 1 (numeral “1”) in the present embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display based on this various information are created. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number, the frame state One command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL and determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and this power failure warning is notified. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552 is performed. The timer update process is performed in step CR, and in step S554, CR Communication processing, full tank and out-of-ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and LED processing is performed in step S564. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs the payer ACK signal indicating that the various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power outage notice signal is input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of payout information is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

  Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage areas for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the sum is calculated.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "processing at power-off of payout control unit".

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the power-on process of the payout control unit is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[10-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 187 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. The order is set to V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[11-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 185. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral controller power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 185. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initialization processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, hot start / cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control command reception interrupt process to be described later, a command relating to the control of the game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to this. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. Repeatedly judge whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so as not to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the contact detection sensor body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374 provided in the effect operation unit 300, Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the bump output detection sensor 375 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”). Various information obtained by the operation of the unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the pressing operation unit 303. Operation history information, etc.) is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the 302, is appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the touch operating unit 302 in the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, a lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specification value ranging from the brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to have the set brightness specification value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that compose the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness. It is possible to set one luminance specified value up to the specified value.

  For example, when the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, the 0th (zero) brightness designation at which the current brightness temporarily becomes the minimum brightness (light off) When the brightness is set to the first brightness designated value that is the next highest brightness level, the predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linear equation) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or the tone curve like a spline curve, while the contact operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating operation in the clockwise direction, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness to the 1st brightness specified value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness while the production is in progress, and at this time, the player (or the clerk in the game hall) A person in charge) can set a desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the production of the effect, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. By displaying a rod-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image what the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th brightness designation value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is directly illuminated with light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. The normal pallet value is selected from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value, in one of 17 steps in 5% steps. In a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are specified values, a palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a tone curve like a spline curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. It is a value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation, out of a range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

  In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Of the various decorative boards that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and that are provided on the game board side that is directly illuminated by light, a palette is provided for a specific decorative board (LED that is felt dazzling by the player) (not shown). The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information, which is the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. The special pallet value is different from the normal pallet value in that there is only one step, and is one of the 32 step ranges from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the brightness designation is set as the above-described gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits the indirect light for the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the While being set according to the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) makes contact operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designation value by the operation of 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to be low, the brightness is changed to direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off) and the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level) Then, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the smallest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off)). Also, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emitting mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set, set the light emission mode according to the flow of production, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame Then, the normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce more effect), and By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, it is possible to extremely easily change the balance of the entire light emitting mode. That is, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to set the maximum brightness from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specified value up to the brightness specified value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one specified luminance value is set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship of the light emission modes set (bright or dark) is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the above relationship).

  Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is normally managed by the palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted respectively.

  Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data for one minute (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, a delay in processing time can be prevented, but so-called dropped frames occur, but various speakers such as a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a main body frame speaker 622 are generated by sound data output processing described later. (Hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers".) From the system, it is possible to prioritize the production of the effect sound such as music and effect sound that match various effects.

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel in the sound data creation process described later. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various effects.

  Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the time-sequentially arranged screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound command data that directs the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effect, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series to configure the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which form the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the top drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own process is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated so as to be instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed, and are also used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to hold prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp pallet setting processing. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the maximum brightness is reached from the above-described first brightness designation value. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the normal pattern A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holdings (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. The command, the symbol storage command that is output when the number of start pending changes, and whether or not it is the special winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 is analyzed. Recognize whether it is a game state.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Various commands are analyzed. Various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related commands, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related commands, various commands classified as jackpot related commands, various commands classified as power-on, and general commands. Fig. Various commands related to tuning performance, various commands related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified to notification display, various commands classified to status display, various commands related to test, and There are various other commands. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical data. The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging emission mode data defining the emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set, The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one minute (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. It is read from the peripheral control ROM (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Outputs sound data from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value 0 to 0. The values are converted to values of 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the music is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. And sound effects are played. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjusting switch, music and sound effects are made to flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. Is becoming

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display. For a fixed period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the vessel (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, the peripheral control unit) And 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received and after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit. Except the above), it can be adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) In the fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the periphery 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. (Until a second elapses), the resistance at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is operated by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The voltage divided by is converted into a value of seven levels of the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is touched by the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust the sub-volume value of the effect sound by setting the substrate volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the or pressing operation unit 303. It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the sound source built in the peripheral control IC have a plurality of output volume in the sound source built in the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and audio. It is designed to be output as data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top central speaker on the door frame 3 side, The volume that flows from the top-side speaker and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the sound source built in the peripheral control IC. The volume control switch that is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting is combined with the adjusted board volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually the center of the top of the door frame 3 side. The speaker, the top side speaker, and the main volume speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value that is a volume, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data. Is the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track used and the sub-volume for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track used. The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually combined with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top side speaker and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 is affected. To briefly explain the control of sending a notification sound to notify a clerk in the hall of misconduct, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the effect sound is incorporated. Sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The synthesized volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 6 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 2 to output it as audio data The amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, but the effect sound is the above-mentioned sound. It is proceeding according to the generation schedule data.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), After the lapse of this predetermined period, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 so that the sound can be heard. Going on.

  In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 is generated. When a notification sound is played to notify a clerk of the hall of an illegal act against a person, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is used for the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Although it is played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main frame speaker 622, the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. Therefore, after the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side. Then, when the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound started flowing, but rather. Thiine so that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point that has elapsed starting to flow a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the sound produced by various speakers such as music and sound effects is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 does. When a malfunction occurs or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff member such as the clerk in the game hall from being liable to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for regular processing and back up.

  Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1008-step The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value of 1), that is, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU does not change the state. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the regular processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 1 is set to FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process on the way, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG. By notifying the V blank signal interruption process and setting the value 0 to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, so that the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine. Whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed is determined. To have. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in the next step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of which the processing has been omitted is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 185. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[11-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 185 will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 185. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. When the determination is made, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 185. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor / solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the like) ) Is driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The moving position is grasped by setting or acquiring the moving position.

  Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the touch operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, or the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 is adjusted, or the door is opened. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5.

  Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Backup is performed by copying to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas and the SDRAM is used. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the above and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the effect progresses within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185, various processes related to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to send the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC for 1 byte (8 bits). ) Information is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is triggered by this, and peripheral command command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1-byte (8-bit) information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value 1 is set, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the mode is the second byte of the main serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the second byte of the main serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data in a certain mode is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game ball B is rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise occurs. The environment is susceptible to.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main-circulation serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main-circulation serial data. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the received status is assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), And ends this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period over which the information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data that has already been retrieved from the reception buffer in step S1202. Then, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, the routine ends as it is.

[11-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power outage notification signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 189, to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. It is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is not input, the CPU ends the routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input, and the power failure notice signal is not input. When it is determined that this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the CPU performs the power saving processing. Perform (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing of the command (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure advance notice signal is input. To determine. In other words, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination of step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear processing in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 185 is restarted.

  As described above, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It doesn't take it. On the other hand, if the power outage notification signal is not continuously input and released in the endless loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, and thus the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Is becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processing are updated (step S106), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3002 as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM first. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S232). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process of controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. In addition, when it becomes the mode which suggests "2R big hit", the processing which controls the opening and closing of special winning a prize mouth 2005 is executed according to the 2R big hit game state.

  Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after opening control of the special winning opening 2005, each process of setting a time saving flag and a time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" 2R jackpot game It is set when ending the state, ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Then, the time saving flag is a big hit next time, or when the count value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201 described later or a second special symbol stop not shown. Reset by processing.

  Further, the time saving counter is a counter showing the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation of the time saving state, and controls to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, when the big hit game state is ended, the number of times the short-time state is continued is set. Then, the hour / hour counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but it becomes the next big hit before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (return the counter value to "0").

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol reserve storage area is stored. On condition that the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002, the same is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value thereof, the following step S243 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the newly reserved state. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination processing for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S245), the processing is ended.

  However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the two LEDs of the first special reserve number indicator in the function display unit 1400 are first reserved. While updating to correspond to the number of memories, the command for instructing the first number of reserved memories in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 stored command 0 ~ 4)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It is like this.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Game play mode type), the acquired special random number type (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved counters) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto are set (step S262).

  Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory to be held, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control installed on the peripheral control board 1510 before the reach effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Stored in advance, when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the first variation pattern command is received and stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in advance. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

  In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), This can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion is made possible. .

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S234).

  Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, the same is shown in FIG. 193. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the RAM with built-in main control, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “1” (step S252). In the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S253-, in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol in the suspended state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the number of second reserved memories is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second holding state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second held. While updating so as to correspond to the memory number, a command for instructing the second reserved memory number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 stored command 0 ~ 1)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It is like this.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the number of the first reserved memory based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 is set to "4", while the game to the second starting opening 2004. The upper limit of the number of second retained memories based on the entry of the ball B is set to "1". The second starting opening 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time saving state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit of "1" is set to "1", the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a second start opening 2004 Even if the game ball B is entered, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state in which the chance to win the big hit cannot be obtained.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and random numbers used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and the first special random number selection process or the like is performed based on the read first special random number for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control stops )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. The mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 195, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner with respect to random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 222 (A) (first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal process is being executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 197 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one kind of the first special random number coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and three kinds of different big hit judgment values Each of the first special random numbers matches the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has been won for the small hit, and the 315 different first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. It is related (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 3/319). Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one type of second special random number is a big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won. Matching and different from the big hit judgment value 144 kinds of second special random numbers coincide with the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and 174 kinds of second special random numbers showing the above-mentioned deviation judgment The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

  The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit is generated (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

  The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process ends.

  On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state and a non-time saving used at the time when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table at the time of the state. Then, in the reach determination table at the time saving state, the above reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating that no reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number reaches, The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), when it is determined that reach loss occurs (step S317), the variation is The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the big symbol design table shown in FIG. 197 (B) with the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of big hit is determined by, and the mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times. (15 rounds) By repeating the game ball B can enter the special winning opening 2005 (easy) 15R jackpot game state is controlled, after the jackpot game state special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) If a big hit does not occur before the fluctuation display of 7 is executed 77 times, it will be finished. After opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 that ten game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is closed twice. (2 rounds) By repeating the game ball B into the special winning opening 2005 (easy), it is controlled to a 2R jackpot gaming state, and if it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot gaming state, it is a jackpot gaming state. After the end of the special symbols (first special symbol, the second special symbol) variable display is executed until 77 times are executed until it is a big hit, it is finished in a short time control, before the start of the 2R big hit game state If it is controlled to the non-time saving state, it is determined to be one of the two types of big hits, 2R big hit, which is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game state is over.

  In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, eight determination values are distributed when the 15R jackpot is hit, and 192 determination values are assigned when the 2R jackpot is hit. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4R probability of 15R jackpot, and a 96% probability of 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are distributed in the case of the 15R jackpot, and four determination values are distributed in the case of the 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 98% probability of 15R jackpot and a 2% probability of 2R jackpot. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is higher than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, and the probability of being determined as a 15R jackpot is high. Is configured as such, when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002, the game It will be in an advantageous state for the person.

  Also, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197 (C) are compared to determine the type of small hit, and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening / closing pattern in which the character prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice, and the game ball B is controlled to a small hitting game state in which the game ball B can enter the character prize opening 2006 (easy). During the small hitting game state, by guiding all the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 to the first losing hole 2535, the game ball B is received in the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008. It is difficult to hit the first small hit 2. The opening / closing pattern in which the character prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed 9 times to control the gaming ball B to a small hitting game state in which it can enter the character prize opening 2006 (easy), The second V is obtained by guiding one of the game balls B, which has won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hitting game state, to the third sorting device 2550 after closing the prize winning opening 2006. The game ball B can be received in the winning opening 2008, and when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small hitting gaming state (for example, 29 Seconds) or when the large prize hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the large prize hole 2005, the open / close pattern is closed 15 times (15 rounds) and the game ball B is large. Winning hole 20 5R can be entered into (easy) 15R big hit game state is controlled, and after the big hit game state ends, until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times If it is not a big hit, it will be finished and it will be finished. By opening and closing the character prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and executing an opening / closing pattern nine times, the game ball B is controlled to a small hitting game state in which the game ball B can enter the character prize opening 2006 (easy). , One of the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hitting game state is guided to the first V winning hole 2007 after the prize winning hole 2006 is closed, and the game ball Based on that B is received in the first V winning opening 2007, after opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hitting game state, or 10 gaming balls B are won in the big winning opening 2005. When the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2403 detects that the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B is allowed to enter the special winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 15R jackpot gaming state. Shi After the end of the big hit game state special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the big display is executed 77 times, if it is not a big hit, it is finished. Of the three types of small hits, it is decided to be one of the big hits.

  In the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed when the second small hit occurs, and one judgment value is distributed when the third small hit occurs. ing. In other words, if a lottery result that is a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the probability is 99.5% to be the second small win, and the probability to be 0.5% to be the third small win. You won't win a small hit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small hit occurs, and 130 judgment values are distributed when the second small hit occurs. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of the third small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of becoming the first small win, a 65% probability of becoming the second small prize, and a 25% probability. It will be the third small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared with the small symbol symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the prize winning slot 2006 is won. By guiding one of the game balls B to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined as the third small hit which is always the 15R big hit game state after the small hit game state ends is increased. Is configured as such, when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002, the game It will be in an advantageous state for the person.

  Further, when the type of small hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is decided to the second small hit, it is decided as the second small hit symbol as the small hit symbol, and when it is decided as the third small hit, it is decided as the third small hit symbol as the small hit symbol. .. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is selected. As the second small hit pattern, the third small hit pattern is determined as the small hit pattern when the third small hit pattern is determined.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the deviating symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S328, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (may be an instruction of the stop symbol aspect of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). Then, after that, as the processing of step S329, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting processing (step S282), this processing ends.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle) Stop display in the order of decorative designs (note that the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stopping pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, a small hit is made. When the design (“final decisive battle”) is decided and the 2R jackpot is specified, the 2R jackpot design (the left, middle, and right decorative designs are the same even number among the designs “0” to “9”) ), And when the 15R big hit is specified, it is decided to be the 15R big hit pattern (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative designs are the same odd design among the designs of "0" to "9"). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" and different inside decorative symbols; reach loss) If it is determined to be a design), and if the removal is specified, it is determined as a removal design without a reach (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decoration designs are different), and changes. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game state can be controlled to the time saving state until it is executed up to 77 times, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits have occurred after the shift control is performed. Specifically, it is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game state, and if a big number of big hits occur after that, without controlling to the time saving state after the predetermined number of big hit game states are finished. The normal state may be controlled. Further, even if the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number, it may be controlled to the non-time saving state during the big hit game state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit game state.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S341), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag. If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (see FIG. (No) is selected (step S346), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (loss without executing the reach effect) occurs, the variation pattern table at the time of loss ( (Not shown) is selected (step S347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the variation pattern table is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, the variation pattern table selected from among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the count value of the hour / hour counter is set to "0". To do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the count value of the hour / hour counter is "0", and if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the hour / hour counter is not "0", then Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of out-of-range selected in the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of out-of-range selected in the non-time saving state, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 200, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S371. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S381 As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). With this, when the variable display of the predetermined number of times (77 times in this example) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control (Normal state control) starts.

  Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit in a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round count. Control to hit the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S401) and the special winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches "0", and the big winning is opened. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process goes to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Control to be executed.

  Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect display of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, set the big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) It has become.

  In addition, the big hit execution flag which indicates that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening after-process (step S403) of the big hit control process (step S235A) Opening / closing control of the special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2403. It is reset when the open / close control of repeating the open / close pattern to be closed 2 times or 15 times) is completed (all the rounds executable in the jackpot game). While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is executed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

  If the big hit flag is not set (step S386), and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, similarly, a small hit start command (first small hit, first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) according to the small hit The hit start command, the second small hit start command, and the third small hit start command) are set.

  In addition, the small hitting execution flag which shows that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting mid-process (step S411) of the small hitting control process (step S236A) described later. ) Ends the opening / closing control of the prize winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times). Will be reset when you do. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the standby time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

  When the process of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S395), this processing ends.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board that informs the player that the special jackpot (first special bucket, second special bucket) changes to a big jackpot when the variable display is stopped Pre-opening processing for the special winning opening, which waits until it is executed by 1510 or waits until the next round starts (step S401)
2. Control the special winning opening 2005 to the open state based on the fact that the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, or open the special winning opening 2005 based on the start of the next round. It controls and after closing the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005, it is closed. Processing during opening of the special winning opening (step S402)
3. After all the rounds are finished, the big winning opening opening post-processing is waited for until the peripheral control board 1510 informs the player that the jackpot gaming state is finished (step S403).

  The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the special winning opening 2005 in an open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the special winning opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round for controlling the state, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display of the big hit game according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker and the like.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing for starting the small hitting game state (step S410)
2. Small hitting processing during small hitting which monitors the entering time and opening time of the game ball B in the game state (step S411)

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. Also, when the entry of the game ball B to the specific area is detected in the small hitting process, the big hitting execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hitting game state (15 rounds in this example) is a big hit. The number of times is set in the counter and the process is completed. As a result, the big hit game state is started subsequently to the small hit game state.

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S802, first, an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the ordinary symbol reserved storage area of the RAM. Perform the mouth winning process.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the universal symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. Normally the variation control stop mode of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control stop of the symbol is normally displayed as the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the second starting opening door 2411 retracts and the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. Normal electric accessory release process that executes a process for controlling the acceptance of the electric power (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 175).

[13. Game in the small hit game state]
Next, a game in the small hit game state will be described. As described above, in the present example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, the opening / closing pattern for opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed a small number of times. All the game balls B which are controlled to the state and enter the accessory winning hole 2006 during the small hitting gaming state and detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2513 are the first missing mouth sensor 2516 and the third missing mouth sensor 2518. , The first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 2515, that is, the small hitting gaming state when discharged from the inside of the winning a prize opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5. Is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning hole 2006 during the small hitting game state is accepted by the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008, and the first V winning hole sensor 2514 and the second V winning hole are received. When it is detected by the mouth sensor 2515, it is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball B entered in the accessory winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is the first lose mouth 2535 or the third lose mouth. When it is received by 2555 and detected by the first missing mouth sensor 2516 or the third missing mouth sensor 2518, after the small hitting game state, it is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state according to the control state before the small hitting.

  Further, as described above, in this example, the first small hit that controls so that all the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first losing mouth 2535, and the game that wins the winning prize opening 2006. One of the balls B is controlled so that the game ball B is guided to the third distribution device 2550 and circulates in the third distribution table 2554, and then the second V winning opening 2008 and two third loses. One of the game balls B that has won in the accessory prize opening 2006 is guided to the first V prize hole 2007, and the second small hit that is controlled to be received in any of the mouths 2555. The third small hit to be controlled in this way, and either one of the small hits is controlled to a gaming state.

  In addition, in the first small hit, compared to the second small hit and the third small hit, the number of opening and closing of the prize winning hole 2006 is smaller, and in addition, all the game balls B winning the prize winning hole 2006 are prize winning. The execution period of the small hitting game state (the period from the start to the end of the small hitting game state) is short because the first losing mouth sensor 2516 is guided from the mouth 2006 to the closest first losing mouth 2535 and is detected. In the third small hit, one of the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 is the first V winning hole 2007 in which the distance from the prize winning hole 2006 is next to the first losing hole 2535. Since it is guided to and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small hitting game state becomes shortest after the first small hitting. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one of the game balls B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the third distribution device 2550 that is the farthest from the prize winning opening 2006, The gaming ball B guided to the three-sorting device 2550 is circulated in the third sorting table 2554, and then the gaming ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515. Since the game ball B received in the third lose mouth 2555 is detected by the third lose mouth sensor 2518, the execution period of the small hit game state is the longest among the above three kinds of small hits.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when it is determined as a small hit based on the first special random number, it is a second small hit. The percentage is set high, and in the normal state, the second small hit is executed in most cases, whereas in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the above time saving state, the small hit is based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed higher than in the normal state, the third small hit is executed once every four small hits in the time saving state. .

  That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hitting game state, it is advantageous for the player that the 15R big hitting game state is a time saving state. Since the state is controlled to shift, by making one game ball B of the game balls B that has entered the accessory winning hole 2006 during the small hitting game state circulate in the third distribution table 2554. While paying attention for a fixed period of time whether it is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 or in the third losing opening 2555, the small hit game is displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Even if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the state, it is only controlled again to the time saving state after the 15R jackpot gaming state, so the ball enters the role winning portion 2006 Rather there may decrease the game excitement when one game balls B of gaming balls B was shown visited the first struck partial table 2554. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol that is executed in the time saving state, by increasing the ratio of the third small hit in which the execution period of the small hitting game state is short, the small hitting game state is shortened during the time saving state. It is supposed to be finished in time.

  Further, as described above, in the third small hit, when the distribution rotor 2531 is rotated from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 receives the first ball It flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the passage 2536, comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, and is guided to the right, and enters the first V winning opening 2007. To do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball B distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotor 2531 from the housed state to the housed state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. As a result, the player cannot see the game. Further, the first V winning opening 2007 can be entered when the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second loss opening 2543, but the distribution door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. That is, the existence of the distribution door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game ball B distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 is displayed on the game board 5 in a short time. Since the presence of the first V winning opening 2007 is also difficult to be recognized due to the discharging to the rear, the player has guided the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the first V winning opening 2007. It is difficult to notice that the game ball B passes. In this way, in the case of the small hitting game state, it is difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit occurs in the time saving state. Without paying attention to the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008)), the small hitting game state is executed and the small hitting game is executed. After the state ends, the 15R jackpot gaming state can be executed. As a result, the small hitting game state and the 15R big hitting game state are continuously generated in a short time, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 as the second small hit, and when the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 as the third small hit, the effect is produced. The effect of the small hit game state executed on the display device 1600 is different. Specifically, in the case of the second small hit, whether the game ball B sorted by the third sorting device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, In contrast to the case where a third small hit occurs, an effect that does not make the distribution rotor 2531 turn conscious (for example, when the third small hit occurs It is understood that the player is in the small hitting game state by performing the same notification as that (when the third small hit is made, the big hit is notified instead of the small hit). It is difficult to obtain a prize ball that is different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state, as a special bonus opportunity that is similar to that in the small hit game state is executed before the start of the big hit game state. You may be allowed to execute the production. As a result, a player who recognizes that he / she has won the 15R jackpot can get a prize ball different from that of the 15R jackpot gaming state by executing a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot gaming state, which improves the enjoyment of the game. To do.

  If the arrival time at the V prize hole is shorter in the third small hit than in the second small hit, the route until the game ball B guided by the second small hit is accepted in the V prize hole. The length of the (first route) and the route (second route) until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted in the V winning port becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V winning port. Not limited to the one, if the arrival time at the V prize hole is longer than the third small hit, the route (first route) until the game ball B guided by the second small hit is accepted at the V prize hole The game ball B guided by the third small hit may be shorter than the route (second route) until it is received in the V winning opening. For example, by providing a decelerating means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first path, the arrival time at the V winning opening may be longer than that of the game ball B passing through the second path.

  Further, in the above-described example, a plurality of V winning openings, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning opening 2006 One game ball B among the game balls B won in is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V winning opening 2008, and in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the character object By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B won in the winning hole 2006 to the first V winning hole 2007, which is the distance from the winning prize hole 2006, which is next to the first losing hole 2535, Although it has been configured so that the execution period of the winning gaming state is different, the distance to the V winning opening, the number of V winning openings, etc. are not limited to those described above, and, for example, a gaming machine having only one V winning opening. The technical idea of the present invention can be applied to It is. Specifically, for example, a means for obstructing or delaying the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening such that the gaming ball B can be accepted into the V winning opening after patrol in the third distribution table 2554 (obstacle). Etc. are provided, and there is no means for inhibiting or delaying the second small hit which takes a long time to reach the V winning opening and the acceptance of the game ball B to the V winning opening (at least as compared to the second small hit). As long as the number provided is small, it is a third small hit with a short arrival time to the V winning opening, and a normal state (of the first special symbol) according to the arrival time to the common V winning opening. It is also possible to change the execution ratio between the variable display) and the time saving state (variable display of the second special symbol).

[13-1. Error notification in small hit game state]
Next, error notification in the small hitting game state will be described. In this example, in the small hitting game state, the time until the gaming ball B won in the winning a prize slot 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if the gaming ball B is not discharged even after a predetermined period of time, an error notification is given. .

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, a setting process for starting the small hit game state is executed.

  When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and the interval beamer. When is timed out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the small hitting game state is started. The initial value "0" is set to the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the start (step S423).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening / closing pattern data according to the type of the small hit that is being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), and the selection. Based on the opened / closed pattern data, control of the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process shifts to the small hitting process (step S411). When the small hit process flag of is updated (step S426), this process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing.

  The opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and indicates the operation mode of each of the accessory winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the accessory winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data according to the small hit type selected in step S424. Then, the accessory winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 are operated in the mode shown in FIG. 151.

  FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process (step S412).

  When the small hitting process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first increments the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time after starting the small hitting game state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. Then, the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 corresponds to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game state) of the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. The data is read out, and the accessory winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 are opened / closed based on the read opening / closing pattern data (step S432).

  Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, if the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006 is turned on (step S433), that is, the winning opening 2006. If the game ball B has been accepted, the residual ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not been discharged from the inside of the prize winning hole 2006 among the game balls B that have won the prize winning hole 2006 is incremented by 1 (step S434). ..

  Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is first received in the accessory winning hole 2006 after the small hitting game state is started (when the first game ball B is entered). In (step S435), it is provided corresponding to each of the small hit types as the longest period expected until all the game balls B entered in the accessory winning hole 2006 including the game ball B are discharged. The estimated maximum period is set in the emission monitoring timer (step S436).

  In the present example, in the case of the first small hit, the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006 is not allotted to the first atari passage 2536 by the sorting rotor 2531, but all is to the second loser 2543. In order to enter, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). Further, in the case of the second small hit, one of the game balls B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531 to obtain the first atari passage. In order for the game ball B that has entered the third distribution device 2550 through 2536 to circulate in the third distribution table 2554 and then enter either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2555 The longest period among the three types of small hits is set as the estimated longest period (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, although one of the game balls B received in the prize winning hole 2006 is distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531, In order to accept the game ball B that has passed through the atari passage 2536 at the second V winning port 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period next to the first small hit is set as the expected maximum period ( For example, 60000s).

  The discharge monitoring timer is subtracted in step S431, and when the number of game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from inside the prize winning hole 2006 do not match, the discharge monitoring timer times out. If it continues until later, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is being performed.

  In addition, if the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game state is monitored and this elapsed time becomes the assumed maximum period according to the small hitting type being executed, it means that some kind of abnormality (error) or cheating has occurred. It may be determined that the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory winning port 2006 in the small hitting game state is monitored and this elapsed time is the estimated maximum period according to the small hit type being executed. When it becomes, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or an illegal act is performed, or the timing at which the game balls B are actually distributed by the distribution rotor 2531 (in the case of the first small hit). With the start of the small hitting game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward from the first distribution solenoid 2 When 32 is turned off (non-energized) and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 operates to face right (first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotor 2531), second small hit Then, after the first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotor 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again, and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward from the first position. The timing when the distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is turned to the right (second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotor 2531), In the case of three small hits, after the timing of the second distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again and the distribution rotation is performed. Timing in which the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state in which the housing portion 2531a of 2531 faces upward and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces rightward ( The elapsed time from the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotor 2531)) is monitored, and when this elapsed time becomes the expected maximum period according to the small hit type being executed, some abnormality (error) or irregularity It may be determined that an action is being performed.

  In addition, when detecting the discharge of the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, that is, when discharging the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, the first loss sensor 2516, the first When the game ball B is detected by any one of the V winning opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and the third losing opening sensor 2518 (step S437), the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438). ).

  Then, whether or not the residual ball counter is "0", that is, whether the number of game balls B received in the winning a prize slot 2006 and the number of gaming balls B discharged from the winning a prize slot 2006 match. It is determined whether or not (step S439), and if the residual number counter is “0”, it is determined that no abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or an illegal act has occurred (step S440). .. As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided for each of the small hit types as the longest period expected from the start of the small hit game state to the discharge of all the game balls B from the accessory winning hole 2006. It shows the remaining period of the expected maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the processing ends without executing the subsequent processing. Thereby, when the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric auditors product control process (step S114) are executed again, the small hitting process is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. Like

  If the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or misconduct has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). The hitting process is ended. For the discharge error notification, an error display on the effect display device 1600, output of a notification sound from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., a predetermined mode by a lamp / LED provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 etc. In this example, a message such as "Discharge is abnormal." Is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600 to output the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. Is not done. That is, since the state where the remaining ball counter is not “0” indicates a slight abnormality such that most of the game balls B that have entered the winning a prize slot 2006 are not discharged, the abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. Is not displayed to make the player uncomfortable or anxious. After performing the discharge error notification in step S441, by finishing the small hitting process without updating the small hitting process flag, the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric accessory control process (step) When S114) is executed, the small hitting medium process is executed again. That is, all the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RAM clear switch is operated by the game store staff to completely erase the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Until it is done (until it is reset), the small hitting game state will not be ended, and the discharge error notification will be executed.

  When it is determined that the remaining ball counter is “0” in step S439, it is determined whether or not the game ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). If the game ball B has not entered the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball B has entered the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2555 and the first losing occurs. If detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third lose mouth sensor 2518, a small hit end command for instructing execution of the effect at the end of the small hit game state is set (step S443), and the small hit start process (step S411). When the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to () (step S447), this process ends.

  In step S442, if the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the big hit game starts. After setting the waiting time up to the interval timer (step S444), the small hit execution flag is reset and the big hit execution flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning jackpot jackpot start command is set (step S446) for instructing execution of an effect at the time of starting the jackpot gaming state based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first V winning slot 2007 and the second V winning slot 2008 (step S446), and the above small When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the hit start process (step S411) (step S447), this process ends.

  In this way, in this example, when the game ball B is received in the prize winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time the game ball B is discharged from the prize winning hole 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is increased. By subtracting 1 from 1, the number of game balls B remaining without being discharged from the prize winning hole 2006 (center prize 2500) can be grasped. Also, the period until the discharge error notification is executed (estimated longest period) is made different according to the small hit type, in other words, the distribution destination of the game ball B, and the game ball B passing through the first atari passage 2536 is set to the first ball. In the third small hit which is received at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the game ball B is entered into the third sorting device 2550 and circulates in the third sorting table 2554. The period (estimated maximum period) until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter than the case of two small hits. That is, the shorter the time (distance) to reach the V winning opening is, the shorter the period until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter.

  Normally, the game ball B does not remain in the prize winning hole 2006, so if the state where the game ball B remains in the prize winning hole 2006 continues for a long time, some abnormality ( It can be determined that an error has occurred. Further, when it is detected that more game balls B are discharged than the number of game balls B that have won the prize hole 2006, an illegal act such as illegally winning the game ball B in the prize hole 2006 is performed. It can be determined that there is a possibility that it has been. The pachinko machine 1 of the present example monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent acts, and if there is a suspicion of these, issues an ejection error.

  In addition, in this example, it is detected that the game balls B remain in the prize winning hole 2006, or that a larger number of game balls B than the game balls B winning the prize winning hole 2006 are discharged. Therefore, even if the discharge monitoring timer times out when the residual ball counter is not "0" and the discharge error is notified, a small amount is returned each time the main control timer interrupt process is executed without stopping the game. The hitting process is executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, and if the value of the remaining ball counter is "0", that is, if the normal state is restored, the first V winning opening 2007 and the The game ball B is automatically returned to the state in which the entry of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 is determined, and the small hitting game state is ended.

  In this example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter is not “0” after the discharge error notification is executed in step S441 of the small hitting process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, Priority is given to the error notification regarding this serious abnormality. As a serious abnormality, for example, when any of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects a magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification) ), When it is detected that the door frame 3 is opened (door opening error notification), there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is performed. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is ended, and the error notification relating to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) Etc., and the error notification relating to the serious abnormality may be restarted again after the end of the error notification relating to the serious abnormality, or the error notification relating to the serious abnormality may be issued to the small hit gaming state. By overwriting the discharge error notification of step S441 in step S441, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small hitting game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, or the like. Output, lighting / points of lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 Although it is not reflected in such as (executed so that it can be viewed and viewed) (executed in the back), the content of the discharge error notification with the passage of time even while the error notification related to the serious abnormality is being issued. When the error notification relating to a serious abnormality is completed, the display on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, and the top are displayed so that the discharge error notification can be visually recognized and listened to according to the progress. It may be reflected in the output of a side speaker or the like, lighting or blinking of a lamp, an LED or the like provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 (for example, by starting the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hitting game state). 5 seconds after, the error notification related to the serious abnormality is started, and when this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, the error notification related to the serious abnormality is ended. After the start of the discharge error notification in step S441 is resumed from the content after 35 seconds in Koatari gaming state in).

  In addition, the discharge error notification may be made different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is "1" or more in step S439 of the small hitting process and is less than "0". When the remaining ball counter is "1" or more, it merely indicates a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the prize winning port 2006 is not discharged, while the remaining ball counter is less than "0". In this case, this is a serious abnormality in which more game balls B than the number of game balls B that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 are discharged, and the game balls B are illegally entered into the prize winning port 2006. There is a possibility. Therefore, when a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the winning a prize slot 2006 is not discharged occurs, as a discharge error notification 1, for example, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the door frame 3 while not displaying an error sound by continuously outputting the effect sound from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. Part of the LED is made to partially emit light, and when a serious abnormality occurs that the number of game balls B that have entered the game ball B or more is discharged, as the discharge error notification 2, for example, the entire area of the effect display device 1600. “Illegal occurrence!” Is displayed on the screen, and the volume of the effect sound is displayed from the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like. In this case, a fraudulent sound is output as an error sound, and all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are turned on so that the entire door frame 3 is turned on. The occurrence may be notified.

  Further, in this example, the detection signal of the second loss mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 makes the third distribution in the second small hit game state. When the game ball B guided to the distribution guide path 2551 is detected by the second loss mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the effect display device 1600 and the main body frame speaker. 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, the game board 5 and the lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to allow the game ball B to circulate in the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550. An effect that excites which of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 is accepted is executed.

  It should be noted that the detection signal of the second losing mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the game ball by the second losing mouth sensor 2517. The presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined according to the detection of B. For example, when the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from a V winning opening or a losing opening planned according to the small hit type in the above small hitting process, or depending on the small hit type. When there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected with a V winning opening or missing opening different from the planned V winning opening or missing opening (different from the planned passage or winning opening depending on the small hit type) When the game ball B is directed to the passage or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hit mid processing.

  Specifically, as the V winning opening and the loss mouth planned according to the type of the small hit, the first losing mouth 2535 is planned in the case of the first small hit, and the second opening in the case of the second small hit. The V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 is planned, and in the case of the third small hit, the first V winning opening 2007 is planned. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B is received in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 in the small hit processing, When it is detected that the game ball B has been received in one of the first losing mouth 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small winning medium processing in the case of the second small winning, during the small winning in the case of the third small winning. When it is detected in the process that the game ball B is received in any one of the first losing mouth 2535, the second V winning mouth 2008 and the third losing mouth 2555, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and, for example, the figure As shown by 207, “illegal occurrence!” Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. As "illegal It is being performed. ”, And a sorting error notification that notifies the occurrence of fraudulent activity by making all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 emit light to make the entire door frame 3 emit light. It may be executed. In this case, it is possible to immediately notify the occurrence of fraudulent activity, and it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity at an early stage.

  Further, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting the game ball B flowing inside the second distribution guide path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guide path 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. May be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game is performed in one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555 in the small hit medium processing. If there is a possibility that the ball B will be accepted, that is, if it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541 due to the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor, the second In the case of a small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the processing during the small hit, but the second loss sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, so that the second distribution guide path 2541 is passed. Game ball B heads to the first V prize hole 2007 When it is determined that the second ball detection sensor 2517 detects the game ball B after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit medium processing in the case of the third small hit When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, a V winning opening or a missing opening different from the planned V winning opening or a missing opening such as When the possibility of detecting the game ball B occurs, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when an illegal act may occur, and it is possible to detect the illegal act at an early stage.

  The distribution error notification mode may be changed according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level). For example, in the case of the first small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B. When it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit medium processing, but the second loss If the mouth sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high when it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007. Judgment is made and, for example, "illegal!" Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and a loud volume "Illegal has been done" is displayed from the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like. Output with By informing the occurrence of fraudulent activity, in the case of a second small hit in the small hit medium processing, in the case of the third small hit in the small hit medium processing, after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the inside of the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading for the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B by the two-haze sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is determined. It is determined that it is low, and for example, a misconduct is performed by displaying "Discharge abnormality." In a partial area of the effect display device 1600 and not outputting the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, or the like. The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. That is, when the game ball B passes through the route in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the preset ratio of the game ball B entering the V winning opening according to the small hit type. If the expected V-winning degree is higher than the preset V-winning expectation depending on the type of small hit that is being performed, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and fraudulent activity is performed. That the gaming ball B passes through the route in which the gaming ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the preset rate of the gaming ball B entering the V winning opening according to the small hit type. If it is (when the expected V winning degree is lower than the expected V winning degree preset according to the type of small hit being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and the misconduct The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. Also, when the expected V winning degree is lower than the preset expected V winning degree according to the small hit type being executed, the player himself / herself suffers a disadvantage, but the gaming shop side is damaged. Since it does not occur, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such an abnormality is low.

  Further, the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a missing opening different from the V winning opening or missing opening planned according to the small hit type, or a V winning planned according to the small hit type. Matter winning hole during the small hitting process during the period during which the distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility that the game ball B is detected by the V winning hole or missing hole different from the mouth or missing hole. Even if it is determined that a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the 2006 is not discharged has occurred, a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or missing opening planned according to the small hit type is made. Based on the fact that the game ball B has been detected and the possibility of detecting the game ball B at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening planned according to the small hit type has occurred. The distribution error notification being executed by , It continues to be performed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the winning a prize hole 2006 is not discharged has occurred in the processing during the small hit is in a visible / viewable state. Although not executed, it is executed in the back, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 is advanced with the lapse of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball B that has entered the winning a prize hole 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes “0”, the gaming ball B that has entered the winning a prize port 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. As described above, even when a minor abnormality occurs during the error notification (the distribution error notification in this example) based on the occurrence of the serious abnormality, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed so that it can be viewed and viewed. However, it is quietly executed behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (distribution error notification in this example), and when a minor abnormality is resolved, an error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is ended.

  In this example, even in a state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third missing mouth sensor 2518 is monitored, and when the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that the cheating is being performed and the occurrence of the cheating is notified. It is like this. In addition, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state does not occur, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss mouth sensor 2517 may be monitored, and the second distribution may be performed. When the gaming ball B is detected by either the detection sensor or the second missing mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, it is determined that the fraudulent activity is being performed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is notified. Good. That is, in a state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the ratio of the game ball B entering the V prize hole, any passage in the prize hole 2006 is played. Even if the ball B is passing, it may be determined that the fraudulent act is being performed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act may be notified.

  In the example described above, the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening planned according to the small hit type or when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441. In addition, the distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility that the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a missing opening different from the V winning opening or a missing opening planned according to the small hit type. In this case, the small hitting process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. Moreover, even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal (“0”), the abnormal state is automatically recovered and a small hit. The gaming state may not be ended. As a result, the occurrence of the abnormality can be surely grasped.

  Also, after the distribution error notification, if the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a loss opening (regular entrance) planned according to the small hit type, or depending on the small hit type. When a game ball B rolling on a planned route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit sensor 2517 detects the second small hit), the distribution error notification ends. You may do so. In addition, when the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the loss opening (regular entrance) planned according to the small hit type after the discharge error notification, or according to the small hit type When the gaming ball B rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, in the case of the second small hit, when the second loss sensor 2517 detects it), the discharge error notification is ended. Good. In addition, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the execution of the discharge error notification is detected for the game ball B rolling on the planned route (regular route) according to the small hit type (for example, the second small). In the case of a hit, it may be reset every time the second missing mouth sensor 2517 is detected). In this case, after the reset, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is The discharge error notification may be made executable when the estimated maximum period according to the small hit type is reached.

[14-1. Volume adjustment]
The volume adjustment switch is used for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display device (first One special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) a fixed period when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped (in this example, the variation pattern in the peripheral control unit) After receiving the command, until 0.5 seconds elapses after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and after receiving the stop display command at the peripheral control unit and until 0.5 seconds elapses after the fixed display of the decorative pattern) Except for the above, the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect that flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. So that the it can be adjusted by rotating operation. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting switch is variable by being rotated, and the peripherally controlled A / D converter electrically connected to the volume adjusting switch has a resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjusting switch. The voltage divided by is converted from an analog value into a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and effects are output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. The sound is flowing. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, etc. are produced from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. The sound is flowing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the effect sound such as music or sound effect, the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1. Or, the contents related to the game effect, etc. are announced (for example, it is highly possible that the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be made more powerful, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player. Sound from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, but the notification sound and the notification sound of the volume adjustment switch. It has a mechanism to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation at all, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program. It has been cut way.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into 7 stages described above, and it is possible to change from mute to maximum volume in 5 stages. Thus, for example, even when a salesclerk in the hall or the like turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched sound of the body frame 4 are used. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 becomes small, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player conducts an illegal act, a large volume (in the present embodiment, , The maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (peripheral control in this example) 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received at the control section and 0.5 seconds after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control section Except for the passage of time), the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and in addition to the predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, Special control in the side control unit initial setting process (step S1000) and current time setting process (period until ending) (step S1002) and special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) (First special symbol, second special symbol) A fixed period when the variable display is started or stopped (in this example, 0.5 after the variable display command of the decorative symbol is received after the variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit). Until a lapse of seconds, or until 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed), and the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect. Or an operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (an effective period for accepting an operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in so-called button effect). ) Or the like, except, thereby making it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound music and sound effects by operating the touch operating unit 302 and the pushing operation section 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display device (first Special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (variable pattern command in the peripheral control unit in this example) Until 0.5 seconds elapses after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after the reception of, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the fixed display of the decorative pattern is received after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit), The operation period of the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variation effect (the contact operation part 302 of the effect operation unit 300 in so-called button effect). When the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotationally operated except for the period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is accepted) and the like, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the effect operation is performed. By rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the unit 300, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect can be changed and adjusted to a desired volume (any one from the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 5). .

  Specifically, the contact operation part 302 is rotated right without operating the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation part 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the sound volume of the effect sound is 1. When the volume is changed to a stepped up level, the contact operation part 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation part 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the effect sound is changed. The volume is changed to one level lower.

  FIG. 208 shows a top center speaker and a top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and a main body frame for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 in accordance with the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the fluctuating effect in which the decorative design is variably displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in the middle of the fluctuating effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example when the part 303 is pressed and when the contact operation part 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is subsequently rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 208, without changing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in order to change the volume of the effect sound from the volume 5 to the volume 4 in the middle of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 to the volume 4, and the rotation of the contact operation unit 302 is performed. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is used. At the timing of t1 when the rotary operation is performed, the changed volume is reflected on the outputs from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. .

  In addition, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes its scale in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. As a result, the current set volume can be visually identified. Further, in this example, an indicator displayed according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which an effect such as a decorative design is executed. Further, this indicator is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is semitransparently displayed so that the image of the variable effect executed on the back of the indicator can be recognized. Note that a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which the variable effect by the decorative pattern or the like is executed may be provided, and in this case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the operation of the touch operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears. After the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. It may be allowed to. Note that the above-mentioned indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area or the like that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is partitioned, and this right part is displayed. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

  Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound of the music or the effect sound are changed by rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as "beep") corresponding to the changed volume is generated. The electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. As a result, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sound of music or sound effect is produced by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from 622, while confirming the actual volume by the specific sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. The volume can be adjusted. In addition, you may make it not output a specific sound during execution of a fluctuation production. That is, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variable effect is output during the execution of the variable effect, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent a particular sound unrelated to the content of the fluctuating effect from being output during the fluctuating effect, which hinders the fluctuating effect that is being executed and reduces the enjoyment of the game.

  This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source built in the peripheral control IC, and the effect sound is changed. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation. There are two methods. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, only the clerk in the hall can rotate the volume adjusting switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, it may be difficult for the player to hear the effect sound of music or sound effect, or it may be too loud for the player to feel the effect sound of music or sound effect. is there. Therefore, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It is like this. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume, and when the hall clerk feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the effect sound of the music or the effect sound. Can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, and feel the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall to generate the effect sound of music or sound effect. When feeling noisy, it is possible to operate the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time and becomes a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the last time, The volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, when the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game feels the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or the effect sound of the sound effect, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who sits at and plays a game can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume loud and feels the production sound of the music and the sound effect loud, this time, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game produces the production operation unit 300. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 of the above.

[14-2. Volume adjustment for specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (may be muted) sound output in the high sound range (equal to or more than a predetermined frequency band).

  That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display device (first special symbol) Display, second special symbol display) a fixed period when starting or stopping the variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives a variation pattern command) After that, until 0.5 seconds elapses after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, or until 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed), further variation production In the operation period of the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (in the so-called button effect, the contact operation part 302 of the effect operation unit 300 When the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed except for the valid period for accepting the operation of the operation unit 303, etc., various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether a high-pitched sound is output or not, light emission of the LED of the door frame 3). The effect display device 1600 displays a screen for performing an environment change mode for setting (whether or not). On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of the environments that can be changed (whether high-pitched sound is output, whether the LED of the door frame 3 is emitting light, etc.) is displayed in a list, and the touch operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 will change the environment. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 in a state in which that environment setting is selected, it becomes possible to execute the process of changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output in a specific frequency band is suppressed, the volume adjustment switch is rotated, and the like. It is possible to output at the volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, although the screen in the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, the screen on the back is recognizable by being displayed semitransparently.

  Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A state in which the sound output in the specific frequency band is suppressed by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 while operating the touch operation unit 302 and selecting the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band and the specific frequency band The selection screen with the state that the sound output of is not suppressed is displayed (for example, while displaying the mini character for volume setting, displaying "treble cut on" or "treble cut off" in the balloon of the mini character, touch operation The display is switched every time the portion 302 is rotated by a predetermined rotation amount), and the touch operation portion 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output in the specific frequency band and the state in which the sound output in the specific frequency band is not suppressed. By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 with one of the two selected, the change to the selected state is determined, and the determination screen is displayed (the volume setting minicap Balloon within the displays either "You there cut of the high-frequency range," or "I no cut of the high range" of). After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears to end the environment change mode. In addition, after the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made to disappear based on the pressing operation unit 303 being operated. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect image and the effect. A lower left display area or the like that does not overlap with the indicator display when adjusting the sound volume may be partitioned, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen are displayed on this display device. May be.

  In addition, after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the contact operation is performed. Even if the section 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is invalidated, and no indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the end of the environment change mode, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is enabled and the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Will be done.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 208, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch or rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the sound volume set according to the operation, the contact operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. Changes according to the operation of the section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 are not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. Then, the decorative design is fixedly stopped based on the timing t3 at which the variation production executed by the production display device 1600 ends (the stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design is received from the main control MPU 1310a). The change according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 performed during the variable effect at different timings is reflected, that is, the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. The volume is controlled to be lower than the volume set in accordance with the rotating operation of the or the rotating operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

  In addition, after the timing of t2 when the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band in the course of the variable effect, the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is invalid. It Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the variation effect ends, the specific operation is reflected. The volume adjustment of the effect sound in the frequency band becomes effective. In addition, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the environment is reduced. The screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but it is not possible to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. In the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode is performed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. When the section 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not immediately reflected, but are reflected after the end of the variable effect executed on the effect display device 1600. Normally, from the start to the end of the fluctuating effect, the effect sound according to the content of the fluctuating effect is continuously output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. Because the output is output, when adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variable effect (the effect sound that is continuously output is interrupted for a moment, and then the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed. The player may feel uncomfortable because the output of the generated effect sound or the effect sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the effect effect, the effect effect is changed. By not reflecting the change according to this operation until the end, it is reflected after the end of the fluctuating effect, so that the effect sound that continuously flows during the fluctuating effect is output with the preset content and changes Volume of a specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the effect ends and the output of the effect sound that continuously flows according to the content of the variable effect is stopped. Since the effect sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the fluctuating effect in which the effect sound is continuously output, the continuously output effect sound is stopped and the next effect sound is stopped without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. By reflecting at the switching timing until output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, when the contact operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band during the period when the variable effect is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding sound is immediately reflected and the effect sound whose volume in the specific frequency band is adjusted is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. .

  As described above, the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the variation effect is immediately reflected, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the planned effect in the changing effect that is being executed, such as making the player feel uncomfortable by changing the effect sound, the change in the changing effect is prohibited to reduce the effect of the effect. It is supposed to deter.

  Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the effect may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the course of the variable effect, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is performed. Although not reflected immediately, the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band is adjusted by displaying a mini-character for volume setting on the production display device 1600 and displaying a standby display such as "wait a little" in the balloon of this mini-character. The player may be informed that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for performing is normally received. In addition, a standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is normally received is specified. The volume may be changed in accordance with the remaining time until the timing of reflecting the volume adjustment of the frequency band of, for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "a little wait" is displayed in the balloon of this mini character. It is confirmed that the player normally accepts the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for performing the standby display 1 such as "ne" and adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band. When the remaining time until the timing of reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time after the notification to "3" in the balloon of this Minikyara to display the Minikyara for volume setting, "2", may be performed stand-by display 2 to perform a countdown, such as "1". Further, when the timing to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band is reached, a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a mini character for volume setting may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to display this mini character. A reflection display such as "Begin selection reflection!" May be displayed in the balloon.

  Further, in the above example, as the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are set in advance for the equalizer. Is stored as, by switching the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and a specific frequency It is designed to switch between two levels (on and off), with the volume of the band suppressed. It should be noted that a plurality of equalizer settings having different volume suppression degrees in a specific frequency band are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching the plurality of equalizer settings, a plurality of different volume suppression levels in a specific frequency band are different. You may make it switch to a state. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a volume of a specific frequency band are rotated by a volume adjusting switch or a performance operation unit 300. The equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6 is changed to volume 3) that is suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302, the equalizer is set in advance. Is stored as a setting pattern of, and the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted to switch to any of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C. The volume is not suppressed, the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and the volume of the specific frequency band is adjusted. And while suppressing half the volume of the volume that is set in response to the rotating operation of the touch operating unit 302 of the turning operation and staging operation unit 300 of the switch may be set so as to be switched to three stages of. As a result, it becomes possible to make settings that match the tastes of various players.

  Further, the effect sound of the specific frequency band is not limited to the above, but also includes the frequency band of the voice, the low frequency range, etc., for example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the dialogue emitted from the character during the variable effect. Alternatively, when there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or may be adjusted individually, or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. Further, it may be possible to adjust the effect sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the confirmation of the big hit, the payout sound at the time of paying out the prize balls, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high range and the low range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted collectively (for example, an operation of switching between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the treble range is suppressed and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed). The operation to switch to one of the states is performed collectively by one operation), and each adjustment is performed (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state where the high range is not suppressed and the state where it is suppressed and the state where the low range is not suppressed) The operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be allowed to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, payout sound cut, big hit confirmation sound cut, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to make settings that match the tastes of various players.

  Further, in the case where a continuous effect sound is output during a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by adjusting the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. The output from the main frame speaker 622 for bass sound of No. 4 may be immediately reflected, while the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may be reflected after the big hit game state and the small hit game state are finished. As a result, the output of continuous effect sound is stopped, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is performed at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output. The top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the body frame. It is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a feeling of discomfort by reflecting it on the output from the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of No. 4. Note that during the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the player's attention to the effect contents is lower than in the variable effect. Therefore, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is the same as the volume adjustment of the effect sound. It may be immediately reflected in the outputs from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the third side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4.

  Further, in the case where a continuous effect sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during a time saving state, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is performed by the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body. The production operation unit 300 is used to immediately reflect the output from the main body speaker 622 for low-pitched sound in the frame 4 and adjust the volume of the specific frequency band in the middle of the variable production in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band. When the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of is operated, the change effect is reflected after the end of the change effect without being reflected until the end of the change effect, and the change according to the operation is reflected. When the contact operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band when there is no door 3-side top center speaker, and the top side speakers, may be caused to immediately reflected on the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low body frame 4. That is, when the player's attention is paid to the player's attention, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected during execution of the player's most noticeable effect. It may be possible to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band of (1) and change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a feeling of strangeness.

  Even when the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. Until this is done, the changed effect sound is not output. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the variable effect, the specific frequency is set after the variable effect ends. Even after the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the changed effect sound is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main frame 4 after the start of the next variable effect. To be done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery or the like) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the contact operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the demonstration in the effect display device 1600. Will immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, but if the effect sound is not output as a demonstration, the changed effect sound will be displayed on the door frame 3 until the next variable effect is started. The main center speaker and the top side speaker on the side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 do not output, but output after the start of the variation effect.

  Further, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is initialized at the same time when the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, waiting for customers, and repeatedly performing demonstrations by the effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 last time. The volume adjusted by the player who was seated and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized, and at the same time, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed. State).

  Also, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during execution of error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (may be the maximum volume), the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 are adjusted. When 303 is operated, whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that causes the error notification may be appropriately set. Good.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, when a slight abnormality (full tank error) is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B. When the touch operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band during the full error notification executed in step 3, the notification sound of the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately issued. When a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the state in which the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center of the door frame 3 side is maintained. The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side and the top side speaker (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") As volume error notification reflects the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band. It is changed (for example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210, the volume of a specific frequency band is set during the door opening error notification that is executed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detection of opening of the door frame 3 occurs. When the contact operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the specific frequency band It is also possible not to reflect the volume adjustment of the above in the notification sound. In this example, the volume of the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side (for example, "The door is open!") Can be adjusted in a specific frequency band as the door opening error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, the female voice is output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, the male voice is output.) When the noise occurs, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is invalidated and a notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 209, when a small abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is full of the game balls B, the full bowl is detected. During the turn error notification, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. . Further, as shown in FIG. 210, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detection of opening of the door frame 3 occurs, the effect operation unit 300 is provided to adjust the volume. When the touch operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but not only the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, but the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It is like this. In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification, it is possible to ensure that a serious abnormality is detected. You will be able to discover it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the touch operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the sound volume in a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are changed. In the state where the changed effect sound is output from the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, when a serious abnormality occurs, a specific operation corresponding to the environment change mode or the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without suppressing the sound volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the sound volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (OFF), and the notification sound in which the sound volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is restarted after the notification sound is stopped, the specific sound corresponding to the operation of the environment change mode or the effect operation unit 300 is specified. Without controlling the volume of the frequency band, the volume of the specific frequency band that has been forcibly released is set (turned on) again, and the effect sound of which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed is displayed on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band, and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. In the case where the effect sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and without the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being immediately reflected in the output of the effect sound. The case where the effect sound and the notification sound after the change can be output by delaying the timing is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of production and to reliably detect a serious abnormality.

[15. Change settings such as winning probability]
An example of changing the probability of a big hit, a small hit, etc. in the pachinko machine 1 according to a set value will be described. In the following, it is assumed that the payout control board 633 outputs operation signals from the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, the setting board may be connected to the power supply board 630 in the power supply board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key, the setting change switch, the setting confirmation switch, and the setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the set or selected setting value. Control the vessel.

  On the setting board, a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and A setting indicator for displaying the set or selected set value is provided and functions as a setting change operation unit that receives an operation for changing the setting. As described above, the setting board is provided in the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the game island in the game shop. This makes it possible to change the settings.

  In the present embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board are fetched by the payout controller 633a. The setting display device is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is used as a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like according to the setting. Select the table you want. A table used for special lottery or the like is provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211, in this example, “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “normal symbol hit probability”, and “second hit depending on the ordinary hit type” The opening / closing pattern of the starting port "is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  The jackpot probability (ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. 1/309 ", the setting value 3 is" 1/299 ", the setting values 4 and 6 are" 1/279 ", and the setting value 5 is" 1/289 ". In this example, in the set values 1 to 5, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, but in the set value 6 having the highest set value, the jackpot probability becomes lower than the set value 5. There is. The jackpot probability may be increased in proportion to the set value. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set higher as the set value becomes higher among the set values 1 to 6.

  Further, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, The setting value 1 to the setting value 4 is "1/100", the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 are "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the setting value 1 to Up to the setting value 5, "50/100" is set, and the setting value 6 is "66/100". In this example, in the case of a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6), the small hit probability is increased compared to other set values (low set value) to indirectly increase the occurrence frequency of the big hit game state. It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the setting value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, while the second special symbol is selected. In the table used for the special lottery, the small hit probability is set to be substantially the same for all set values, so that the continuation of the time saving state (ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the time saving state.

  In addition, although the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4 in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, On the other hand, in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set values 1 to 5. Therefore, in the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the lottery is performed with different small winning probability, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state Has the same probability that a small win lottery will be held. However, the big hit probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type described later are set so that the set value 5 is higher than the set value 4, so that the set value 5 is more advantageous than the set value 4 as a whole. Has been done.

  In addition, since the big hit probability in the normal state is high, but the small hit probability is low, it is highly possible that the hit as an opportunity to control the shift to the time saving state as in the setting value 4 is the “big hit”. A game that is unlikely to be a big hit through "small hits", and the chance as a trigger for transition control to a time-saving state like a set value of 5 is unlikely to be a "big hit", but a "small hit" It is possible to realize a game that is likely to be a big hit through the change of the set value, and to provide a new game property in which the set value is inferred according to the type of hit as the trigger for transition control to the time saving state. You can

  The small hit probability may be increased in proportion to the set value, and in this case, the small hit probability may be set higher as the set value becomes higher among the set values 1 to 6. .. Further, the small hit probability corresponding to a part of the set values 1 to 6 is set lower than the small hit probability corresponding to any one of the set values lower than the part of the set values. You may do so. For example, the small hit probability of the setting value 4 may be 1/100, and the small hit probability of the setting value 3 lower than the setting value 4 may be 1/90. In this case, by setting the ratio of the small hit type (third small hit in this example) that is advantageous in the case of a small hit, the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

  In addition, as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), it is determined that a small hit is determined based on the fact that the small hit is determined (the small hit symbol determination table is also set. Selection ratio), and different values are set for each set value. In this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, in the setting value 1 to the setting value 3, it is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 9/10 and 10 minutes. 1 is determined as the third small hit, and with setting values 4 and 5, 8/10 is determined as the second small hit and 2/10 is determined as the third small hit. With the set value 6, 1/10 is determined as the first small hit, 6/10 is determined as the second small hit, and 3/10 is determined as the third small hit. It is like this.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are set to the first small hit at a rate of 3/10, and 6/10 It is determined as a second small hit in proportion, is determined as a third small hit in a proportion of 1/10, and is set as a first small hit in a proportion of 2/10 in the setting values 3 and 4 and is 10 minutes. 6 small percentages are decided as the second small hit, two tenths are decided as the third small hits, and with the set value 5 and the set value 6, they are decided as the first small hits at a tenth ratio. Sixth tenth is decided as the second small hit, and three tenths is decided as the third small hit.

  In addition, as described above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 to the first losing mouth 2535, and there is no possibility of a big hit game state, or a big hit game state. Is extremely unlikely to occur. Then, in this example, when it is determined that the small hit is the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the setting value is 6, and the other setting values (setting values) 1-setting value 5) by not being selected, if the small hit in the player's disadvantageous state compared to the normal time saving state, if the setting value 1-setting value 5 is always a big hit game It is possible to execute the small hitting game state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of occurrence of the state and holding the expectation for the big hit game state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, when the small hit occurs in a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state which is the normal state, the small hit game state is focused while holding the expectation for the big hit game state. The player's discouragement increases when he / she recognizes that all the game balls B received in the prize winning hole 2006 are guided to the first losing mouth 2535 and there is no possibility of a big hit game state. By generating a second small hit or a third small hit that has the possibility of at least a big hit gaming state, it is possible to bring attention to the big hit gaming state while keeping the expectation for the big hit gaming state, and to make the game entertaining. It can suppress the decline. On the other hand, in the case of the set value 6, although the first small hit may be selected, it is possible to determine that the maximum set value is the set value 6 by executing the first small hit in the normal state. , It is possible to give the player more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small hit, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

  In addition, when it is decided that the small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time saving state, the small hit probability is increased more than in the normal state, so that the small hit game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, it is recognized that the first small hit is executed and all the game balls B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 are guided to the first lose opening 2535, and it is recognized that there is no possibility of a big hit game state. Does not discourage the player. In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the determination ratio of the first small hit is increased at a low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2), and at a high setting value. The decision rate of the first small hit is being reduced. In other words, in the high setting value, the proportion determined as a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is decreased when it is decided to make a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, as compared with the low setting value. Thus, the high set value is more advantageous to the player than the low set value.

  In addition, as described above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 to the first V winning hole 2007, and it is determined that the third small hit is a big hit. It is almost the same as what was done. In other words, the higher the determination ratio of the third small hit is synonymous with the higher the winning probability of the big hit. Increasing the ratio indirectly improves the probability of a big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol per judgment value indicating the normal per symbol among the random numbers for ordinary symbol per judgment) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the set values 1 to 5 The value is "1/2", and the setting value 6 is "1/2". Therefore, in the setting value 6, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed, the second starting opening door 2411 is surely moved forward and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, the player is in a more advantageous state than the other set values.

  In addition, in this example, when it is determined to be a normal win as a result of the normal lottery, a normal symbol per symbol A (normal symbol per symbol A) and a regular symbol per symbol B (normal symbol per symbol B (normal symbol per symbol B1) It is designed to be decided from one of a plurality of ordinary symbol per type of regular symbol per symbol B5)) and ordinary symbol per symbol C (general symbol per symbol C), according to the determined ordinary symbol per symbol type. The mode (design A per design, design B per design, design C per design) is derived and displayed on the normal design display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second starting opening door 2411 is made different for each set value. Specifically, when the normal symbol hits A in the normal state, the open / close mode of "performing 0.1 s opening once" is executed with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and a time saving state When the normal symbol hits A, when all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6) "open 6s once" opening / closing mode is executed, when the normal symbol hits B in the normal state For the odd number set value (set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5), perform the opening / closing mode of "execute 0.1s opening twice", and set the even set value (set value 2, set value 4, set value) In the value 6), execute the opening / closing mode of "perform 0.1s opening once", and if the normal symbol hits B in the time saving state, set value 1 to setting value 3 "execute 6s opening once" Open / close mode is executed, and with the set value 4 and the set value 5, the open / close mode of “Execute 3s opening twice” is executed and the set value is set. In running the "Run once 3s open" opening and closing manner.

  Further, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, one is selected from two kinds of normal symbol per type, that is, a normal symbol per unit A and a normal symbol per symbol B as a normal symbol per type. In the case of the setting value 6, as a normal symbol per type, it is determined to be one of three types of normal symbol per type, that is, A per normal symbol, B per normal symbol, and C per normal symbol. .. Then, when the normal symbol hits C in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of "execute 0.1s opening 6 times" is executed with the set value 6, and when the normal symbol hits C in the time saving state, the setting is performed. With the value 6, the opening / closing mode of “execute 1s opening 6 times” is executed.

  As described above, the operation mode of the second starting opening door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second starting opening 2004) for opening the second starting opening 2004 based on the result that the ordinary lottery result is the normal winning is set for each set value. Therefore, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting opening door 2411.

  The setting key serves as an opportunity to insert a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contact by the operation of turning the key to the set position to change to the setting change mode. A switch that outputs a signal. Note that other switches may be used together without providing the setting key. In this case, operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press) starts the setting change mode, and long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode ends the setting change mode. You may.

  Further, the setting change mode may be started or ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key can change the setting, and thus the handling of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes easy. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch.

  The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be less (for example, 2 levels) or higher (for example, 8 levels).

  The setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of winning the special symbol). The setting value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the setting value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the percentage of probability variation big hits, the proportion of time saving (ST) after big hits, the number of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a general figure, the prize holes of general winning openings, starting openings and big winning openings. Various parameters relating to the game such as the number may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

  The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected may be confirmed by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch. In addition, the selected set value may be set in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, operation of the one-off button operation sensor 194, operation of a ball lending button, operation of a return button, The selected setting may be confirmed by the winning detection of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  In other words, in order to set the game performance in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. ..

  Further, the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, a predetermined time of the RAM clear switch. By the above operation (long press), the set value can be confirmed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting indicator is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key). It should be noted that the setting indicator may be configured with LEDs having a settable value, instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on in displaying the set value. Further, the error type display may be a lighted display (not blinking), and the set value display may be a blinking display.

[15-1. Setting change processing]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the set value.

  In this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control side power-on process is executed, and when the setting change mode start condition is satisfied in the main control side power-on process. The set value is changed.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines the state of the setting key after the initial value setting and the start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the main control side power-on process are performed, and the setting key is turned on. If it is operated, a setting change mode for changing the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, the payout control unit 633a outputs a setting key operation signal to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is operated on when the setting key operation signal is received. . It should be noted that the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 195 is touched, or the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (the prepaid card has a balance). The setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, the setting change mode may not be started even when there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

  When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a uses the data other than the game state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, prize ball information) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. Therefore, the first RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

  Next, a setting change operation is performed to switch the setting values 1 to 6. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a finishes the first RAM clear process, it sends a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a, and when the first RAM clear process end command is received, the payout control unit 633a displays the set value on the setting display. As an initial value, an initial value (for example, setting value 0) is displayed in a blinking manner, and the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (looping from setting value 1 to setting value 6).

  Note that the main control MPU 1310a executes the first RAM clearing process to clear the set value and enter the unset state. Also, the setting change mode cannot be terminated when the set value is not set.If the power is cut off during the setting change mode while the set value is not set, the power is turned off and then on again. Then, the setting change mode is started. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process of monitoring the state of the setting key is performed until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is set in response to the setting key being turned on. Get started.

  Further, the payout control unit 633a confirms whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame opening switch is off, and the main body frame opening switch is turned on (main body frame 4 is the outer frame 2). If it is not opened), it loops until the main frame opening switch is turned off and does not accept the operation of the setting confirmation switch. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

  When the main frame opening switch is off, or when the main frame opening switch is turned off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the payout control unit 633a confirms the set value displayed on the setting display ( The blinking display is ended and the display is turned on), and the main control MPU 1310a transmits a setting change end command indicating the confirmed set value.

  Upon receiving the setting change end command, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, the lottery process or the like according to the confirmed set value is performed.

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14) when the ending condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the set value is changed by the above-described processing.

  When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the set value on the setting display (does not display the set value). You may. When the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. As a result, the gaming shop staff can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

  Further, when the setting change mode is executed, the fact may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, the setting change mode start command that notifies the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is started is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (during setting change, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when ending the setting change mode, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the peripheral control unit 1511 is transmitted with a setting change mode end command notifying that the setting change mode is to be ended. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode end command. It should be noted that the set value confirmed as the predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be erased at the end of the setting change mode. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral controller 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or turned on).

  On the other hand, after the initial value setting and the start-up setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the power-on process of the main control side, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, the step is performed. The processing after S14 is executed.

  Then, in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU 1310a, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is erased, or the determination of step S30. In step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off process is performed. When it is determined that the game is not normally completed, in step S38, the data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area, which is the game state (for example, the probability variation state, the time saving state, the prize ball information) After executing the second RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating), the work area of the main control internal RAM is set (step Flop S40). In this way, in the second RAM clearing process, unlike the first RAM clearing process, the setting value information is not initialized. That is, when the power is turned on, the setting key can be turned on to execute the first RAM clear process to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and when the power is turned on, the second RAM clear switch can be cleared. It is possible to execute processing to clear information regarding the game state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, information regarding prize balls). Also, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process is executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process to play the game. Clear information about the state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, award ball information), that is, set value information of the pachinko machine 1 and information about the gaming state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, award ball information) It is also possible to clear both. In this way, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

  In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. The setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a pulse having a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage is grounded. You may output the signal of the intermediate electric potential which is not a voltage. In order to prevent an illegal act of short-circuiting the setting key terminal and activating the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key is output from the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminal. Because it is preferable to send to.

[15-2. Variation effect according to the set value]
Next, a variation effect according to each set value will be described. FIG. 213 is a fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting process, second fluctuation pattern setting process).

  In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern types selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are different. Specifically, in the normal state, when the first special lottery result is out of reach, the special figure 1 referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process is the variation variation pattern table ( In FIG. 213 (A)), for example, a mini character for suggesting the setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "is it low?" By doing so, the deviation variation pattern 25 that executes the "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 2, or 3 is selectable from the set value 1 to the set value 3. , For example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting the setting on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "is it expensive?" Or "is it 4, 5, or 6?" In the balloon of the mini character. Off variation pattern 26 for executing the "High Set suggesting demonstration" suggests that the set value of the slave unit 1 is one of 4, 5, 6 are selectable setpoint 4 setpoint 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, for example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting the setting on the effect display device 1600, and by displaying “may it be even number?” Or “may it be 2, 4, or 6?” In the balloon of the mini character, the pachinko machine 1 The deviation variation pattern 27 for executing the “even setting suggestion effect” that suggests that the setting value of 2 is 4, 4, or 6 is selectable from the setting values 2, 4, and 6, for example, The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini character for suggesting the setting on the effect display device 1600, and displaying "is it odd number?" Or "may it be 1, 3, 5?" In the balloon of the mini character. The deviation variation pattern 28 for executing the “odd setting suggestion effect” that suggests that the value is 1, 3, or 5 can be selected from the set value 1, the set value 3, and the set value 5. Therefore, in the fluctuating effect, one of the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6 is executed when the “even setting suggestive effect” is executed, and the set value 1, the set value is executed when the “odd setting suggesting effect” is executed. The player can recognize that the value is either 3 or the setting value 5. In addition, it is possible to estimate the set value by combining with the execution history of the “low setting suggestive effect” and the “high setting suggestive effect”. That is, if the “odd setting suggesting effect” and the “low setting suggesting effect” are executed, the setting value is 1 or the setting value 3, and the “odd setting suggesting effect” and the “high setting suggesting effect” are executed. If the setting value is 5, the setting value is 5, and if the “even setting suggesting effect” and the “low setting suggesting effect” are executed, the setting value is 2, and the “even setting suggesting effect” and the “high setting suggesting effect” are set. If is executed, it can be inferred that the setting value is 4 or the setting value 6. In this way, in this example, a new game property is provided in which the setting value is estimated by the combination of the executed setting suggestion effects of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

  Further, in this example, for example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting the setting on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maybe the best?" Or "maybe six?" In the balloon of the mini character, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be set. The outlier variation pattern 29 for executing the “highest setting suggestion effect” indicating that the value is 6 can be selected only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the highest setting, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, it is possible to select the deviation variation pattern 31 for executing the "maximum setting finalizing effect" in the case of the non-reach failure or the reach failure. It can be notified that the setting value 6 is the highest setting, and the player can be made aware of the fact that the highest setting has been set, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, when the first special lottery result in the normal state is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 213) referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, the setting display of the pachinko machine 1 is performed by displaying a mini character for suggesting the setting on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maximum setting confirmed!" Or "6 confirmed!" In the balloon of the mini character. The small hit variation pattern 33 and the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting confirmation effect" for notifying that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the maximum setting value 6, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. .

  In addition, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 213 (C) is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. )), The jackpot variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting confirmation effect” can be selected only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when it is a big hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the highest setting, and the big hit game state is executed. By doing so, a double pleasure can be given to the player, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Further, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 213) that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process. In (D), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting confirmation effect" can be selected only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when a small hit occurs, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the maximum setting, and further the accessory winning hole Double pleasure can be given to the player by guiding the game ball B entered in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 and winning the third small hit which causes the big hit game state. The interest in playing games is improved.

  As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to the small hit probability “1/100”, while the setting values 5 and 6 are “90 minutes higher than the setting values 1 to 4”. Of 1 ”. Similarly, in the time saving state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 are the small hit probability "1/10", while the set value 6 is "1/9" higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said that.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting confirmation effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process is for a long period (155 s). It is performed by the setting value 1 to the setting value 5 lower than the setting value 6, and is longer than the variation time of the variation pattern selectable. Further, with the set value 6, the selectivity of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is set higher than the set values 1 to 5 lower than the set value 6. That is, with the setting value 6 in which the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the variation time of the variation effect executed in the time saving state is long. As described above, in the setting value 6, the probability of a small hit is higher than in the setting values 1 to 5, and when the small hit is reached, the game ball B entered in the accessory winning opening 2006 is the first V winning opening. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that induces the big hit game state by being guided to 2007 is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. .. Therefore, by increasing the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 and the small hit variation pattern 34, in which the variation time is set to be longer than the other small hit variation patterns in the case of the setting value 6, from the setting values 1 to 5. By suppressing the number of executions of the fluctuating effect per unit time, improvement in gambling is suppressed.

  Further, in the present example, the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are distributed in the same manner among all the set values, but in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the variation patterns specific to the set value 6 (deviation variation pattern 29 to deviation variation). Since the pattern 31, the small hit variation pattern 33, the small hit variation pattern 34, and the big hit variation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of the variation pattern random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determining random numbers assigned to the specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6 are adjusted to distribute the variation pattern determining random numbers. As described above, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to the specific variation patterns are adjusted without changing the assignment of the variation pattern determination random numbers of all the variation patterns. As a result, the load of adding or deleting the variation pattern is reduced, and the game machine can be easily designed. It should be noted that the specific variation pattern is such that the appearance frequency above a certain level is maintained even if the distribution number of the variation pattern determination random numbers is reduced, and at least the variation pattern determination random numbers set in other setting values are set. It may be adjusted so as to have 60% or more of the distribution number, and the appearance rate may not be excessively reduced as compared with other set values.

  In this way, in this example, the small hit probability and the change time of the change effect executed when the special lottery result is a small hit are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, and thereby the balance with the gambling performance is made. Is taking.

  In addition, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even setting suggestion effect, odd setting suggestion effect, maximum setting suggestion effect, maximum setting confirmation effect) is out of the first special lottery result in the normal state. Alternatively, it is most likely to be executed when there is a lack of reach, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result in the time saving state is out of reach or out of reach, or in the normal state and in the time saving state (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is a small hit or a big hit. In such a case, it is more difficult to execute the first special lottery result in the normal state than in the case where the first special lottery result is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. That is, during the time saving state or the small hit, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, so that the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening is focused. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of first guide passage and second guide passage]
[16-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As a different embodiment from the above, a case where a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 215 is a specific example of performance when a warning performance is performed using the right detection sensor 2404. ..

  As shown in FIG. 214, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the stop portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not abut the hitting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right hitting), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

  The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors, based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way of striking the game ball B (firing strength) according to the game state, and to make the region and the passage where the game ball B is hit different. First, during the small hitting game, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is inserted into the opening winning prize 2006. Is required. Therefore, during the small hitting game, the game ball B has such strength that it enters the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to hit B (so-called right hit).

  Also, during the big hit game, the special winning opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 which has been opened. However, in the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged from the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 more than the outlet of the first guide passage 2521. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, the second starting opening 2004 also provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened based on the entry into the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. It is required to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 which is in the state of being opened, but the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 is more than the outlet of the first guide passage 2521. The higher the probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit, the higher the probability that the game ball B enters the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 so that the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a certain strength (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit).

  Further, during the normal state, it is required to enter the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. Therefore, in the normal state, the highest height of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can flow into the first starting opening 2002 in a region on the left side of the center accessory 2500. It is necessary to hit the game ball B (so-called left-handed) with the strength to enter the left side in front view (left side of the right upper part 2502a of the front frame) with respect to the part which has become.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (firing strength) of the game ball B in accordance with the game state, and to change the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit, but the recommended area and passage are played. When the ball B is not hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or passage. Specifically, when the game ball B is not in the game state in which the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 should be hit, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 does not pass the game ball B. When the detected state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

  First, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time saving state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is recommended. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball B has 5 balls in 5 seconds). When the above is detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (A), the effect display device 1600 is executing a first warning effect for notifying a message “please drive into the second guide passage”. As a result, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (the strength is somewhat weaker than the right hitting), and the second guide The player can recognize that the game ball B should be hit in the passage 2522. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, when the state where the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is inserted into the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state of having been hit has been eliminated, and the first warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer. And the count value is incremented every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during the monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has continued for a predetermined time (for example, when 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), While the first warning effect is executed, when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected by less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is displayed. As the state in which the game ball B has been hit is eliminated, the first warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the gaming state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, and the state where the game ball B should not be hit in the second guide passage 2522 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. is doing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect as if the state where the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, the second guide passage 2522 is also provided when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state. The first warning effect has ended because it is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be hit.

  Further, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 does not pass the game ball B. When it is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), the effect display device 1600 is executing a second warning effect for notifying the message “please left-handed”. As a result, in the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the left side in front view (the left side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame) of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view from the highest portion. Then, the player can recognize that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the state where the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 is eliminated. It is determined that it has been performed, and the second warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B in the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. , The count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during the monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has continued for a predetermined time (for example, when 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), In contrast to executing the second warning effect, when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected as less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is displayed. The second warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared, assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit is eliminated. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and when the state where the game ball B should not be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. is doing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to terminating the second warning effect as if the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, when the game state is switched from the normal state, the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 The second warning effect has ended because it is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be hit.

  As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 does not pass the game ball B when the game ball B is not in the game state where the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 should be hit. When the detected state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but the content of the warning is changed according to the game state. Thereby, even when the game ball B is hit in the first guide passage 2521 when the game ball B is not hit in the first guide passage 2521, the recommended area or passage is any. Whether there is it, the player can accurately grasp.

  On the other hand, during the small hitting game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521. The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), the effect display device 1600 is executing a third warning effect for notifying the message “Please drive into the first guide passage”. As a result, during the small hitting game, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the stop portion 1006, and the gaming ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. It can be grasped by the player. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the third warning effect is ended. I am trying.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer has started. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit in the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed, while When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated. 3 The warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game and the game ball B is no longer to be hit in the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Then, after the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to terminating the fourth warning effect as if the problem has been resolved, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game, it is determined that the gaming ball B is no longer in the first guiding passage 2521 and the third state is assumed. Warning production has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 (near the entrance), but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always present. It may be provided at a position where it can pass, and for example, may be provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, the outlet which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory winning opening 2006 that has been opened. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. In order to separately perform a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) for making the player always know that the player should hit, It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to disturb the display of the driving area instruction. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the driving area instruction display" is partitioned and provided, and in a display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area. It is desirable that the “display area for displaying the first to third warning effects” is partitioned and provided in the upper left portion of the above so that the respective guides are not overlapped and obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such an alarm is realized not as a display but as an effect by voice. However, in that case, the priority level of the allocation to the channel provided finitely for outputting the voice becomes higher than that of various effect sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so that the output can be performed as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant channel (unused channel) provided. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player, who is unfamiliar with the game having various types of game balls B, from being disadvantaged.

[16-2. Regarding the case where detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and the second guide passage 2522. A case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the played game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. 217 is a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. It is a concrete example of performance at the time of execution.

  As shown in FIG. 216, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at a slightly lower position (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and the second A little below the entrance which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522 (near the entrance), a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the stop portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

  On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right hitting), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

  The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 provides the detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B has been hit in the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and detects the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Based on this, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

  In the present embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the hitting method (launching strength) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and passage where the game ball B is hit, but it is recommended. When the game ball B is not hit in the area or passage to be played, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is normal to hit the game ball B in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the state is a predetermined state, one of the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 has detected the passage of the game ball B. When the time is continued, the player can be alerted.

  More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and these states continue for a predetermined time (for example, one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 play a game for 5 seconds). When five or more balls B are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (A), on the effect display device 1600, the fourth warning effect is issued to notify the message "please left-handed". As a result, in the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the left side in front view (the left side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame) of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view from the highest portion. Then, the player can recognize that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are displayed. It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been eliminated, and the fourth warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B in the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. It is determined that there is, and the monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented each time the gaming ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during the monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). When the state is not continued for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected as less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the fourth warning effect is executed. As the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, the fourth warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and when the state where the game ball B should not be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. is doing. Then, after the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the case where the game state is switched from the normal state in addition to the end of the fourth warning effect, assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated. Also, the fourth warning effect is finished because it is no longer possible to hit the game ball B in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

  It is recommended to hit the game ball B in the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 during the small hit game, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521. The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), on the effect display device 1600, a fifth warning effect is issued to notify the message “Please drive into the first guide passage”. As a result, during the small hitting game, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the stop portion 1006, and the gaming ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. It can be grasped by the player. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit in the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is ended. I am trying.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer has started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not struck in the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed, whereas When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated. 5 The warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game and the game ball B is no longer to be hit in the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Then, after the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to terminating the fifth warning effect as if the problem has been resolved, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is no longer to be driven into the first guide passage 2521 Warning production has ended.

  On the other hand, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522. If the game ball B is not detected passing, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and if the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (C), on the effect display device 1600, a sixth warning effect is issued to notify the message “Please drive into the second guide passage”. As a result, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (the strength is somewhat weaker than the right hitting), and the second guide The player can recognize that the game ball B should be hit in the passage 2522. Then, when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit in the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, and the warning effect is ended. ing.

  More specifically, when the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. Then, the monitoring timer has started. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, when the state in which the game ball B is not hit in the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed, while When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated. 6 The warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the gaming state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, and the state where the game ball B should not be hit in the second guide passage 2522 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. .. Then, after the execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. In addition to terminating the sixth warning effect as if the problem has been resolved, even when the gaming state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the second guide passage 2522. The sixth warning effect has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 (near the entrance), but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always present. It may be provided at a position where it can pass, and for example, may be provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, the outlet which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 (in the vicinity of the entrance), but the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. It may be located at any position, and may be provided inside the second guide passage 2522, the inlet at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, the outlet at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, for example.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory winning opening 2006 that has been opened. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from being defective due to the game ball B passing excessively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404, the left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, by providing one detection sensor in the passage on the front side of the game ball B that has entered the upstream space 2506, which branches into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide is provided. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B. If not, it is possible to determine that the game ball B has not been driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the game ball B is to be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in a normal state, if one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time, By alerting the player, it becomes possible for the player to know whether or not the game ball B should be hit at least on the left side area of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any manner in each game state. In order to make the player always know that the player should hit, the hit area indication display (for example, the right hit display consisting of the right arrow image and the left hit display consisting of the left arrow image) is separately performed. It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to hinder the driving area instruction display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the driving area instruction display" is partitioned and provided, and in a display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area. It is desirable to partition the "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left portion of the so as not to be obstructed by overlapping each guide.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized not as a display but as a sound effect. However, in that case, the priority level of the allocation to the channel provided finitely for outputting the voice becomes higher than that of various effect sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so that the output can be performed as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant channel (unused channel) provided. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player, who is unfamiliar with the game having various types of game balls B, from being disadvantaged.

[16-3. Regarding the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the heavy section where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are lined up in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in a weighted portion 2520a in which a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball capable of removing a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. A case where the clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 and 219. 218 and 219 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  Although the details are described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front and rear directions in the first guide passage 2521 at the portions extending vertically on the left side of the accessory winning hole 2006. It has a weighted portion 2520a that can be seen overlapping. In the weighted portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIGS. 218 and 219 (A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is provided from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 in the weighted portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided which is insertable and is capable of removing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the front surface side of the first guide passage 2521, and on the portion where the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front surface side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other. Further, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front surface side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other is provided in the front surface side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front. It is located so as to coincide with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Accordingly, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, so that the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side It becomes possible for the rod-shaped member to come into contact with the game ball B that has become clogged, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-back direction, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522.

  When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member is also visually recognized from the front side and the first guide passage The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the front surface side of 2521. Accordingly, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front surface side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

  Further, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. Accordingly, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. . That is, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-back direction but also in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a region where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend vertically above and below the weighted portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the ball clogging occurs at any position of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member may be inserted from the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided at a position near the position. The ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

  In the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, the passage is bent only in the left-right direction, whereas in the second guide passage 2522, the passage is complicated not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, or an outlet that is the lower end. Since it is a part after being bent away from the entrance and the exit, even if the bar-shaped member is inserted from the entrance and the exit, the bar-shaped member does not reach the part. In this respect, a bar-shaped member may be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided. Accordingly, when the ball clogging occurs not only in the front first guide passage 2521 in the weighted portion 2520a but also in the rear second guide passage 2522, by inserting the rod-shaped member, Ball clogging can be easily removed.

  In the above, in the weighted portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a ball is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although the clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided, another example of the clogging elimination hole 2523 capable of eliminating the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side will be shown below.

  As a first another example, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 that can remove a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. You may. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the gaming ball B clogging in the second guide passage 2522 is rod-shaped. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. In the present embodiment, the transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 formed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

  In addition, as a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), in the weighted portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the front side of the first guide passage 2521 is provided. The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the first guide passage 2522 to the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. It may be formed in. In such a case, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be largely moved in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. The clogging can be easily removed.

  Further, near the entrances which are the upper ends of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. Then, as a third another example, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the second guide passage 2522 at a position where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 that can be inserted from the left side and can remove the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-shaped member may be provided. That is, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when a ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side). The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B described above, and the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction.

  When the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first and third modifications, the clogging elimination hole is provided from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. Although it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-shaped member through 2523, the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the second guide passage 2522 but adjacent to it. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. When the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the pattern (first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120) is light-emitted on the light guide plate 3102, there are also scratched parts unrelated to the pattern. Although the light is guided (light is reflected), there is a problem that if the scratched portion overlaps with the design, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the design. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decoration region in which a pattern is displayed in the right region portion of the light guide plate 3102 adjacent to the second guide passage 2522. Further, the light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, but the light guide plate 3102 is manually left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where the rod-shaped member does not contact the light guide plate 3102 as a preceding step. You may. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a movable member capable of moving to a position where the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where it is not concealed. When the rod-shaped member is provided and the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball-clogging elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to be able to move to a position where the ball-clogging elimination hole 2523 is not concealed as a preceding step. With such a configuration, when it is not necessary to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position that conceals the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, and the player visually recognizes the ball clogging elimination hole 2523. It becomes difficult, and there is an advantage that the decorativeness as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[16-4. Regarding the ball clogging prevention structure near the exits of the first guide passage and the second guide passage that are arranged in parallel]
As described with reference to FIG. 149 (a), the game ball B is struck with a strength that abuts on the stop portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( So-called right hitting), the game ball B abutting against the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide path group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the side of the attacker unit 2400 below. Then, the game ball B released downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker unit 2400. The player is guided to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or a part on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 149 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates in the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward. After being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction in the weighted portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. And the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is a normal winning opening 2003 or a left side of the normal winning opening 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the attacker unit 2400. Of the attacker, and in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging opening 2435 below the special winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 are arranged on the right side, and the outlets of the second guide passage 2522 are arranged on the left side. In the vicinity of the outlets of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of the game balls B discharged from those outlets flow in a short time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below these outlets. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 thereof is provided. When the game ball B enters, the game ball B is guided to the outlet 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, in the vicinity of the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game ball B discharged from these outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. It becomes difficult for the game ball B to stay near the exit of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring. Further, even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from these outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. This means that the game balls B can be prevented from being piled up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and its position is the outlet of the second guide passage 2522. It is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than that of the first guide passage 2521. Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game, but due to the ball clogging below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the prize winning hole 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the game balls B more than expected are flown into the opened prize winning hole 2006, and the player is illegal. You will be able to earn profits. In this respect, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide passage 2522, and therefore the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 Even if ball clogging occurs below the outlet of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B near the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being piled up to the position of the prize winning port 2006 provided inside the one guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, the attacker right passage 2430 is provided with an outlet different from the outlet 1008, and the game ball B that has entered from the first opening 2431 is separated from the outlet 1008. You may make it discharge | emit out of the game area | region 5a from an outlet. Even in such a case, part of the game ball B discharged from the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a from an outlet different from the outlet 1008. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying near those exits and prevent the ball from being clogged.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008. The first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, but also at a position near the exit of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the outlet 1008, and to the outside of the game area 5a. An outlet different from the outlet 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B may be provided. Even in such a case, it is possible to efficiently guide a part of the game ball B discharged from the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 to the outside of the game area 5a, and near those outlets. It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay, and it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring.

  In the above, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 and to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a. An outlet different from the possible outlet 1008 may be provided. In the following, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Show. FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As shown in FIG. 220, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a between the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A certain second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit (so-called right hit) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the stop portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. , A part of the game ball B that has been driven in enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the hitting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right hitting), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B comes into the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, one of the game balls B hit to enter the upstream space portion 2506. Since the part is guided to the outside of the game area 5a from the second outlet 1013, the number of game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the balls inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to prevent clogging.

  Further, in addition to the above, only when the ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, is it possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a? You may make it provide another outlet. Below, another example of the case where the second outlet 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521 will be shown. FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the outlet inside the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (A), slightly above the exit which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, on the front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second outlet 1013 is provided which is opened and from which the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hitting game, but the second outlet 1013 is downstream from the prize winning opening 2006. It is provided in the position. In such a configuration, when the ball clogging does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out The ball passes through the front of the second out port 1013 as it is without entering the port 1013.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), when ball clogging occurs below the second outlet 1013, such as below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, a game is played up to the position of the second outlet 1013. When the balls B are piled up, the game balls B that have further circulated through the first guide passage 2521 come into the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are prevented from being piled up to a position above the second outlet 1013. As described above, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided the prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hitting game, but due to the ball clogging near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, when the game balls B are piled up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B flow into the opened prize winning holes 2006 more than expected. Players will be able to earn illegal profits. In this regard, on the downstream side of the accessory winning port 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when a ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second outlet port 1013 that can be used is provided, even if a ball clogging occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning port 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 can be used. Before the game balls B are piled up to the position, the game balls B can be discharged from the second outlet 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and a situation occurs in which the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[17. Out-out detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, to the entrances (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) provided on the game board 5. When the game ball B enters the game ball B and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of each game ball is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h). When an abnormality occurs, whether to continue the calculation or to stop (stop) the operation differs depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. I am trying to stop (stop). The execution state of the calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of calculation when an abnormality occurs.

  First, in the main control board 1310, a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a character object as a winning opening provided on the game board 5. When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B and adds it to the corresponding ball count counter. With such a ball count counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered each of the ball entrances of the game balls B that have been hit in the game area 5a.

  Further, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is played. Is detected and both are added to the out number counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been hit in the game area 5a.

  Then, the main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation by using the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter. As a specific example, by adding up all the number-of-balls counter, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been hit in the game area 5a. Can be calculated. In addition, by adding up all the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have been hit in the game area 5a.

  The above calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of balls of the game ball B entered in each of the entrance port and the out port 1008 is unchanged based on each of the entrance number counter and the out number counter. It is also possible to output. Further, as the predetermined display device, an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer externally managed by the hall side, and the like can be cited. Further, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be displayed. Of these, when the information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, both the player and the hall side can recognize the information at a position that can be visually recognized, whereas the hall computer and the monitor of the main control board 1310 can be grasped. When the information is displayed on the (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position visible only to the hall side.

  In addition, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it is possible to determine from the ratios thereof whether or not the extent to which the game ball B enters the entrance or exit 1008 is within the normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, the game balls B hit in the game area 5a are adapted to enter the entrance opening at a predetermined rate. If the total number of game balls B entering the entrance is too large, it can be suspected that the player may have entered the entrance by an improper act. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B entering the out-port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the player may have entered the out-port 1008 by an improper act.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout number counter, the payout number of the game balls B paid to the player can be grasped. Then, since the total number of game balls B hit in the game area 5a, which is calculated by all of the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter, is the total number of the game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference from the number of payouts of the game ball B, it is possible to calculate the net increase of the game ball B, and display such a net increase of the game ball B on a predetermined display device. You can

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and the pachinko machine 1 A frame-side outlet sensor is provided which is capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629, although it is discharged to the outside outside (the island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93). . When the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629 is detected, the frame side outlet sensor inputs the detection signal to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the entrance or the exit 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame side out number counter. With this frame side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of entered balls of the game ball B that has been hit in the game area 5a.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the upper full tank ball path unit 600, and the lower full tank ball. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the lower ball removal passage 610c of the path unit 610, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629. Is discharged to the outside of the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), and is discharged downward not only from the game ball B hit in the game area 5a, but also from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580. The played game ball B is also configured so that the frame side outlet sensor can detect it. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of incoming balls of the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, regarding the number of game balls B that are discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, It is desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side outlet sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-removing passage 580b of the dispensing device 580, it is provided on the upstream side of the frame-side outlet sensor. A ball drop detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and the ball drop detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball drop passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further detected by the ball drop detection sensor. It is desirable to be configured to subtract the number of played game balls B from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and is once subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor. It will be added to the out number counter, and the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially prevented from being reflected in the out number counter. In addition, in such a form, when the gaming ball B is discharged downward from the ball-out passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the ball-out action of the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can perform detection itself, but with the pachinko machine 1 energized, the game is downward from the ball passage 580b of the dispensing device 580. When the ball B is discharged (when the payout device 580 is removed from the ball) or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. Although the payout device 580 is removed from the ball, the problem is solved when the pachinko machine 1 is energized during the removal of the ball. Further, the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B that has been discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 do not merge, but pass through separate passages and behind the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured such that it is discharged to the outside (the island facility side of the game hall), and only the game ball B hit in the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side outlet sensor. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which the number of game balls B detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the out number counter.

  As described above, the number of incoming balls of the game ball B hit in the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter, but the game hit in the game area 5a can also be grasped by the out number counter. The total number of spheres B can be calculated. That is, in the state where the game is not played and the game ball B is not hit in the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter coincides with the value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B has been hit in the game area 5a, after the game ball B has passed the detection sensor provided at the entrance or the exit 1008, the frame side out which is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the total of the number of incoming ball counters and the number of out counters is slightly larger than that of the frame-side out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue addition or calculation to the counter or to stop (stop) it differs depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), when a slight abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). As this slight abnormality, the game ball B is full in the upper plate 201 and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or the game ball B should be hit in the right side area of the center accessory 2500. , The state of not hitting the right. In these states, an effect of warning to guide the game ball B on the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 and an effect to warn the player to right-hand are executed. Further, in these states, with the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 not being opened from the outer frame 2, with respect to the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game ball B cannot be artificially entered. For this reason, when a minor abnormality occurs, it is assumed that the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter do not increase due to an illegal act, and the addition and calculation to the counter are continued without being stopped (stopped). There is.

  On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped). An example of this serious abnormality is a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and artificially with respect to the entrance port and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game ball B can be entered. Therefore, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped) so that the incoming ball counter or the out counter will not be increased by an illegal act.

  Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided at the entrance or the exit 1008 does not pass the game ball B. It is detecting. Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter before the occurrence and the calculation result are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are held by the outer frame 2. However, after the severe abnormality is resolved such as being closed, the addition to the counter and the calculation are restarted. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter can be performed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker. The effect at the time of cancellation that notifies that it is canceled is being executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), regarding the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter, a serious abnormality occurs. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter continue without being stopped (stopped), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter Addition to and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). Thus, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being opened from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. .

  For example, when the game ball B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and a ball jam occurs, a normal game cannot be performed, and therefore a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game ball B. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is a game ball B that is highly likely to have been discharged from the outlet 1008 unless it originally becomes a grape. In this respect, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, addition to the out number counter and calculation regarding the out number counter until a predetermined time elapses. By continuing without stopping (stopping), it is possible to grasp the number of incoming balls into which the grape-shaped game ball B has flown into the out port 1008, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of information regarding the out port 1008. After the predetermined time has passed, the grape-shaped game ball B is unlikely to flow into the out port 1008, and it is suspected that the game ball B is being entered into the out port 1008 by an improper action. It is supposed to stop (stop) the addition to and the calculation related to the out number counter.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 222 (C), regarding the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter, a serious abnormality occurs. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without stopping (stopping), but the predetermined time elapses. Even before, when a large amount of game balls B are continuously detected by the out-out left sensor 3032 or the out-out right sensor 3033, addition to the out-number counter or the out-number counter at that time is detected. The calculation related to is stopped (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible that more than the number of incoming balls that is supposed to flow into the out port 1008 by removing the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008. Since it is expensive and it is suspected that the player has entered the out port 1008 by an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened in the case where a serious abnormality has occurred, the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 is displayed. Regarding addition and calculation related to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that time. It is considered that the door frame 3 is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B in the game area 5a when the door frame 3 is opened, while the main body frame 4 is opened in the game area 5a. This is because the main body frame 4 that does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B is opened. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as clearing a ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). I am going to do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the entrance or exit 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B, the frame side outlet number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side outlet sensor is displayed as shown in FIG. 222 (E). Regarding the addition and the calculation related to the frame-side out number counter, the addition to the frame-side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame-side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. Therefore, when the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out corresponding to the detection by the out-out left sensor 3032 and the out-out right sensor 3033 in a predetermined period. While addition to the number counter is performed, addition to the frame-side out number counter corresponding to detection by the frame-side outlet sensor is not performed. By the difference between the added value and the value of the frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls of the grape-shaped game ball B removed when the door frame 3 is opened. It is possible to display the number of entered spheres of the grape-shaped game ball B on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, as described above, in the state where the game is not played and the game ball B is not hit in the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter is all of the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter. It will be the same as the value obtained by adding. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B has been hit in the game area 5a, after the game ball B has passed the detection sensor provided at the entrance or the exit 1008, the frame side out which is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the total of the number of incoming ball counters and the number of out counters is slightly larger than that of the frame-side out number counter. As described above, as long as a normal game is played, a difference of a predetermined number or more may occur with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter, as compared with the frame side out number counter. Since there is no such difference, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a difference equal to or more than the predetermined number has occurred.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, in the case where there is a difference of a predetermined number or more with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out counter It is judged that the abnormal condition has occurred, and the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by the image display on a predetermined display device or the sound output from the speaker. The effect at the time of cancellation that notifies that there is is being executed. Then, in the case where a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out counter, for example, an illegal act is performed on the game board 5 After passing an object other than the game ball B only to the provided ball entrance or out port 1008, or after the game ball B has passed the detection sensor provided at the ball entrance or out port 1008 It is possible to suspect that a ball may have clogged before passing through the frame-side outlet sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect an occurrence of a fault such as an illegal act or a ball clogging at an early stage, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 is illustrated as the serious abnormality, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not limited thereto. Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, if it detects a situation in which the game is assumed to be proceeding due to an illegal act, the addition or calculation to various counters is stopped (stopped). You can For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) on the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being played. Then, it is possible to exemplify that the addition to various counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, both of a state where the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 and a case where an unauthorized magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2 Also stops (stops) addition to various counters and calculation, but it is illegal only when an unauthorized magnetism or vibration is detected while the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the firing of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[17-1. Out-out detection when multiple out-outs are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the discharged game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008. FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of calculation when the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008.

  As shown in FIG. 224, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a between the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A certain second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit (so-called right hit) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the stop portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. , A part of the game ball B that has been driven in enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the hitting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right hitting), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B comes into the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, but in the attacker right passage 2430. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided so that the game ball B entered from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The effect of providing the second outlet 1013 around the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 and the effect of providing the third outlet 1014 around the outlet thereof. The effect of the above is described in detail above, but the ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 due to the provision of the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, the second out port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside, and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. A third outlet sensor capable of detecting that This second outlet sensor, when detecting the game ball B that has entered the second outlet 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, the third outlet sensor is the third When the game ball B that has entered the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged from the second outlet 1013 to the outside, the second outlet sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the third outlet 1014 to the outside, the third outlet sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The second out number counter grasps the number of game balls B entered in the second out mouth 1013, while the third out number counter causes the game ball B entered in the third out port 1014. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entered.

  It should be noted that the main control board 1310 uses the second out number counter and the third out number counter in addition to the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter to perform a predetermined calculation. As a specific example, by adding an out number counter, a second out number counter, and a third out number counter, of the game balls B struck in the game area 5a, the first provided on the game board 5 It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B discharged to the outside without entering a ball entry port such as the one start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Further, by adding the incoming ball number counter, the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of the game balls B hit in the game area 5a.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) is the second out in the state where the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a. It is designed so as not to enter the mouth 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, whether or not the number of game balls B entered in the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time is determined by using the second out number counter. It is determined that it is difficult to carry out a normal right-handed game when it is monitored and when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), when the number of game balls B entered in the second outlet 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect that warns that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game is executed by a voice output from a speaker. Then, this warning effect is finished when the number of game balls B entered in the second outlet 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of game balls B entered into the second outlet 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, an inlet located downstream of the second outlet 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a. There is less opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006), which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Becomes In this respect, when the number of game balls B entered in the second outlet 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is made so that the game balls B can easily enter the second outlet 1013. It can be suspected that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above, in the time saving state and the big hit game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entered in the second outlet 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. The number of game balls B entered in the second out port 1013 and the ball or out port (out port 1008, third out port 1014) located downstream of the second out port 1013. The ratio of the game ball B to the number of entered balls may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of the game ball B that has entered the second outlet 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform.

  Similarly, in the state where the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired in one minute) is the third outlet port 1014. It is designed to never enter. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, whether the number of game balls B entered in the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time is determined by using the third out number counter. It is determined that it is difficult to carry out a normal right-handed game when it is monitored and when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), when the number of game balls B entered in the third outlet 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect that warns that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform is executed by a voice output from a speaker. Then, this warning effect is ended when the number of game balls B entered in the third outlet 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of game balls B entered into the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the inlet located on the downstream side of the third outlet 1014 in the right side region of the game region 5a. The chance that the game ball B will enter the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, special winning opening 2005) is reduced, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this respect, when the number of game balls B entered in the third outlet 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is set so that the game ball B can easily enter the third outlet 1014. It can be suspected that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above, in the time saving state and the big hit game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entered in the third outlet 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time. Ratio of the number of game balls B entered in the third outlet 1014 to the number of game balls B entered in the inlet or the outlet 1008 downstream of the third outlet 1014 May be calculated and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of the game ball B entering the third outlet 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 in the time saving state or the big hit game state is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, The addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation related to these out number counters are continued. Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the calculation related to these out number counters may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B is inserted into the second out mouth 1013 or the third out mouth 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase. The reliability of information regarding the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be struck in the left area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is struck in the right area of the game area 5a, in the right area thereof. The game ball B may enter the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014. Therefore, in the normal state, when the second out-mouth sensor or the third out-mouth sensor detects the game ball B, right-handed to left-handed hitting is performed by image display on a predetermined display device or audio output from the speaker. An instruction effect is instructed to change to.

[18. Regarding the light emission history after light emission using the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed on the effect display device 1600. During the variation display, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The light guide plate 3102 provided on the front surface of the display area is light-emitted and decorated multiple times, and the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise by the plurality of times, so that the big hit expectation degree for the variable display is indicated. The production can be executed. Further, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated, a back decoration 3211 and a back left decoration of the back front effect unit 3200 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010). The body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 emit light with the same light emission color as that of the light guide plate 3102, but even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 indicates the history of the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to execute a history effect in which the back decoration 3211 and the like continue to emit light in the immediately preceding emission color.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. Decide When it is determined to perform the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emission color pattern table is referred to based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined. Any one of a plurality of types of emission color patterns set a plurality of times is determined.

  Further, in the light guide plate 3102, by changing the emission color of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102, one of white, green, blue, and red is provided. Although it is possible to decorate the design 3110 (see FIG. 172) with light emission, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is given a predetermined color three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. I am trying to decorate the light at the timing. The time for which the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted, the light is turned off until the next light emission decoration. The time spent is longer. Further, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated at one timing is one, but the light guide plate 3102 may be light-emitted and decorated a plurality of times at each timing.

  Further, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing of the reach effect after the reach is formed. It may be executed, for example, 1 to 3 times out of the three times of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at the timing of the reach production after the reach formation.

  Further, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 can be caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 can be illuminated and decorated. Although it is possible to make a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light emission, a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102. Then, the first pattern 3110 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the three light emitting decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light emitting effect are a series of effects.

  Next, the emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 226. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 226 is an emission color pattern table in which the emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

  As described above, a plurality of types of light emission color patterns are set in the light emission color pattern table, and the light emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are as many as the number of times of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102. It is set how it will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, the light emission color pattern table is set with light emission patterns so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after being decorated with a predetermined light emission color.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 set in the light emission color pattern is set to be light-emitted and decorated with any of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 being changed to the end, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of white → green → blue → red. Has been done. That is, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a big hit, the light emitting color pattern that becomes the light emitting color (for example, red) with a high big hit expectation degree as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined with high probability, When the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is lost (missed, reach lost), the light emission color pattern having a light emission color (for example, white) with a low expectation for a big hit as the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is highly likely. It is decided to decide. As a result, when the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated with a light emission color with a high expectation for a big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit increases.

  The light emission color pattern does not change the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red. When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated next time, Is set so that the emission color is maintained or the emission color with a high expectation for a big hit is high. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted with a light emission color with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the light-emitting plate 3102 will change to a light emission color with a high jackpot expectation unless the three timings of the light emission effect are finished. Therefore, it is possible to expect the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to be noticed until the light emission effect is completed.

  In addition, the light emission color pattern does not necessarily need to change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated. It is also set to skip the above emission color and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated with a light emission color with low expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which light emission color the next light emission color will change, and the light guide plate 3102 will not be displayed until the light emission effect ends. The emission color of 3102 can be expected to be noticed.

  Next, the back decorative object 3211 and the like provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. As described above, the back front effect unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the back decorative body 3211 of the back front effect unit 3200. , A back left decoration 3212 and a back right decoration 3213. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 227, in the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, three radiation decorations 3212b and 3213b are provided respectively. It is divided into four. Here, these are collectively referred to as a decorative body 3210 for description. Therefore, four decorative bodies 3210 are provided so as to be vertically aligned on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front are mounted is provided behind the decorative body 3210. Further, in the plurality of ornaments 3210, light emission decoration can be performed in any of white, green, blue, and red, similarly to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

  When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Further, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated three times at a predetermined timing. However, even after the light-emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of ornaments The light emission of 3210 is maintained. In this way, when performing the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, as the history of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102, the history effect of continuously emitting light from the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is set. Running.

  Specifically, in the first or second timing of light-emitting decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated next time. The light emission of the plurality of ornaments 3210 is maintained until the timing of light emission decoration. Further, at the third timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated. Until then, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are kept emitting light. As a result, the time for which the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light emission of the plurality of ornaments 3210 is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining the above, even if the light emission color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission.

  In addition, as the plurality of decoration bodies 3210, a number corresponding to the number of emission colors with which the light guide plate 3102 can be light-emitted and decorated by a light emission effect is provided. In addition, the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210 varies depending on the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 is higher as the jackpot expectation is higher. The decorations 3210 are set so that the number of the decorations 3210 emitting light increases in order from the lower side. Specifically, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102, which is light-emitted and decorated in the light-emission production, is white, which is the light-emission color with the lowest expectation of a big hit, four light-emission colors are provided on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Of the decorations 3210, one decoration 3210a on the lower side is set to emit white light. Further, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. In addition, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three ornaments 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. In addition, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the light emission color with the highest expectation for a big hit, all four decorations 3210a to 3210d are set to emit light in red. As a result, even if the jackpot expectation cannot be grasped from the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the ornament 3210, the jackpot expectation can be easily grasped from the number of the ornament 3210 emitting light.

  The plurality of ornaments 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102 and can emit light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted and decorated in the light emission effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. However, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. Light is emitted to the light guide plate 3102 not only by the plurality of LEDs for light-emitting decoration of the first pattern 3110 on the light guide plate 3102 but also by the plurality of light emitting ornaments 3210. As a result, the first pattern 3110 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more prominent.

  Further, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. That is, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visual recognition of other notice effects, and other notice effects are started. Even if you do not miss it. In other words, it is possible for the player to firmly grasp the light emitting effect that decorates the light guide plate 3102 with light and other notice effects.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of ornaments 3210 when the light emission effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of ornaments 3210 when the light emission effect is executed. Note that in FIG. 228, as the second pattern 3120, a pattern in which the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are enlarged is shown.

  In FIG. 228, a case will be described in which a light emission color pattern in which the light emission color that decorates the light guide plate 3102 by light emission is changed from white → green → red is determined. First, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), at the first timing of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the luminescence effect, the second pattern 3120 is luminescently decorated with white on the light guide plate 3102, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Of the four ornaments 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, one lower ornament 3210a emits light, but the emission color is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. . Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but regarding the decoration 3210a which is already emitting white light, The white light emission is maintained until the second timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), at the second timing of light-emission decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the light emission effect, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated with the green color on the light guide plate 3102, and the effect display device 1600 displays. Of the four ornaments 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the two ornaments 3210a and 3210b on the lower side are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. Is emitting light in green. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (E), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light-emitting decoration 3210, which is already emitting green light, For 3210b, the green light emission is maintained until the third timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 228 (F), at the third timing of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with the second pattern 3120 in red and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Of the four ornaments 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the four ornaments 3210a to 3210d are all increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It is emitting red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (G), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210 is already emitting light in red. As for 3210d, as shown in FIG. 228 (H), the red light emission is maintained until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. A plurality of light emitting bodies may emit light with the color of light emitted immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the light emitting decoration of 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be grasped after the light emission decoration is turned off.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210 is set to be different depending on the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210. However, it is also possible to indicate the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been light-embellished among the three timings of light-emitter decoration of the light guide plate 3102. For example, in the first timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, one lower decoration element 3210a of the four decoration elements 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is made to emit light. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are made to emit light, and at the third timing, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c are made to emit light. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at a predetermined timing in the light emission effect. However, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated at the second and third timings. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which 3102 is not decorated with light emission, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second times but the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission at the third timing. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emission effect, and it is possible to pay attention to how many times the chance of changing the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as the effect indicating the big hit expectation degree for the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the first starting opening 2002 Alternatively, the light emission using the light guide plate 3102 is spanned over a plurality of variations from when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied) to when the variation display of the decorative design by the entry is performed. You may make it perform an effect. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the main control board 1310 transmits a pre-determination command, and the peripheral control board 1510 uses the pre-determination command. When the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed based on the variation pattern specified by the pre-determination command, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined when the light emitting effect is determined. It may be configured to determine. In addition, in the light emission effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission a plurality of times at a predetermined timing among a plurality of variations, and the light guide plate 3102 is also turned off after the light emission decoration is turned off. It may be configured such that the plurality of light emitters continue to emit light in the emission color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to pay attention to how the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light emission effect is finished over a plurality of fluctuations.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 are caused to emit light to decorate the first pattern 3110 with light emission. However, when a plurality of LEDs stop emitting light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not illuminated at the timing of light emission decoration, and the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the light emission color is to be grasped. I can't. In this regard, after the timing at which the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitted, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be light-emitted and decorated, a plurality of light-emission elements cannot be emitted. The degree of expectation of a big hit can be grasped by the color of light emitted by the decorative body 3210.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, priority is given to the other effects, and a warning effect is given to notify that the abnormality has occurred. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) on the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being played. Then, the warning effect is executed. In this regard, when an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of performing the light emission effect and performing light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission of the plurality of ornaments 3210 are given priority with the warning effect. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 start emitting light. There is. In this way, even when the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emission effect, the big hit expectation degree can be grasped by the emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit expectation degree is suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emission colors of the plurality of ornaments 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect, but the light emission effect and the history effect as the setting suggestion effect described above. May be performed, and the setting value may be suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emission colors of the plurality of ornaments 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the set values are high in the order of white → green → blue → red. It should be set so as to suggest that. That is, among the setting suggesting effects, a light emission pattern in which the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed as the high setting suggesting effect, and the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is as the low setting suggesting effect. It is sufficient to execute a light emission pattern that produces white. As a result, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission color of the plurality of ornaments 3210 is set to be a high emission value, the player can set the high emission value to the high set value (set value 6). You can raise expectations.

[19. About image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, not only the light guide plate 3102 is light-embellished with a predetermined pattern, but also a light guide plate 3102 is provided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern in a visual mode similar to the pattern to be light-emitted and decorated on the light plate 3102, it is possible to perform the imitation effect of visually recognizing as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, a pattern to be light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally any pattern is displayed. , The reach production executed after that is different.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing of step S601, the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, but the fluctuation pattern for executing the first reach effect is specified. In this case, a pattern in which the light-guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated and the design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the light-guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. By executing the effect, the first reach effect is subsequently progressed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the light emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. Thus, by finally executing the imitation effect of displaying the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second reach effect is advanced.

  In addition, the above-mentioned imitation effect is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed, while the decorative pattern is being changed. The first reach effect of the reach effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effect during the normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally illuminated with a pattern, the first reach effect with high expectation for a big hit proceeds, so that the pattern is finally displayed on the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not to illuminate.

  Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. Note that, in FIG. 229, the second pattern 3120 is shown by a pattern made up of the characters "CHANCE!".

  As shown in FIG. 229 (A), on the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is provided with the letters "CHANGE!" . In the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 can be caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 can be illuminated and decorated. Although it is possible to make a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light emission, an imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102. Then, only the luminous decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the imitation effect execution, as the imitation pattern 1600a, the characters "LUCKY!" it's shown. Although a moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, during the imitation effect, a still image is displayed like the imitation pattern 1600a described above.

  The light guide plate 3102 is provided with a second pattern 3120, which is illuminated and decorated with the letters "CHANCE!". However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the characters of the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the character forms are the same, it can be difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, while the effect pattern is light-emitted and decorated as the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102, the effect pattern is displayed as the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3120. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect patterns that are made common as a part of the patterns are displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, while the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated with a plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102 in a single color, the imitation pattern 1600a is also displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted, the light-emission decoration of the second pattern 3120 is shaded due to the distance from the plurality of LEDs. It is displayed such that the pattern 1600a is shaded. Further, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted on the light guide plate 3102, a black image that does not display any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the visual recognition mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area in which the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in 3102 is substantially the same as the area in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to understand which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. The time is the same in all cases. In addition, during execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, or the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are surrounded. A composite effect of operating the provided members in a predetermined operation mode (for example, turning on a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operating a movable member) is executed. Even at the timing of displaying the pattern, the common effect is executed as the composite effect. However, at the timing of displaying the respective patterns of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are both turned on, but the emitted colors are turned on in different colors. You may. As described above, in the imitation effect, there is no effect difference between the case where the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with the second pattern 3120 and the case where the effect pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. Note that, in FIG. 230, the second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern made up of the characters "CHANCE!".

  In FIG. 230, a variation pattern for executing either the chance reach effect as the first reach effect or the lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and the imitation effect is performed before the reach effect is executed. The case of execution will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 230 (A), variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the second pattern 3120 is formed on the light guide plate 3102 as the second pattern 3120, and the effect pattern is displayed for a predetermined period of time along with the letters "CHANGE!" (For example, less than 1 second), red light emission decoration. Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (C), when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an imitation pattern 1600a is displayed along with the letters "LUCKY!" The effect pattern is displayed in blue on the periphery for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second). The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 with light emission.

  As described above, the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are used depending on whether the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted on the light guide plate 3102 or when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to know which one of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, it is possible to know which of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 which is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times). Although it is being displayed, after repeating a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. There is. Accordingly, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay attention to which of the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (E), after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in red, the reach is displayed by the variable display of the decorative pattern. After forming, the process proceeds to the chance reach effect (first reach effect) as the reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3120. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), when the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. After the reach is formed in, the process proceeds to a lucky reach effect (second reach effect) as a reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Further, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 230 (F) is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 230 (E). (For example, 3 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, the characters and the effect pattern are displayed by the second pattern 3120 which is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It suffices to display a pattern having a similar visual recognition manner so as to match the elements of, and for example, a pattern of a character having a similar style may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, However, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second reach effect are displayed. You may set the pattern which does not progress in any of reach production. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, more attention can be paid to what result is notified after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, the second pattern among the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although the light emitting decoration 3120 is started, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A pattern to be executed in a different color may be set when the color is developed. In this way, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or a color different from the normal one, by setting so that the jackpot expectation degree for the variable display of the decorative pattern is set to be high, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. Not only which of the two patterns 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped, but also the effect contents can be focused on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the imitation effect is executed, the second pattern 3120 which is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, other than the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, an effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the second pattern 3120 is executed without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, the second pattern 3120 is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in blue so as to invert the coloring, while a pattern for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is set. In these patterns, red is a color indicating that the expectation for a big hit is higher than that of blue. For example, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in red, it is a big hit rather than light-emitting decoration in blue. When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the big hit expectation is higher than that in blue. As described above, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp what is being used.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By indicating one of the patterns, it suggests the reach effect to be executed after that, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggestion effect described above and finally displaying any of the patterns. , May be configured to suggest a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggesting effect, a mimicking effect of finally illuminating the light guide plate 3102 with the second pattern 3120 by emitting red light is executed as the high setting suggesting effect, and the low setting suggesting effect is the final setting. Specifically, the imitation effect of displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally illuminated with the second pattern 3120 illuminated in red during the imitation effect, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to cause the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 to emit light and to cause the first pattern 3110 to emit light. On the other hand, it is possible to make a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side in the front view emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light emission. The brightness can be changed by the player by operating the pressing operation unit 303. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, while the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is high. When set, the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 that is light-emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in the dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to any of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, whichever of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand what is being used. When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Good.

[20. Commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, some commands of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. FIG. 231 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 232 and 233 show continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 231. It's a table.

[20-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, and notification display. , Status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the division thereof, as shown in FIG. 231, relates to the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, It is composed of commands named FIG. 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is a deviant, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state that indicates a time saving state, a probability changing state that indicates a probability changing state, and a normal state that indicates neither a time saving state nor a probability changing state. Has been done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 1 tuning effect ending command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the main control MPU 1310a writes the special value in the specific area of the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Select and send the command according to the stored setting value. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect ending command that have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed. The setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. It is like this.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[20-1-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
Special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, the division, as shown in FIG. 231, regarding the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, It is composed of commands named FIG. 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specification command is a deviant, specific jackpot, The non-specific big hit is designated, and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  In addition, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command are the pachinko machine 1 similarly to the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, the specific area of the main control internal RAM is provided for each set value of The command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in is selected and transmitted. In addition, the special figure 2 synchronization effect (variation effect of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting opening 2004) is mainly executed in the probability changing state and the time saving state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command that have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 has a pachinko machine. The setting value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probable variation state and the time saving state, so that the peripheral control board 1510 side can perform the pachinko machine 1 operation. The set value of can be grasped.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 231, the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command starts during the first to fifteenth round big winning opening 1 opening (the big winning opening 2005's Nth round). The special winning opening 1 closing display command indicates the opening of the special winning opening 1 between the rounds (the opening or closing of the special winning opening 2005 between the rounds). The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls of the game balls B having a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (the game balls entered in the special winning opening 2005 detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403). The number of balls of B) is transmitted, the big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is a big hit symbol. It is an indication of the broadcast display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit or during the opening of the prize winning opening 2006). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium-large prize hole winning effect (when the game ball B entered into the winning hole 2006 during the small hit is detected by the winning hole sensor 2513). The V pass command is a V winning command winning effect (the game ball B that has won the winning prize winning part 2006 during the small hit is the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008). The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending. In addition, the V passage command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second A second V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening 2008 may be provided.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 15th rounds (the big winning opening 2005 When the opening of the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (closing of the special winning opening 2005 starts), and the big winning opening 1 count display command is large. Sent when the winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning opening 1 is changed (when the big winning opening 2005 is opened, and when the game ball B entered in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403) The big hit ending command is transmitted when the big hit ending is started, and the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2005 is opened. It is sent to.

  In addition, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is sent when the small hit is opened (when the character prize opening 2006 is opened during the small hit), and the small hit count is displayed. The command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning a prize (when the game ball B entered in the winning a prize hole 2006 is detected by the winning a prize sensor 2513 during the small hit), and a small hit ending command. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 232, the category of power-on includes names such as power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of commands. A status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is executed when the power is turned on (including power-on and power restoration when power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that fact and at power-on (in addition to power-on, also at power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) (Including the above), information indicating which of the above-described normal state, time saving state, and probability variation state is restored, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  In addition, the model code of the pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, what kind of game the copyright is for, what game specification (for example, probability variation is When it occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability variation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is for specifying whether it is the specification (so-called ST machine) or the like, and whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of set values or only one set value. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes with a limited number of changes in special symbols. It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which a problem occurs and a set value code indicating whether the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is one or plural.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512.

  The ON operation command of the setting key is for instructing to confirm the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the internal control RAM, and the OFF operation command of the setting key is for the main control internal RAM. This is an instruction to confirm that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been confirmed.

  The setting change command is for instructing that the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value has been changed. In this example, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command. The set value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed. If the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value You may make it transmit the setting notification command which instruct | indicates. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp the latest set value each time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  The error display command is to instruct that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal.

  These commands are transmitted at the time of power-on of the main control board (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control built-in RAM is transmitted by the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main processing. Stored in the information storage area, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 232, regarding the ordinary symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the ordinary figure synchronization effect start. , General pattern designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and variable state designation command. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command (universal figure variation pattern command) is an instruction to start the universal figure entrainment effect with the production pattern (general figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The big hit and non-specific big hit are designated, the universal figure synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the ordinary figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. As described above, the gaming state is composed of a time-saving state instructing that it is a time-saving state and a normal state instructing that it is not a time-saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol variation start, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the universal figure synchronization effect start, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the regular symbol is fixed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning / losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to the second starting opening door 2411 which is moved forward and backward by the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2412, and its division is, as shown in FIG. And a command called ending per Uzu. A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal figure, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (the second starting door 2411 is projected forward by the driving of the starting solenoid 2412). The drawing command or ending command is issued, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of opening per universal figure, and the universal power open display command is when the universal power is open (the second starting door 2411 drives the starting solenoid 2412). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-7. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 233, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 1, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 2, fluctuation pattern Pre-reading 3, change pattern pre-reading 4, change pattern pre-reading 5, change pattern pre-reading 6, normal winning a prize winning, it consists of the command of the normal symbol memory. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002. And the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is , Is to instruct the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the special symbol 1 storage command, special symbol 1 hold 0-4 (the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002) Then, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 memory command is the special symbol. Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls not yet used for variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 with the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004) That is, the special symbol type prefetch command, the special symbol 1 hold is used before the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol 1 hold Based on the display result by the first special symbol display (outlier symbol, big hit symbol), and before the special symbol 2 hold is used for variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400, prefetching Then, the display result by the second special symbol display device based on the holding of the special symbol 2 (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) is designated respectively.

  In addition, the variation pattern pre-reading command 1-variation pattern pre-reading command 6, before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol is pre-read and the special symbol 1 The variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold, and the special symbol 2 before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the special reading The variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the design 2 hold is designated, and the variation pattern prefetch command 1 is a command corresponding to the set value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 2 Is a command corresponding to the set value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 3 corresponds to the set value 3 of the pachinko machine 1. The variation pattern pre-reading command 4 is a command corresponding to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern pre-reading command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern pre-reading command 6 Is a command corresponding to the set value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, setting change command ) Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

  In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is for instructing the acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is 0-4 ordinary symbols reserved (the gaming ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003). The normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is used to convey the number of balls (the number of reserves) not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is the starting mouth winning command (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, (2) When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), the main center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 mainly notify that by voice. Is sent to do, fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed (after the elapse of the stop period), the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 When the number of operation reserve balls changes (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reserves increases, and from the number of reserves, the first special symbol display changes the display of special symbols. When the number of holdings is reduced by using, the special symbol 2 memory command is a special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of holdings increases. When, or when the number of holding decreases when the number of holding decreases by using the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display from the number of holding), the special symbol type look-ahead command, special symbol 1, 2 operation hold When the number of balls increases (when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the number of holdings increases), the variation pattern prefetch command is immediately after the special symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. Sent to. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  Further, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, the normal symbol memory command, when the number of normal symbol operation hold balls (the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning hole 2003 When the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings normally used for variable display of the ordinary symbol on the symbol display). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is the start opening winning (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or the second starting). When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402), the main center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 mainly notify by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, a process of notifying when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 among various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above. Will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a procedure of setting information determination processing executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis processing (step S1022).

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag described below is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is detected. It is determined that the notification has not been made, and the process proceeds to step S1501.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the above setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command. The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

  If the received command is not the setting change command (in this example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect ending command, the special figure 2 tuning effect starting command, the special figure 2 tuning effect ending command, the variation pattern In the case where the pre-read command 1 to the variation pattern pre-read command 6 are received), the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the set value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. It is determined whether or not (step S1504), and if they do not match, the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information is notified (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that the setting value information is being abnormally notified is set. The process is set and the process ends (step S1505).

  If it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, if the setting value information abnormality notification is being performed, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting value information in step S1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the set value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507). If they do not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is continued.

  On the other hand, if the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the set value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormality notification of the set value information ends (step S1508). The setting abnormality notification flag is reset, and the process ends (step S1509).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by transmitting a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is abnormal, specifically, the normal processing (setting value changing processing) has not been performed. Nevertheless, when the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or injustice has occurred, and a process of notifying the fact is executed. It should be noted that the game progresses even during the notification of the abnormality in the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect or the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to hinder the execution of the fluctuating effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, control for displaying "setting error!" In a region that does not overlap with the variation effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, and the variation effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Control that semi-transparently displays "Setting error!" Etc. in the area that overlaps with the variable effect, control that outputs "Setting error occurred" from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and body frame speaker 622 by voice, game board 5 A combination of one or a plurality of controls such as light emission control in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking in red), a lamp, an LED, etc. provided on the door frame 3 is executed.

  When the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is abnormal, the abnormality notification of the set value information is not executed or the abnormality notification of the set value information is executed. At the same time, the effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 to be described later is prevented from being executed, and when the effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect is stopped. You can That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command is changed to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510. The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is caused by the fact that the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. When there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect is improved. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be executed, and if it is being executed, the effect may be stopped to suppress the decrease in reliability. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information, and in this case, when the abnormality occurs in the set value information, the game is stopped. You can For example, when the set value is changed in the set value changing process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. Also stores the changed set value, and for reference with the set value stored in the set value dedicated area at an arbitrary timing (for example, the timing of transmitting the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command) It may be determined whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and when it is determined that the set value does not match, the game is stopped and the abnormality of the set value information may be notified.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, after the abnormality notification of the setting value information is started, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the gaming shop clerk. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, it is stored in the setting information storage area. If the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state after the abnormality notification of the setting value information is started because it does not match the setting value information, the setting is immediately performed. It is possible to end the abnormality notification of the value information.

  In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value instructed by the command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is configured to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information depending on whether or not the stored set value matches the stored set value. The method of determining whether or not it is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time. It may be determined whether or not the value and the value match, and if the values do not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the setting value, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

  Further, in connection with the variation effect, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 a plurality of times, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, an abnormality notification of the setting value information is issued. You may do it. Specifically, the special value 1 synchronization effect start command and the special value 2 synchronization effect start command indicate the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command. It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if it does not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed.

  Further, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern prefetch command are set values for the pachinko machine 1. Although the information provided for each is shown, if the main control board 1310 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the setting information of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 sends the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern prefetch command, and main control is performed. Whenever a command is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is transmitted, Command for notifying the setting information of the Nko machine 1 also may be transmitted. For example, setting notification commands 1 to 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and the setting notification command (setting value 1) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set from the main control board 1310 at an arbitrary timing. If so, the setting notification command 1 may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 if the setting value is 2, and the setting notification command 2 if the setting value is 6 ... With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one having a plurality of setting values and one having only one setting value), and it is possible to save design work.

  Further, in this case, commands (for example, special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, etc.) related to effects (special figure synchronization effect, pending notice effect described later, etc.) executed on the effect display device 1600, Not limited to the transmission of the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, the variation pattern prefetch command, etc.), a command that is not involved in the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal winning a prize command or the like) ), The command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. You may make it discriminate | determine whether there is abnormality. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, and avoid a problem due to noise or the like. The accuracy of can be further improved.

[22. Hold notice production]
Next, the pending notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, a command for instructing the first reserve memory number (first reserve memory) Based on the fact that the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 by setting the number designation command 0 to 4) and transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600. When the second reserved memory number changes, a command for instructing the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The second reserved memory number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. When the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received. The special lottery result is changed by changing the display mode of the first reserve memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result in which the start of suggestion is suspended based on It is possible to execute a pending notice effect that suggests a jackpot expectation level at the time of executing the suggestion of.

  In this example, the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved number storage command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the special reserve Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the pre-determination information instructed by the symbol type look-ahead command (missing, small hit, big hit, etc., which may notify the kind of big hit such as probability variation big hit or normal big hit). Has a hold notice determination table for determining whether there is a hold notice and a hold notice pattern type when executing the hold notice.

  Then, when the decision to execute the hold notice is made and the hold notice pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from the normal ones. It is displayed in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from the normal display color). In this example, normally, the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in white which is a basic color, and when executing the reservation notice, it is displayed in any one of blue, green, red and ladybug patterns. To do. In addition, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are set so that the jackpot expectation becomes higher in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

  Also, when the lottery result is specified as the jackpot as the preliminary determination information, the pending notice pattern that is a mode with a high expectation for a jackpot (for example, red or ladybug pattern) is determined with a high probability as a final pending display mode. When the lottery result is determined to be lost as the determination information, the final notice of the pending display is determined by determining with a high probability a pending notice pattern that is a mode (for example, blue) with a low jackpot expectation as the final pending display mode. When a mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed as a mode, the player's expectation for the jackpot game state is increased.

  Also, in the hold notice pattern, each time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed during execution of the hold notice production (every time the hold is digested), the production display It is set how the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the device 1600 changes. In the hold notice pattern, the display forms of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and each time the suggestion of the special lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed (holding is digested Each time) the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or a mode in which the jackpot expectation is high. Is set. Therefore, even if the first display storage 1700a to 1700d and the second display storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is low, the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the execution target of the hold notice starts. Until this is done, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high jackpot expectation, and the mode of the hold display can be expected with attention to the end.

  Further, in the reservation notice pattern, it is not always necessary to display the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then change in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Start from a display mode in the middle (for example, the first reserve memory 1700c is displayed in red based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002. ), It changes to the next display mode without passing through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is displayed. (When the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c in response to the start of the above), the pattern changes from white to a ladybug pattern). For this reason, even if the display mode of the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a is small (the number of holdings) is small, the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d with a high jackpot expectation. Second, the hold storage 1701a can be displayed. Further, even if the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. It is possible to expect attention to the display modes of the pending storages 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a until the end.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode of the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a is different from the above-mentioned pending announcement together with the pending announcement effect that suggests the jackpot expectation level described above. By changing the setting to, it is possible to execute the set value holding suggesting effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

  In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestive effect and the set value hold suggestive effect according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the variation pattern look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A setting value hold suggestion determination table for determining the set value hold suggestion pattern type in the case of performing is provided. Then, when the decision to execute the set value hold suggestion effect is made and the set value hold suggestive pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in a display mode different from usual (in this example, a shape different from normal).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235 (A), normally, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a are displayed in a circle which is a basic shape, and when the set value holding suggestion effect is executed, It is displayed by one of the square shown in the first holding memory 1700c in FIG. 235 (B), the triangle shown in 1700c in FIG. 235 (C), and the star shown in 1701a in FIG. 235 (D). In addition, in the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a, the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. Is set.

  Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified to be 5 or 6 based on the variation pattern look-ahead command, the set value hold becomes a mode (eg, star) with a high expectation for the high set value as the final hold display mode. When the suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified to be 3 or 4, the set value that makes the expectation for the high set value a mode (for example, triangle) as the final hold display mode. When the hold suggestion pattern is determined with high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified to be 1 or 2, the set value that is the mode (for example, a square) with the lowest expectation for the high set value as the final hold display mode. By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, the high set value is Player's expectations is adapted to increase that.

  In addition, each time the suggestion of the special lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed in the set value suggestion suggestion pattern (during hold completion) ), How the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes is set. In the set value holding suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the degree of expectation for high set values does not decrease), and each time the suggestion of a special lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed (pending is exhausted) Each time the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for a high set value is displayed. It is set to have a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first display storages 1700a to 1700d and the second display storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is low, the special value that is the execution target of the set value hold suggesting effect is special. Until the suggestion of the lottery result starts, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and it is possible to make the hold display mode pay attention to the end with expectation. it can.

  In the set value holding suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to display the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a in a circle (basic shape) and then change in the order of square → triangle → star. Starting from the display mode (for example, the first reserve memory 1700d is displayed in a square based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002), It changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first pending storage 1700d is displayed in a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c, it changes from a square to a star). Therefore, even if the number of opportunities (the number of holdings) for changing the display mode of the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a is small, the first pending storage 1700a to 1700a to It is possible to display 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a. Further, even if the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for the high set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. The display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be expected to be noticed to the end.

  In addition, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value suggestion suggestion are separately determined, the first notice displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display mode of one of the hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high set value, and displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestive pattern of the set value hold suggestive effect. When the display mode of the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high set value, and when it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect. The display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a for the high set value While changing to a mode with a high degree of waiting, the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestive pattern of the set value hold suggestive effect is maintained. When setting the setting value hold suggestion effect while maintaining the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. There are cases where the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high set value based on the value hold suggestion pattern.

  For example, when the display mode of the pending notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value suggesting suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is exhausted and displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d or the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d. (2) When the hold storage 1701a is moved, the display mode “white” of the pending notice effect is changed to “red”, and the display mode “circle” of the set value pending suggestion effect is changed to “square” (color and shape). Both are changed), when the display mode of the pending notice effect is “red” and the display mode of the set value suggestive suggestion effect is “circle”, the hold is exhausted and displayed on the effect display device 1600. ~ 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is moved without changing the display mode "red" of the pending notice effect, while changing the display mode "circle" of the set value pending suggestion effect to "square". Or (when the color is changed and the shape is changed), if the display mode of the pending notice effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect is “triangle”, the hold is exhausted and displayed on the effect display device 1600. While moving the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the display mode "white" of the pending notice effect is changed to "blue", while the display mode "triangle" of the set value pending suggestion effect is changed. May be maintained without changing (the shape is maintained by changing the color).

  In other words, in this example, the process of determining the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the process of determining the set value hold suggestive pattern of the set value hold suggestive effect are separately performed, and the special lottery result is suggested based on each change pattern ( Display of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted). The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode with high expectation for a high set value.

  It should be noted that final display modes of the pending notice effect and the set value suggestion effect are separately determined, and a change scenario of the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. You may make it execute any one of the change patterns of a plurality of types.

  Further, the start timing of the set value holding suggestive effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Not only at the timing of displaying the pending storages 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a, but also at subsequent timings (timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, completion of suggestion of special lottery result and start of next special lottery result). Accordingly, it is also started in the case of moving the first reserved storages 1700b to 1700d to the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700c). As a result, even if the set value holding suggestion effect is not executed, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a can be expected to pay attention to the end.

  In addition, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestive effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary judgment information, and the content of the pending notice effect is reset when the special lottery result based on the result of the lottery based on the holding memory that is executing the pending notice effect is suggested. On the other hand, since the content of the set value hold suggestive effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestive effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. The setting prevents the specified value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  Also, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B) and the second hold storage 1701a of FIG. 235 (D), the set value hold suggesting effect is executed at the same time as the hold notice effect. In some cases, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c in FIG. 235 (C), the set value hold suggesting effect may be executed independently. It should be noted that the hold notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of the set value suggestion suggestion effect, and in this case, the hold notice determination table may be further provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a plurality of types of image data that combine the display mode of the above-mentioned hold announcement effect and the display mode of the set value suggestion effect, and the hold notification of the above-mentioned hold announcement effect. The target hold memory is displayed based on the image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value hold suggestive pattern of the set value hold suggestive effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the pending notice effect of the target hold memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value suggesting suggestion effect, a display mode in which these are combined is generated, and this combined display mode is generated. Is displayed as a pending storage.

  Specifically, in the example of FIG. 236 (A) in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold memory in which the set value hold suggesting effect is not executed is displayed, the first hold memories 1700a and 1700b are set to “composite pattern white 1”. , And the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern blue 1”. Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (B) in which the hold storage in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the first hold memories 1700a and 1700b are set to the image data of “composite pattern white 1”. And the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 2". Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (C) in which each of the hold storage in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold storage in which only the set value hold suggesting effect is executed are displayed, the first hold memory 1700a is set to “composite pattern”. It is displayed based on the image data of "blue 1", the first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3". Is displayed.

  Also, in the second hold storage 1701a, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed, and the hold storage in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed (FIG. 236 (D)). In the example, the second hold storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern red 4”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, by displaying and controlling the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a in a manner different from the usual mode, the pending notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation and the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. A set value hold suggesting effect that suggests a set value can be executed. It should be noted that while the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, the set value pending suggestion effect is not based on the preliminary determination information. That is, the pending notice effect can be executed by acquiring the pending special lottery result in advance, while the set value pending suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance. is there.

  The special lottery result in which the start of suggestion is suspended is not limited to being displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserve memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserve memory 1701a, and the special lottery in which suggestion is being executed is performed. The pending storage corresponding to the result may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the pending storage for execution. In this case, the final display mode in the above-mentioned pending announcement effect or set value pending suggestion effect may be displayed in the on-hold pending memory, and by such a configuration, the special lottery result is suggested. Until the game is executed, attention can be paid to the pending notice effect and the set value suggestion effect, and the expectation can be given to the big hit and the high set value.

  In the above example, the display color of the hold storage is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the shape of the hold storage is changed as the display mode of the set value hold suggestive effect. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, the display color of the pending notice effect is changed as the display mode of the pending notice effect, and the numerical value or the pending memory corresponding to the set value suggested without changing the shape of the target reserved memory is changed as the display mode of the set value suggesting suggestion effect. Additional information such as the effect mode (glitter effect or flame effect) around the item may be displayed in association with the pending storage.

  In addition, when the first reserve memory 1700a to 1700d is displayed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002, or when the game ball B has entered the second starting opening 2004, the second When displaying the pending storage 1701a, when updating and displaying the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a based on that the pending is exhausted (the first pending storage 1700b to 1700d is the first pending storage 1700a to 1700c or when moving the first pending storage 1700a or the second pending storage 1701a to the pending storage during execution), a sound effect may be output to indicate the set value of the pachinko machine 1. . For example, when suggesting that the set value is “1”, a sound effect (for example, “beep”) corresponding to the set value “1” is output from among a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is “2”. In the case of suggesting that the set value is "5", a sound effect corresponding to the set value "2" among a plurality of types of sound effects (for example, "beep") is output. In the case of performing, a sound effect corresponding to the setting value “5” (for example, “beep beeping”) is output among a plurality of types of sound effects, and in the case of suggesting that the setting value is “6”, a plurality of types of effects are output. Of the sounds, a sound effect corresponding to the setting value “6” (for example, “Pampacapan”) may be output.

  In addition, when the pending notice effect or the set value suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree or the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is set according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying the operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation section 301 or the pressing operation section 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The jackpot expectation degree or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 or the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be made common when maintaining the jackpot expectation level or the suggested setting value and when further increasing the jackpot expectation level or the suggesting setting value. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation or the suggested setting value is increased by the effect (the effect that displays the operation instruction image) that is a precursor of the execution of the hold suggestion effect, and the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is touched. It is possible to encourage the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be actively operated.

  Further, the presence / absence of the hold announcement effect and the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect may be selectable during the demonstration (demonstration effect in the player waiting state). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the taste of the player, and execute a hold notice effect and a setting value hold suggestion effect even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation or the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the big hit and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being suggested.

  In addition, a demonstration of the mode suggested by the set value holding suggestive effect (such as a mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and not a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation) is demonstrated (the player is in a waiting state). It may be executed at the time of execution of a demonstration effect) performed or a suggestion of a special lottery result (during the variable display of the decorative pattern). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the big hit from being improved by being mistakenly recognized as the big hit expectation when the set value holding suggestive effect is executed.

  In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the probability variation state, the advance determination instructed by the variation pattern prefetch command and the special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002. Pre-determination instructed by the variation pattern pre-reading command and the special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 without executing the pending notice effect based on the information You may be made to be able to perform only the pending notice production based on information. Also, during execution of the time saving state or the probability changing state, the set value is held in association with the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. You may make it perform suggestive production. Accordingly, even when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 during the time saving state or the probability changing state, the expectation for the set value holding suggestive effect can be held.

[23. Setting value continuous suggestion]
Next, the set value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, the set value continuous suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed over the multiple variable display of the decorative pattern. The variable display of the decorative symbols is not limited to being executed once for each variable display of the special symbols, but is also performed multiple times for each variable display of the special symbols (so-called pseudo continuous. Fluctuation) is also included.

  In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 suggests continuous setting values according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect starting command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A set value continuous suggestion effect table for determining the presence / absence of an effect and a set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type when executing the set value continuous suggestion effect is provided. Then, when the decision to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect is made and the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type to be executed is decided, the set value is set every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600. Any of the plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 having different display modes is caused to appear.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (A), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, “1” is drawn on the head as the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 1. The displayed setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, “3” is drawn on the head as the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 3. The setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 237 (E), when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, as the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 4. A setting suggestion character 1702 with a “4” drawn on the head is displayed.

  Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the setting suggestion corresponding to the set value "6" is given as the final mode. When the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern which becomes the character 1702 is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting which becomes the set suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the set value "1" as the final mode. By determining the value continuation suggestion production pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final mode of the setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectation for the high setting value. The degree is increasing.

  Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, how is the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect? It is set to change to. In the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order from the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation for the high set value does not decrease), and the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. (The display mode does not change) or the mode is set according to the high set value. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 remains high until the setting value continuous suggestion effect is completed. There is still a possibility that the mode will change according to the above, and the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 can be expected to be noticed to the end.

  In the set value continuation suggestion effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the setting suggestion character 1702 in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 in the mode corresponding to the set value “1”. Starting from the display mode (for example, starting the set value continuous suggestion effect and first displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 with the set value “2”), the display mode is changed to the next display mode without passing through the intermediate display mode. (For example, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value “2” is displayed, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to “4” is displayed in response to the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also set to let out). For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode according to the low set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode the display mode will change next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 will be displayed. You can let them pay attention to the end with expectations.

  The execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestive effect is set lower than that of the pending notice effect, similar to the set value pending suggestive effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and the content of the pending notice effect is reset when the special lottery result based on the result of the lottery based on the holding memory that is executing the pending notice effect is suggested. On the other hand, since the content of the set value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. The setting prevents the specified value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the set value continuation suggesting effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by causing the setting suggesting character 1702 to be displayed over the variable display of the decorative pattern a plurality of times. I'm supposed to get it. Since the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information like the set value hold suggestive effect, it can be executed without acquiring the special lottery result in advance.

  The set value continuous suggestion effect for displaying the setting suggesting character 1702 may be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved memories (the upper limit of the first reserved memory is 4 and the upper limit of the second reserved memory is 1). You may make it possible (for example, over 5 fluctuations of a decorative pattern). Further, when the number of retained memories becomes 0 during execution of the set value continuation suggestion effect, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. When the display is started, the set value continuation suggestion effect may be restarted to expose the setting suggestion character 1702. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed until the set value continuation suggestion effect is restarted. The effect display device 1600 may continue to display. As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize that the set value continuous suggestion production is continuing and continue the game, and even if the player quits the game, the new set player continuous suggestion production is being continued. , And can be directed to play on the gaming machine.

  Further, the set value continuation suggesting effect may be executed in parallel with the set value holding suggesting effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game in which the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is inferred from both the effect mode in the set value holding suggestion effect and the effect mode in the set value continuous suggestion effect. In addition, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided and any of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed according to the jackpot expectation.

[24. Use of surplus setting other than big hit probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value (set values 1 to 6) by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b in a state in which the setting value can be changed. As a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery, etc., a table corresponding to the set value that has been decided is used. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the table corresponding to each set value, "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal symbol hit probability", and "universal figure hit type" The combination of the "2nd starting opening and closing pattern" is set to be different, but as another example, even if "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting values, "big hit probability" Information other than the hit probability may be set such that the fraud monitoring system is different.

  As described above, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, various fraudulent activities are monitored. Specifically, by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 and changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraudulent activity with a magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity such as throwing into various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. However, it is monitoring for fraudulent activity caused by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud is changed, or a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud is detected. ) Can change the part (target area) that is determined to be fraudulent, and can change the condition to release the error state when it is determined to be fraudulent and shifts to the error state. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 238, in this example, the “big hit probability”, the “small hit probability”, and the “misconduct monitoring system” are set to the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, respectively. Correspondingly set.

  Specifically, as the jackpot probability (the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination table), “1/319”, the set value 2 and the set value are set for the set value 1 and the set value 1 ′. 2'is set to "1/309", and the set value 3 and set value 3'is set to "1/299". In this example, the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1'to 3'are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability.

  In addition, as the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit in the hit judgment table has been won), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set values 1 to 3 and the set value 1 are set. In the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3 ', while "1/100" is set to each of "to 3". Is set to "50/100". In each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3 ', the small hit probability may be set to be higher as the set value is higher.

  Further, as a system for monitoring fraudulent activity, “illegal monitoring A” is set to the setting values 1 to 3, and “illegal monitoring B” is set to the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′. In this example, the “fraud monitor A” is set to have a stronger monitoring system than the “fraud monitor B”.

  In this example, the set value 1 and the set value 1 ', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3'are the same set value for the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability". However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". For example, if it is possible to set six setting values on the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a and the like, and if it is necessary to set only three kinds of "big hit probability", three kinds of In addition to the three setting values corresponding to the “big hit probability”, three surplus setting values will be generated. In this way, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is diverted to another gaming machine, a surplus setting value may occur, but as in this example, a surplus setting value is set. By using the value for changing the fraud monitoring system, it is possible to effectively utilize the surplus set value and minimize the change in the program.

  In addition, as the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310g configured by a single 7-segment LED display. In addition, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in the settings 1 ′ to 3 ′, “1” “2” “3” is displayed on the setting display 1310g and the 7 The segment LEDs are displayed so as to flash at high speed (flashes faster than settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the setting value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3 '. However, when the set value is determined after the setting value is changed, the 7-segment LED normally blinks or the high speed is displayed as the display mode of the set value in any of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 1'to 3 '. It stops blinking and is displayed normally. Therefore, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the setting, it becomes unclear whether the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3 '.

  Further, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1” and “2” are displayed on the setting display 1310g configured by the 7-segment LED display alone. "3" is displayed, whereas in the settings 1'to 3 ', "1.", "2." and "3." are displayed on the setting display 1310g. You may add dots by adding. In the case of such another example, even if the 7-segment LEDs are normally blinked during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the set value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3 '. be able to. In addition, when the set value is determined after the setting value is changed, even if the 7-segment LED is stopped from being normally blinked and displayed normally as the display mode of the set value, the determined set value is set to 1 It is possible to clearly distinguish whether it is ~ 3 or settings 1'-3 '.

  Next, as specific monitoring systems for the “illegal monitoring A” and the “illegal monitoring B”, there are the first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as the “illegal monitoring A” and the “illegal monitoring B”. First, as a first specific example, a case will be described below in which the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud are different.

  As a first specific example, in the “fraud monitoring A”, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting the fraud is increased, whereas in the “fraud monitoring B”, the fraud is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting is lowered. When the detection sensor that detects fraud is excessively detected due to individual differences of the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, the “fraud monitoring B” is selected to prevent the excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, if the detection by the detection sensor for detecting fraud is slow, it is possible to prevent the sluggish detection by selecting “Fraud monitoring A”. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, by selecting the “misbehavior A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the misbehavior due to the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  In the “fraud monitor A”, when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects a fraudulent activity, the detection signal is input for a short time, or the detection signal is detected. Even if the number of times is input is small, it is determined to be a fraudulent act, whereas in the “fraud monitoring B”, when the detection signal is input for a long time or the detection signal is input If there are many cases, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case where the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor that detects fraud is different.

  Next, as a second specific example, a case will be described below in which the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud are different in the parts (target areas) that are determined to be fraud.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, whether or not the magnet approaches the area where the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting is changed by a person other than the person who changes the setting or confirms the setting. Monitors fraudulent activity such as changes and attempts to display confirmation. On the other hand, depending on the game area magnetic sensor, it is monitored whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to be provided on the game board 5. It monitors illegal activities such as entering the prize hole and the gate (gate).

  Similarly, as a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration, a vibration of a setting operation unit capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 around the third distribution device 2550 are provided. Then, depending on the setting operation unit vibration sensor, whether or not vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is monitored by a person other than the person who changes the setting of the setting value or performs confirmation display. Monitors fraudulent activities such as changing settings and trying to display confirmation. On the other hand, depending on the game area vibration sensor, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, and the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed to change the second V winning opening 2008. The illegal activity such as entering the game ball B into the game is monitored.

  As a second specific example, in the “fraud monitoring A”, while using all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activity, the number of parts that are determined to be fraudulent activity is increased. , "Unauthorization monitoring B", it is an illegal activity by using only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting the illegal activity. There are few parts to judge. That is, in the “illegal monitoring A”, not only is the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, in the "illegal monitoring B", the magnetic field around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected. It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration or vibration. For example, when a malfunction occurs in the game area magnetic sensor and the game area vibration sensor, and such a detection sensor is frequently detected in spite of no fraudulent activity being performed, "illegal monitoring B" is selected. By selecting it, it is possible to prevent the frequent detection. In addition, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select the “counterfeit monitoring A” to monitor the fraudulence in front of the game area 5a, and cheat by magnets and vibrations. The monitoring of can be strengthened.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity by a magnet, two magnetic sensors 2010, that is, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided. It is possible to specify (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5) 1 One magnetic sensor 2010 may be provided. Similarly, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, two vibration sensors 3003, that is, a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor are provided, but a place where vibration has occurred (game board 5 around the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the No. 5 or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5) It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of Even in such a case, the “illegal monitoring B” is fraudulent only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. By determining that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the condition for canceling the error state when the error state is determined to be fraudulent is changed.

  As a third specific example, in the “illegal monitoring A”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the error state can be canceled by turning the power on again. In the “fraud monitor B”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, it is possible to automatically release the error state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed. ing. That is, in the “illegal monitoring A”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the hall clerk performs a work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be released unless the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again. In addition, when the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the state shifts to the error state, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are output. As a result, an abnormal event effect that notifies that the game is in an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is executed, and it becomes difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, when the “fraud monitor A” is selected, the hall clerk needs to perform work when it is determined that the fraudulent act is made and the error state is entered. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud can be increased. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, by selecting the “illegal monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, information regarding the error state is provided to the gaming hall through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The case where the output to the computer is different or not will be described below.

  As a fourth specific example, in the “fraud monitor A”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and shifts to the error state, information about the error state is sent to the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the output to the hall computer installed on the side, "Unauthorization monitoring B" outputs information about the error status to the hall computer even when it is determined that the activity is fraudulent and the error status is entered. I try not to. In other words, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when the fraudulent activity is judged to be fraudulent and the error state is entered, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent activity even if he / she is not present. Deterrence can be increased. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, by selecting the “illegal monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is externally notified by an output from the image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. A case where the difference is made will be described below.

  As a fifth specific example, in “illegal monitoring A”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and an error state is entered, magnetism or vibration is generated by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, or the speaker. The information about the error state is externally notified by executing an abnormal occurrence effect for notifying that the error state is due to the error state, whereas in the “illegal monitoring B”, the error state is judged as the illegal action. Even in the case of shifting to, the information regarding the error state is not notified to the outside. In other words, in the “fraud monitor A”, when a fraudulent act is determined and the error state is entered, the fraudulent person is warned by external notification of information related to the error state, and the deterrence against the fraudulent activity is enhanced. can do. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, by selecting the “illegal monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  In this example, “illegal monitoring A” is set to the setting values 1 to 3 and “illegal monitoring B” is set to the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU 1310 a sets it toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the information related to the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side can determine which of the “illegal monitoring A” and the “illegal monitoring B” should stand by. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a sends information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an illegal act and shifts to the error state, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, It is possible to determine whether or not information about the error state is externally notified.

  In the case of “illegal monitoring B”, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, information regarding the error state is externally notified, and at that time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are displayed. May be executed in a mode (inconspicuous) that is less than that of the “illegal monitoring A”. For example, in the “illegal monitoring B”, when the information regarding the error state is externally notified, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that in the case where the information regarding the error state is differently notified or not.

  In the above description, the case where the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used, and only three types of “big hit probability” need to be set, and three surplus setting values occur has been described. That is, in the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, the fraud monitoring system is set to “fraud monitoring A” even though the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same as the set values 1 to 3. Although the “illegal monitoring B” is set for the set values 1 to 3, it is not limited to this. For example, the set values 1 to 5 corresponding to 5 types of “big hit probability” When one surplus set value is generated, the fraud monitoring system may be different for the one surplus set value. For example, in the case of setting value 1'which is one surplus setting value, even though the setting value 1 is the same as the setting value 1 among the setting values 1 to 5, and the "small hit probability" is the same setting value, fraud monitoring is performed. For the set values 1 to 5 in which the system is set to "illegal monitoring A", "illegal monitoring B" may be set. Even in such a case, the surplus set value can be effectively utilized.

  Further, in the above, either one of the “fraud monitoring A” and the “fraud monitoring B” is set as the fraud monitoring system, but the “fraud monitoring A” and the “fraud monitoring B” having different fraud monitoring systems are set. , Or “fraud monitor C” may be set. It should be noted that the monitoring of fraud is strengthened in the order of “fraud monitoring C”, “fraud monitoring B”, and “fraud monitoring A”. For example, when setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of “big hit probability” are set and four surplus setting values occur, the setting of the fraud monitoring system set to “fraud monitoring A” will be described. The values 1 and 2 have the same "big hit probability" and "small hit probability", but the set values 1'and 2'set in "fraud monitoring B", "big hit probability" and "small hit" Even if the "probability" is the same set value, the set values 1 "and 2 '" set in "illegal monitoring C" may be set as surplus set values. Even in such a case, the surplus set value can be effectively utilized.

  In the above, the case where the fraudulent behavior monitoring system is set to be different even though the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are the same setting values has been explained. Other information may be set so that the operating systems of all or some of the plurality of accessory (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 are different. A case where a part of the plurality of accessory (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to have different operation systems will be described below as a sixth specific example.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the sixth specific example, setting is made as the operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessory (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The fact that the values 1 to 3 are set to “with specific accessory action” and the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′ are set to “no specific accessory action” is the first case where the “fraud behavior monitoring system” is set. The example is different from the fifth example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are set for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1 ′, the set value 2 and the set value 2 ′, and the set value 3 and the set value 3 ′. Although the setting values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific accessory operation" or "without specific accessory operation". It should be noted that a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be operated using drive sources such as drive motors and solenoids. The accessory is made up of the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since this production operation unit 300 can be operated by being directly contacted by the player, there is a high possibility that a breakdown or a problem will occur as compared to other accessory products. In the case of “with a specific accessory action”, it is possible to control the specific accessory to operate at a predetermined timing during execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory (the raising and lowering operation of the effect operation unit 300). On the other hand, in the “no specific accessory action”, the specific accessory is controlled so as not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the operation mechanism of a specific accessory, and the specific accessory does not operate normally, selecting "No specific accessory operation" will stop the operation of the specific accessory on the way. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to continue the game due to the loss of the game.

  In this example, when a variation pattern in which execution of a movable object effect accompanied by an action of a specific accessory is set is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns, when “with a specific accessory action” is selected, In contrast to controlling the specific accessory to move at a predetermined timing during execution of the movable object effect accompanied by motion, "without specific accessory motion" executes the movable object effect accompanied by motion of the specific accessory effect. Without doing so, it is controlled so that the specified accessory does not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between “with a specific accessory action” and “without a specific accessory action”. Of the plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the action of the specific accessory is set. It is also possible to control so as not to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of is set. Even in such a case, in the case of "no specific accessory action", the same effect as above is obtained by controlling the specific accessory not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory. Can be obtained.

  In addition, in this example, when the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to the set values 1 to 3 which are “with specific accessory operation”, the specific character is activated at power-on (after setting change). In contrast to the initial operation of the object, when the set values 1'to 3'that are "no specific accessory operation" are set, the initial operation of the specific accessory is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). I try not to do it. This makes it possible to recognize again that the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessory (movable objects) is excluded from the operation target. Further, regarding the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), it is possible to confirm whether or not the set value is intended by the operator, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the operator mistakes the set value which is not intended. be able to.

  Unlike the above, when giving priority to the confirmation of whether there is a malfunction related to the operation of a specific accessory (specific movable object), in order to inform it accurately, "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation" Whichever of the above is set, the initial operation of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

  In addition, it is possible to confirm whether “with a specific accessory action” or “without a specific accessory action” is set by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g. However, it may be notified. For example, when the setting change of the set value is completed, the notification of "set with specific accessory action / set without specific accessory action" is issued by the output of the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not a specific accessory (specific movable object) of a plurality of accessory (movable objects) is an operation target, by performing or by notifying that as a standby screen during a period in which a game is not being performed I can recognize it.

  In addition, in this example, it is possible to set either "with specific accessory motion" or "without specific accessory motion" by changing the setting value by the operator. After setting, the initial setting may be changed to another setting by the player. For example, the player may be allowed to change to either “with a specific accessory action” or “without a specific accessory action” while the standby screen is displayed during a period in which no game is played. In other words, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to “with specific accessory action”, and the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′ are set to “without specific accessory action”, and the main control MPU 1310 a sets toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the information related to the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side executes either one of the settings as the initial setting. However, when the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is given priority over the initial setting and executed.

  Further, the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessory (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300, and is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, The effect display device 1600 may operate from outside the front of the screen toward the front of the screen. Further, in this example, by changing the setting value, it is possible to change the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessory (movable objects), but it is not limited to the specific accessory. It is possible to change the operation system of multiple characters (movable objects) or all characters, and set the target character to either "with character operation" or "without character operation". You may do it. Further, the accessory (movable object) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is possible to change the operation system for such accessory. It may be the target.

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection processing in step S112 described above. Specifically, by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 and changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraudulent activity with a magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity such as throwing into various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. However, it is monitoring for fraudulent activity caused by vibration. Regarding the monitoring of these illegal acts, the monitoring mode is different between the normal time and the state in which the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed.

[25-1. About fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activity during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal time is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and a state in which the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is not performed, and the symbol variation, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. It refers to a state in which the game can be played.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, normally, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, normally, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor causes a magnetic field that should not originally occur (magnetic field due to unauthorized access) to the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. ) Has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and the person other than the person who changes the setting value or confirms the setting is monitoring the fraudulent behavior such as trying to change or confirm the setting. Examples of illegal acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in a space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), A magnet for indirectly operating a metal fraudulent instrument is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent instrument are inserted through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that destroys a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is illegally accessed by operating the pachinko machine 1. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, a fraudulent act using a magnet is detected in the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided. It is judged that it is being done.

  Similarly, normally, the game area magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity on a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in normal times, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur has occurred (whether the magnet approaches) in the area in front of the game area 5a. , The illegality such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to enter into various winning openings or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 is monitored. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the game area magnetic sensor is input, it is determined that a fraud using a magnet is being performed on the area in front of the game area 5a. ing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity by a magnet, but these two setting operations are performed. The partial magnetic sensor and the game area partial magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010 are formed by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity with strong sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface on one side. It is possible to perform magnetic detection in the area and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection area having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on the opposite side to the other side. ing. It should be noted that "sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that each side surface is more sensitive in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. Then, the game area magnetic sensor is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of such a sensor body spread in the left-right direction or the vertical direction in a front view of the pachinko machine 1, A wide range of the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and other winning openings, and a plurality of other parts of the main part of the ball passage, etc. ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Is arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

  It should be noted that the two setting operation unit magnetic sensors and the game area magnetic sensor may not have the same performance. For example, in place of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the game area magnetic sensor, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board 5). One magnetic sensor 2010 capable of specifying (in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of) may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. ..

  Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, a setting capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is set. An operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 around the third distribution device 2550 are provided. Then, in a normal state, a fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, during normal operation, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether or not vibration that should not originally occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. However, a person other than the person who changes or confirms the setting of the set value monitors the illegal acts such as trying to change or confirm the setting. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation unit vibration sensor is input, vibration fraud is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. I have decided.

  On the other hand, during the normal time only during the small hit game, the fraudulent activity is monitored using the game area vibration sensor, and in the cases other than the small hit game, the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor. This is, in the small hit game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 to the second V winning opening 2008 side is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed to the game ball at the second V winning opening 2008. This is because it becomes possible for B to enter the ball, and such fraud is prevented. In other words, during the small hitting game during the normal time, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibration that should not originally occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) is applied to the third distribution device 2550. Then, the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed to monitor the illegal activity such as entering the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008. In the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed on the third distribution device 2550.

  In this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration, two vibration sensors 3003, that is, a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor are provided, but a place where vibration occurs (Whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5) You may make it provide the one vibration sensor 3003 which can be specified. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided is vibrated or whether the third distribution device 2550 is vibrated. it can.

  In addition, normally, in the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal that notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is set, and the player It is possible to shoot the game ball B when the handle 195 is operated.

  In addition, at normal times, when the game ball B wins a winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the special winning opening 2005, etc., the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of them. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the symbol is not changed, and the game ball B is not changed. In the case where the detection of the game ball B is enabled, while the payout of the game ball B is not performed, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the variation of the symbol is performed. At the same time, the game balls B can be paid out.

  Further, normally, except for a period in which an effect using the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is being performed while the symbol is changing, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, or the like. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after operating the pressing operation unit 303 to display an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to rotate the contact operation unit 302 to adjust the volume and the amount of light. In addition, while the effect using the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is being executed while the symbol is changing, the operation waits for the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 to be operated. Since it is in the state, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 is operated, the volume period and the light amount cannot be adjusted, and the prohibited period is set.

[25-2. About fraudulent monitoring while changing the setting value]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting value setting change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a time chart showing the state of monitoring fraudulent activity while the setting value is being changed.

  When changing the setting of the set value, first, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 in a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered off). Work (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it becomes possible to change the setting of the set value (change permitted state). In such a change-permitted state, it is possible to change the set value (set values 1 to 6) every time the push operation section of the setting switch button 1311b is pushed, and then the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the decision key ON by rotating the setting key switch 1311a toward the original position by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by turning 120 degrees toward the second ON operation. The setting key cylinder 1311a is turned OFF by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it and turning it OFF (timing t4). That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), and the setting value is changed after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It becomes impossible to change the setting (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), it becomes possible to play the game. Become.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process of step S37 is not ended (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited so as not to be performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with normal power-on. The main control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Therefore, in the main control timer interrupt process, the switch input process of step S104 and the misconduct detection of step S112 are performed. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like have not been executed and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but the illegal activity is not monitored, and the game ball B A special period is provided in which the launch is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening. In the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the information regarding the setting change of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The hall clerk can know that the setting is being changed.

  Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the entire monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor are performed. I'm trying not to run. This is because, in the change-permitted state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting of the setting value can use the magnet. This is because there is no room for illegal acts using the. Also, when changing the setting of a set value, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular setting change work.

  Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of the misconduct using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the entire monitoring of the misconduct using the game area vibration sensor are executed. I try not to. This is because in the change-permitted state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting is illegal due to vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, when changing the setting value, even if a legitimate worker who makes the setting change vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the regular setting change work is prevented. Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. And, the firing of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if an authorized worker who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and inhibition of the authorized setting change work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permitted state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the special winning opening 2005, and various gate portions (gates). When the game ball B enters in), the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection sphere B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as an invalid signal while the detection signal from the detection sensor is being input. In this way, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation, the game ball B It will not be performed for any of the payout, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the winning opening and the gate (gate) in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. At the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the measurement is performed (added to the out number counter).

  Further, in the change permitted state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member is not adjustable.

  Further, in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the setting is being changed is being executed. To notify that the setting is being changed, the voice that repeats "Setting is being changed", the message that "Setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the color corresponding to the setting value of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. I am trying. This setting change notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permitted state, and is executed prior to the body frame opening notification that is performed when the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (such as the display of "the frame is open" and voice), but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification is given. The setting change notification is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the above. It should be noted that the main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification has priority over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is given after the setting change notification ends. The form can also be illustrated.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the output from the effect display device 1600 image, the lamp, and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies the setting change notification as described above. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, an ordinary symbol indicator, an ordinary reserved indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special reserved number indicator, a second special indicator. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting change display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permitted state), of the set value A confirmation-in-progress display unit including one LED that indicates that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LEDs of the setting changing display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display are turned off. As a result, in the change-permitted state, it is possible to understand that the game is not progressing by the notification from the function display unit 1400.

  Further, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 175 and 176) is completed (the setting key is changed in step S222 of the setting change process). When it is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off, the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, and the firing permission signal setting of step S113. Processing will be performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), the permission to shoot the game ball B or the detection when the game ball B wins the winning opening is detected. The signal is not allowed to be input, and the state where the game cannot be started is maintained. That is, in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, a detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by an illegal act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor can be performed. The monitoring and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area vibration sensor are not executed yet and are in a standby state.

  In addition, the game ball B can be fired from the timing t5 when the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started with the content described in the above [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal time].

  Further, in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and is in a state of waiting for the start of the game on the screen of the effect display device 1600. The image that notifies that is displayed (game standby notification). Then, for a predetermined period from timing t5, after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, start a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game. The image (game start notification) for notifying that the game has become possible is displayed.

  In this example, the game ball B is fired during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). Although the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the permission is permitted is not set, in consideration of performing the firing operation inspection by the handle 195 in the change permission state, The logic of the launch permission signal may be set in that period so that the gaming ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the permission until the launch of the game ball B is limited. It is desirable that the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unfairly. .

  In addition, in this example, the game ball B is shot in the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The game control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 does not set the logic of the firing permission signal for informing that it is permitted, and the gaming ball B is fired from timing t5 (timing t4 may be used). Although it is in a possible state, when the handle 195 is operated (touches the handle 195) for the first time after ending the change permitting state and permitting the game ball B to be launched, the setting value is changed in the change permitting state. The notification is executed after changing the setting to notify that. As a notification after the setting is changed, a voice of "setting changed", a message of "setting changed", and lamp light emission are executed. Further, the notification after the setting change indicates that the handle 195 is operated only after the setting change of the setting value (the steering wheel 195) even after the setting change of the setting value is made by an unauthorized person other than an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value. 195)). As a result, if a legitimate worker who changes the setting value does not change the setting value, if the notification is issued after the setting change, the setting value will be changed due to misconduct. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct by making the information known to the outside.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B is fired in the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal that notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the gaming ball B is launched from timing t5 (timing t4 may be used). Although it is in a possible state, if the handle 195 has been operated (contact with the handle 195) before the game ball B is permitted to be fired, the contact to the handle 195 is once released after the game ball B is permitted to be fired. If the player does not touch (operate) the handle 195 again (by turning off contact detection), the game ball B is not launched. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 is turned on before the timing t5, unless the contact detection for the handle 195 is detected from the OFF to the ON edge after the timing t5, the contact to the continued handle 195 is reached. The contact is invalidated so that the game ball B is not fired. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value contacts the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is not attached to the outer frame 2. The game ball B is not accidentally shot when it is closed, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from losing.

  Further, unlike the above, in consideration of accelerating the game start based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the permission to shoot the game ball B, The contact with the handle 195 may be enabled while the contact is continued, and the game ball B may be launched from the time when the launch of the game ball B is permitted. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B can be fired from the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. Although it is possible to play the game, it may be possible to immediately play the game at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be fired, and it is possible to perform a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, a small hit game, and the above-mentioned [normal Regarding fraudulent monitoring at time], the fraudulent activity may be monitored, for example. In such a configuration, in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a symbol variation, a big hit game, and a small hit. You may make it display the image (game start notification) which notifies that it is now possible to start a game such as a winning game.

  As another example, after the power is turned on, before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the switch input process of step S104, the injustice detection process of step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 are performed. You may comprise so that a corresponding process may be performed in advance. With such a configuration, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, although the setting value setting is being changed (change permitted state), cheating is not monitored, and the game ball It is also possible not to permit B to be fired, and not to enable the input of the detection signal when the game ball B wins the winning opening.

  Further, in the above-described another example, the magnetic sensor 2010 or the magnetic sensor 2010 is included in the change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5) which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. The vibration sensor 3003 may be used to monitor fraudulent activities, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. In addition, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1, but from the timing t3 to the timing t4. In the change permission state (the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5), which is the period of, even if it is determined that the fraudulent act due to the magnet or the vibration is performed, The values of the Goto counter and the vibration Goto counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when the setting value is changed, even if a legitimate operator who changes the setting approaches the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal to use the magnet or vibration. There is no notification or addition as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of illegal activities from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting of the setting value.

  The various processes related to the change permission state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, and thus may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with a normal operation of the RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, a worker in the amusement hall generates a state in which various processing relating to the change permission state can be selected. After that, when a change permission state occurs, various processing relating to the change permission state is executed with the selected setting. As a result, in the game arcade A, the fraudulent monitoring is not monitored in the change permitted state, but the contact with the handle 195 is set to be valid, and in the game arcade B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the change permitted state. It can be unmonitored and can be set to invalidate contact with the handle 195. Needs of the amusement hall such as whether or not to inspect the firing operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state. You will be able to adjust to.

[25-3. About fraud monitoring during confirmation display of set values]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the setting value, I explained that I did not monitor the fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the setting value. The configuration may be configured such that a fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of the set value, or a fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case in which a fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of set values will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a time chart showing a fraudulent behavior monitoring state when the fraudulent activity is not being monitored while confirming and displaying the set value.

  When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, first check the state that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and also check the state that there is no symbol fluctuation (state without hold). , The main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 (timing t5), and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key switch 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. To do. Then, by rotating the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position from the rotational position (timing t7), the setting display device is displayed. The state of displaying the set value for 1310 g is switched to the state of not displaying. That is, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), and the setting value confirmation is performed after the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is in a state where no display is made (state that cannot be confirmed). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), it becomes possible to play the game. Become.

  At the timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless the gaming ball B such as the prize ball is paid out. ing. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key by 60 degrees clockwise, the game ball B such as a prize ball is paid out. If it has been issued, the setting key switch 1311a may not be set to the setting key ON (while the setting key is OFF), or after the payout of the game ball B such as the prize ball is completed, the setting key switch 1311a The setting key may be turned on to display the current set value on the setting display 1310g.

  In addition, as another example, when performing confirmation display of the set value that is currently set, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (power of the pachinko machine 1 is the same as when changing the setting of the set value). Setting state by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. By setting the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the set value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). You may. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, the state of the set value can be changed (change permitted state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, it may be configured to shift to a state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed. In such a configuration, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, whereby the state (confirmation display state) in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed is performed. The state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7.

  In this example, for the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), but monitoring of illegal activity is not executed, and the game ball B Is not permitted, and a special period during which the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening is set. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the information regarding the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , So that the hall clerk can know that the confirmation is being displayed.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the entire monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor are performed. I'm trying not to run. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value uses the magnet to misconduct. This is because there is no room to do. In addition, when performing confirmation display of the set value, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular confirmation display work.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the monitoring of the misconduct using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the entire monitoring of the misconduct using the game area vibration sensor are executed. I try not to. This is because in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for anyone other than the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display to perform fraudulent acts due to vibration. Because there is no. In addition, when performing confirmation display of set values, even if a legitimate worker who performs confirmation display vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity due to vibration, Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, do not set the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted. And, the firing of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value touches the handle 195, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being launched, and it is possible to prevent the regular confirmation and display work from being hindered. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the special winning opening 2005, and various gate portions (gates). Even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the game balls B entered in), the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation, the game ball B It will not be performed for any of the payout, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of the winning opening, the gate portion (gate), etc. in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7. At the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining due to a ball slid (ball clogging) in the game area 5a is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the value is measured (added to the out number counter).

  Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like. The amount of light output from the light emitting member is not adjustable.

  Further, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. The notification during confirmation display (notification related to confirmation display) for notifying that it is being displayed is being executed. As a notification during confirmation display, a voice that repeats “Confirmation is being displayed”, a message “Confirmation is being displayed!”, And a lamp light emission in a color corresponding to the setting value of 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. There is. This notification during confirmation display is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed prior to the body frame opening notification that is performed when the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (such as the display of "the frame is open" and the sound), but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is given. It is supposed that the notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing. It should be noted that the main frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification has priority over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is given after the confirmation display notification ends. The form can also be illustrated.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, in addition to the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies the confirmation display state as described above. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, an ordinary symbol indicator, an ordinary reserved indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special reserved number indicator, a second special indicator. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting change display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permitted state), of the set value A confirmation-in-progress display unit including one LED that indicates that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LEDs of the display device during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display devices are turned off. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to understand that the game is not progressing by the notification from the function display unit 1400.

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 may be included), the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002. Even when the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the game balls B when the game balls B win the prize holes such as 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, and the big winning hole 2005, the detection of the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be emitted by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A warning effect that illegally notifies that the game ball B has won in the winning opening despite the period in which the game ball B does not win in the winning opening Running. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display and the notification for opening the main frame. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification and the main body frame opening notification.

  Further, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, it is not possible to permit the launch of the game ball B or to input the detection signal when the game ball B wins the winning opening, so that the game is played. Although it cannot be started, the state is maintained until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed thereafter (timing t8). That is, in the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, the detection signal is not input even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening due to a fraudulent act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor can be performed. The monitoring and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area vibration sensor are not executed yet and are in a standby state.

  Also, from the timing t8 when the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, it is possible to shoot the game ball B, and it is possible to perform a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started with the content described in the above [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal time]. In addition, before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, the game ball B can be fired, and the variation of the symbol and the big hit. A game, a small hit game, or the like can be played, and various fraudulent behaviors are started to be monitored with the content described in the above [Regarding fraudulent monitoring in normal time].

  Further, during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is on standby for the start of the game. The image that notifies that is displayed (game standby notification). Then, for a predetermined period from timing t8, after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, start a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game. An image is displayed to notify that it has become possible (game start notification).

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in the state of turning on the setting key normally, but in the case of such a state of turning on the setting key The warning effects A and B for notifying that the setting key is illegally turned on by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state (timing t1) in a state where the design variation is normally performed, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state (timing t3) in a state where the symbol is not constantly changed, the setting key switch 1311a is returned to the setting key OFF. During the period (timing t4), the warning effect B is being executed. The warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effect that is being executed. That is, at the time of executing the warning effects A and B, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed, the effect being executed is stopped and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority. Note that the warning effects A and B execute the effects in the same manner, but the effects may be performed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbols are being changed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring fraudulent activity due to magnets or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is detected for a predetermined period by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, or the speaker. The abnormal occurrence effect for notifying that it is in an abnormal state due to occurrence of is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence performance, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration) Whether the occurrence is detected), the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the area of the third sorting device 2550) Is it a peripheral area?) And so on. Further, the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, at the time of executing the abnormality occurrence effect, the effect being executed is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is given the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed.

  In this example, the game ball B is fired during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). Although the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, the fact that the firing operation by the handle 195 is inspected in the confirmation display state is taken into consideration. The logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission up to the launch of the game ball B is limited. It is desirable that the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unfairly. ..

  Further, in this example, the game ball B is fired during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). The logic of the launch permission signal for informing the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set and the launch of the game ball B from the timing t8 (timing t7 may be possible). However, if the handle 195 has been operated (touching the handle 195) before the game ball B is permitted to be fired, the handle 195 is once contacted after the game ball B is permitted to be fired. The game ball B is not launched unless it is released (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 195 is contacted (operated) again. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been turned on before the timing t8, as long as the contact detection on the handle 195 does not detect an edge from OFF to ON after the timing t8, the contact to the continued handle 195 is reached. The contact is invalidated so that the game ball B is not fired. As a result, even if an authorized worker who confirms and displays the set value contacts the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 can be held against the outer frame 2. When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not inadvertently shot, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from losing.

  Further, unlike the above, in consideration of accelerating the game start based on the end of the confirmation display state, when the handle 195 has been operated from the time before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, to the handle 195. The contact with the handle 195 may be validated while the contact of is continued, and the game ball B may be launched from the time when the launch of the game ball B is permitted. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B can be fired from the timing t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the variation of the symbols, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. Although it is possible to play the game, it may be possible to immediately play the game at the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be fired, and it is possible to perform a game such as a symbol variation, a big-hit game, a small-hit game, etc. Regarding fraudulent monitoring at time], the fraudulent activity may be monitored. In such a configuration, in the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a symbol variation, a big hit game, a small game. You may make it display the image (game start notification) which notifies that it became possible to start games, such as a winning game.

  Further, as another example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (the period may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor. While using the 3003 to monitor fraudulent activity, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. Further, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, the value of the magnet Goto counter or the vibration Goto counter is incremented by 1, but from the timing t6 to the timing t7. In the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8) which is the period of, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed, The values of the Goto counter and the vibration Goto counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, even if an authorized worker approaches the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal to use the magnet or the vibration. There is no notification or addition as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of illegal activities from becoming an obstacle when confirming and displaying the set value.

  The various processes related to the confirmation display state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, and thus may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a worker in the amusement hall generates a state in which various processing relating to the confirmation display state can be selected. After that, when a confirmation display state is generated, various processing relating to the confirmation display state is executed with the selected setting. As a result, in the game arcade A, the fraudulent monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, but the contact with the handle 195 is set to be valid, and in the game arcade B, the fraud monitoring is checked in the confirmation display state. It can be set as non-monitoring and can be set to invalidate the contact with the handle 195. Needs of the amusement hall such as whether or not to inspect the firing operation with the handle 195 in the confirmation display state. You will be able to adjust to.

  Next, a case where a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is being confirmed and displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in the case where a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while confirming and displaying the set value. Here, the difference from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value is described below.

  In this example, for the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), but the firing of the game ball B is not permitted, and the game ball is in the winning opening. When B wins the prize, the detection signal is not valid for a special period, and only the fraudulent acts on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. There is.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, while the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation magnetic sensor is used. I am trying to monitor the cheating. This is because in the confirmation display state, the regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a with the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2, A person other than an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display of the above may perform an illegal act to bring a magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the setting value may be illegally changed. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening by an illegal act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which the game area cannot be used, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period from timing t8 when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. I am trying to monitor the cheating. That is, regarding the monitoring of the illegal activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, whether it is the normal time, the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, while the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, the fraud using the setting operation vibration sensor is not observed. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because in the confirmation display state, the regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a with the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2, A person other than an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display of the above may perform an illegal act to vibrate the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the setting value may be changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening by an illegal act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which the game area cannot be used, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

  The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period from timing t8 when the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I am trying to monitor the cheating. That is, regarding the monitoring of the illegal activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, whether it is the normal time, the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

  Further, in the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the illegal operation using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed. Although the behavior is monitored and the illegal operation is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, when those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the effect display device 1600 displays an image of magnetism or vibration. The abnormal occurrence effect A for notifying that it is in an abnormal state due to occurrence of is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The designated part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the timing t7 (which may be the timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF. The abnormal appearance A is forcibly ended. This is because in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the regular operator who performs the confirmation display does The possibility of unintentionally bringing the magnet closer or adding vibration cannot be ruled out. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A being executed is forced. It is supposed to end.

  As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8, the fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the fraud activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. Although it is done, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Of fraudulent activity, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, or the speaker causes an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is is executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence occurs. The effect is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the effect B. This is because in the confirmation display state, the person who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display does not knowingly This is because it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the magnets have been moved closer or vibrations have been added. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Whether the occurrence has been detected), or the part where the abnormality has been detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the area of the third sorting device 2550) Is it a peripheral area?) And so on.

  Further, as described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is output by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The main body frame opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is in the open state is executed. Further, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. The notification during confirmation display (notification related to confirmation display) for notifying that it is being displayed is being executed. After performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON to shift to the confirmation display state. Priority is given to the notification during confirmation display, and when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the main frame opening notification is given. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display.

[25-4. Modification of fraud monitoring while setting value is being changed]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the setting value, it has been explained that the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value of the setting value is being changed. Good. A case where a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 243 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in the case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed. Here, the difference from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value is being changed will be described below.

  In the above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 175 and 176), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until step S37, the setting change process of step S37 is not ended (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and the subsequent steps are performed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. The interrupt permission setting of S52 is prohibited so that the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. That is, since the main control timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 and the misconduct detection of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like have not been executed and are in a standby state. On the other hand, after the power is turned on and before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the switch input process of step S104, the misconduct detection process of step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 are equivalent. The processing (the same processing) may be performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value setting is changed (change permitted state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, a special period during which the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B is won in the winning opening is set to be a special period, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are set for the area of the illegal act. I try to monitor only cheating.

  Before starting the setting change process of step S37, a process (the same process) corresponding to the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112 is performed in advance, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch are included in the fraudulent activity. In the case where only the fraudulent activity in the area where the 1311a is provided is monitored, in the processing, as in the fraudulent activity detection processing in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1. However, in the main control power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and after the setting change process of step S37 is completed (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process). After the determination is made), in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, and the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are added (incremented). The value 0 (zero) is set (initialized) as an initial value to the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter by clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state. As described above, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized at the end of the change permission state. However, in the change permission state, a person who changes the setting of the set value sets the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b. It is impossible to exclude the possibility that, when the setting value of the set value is changed, the person who changes the setting value unintentionally brings the magnet closer to the magnet or applies vibration when the setting value is changed. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is occurring, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is initialized. I am going to change.

  Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, while the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation magnetic sensor is used. I am trying to monitor the cheating. This is because in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button 1311b changes the setting of the set value while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. However, a person other than a legitimate operator who changes the setting value makes an illegal act to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctioning such as being performed.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening by an illegal act, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which the game area cannot be used, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period from timing t5 when the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I am trying to monitor the cheating. That is, regarding the monitoring of illegal activities using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is normal time, whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

  Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, while the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, the fraud using the setting operation vibration sensor is not performed. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button 1311b changes the setting of the set value while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. However, a person other than a legitimate operator who changes the setting value makes a fraudulent act to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctioning such as being performed.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening by a fraudulent act, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it is not possible, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

  The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change-permitted state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, but also in the period until the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I am trying to monitor the cheating. That is, regarding the monitoring of the illegal activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, whether it is the normal time, the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. A setting change effect that notifies that it is being changed is being executed. It should be noted that the first start port 2002 and the second start port are included in the change permission state (which may be a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5) which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Even when the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the game balls B when the game balls B win the prize holes such as 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, and the big winning hole 2005, the detection of the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be emitted by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A warning effect that informs that the game ball B has been illegally won in the prize hole despite the period in which the game ball B does not win the prize hole. Running. The warning effect C is executed with priority over the notification of setting change and the notification of opening of the main body frame. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification.

  Further, in the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the illegal operation using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed. Although the behavior is monitored and the illegal operation is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, when those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the effect display device 1600 displays an image of magnetism or vibration. The abnormal occurrence effect A for notifying that it is in an abnormal state due to occurrence of is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The designated part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the time point of the timing t4 (which may be the time point of the timing t5) which is the end time of the change permitted state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. The abnormal appearance A is forcibly ended. This is because in the change permitted state, an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and when the setting of the setting value is changed, the setting is changed. It is impossible to rule out the possibility that a legitimate worker unintentionally moved the magnet closer or added vibration. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A being executed is forced. It is supposed to end.

  As described above, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5, monitoring of the misconduct using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of the misconduct using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. Although it is done, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Of fraudulent activity, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, or the speaker causes an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is is executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence occurs. The effect is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the effect B. This is because in the change permitted state, an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and when the setting of the setting value is changed, the setting is changed. This is because it is not possible to exclude the possibility that a legitimate worker unintentionally brought the magnet closer or added vibration. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Whether the occurrence of the occurrence of) has been detected, or the part where the abnormality has been detected (the area in which the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the third distribution device 2550). Is it the area around?) Etc.

  Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t5 after the power is turned on, the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. , The outer frame 2 is informed that the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, after the power is turned on, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, the speaker, A setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the setting of the setting value is being changed is executed. After performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON to shift to the change permission state. When the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permitted state, the main unit frame is given priority over the open notification. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the release notification and the setting change notification.

[26. Modified example of changing settings such as winning probability]
In the above example, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit playing state. In the case, the one for changing the setting of the winning probability or the like is shown for the one for controlling the transition to the big hit game state, but as shown in FIG. 244, whether the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, Alternatively, even if the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hitting gaming state, the winning probability or the like may be changed for those that are not controlled to shift to the big hitting playing state. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example of the setting change of the winning probability and the like in the pachinko machine in a mode in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, instead of the accessory winning hole 2006 (the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are arranged inside) of the pachinko machine 1 of the above example, The second major winning opening 2006A (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged inside) is provided, and the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game contents of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, "big hit"). , "Small win", "Time reduction (time reduction) win", "Probability change (probability change) win") is generated, and the special lottery result is drawn. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance in the second starting opening 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived). To do. It should be noted that the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 without giving priority (deriving) the special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance in the second starting opening 2004 (priority change). The special lottery results may be suggested (deriving) in the order indicated (sequential change), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in parallel with the same period (simultaneous change).

  In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn by the game balls B being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R certainty change big hit", and "15R certainty change big hit". , "15R normal big hit" and so on. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes “small hit”, while the first special lottery result does not include “small hit”. In addition, while including "small win" in both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, the second special lottery result wins the "small win" rather than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set to be high.

  If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is “small hit”, When a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) elapses after the two major winning openings 2006A are in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, the "small hit" game in which the game ball B is in the unacceptable closed state is executed. Executed. Since the second special winning opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when the "small hit" is drawn, "right hit" is carried out for the first guide. The game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. Further, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period during which the second big winning opening 2006A is in the open state is shorter than that in the big hit game, it is necessary to continue to hit the game ball to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big winning opening 2006A in one small hit game. During the small hitting game, the gaming state before the start of the small hitting game state (such as a probability changing state and a time saving state described later) is maintained, and after the small hitting game, the gaming state before the start of the small hitting gaming state continues. ..

  The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which have been drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, are either "15R probability variable big hit" or "15R normal big hit". In this case, after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) elapses, or a predetermined limit number of the special winning opening 2005 (for example, 10 pieces). ), The acceptance of the game ball B, if any of the conditions are satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is called one round) that closes the game ball B into an unacceptable closed state is repeated 15 times. The game is executed. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R normal big hit”, the lottery is selected by accepting the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player, a predetermined number of variations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion Until the number of times reaches 100 times), the shift control is performed to a “time saving state” in which the time is shortened as compared to usual and the time until the next “hit” is drawn is shortened. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R probability variable big hits", after the "big hit" game is over, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 until the next "big hit" The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B are shortened as compared with the special symbol for suggesting to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. Control is performed to shift to a “probability change state (high probability state)” that improves the probability that the special lottery result will be a “hit”.

  If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, are “2R certainty variation jackpot”, the second big winning opening 2006A is After a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) elapses after the open state in which the game ball B can be received, the open / close pattern in which the game ball B is in the unacceptable closed state (one open / close pattern is one round) The “big hit” game is repeated twice. Also, after the "big hit" game, until the next "big hit", the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. While shortening the variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player than usual, and improving the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "win" "probability variation state (high probability state ) ”.

  Since the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role object 2500, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role object 2500. Can be played by the player. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 while the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are open, the payout device 580 is operated by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be received. Can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to perform the driving operation than the second guide passage 2522 side, while the second guide passage 2522 is used. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to allow the player to select which passage is targeted for the driving operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with various games. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, only the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be accepted into the second special winning opening 2006A.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are received from the start of the special drawing until the result of this special drawing is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit. In the following, the blinking of the LED for suggesting the first special lottery result to the player for a predetermined time is referred to as "variable display of the first special symbol", and for suggesting the second special lottery result to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined time may be referred to as "variable display of the second special symbol", and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs that suggests the first special lottery result to the player is "stop symbol of the first special symbol". In some cases, the LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as a "stop pattern of the second special symbol".

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three or more picture rows each including a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and each picture row is changed to display the variably displayed picture row. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective three rows of the stopped and displayed picture rows are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture columns stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player operation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the front effect unit 3200 and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the contact operation section 302 or the push operation section 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

  Further, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, the main control board 1310 carries out a lottery of the ordinary lottery result as to whether or not the second starting opening door 2411 is opened in a predetermined pattern. Then, the ordinary lottery result selected by lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time) on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol for suggesting the player the ordinary lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B to the ordinary winning port 2003 is set to "6000 s" in the normal state, while the probability state is changed. And, in the time saving state, it is set to "0.1 s".

  In addition, the probability of winning per coin (probability that the result of ordinary lottery will be "ordinary winning") is set to "10/11", and in most cases when the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003, "normal" Then, the second start door 2411 is opened. Further, when the result of the normal lottery is "normal win", the period for which the second start door 2411 is opened is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, while "2" is set in the probability variation state and the time saving state. .0s ”. Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting opening door 2411 is opened only at an interval of 6000 s at the shortest, and the period of the opening state is extremely short, so that the game ball B is received into the second starting opening 2004 very very. To be difficult. As a result, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act aimed at receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the probability variation state, not only the second starting opening door 2411 is frequently opened, but also the opening state is long, so that it is easy to receive the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. . The probability of hitting a figure may be different between the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the time saving state (low probability time saving state) or the probable variation state (high probability time saving state). The probability of hitting a universal figure is set to "1/11", and the probability of hitting a universal figure is set to "10/11" in a time-saving state or a probable variation state. In a normal state, it is very important to accept the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, by making it easier to receive the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state or the probability changing state It is possible to suppress fraud aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state while allowing acceptance to occur frequently. In addition, while the probability of hitting a universal figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the probability of hitting a universal figure is set to “10 / 11ths” in the time saving state or the probability variation state. It may be set to “11” or “11/11” to further suppress the fraudulent act aiming to accept the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state.

  In this way, in the normal state, the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based mainly on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 (first Variable display of special symbols) is performed. On the other hand, in the probability change state and the time saving state, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 is performed, so that the game ball B is frequently received in the second starting opening 2004, and mainly the second Suggestion of the second special lottery result (variable display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting opening 2004 is performed.

  Further, if the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2003 during the period from the start of the normal lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 until the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the result of the normal lottery is suggested. Since it is not possible to start, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four with respect to the normal winning port 2003, and if the number is more than that, the ordinary lottery result is withheld even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning port 2003. Instead, I try to discard it. Instead of this example, the game ball B has been received in the normal winning hole 2003 from the start of the normal lottery by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 until the result of this normal lottery is suggested. In this case, the ordinary lottery result may be discarded without being held. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state, and in the normal state, the second special lottery is performed to make a small hit. It is possible to prevent the occurrence, and it is possible to further suppress the fraudulent activity aiming to accept the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state.

  Further, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600, similarly to the special lottery result. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the ordinary lottery result. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result on the function display unit 1400 is that the LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result is repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the ordinary lottery is made by a combination of the turned-on LEDs. Suggest results.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, the game ball B aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 is driven and the first special based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. Suggestion of lottery results (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed. In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 is controlled by controlling the shift to the time saving state after the jackpot game is over. Suggestion of the second special lottery result (variable display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is performed. If a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggested times for the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion combined) is reached without a big hit in the time saver state, the normal state is terminated. The game ball B aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 is driven again, and the result of the first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 is indicated (first special (Variable display of symbols) is performed.

  In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R certainty variation big hit" or "2R certainty variation big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state, the shift control to the certainty variation state (high probability state) is performed after the big hit game is finished, and the center character object The game ball B is aimed at the right side of 2500, and the suggestion of the second special lottery result (variable display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is performed. The probability change state is continuously executed until the next big hit, and when the second special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" in the probability change state, the big hit is generated in the time saving state after the big hit game is over. Without reaching, if the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached (the suggestion number of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times), the time saving state is ended and the transition control to the normal state is performed.

  Further, when the second special lottery result becomes "15R certainty variation big hit" or "2R certainty variation big hit" in the probability variation state, the transition control to the probability variation state (high probability state) is performed again after the big hit game is over. In this way, the probability changing state continues until the "15R normal big hit" is reached, and when the "15R normal big hit" is reached, the transition control to the time saving state is performed after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, when only the first special lottery result is suspended with no second special lottery result pending, or when there is no second special lottery result pending, the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 When is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed even in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the control is shifted to the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, and the first special lottery result is "15R in the time saving state or the probability changing state. When it becomes "probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit", it shifts to the probability variation state after the big hit game is over.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being a “small hit” as the second special lottery result (small hit probability) is set to be much higher than the big hit probability (for example, 10 of the big hit probability in the probability changing state). About twice). Further, during the time saving state or the sudden change state, the game ball B is frequently received in the second starting opening 2004 and the second special lottery is carried out, so that a small hit frequently occurs and the second big prize. The mouth 2006A is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a small hit frequently occurs in the second special lottery in a time saving state or a probability changing state, and even if it is not a big hit, it is possible to acquire prize balls exceeding the firing amount little by little. It is possible, and the longer the time-saving state and the probability variation state last, the more prize balls can be acquired. Therefore, not only does the game ball B not decrease in the time saving state or the probability changing state, but also the player's possession ball can be increased by the prize ball obtained by the generated small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game in the normal state in which the consumption of the game ball B is large, and the consumption of the game ball B is small and the player's ball is held even if the small hit does not result in a big hit. It is possible to control the game to be executed in a completely different state by increasing the time saving state and the game executed in the probability changing state.

[27-2. Change of settings such as winning probability in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big hit, a small hit, etc., which is changed according to the set value, will be described.

  Also in the second embodiment, similarly to the above-described example, a table corresponding to the set value is selected as a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery or the like. A table used for special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (A), in this embodiment, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot is won in the hit determination table) common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery is set to a different value for each set value. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" with the setting value 1, "1/309" with the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 Is 1/299, the setting value is 4/289, the setting value is 5/279, and the setting value is 6/269. Further, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability variation state (high probability state) is "1/30" with the setting value 1, "1/40" with the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 Is 1/50, the setting value is 4/60, the setting value is 5/70, and the setting value is 6/80.

  In this way, in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, but in the probability variation state, the set value becomes higher, contrary to the normal state and the time saving state. The probability of a big hit is getting lower. That is, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest in the normal state and the time saving state, while the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest in the probability variation state. The jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, but for some, the jackpot probability set to a lower set value than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value is You may make it set so that it may become high.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit in the hit judgment table is won) is "0" for all the set values. Therefore, it is difficult to win a prize ball by a small hit in the normal state and the time saving state (where the small hit is not won), while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hit in the hit judgment table The percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that you have been won is set to "1/3" that is common to all the setting values, and it is a very high probability compared to the big hit probability. Frequent hits make it easy to win prize balls.

  In the probability variation state, the big hit probability is the lowest at the set value 6, so it is less likely to occur (delay) than the low setting value, and the probability variation state continues for a long time, so the set value is high. As a matter of fact, the number of small hits that occur until a big hit comes to increase. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is promised. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage degree. In other words, in the probability variation state, the next big hit is promised regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained except for the big hit is made different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the big hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in other countries is increasing.

  In addition, without changing the duration of the probability variation state until the next big hit, a predetermined number of fluctuations as in the normal state and the time saving state (the suggestion number of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are 100 suggestions times) When the set value is reached, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, so that the higher the set value, the more frequently the big hit occurs, thereby increasing the advantage degree. Good (so-called number of times change probability). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained outside the big hit is made different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property that expects a big hit before the end condition of the probability variation state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest. In order to realize such a game property, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state should be set with no setting difference (equal to 1/319) to make sure The setting difference may be provided as described above only for the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state.

  In addition, in order to realize the game of the second embodiment, when the setting value is lower than a specific setting value, the big hit probability in the probability variation state is made higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, When the set value is higher than the specific set value, the big hit probability in the probability variation state may be set lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to 1/250 and the set value 2 to 240 1 / ”, the setting value 3 is“ 1/230 ”, the setting value 4 is“ 1/180 ”, the setting value 5 is“ 1/170 ”, and the setting value 6 is“ 1/160 ”. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability variation state (high probability state) is "1/25" with the setting value 1, "1/24" with the setting value 2, and "1" with the setting value 3. 1/3 ”, setting value 4 is“ 1/8 ”, setting value 5 is“ 1/17 ”, setting value 6 is“ 1/16 ”, while small in the second special lottery. An example in which the hit probability (the proportion of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won in the hit judgment table) is set to “1/20” which is common to all the set values It can be.

  In the case of such a configuration, with the set values 1 to 3, since the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of a big hit in the probability changing state, a prize ball obtainable by a small hit in the probability changing state. While the number is relatively small, with the set values 4 to 6, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probability changing state, so a prize that can be won by a small hit in the probability changing state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, if the set value is 4 or more, the probability of a big hit is lower than the probability of a small hit in the probability variation state, and it is less likely that a big hit will occur. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that a ball can be obtained. Further, history information of the probability of a big hit occurring in the probability changing state after power-on or the probability of a small hit occurring in the probability changing state is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM or the like) of the peripheral control unit 1511. By displaying various kinds of hit probability information based on the history information on the effect display device 1600, the player can be made aware that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probability changing state. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that "the set value may be 4 or more", and to add new enjoyment and fun that has never existed before while the game continues in the probability variation state. In addition, the player feels that "the set value may be 4 or more" because the player feels that the probability variation state continues for a long time and that many prize balls can be won by a small hit in the probability variation state. It can be made to be recognized, and in this respect also new fun and fun that has never existed can be added. As described above, with a specific set value (the set value 4 in the present embodiment) as a boundary, if the set value is higher than that, the game is changed to a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit, so that the game can be enjoyed. Can be further improved.

  Further, as another embodiment, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery becomes higher as the set value becomes higher in the probability variation state, and the second special lottery becomes larger as the set value becomes higher. The probability of a small hit in may be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the small hit probability is the set value 1. "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/309", setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279" The setting value 6 is “1/269”. Further, the probability of small hits in the probability variation state (high probability state) is "13.9 / 1" with the setting value 1, "30.9 / 1" with the setting value 2, and "29.9 minutes with the setting value 3". 1 ”, the setting value 4 is“ 1/8/2 ”, the setting value 5 is“ 17.9 ”, and the setting value 6 is“ 26.9 ”. As described above, in the probability changing state, the jackpot probability of all the set values is increased ten times as compared with the normal state and the time saving state.

  In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is "1/7" when the setting value is 1, "1/6" when the setting value is 2, "1/5" when the setting value is 3 and "1/5" when the setting value is 4. It is set to "1/4", the setting value 5 is "1/3", and the setting value 6 is "1/2". Therefore, in the setting value 1, the small hit occurs only once every 7 times the second special lottery is performed, whereas in the setting value 6, the small hit is 1 every 2 times the second special lottery is performed. It occurs only once, and the frequency of small hits increases. That is, with the set value 6, small hits occur more frequently than with the set value 1, and it is easier to win prize balls due to the small hits. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

  Further, in addition to changing the setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability described above, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability, it is possible to change the determination ratio of the big hit type for each set value to increase the degree of advantage. It may be changed. As described above, the second special lottery is mainly executed and the small hit may occur in the probability variation state and the time saving state, whereas the first special lottery is mainly executed and the small hit cannot occur in the normal state. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes depending on the duration of the probability change state or the time saving state.

  Also in the probability variation state, as in the normal state and the time saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the big hit probability, and the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability. The so-called falling lottery may be performed in which, when the special lottery result is “out of bounds” during the probability changing state, whether or not to end the probability changing state is selected. Further, in this case, the falling probability (probability of ending the probability variation state) may be common for each set value, or may be different for each set value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (C), the fall probability in the high-probability state may be set to "1/100" which is common to all the set values. In this case, the fall lottery result should end the probability change state. Although the probability that indicates is not different for each set value, the jackpot probability is improved as the set value is higher as shown in FIG. 245 (B). Therefore, the occurrence frequency and the number of occurrences of the jackpots are made different for each set value. The degree of advantage is changed so that the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

  Further, the falling probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (D), the falling probability is "1/80" for the set value 1 and the set value 2, "1/90" for the set value 3 and the set value 4, the set value 5 and the set value. The value 6 may be “1/100”.

  In this case, with the set value 1, the jackpot probability is "13.9 / 1", whereas the fall probability is "1/8", and the jackpot probability is about 2.5 times higher than the fall probability. On the other hand, with the setting value 6, the jackpot probability is "16.9 in 26.9", whereas the falling probability is "1/100" and the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the falling probability. Doubled. In other words, the jackpot probability is improved as the set value increases, and the proportion of winning the jackpot before the result of the falling lottery that ends the probability variation state is increased. There is.

  If a falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability variation state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability) while the second special lottery is performed. The control for shortening the variation time of the special symbol to suggest the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the variation number after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number (for example, the first special The control may be terminated and the transition to the normal state may be controlled on the basis of reaching the suggestion number of the lottery and the suggestion number of the second special lottery 100 times. That is, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be terminated and the transition control to the time saving state may be performed. In addition, when the falling lottery result to end the probability change state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game has already been finished is a predetermined number (for example, the suggestion number of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are 100 suggestion times. ), The probability change state may be terminated and then the transition control to the normal state may be performed without performing the transition control to the time saving state.

  Also, when a falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability variation state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variation time. That is, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be terminated and the transition control to the normal state may be performed. In this case, the falling lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and if the result of the falling lottery that ends the time saving state during the time saving state is obtained, the time saving state is ended and the state shifts to the normal state. You may make it control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 245 (E), after the jackpot game is over, after the transition control is performed to the probability variation state, if the special lottery result is “big hit”, the probability variation state will be terminated. The degree of advantage is changed by changing it. Specifically, when the first special lottery result that is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is the same in all the set values, "15R probability change big hit" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of big hit game and "2R probability change that the number of award balls that are controlled to shift to a high probability state after end of a big hit game is smaller than" 15R probability change big hit " The occurrence ratio of "big hit" is set to "40/100", respectively, and a predetermined number of fluctuations after the big hit game is finished (for example, the suggestion number of the first special lottery and the suggestion number of the second special lottery are 100 times) The generation ratio of the "15R normal big hit" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until it reaches is set to "20/100".

  On the other hand, when the second special lottery result mainly executed in the probability changing state and the time saving state is “big hit”, the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value, and the set value 1 is set. The occurrence rate of the "15R probability variation big hit" that is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is set to "45/100", and the number of prize balls that are controlled to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game is finished. The occurrence ratio of "2R probability variation big hit" less than "15R probability variation big hit" is "15/100", and shift control to a time saving state until reaching a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game. The generation ratio of the "15R normal big hit" is set to "40/100".

  With the set value 2, the occurrence ratio of "15R certainty variation big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is set to "46/100", and the prize which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is finished. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "19/100", and a predetermined number of variations after the jackpot game is finished (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The generation ratio of "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to a time saving state until reaching the suggestion count of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "35/100".

  With the set value 3, the occurrence ratio of "15R certainty variation big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is set to "47/100", and the prize which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is finished. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variable jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variable jackpot", is "23/100", and a predetermined number of changes after the jackpot game is finished (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The generation ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the suggestion number of the second special lottery 100 times) is "30/100".

  With the setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of "15R certainty variation big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is set to "48/100", and the prize which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the big hit game is finished. The occurrence rate of "2R probability variation big hit", which is less than "15R probability variation big hit", is "27/100", and a predetermined number of fluctuations (eg, suggestion of the first special lottery and The generation ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the suggestion number of the second special lottery (100 suggestions) is set to "25/100".

  With the set value 5, the occurrence ratio of the "15R certainty variation big hit" that is controlled to shift to the high-probability state after the jackpot game is set to "49/100", and the prize that is controlled to shift to the high-probability state after the jackpot game is finished. The occurrence rate of "2R probability variation big hit", which is less than "15R probability variation big hit", is set to "31/100", and a predetermined number of fluctuations (eg, suggestion of the first special lottery and The generation ratio of the "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the suggestion number of the second special lottery 100 times), is set to "20/100".

  With the setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of the "15R certainty variation big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is "50/100", and the prize which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is "35/100", and a predetermined number of fluctuations after the jackpot game is finished (for example, suggestion of first special lottery and The generation ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the suggestion number of the second special lottery 100 times) is "15/100".

  In this way, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability change state and the time saving state is “big hit”, a predetermined number of fluctuations (eg, suggestion of the first special lottery and second Change the generation ratio of "15R normal big hit" that is controlled to shift to a shorter working time until reaching the suggestion count of the special lottery (100 times), and increase the set value to generate "15R normal big hit" By reducing the ratio, it is difficult to end the probability change state. As a result, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to end the probability variation state once it is controlled to move to the probability variation state, and it is possible to increase the number of occurrences of big hits. Can be acquired. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the probability variation state.

  In addition, while the higher the set value is, the rate of occurrence of "15R regular big hit" is reduced, while the rate of occurrence of "2R certainty variation big hit" is made higher than that of "15R certainty variation big hit" to suppress the number of prize balls to be won. It is possible to prevent the person from becoming excessively advantageous.

[27-3. Set value suggestion effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is configured such that the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in the probability variation state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won are different for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 245 (A), the jackpot probability of the probability variation state of the set value 1 is set to "1/30", and the jackpot probability is set to "1/3", so after the jackpot game is over. The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won before the next big hit is reached is "9 times". In addition, since one game ball B is allowed to enter the second big winning opening 2006A in one small hit game, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one small hit game. Will be "15 balls". That is, when the set value is 1, the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability changing state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls". Similarly, if the set value is 2, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls", and if the setting value is 3, the prize ball is obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state. The expected value of the possible prize balls is "240 balls" of "16 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit in the case of the set value 4 is "19 times x 15 balls". When the set value is "285 balls", the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state is "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and the setting value is 6 the small hit in the probability variation state. The expected value of the award ball that can be obtained by is "390 balls" of "26 times x 15 balls".

  Further, in FIG. 245 (B), the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability changing state when the setting value is 1 is “60 balls” of “4 times × 15 balls”, and the probability changing state is the setting value 2 The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit in the case of the set value 3 is "5 times" In the case of "75 balls" of "x15 balls", the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit in the case of the set value of 4 is "105 balls" of "7 times x 15 balls", and the set value of 5 The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability changing state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability changing state is "9". It is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls".

  As described above, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won are different according to the set value in the probability change state (some of them are the same in FIG. 245 (B)). Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after finishing the big hit game, it is possible to guess the set value according to the number of prize balls won in the small hit game and the number of wins in the small hit before the next big hit. it can. In addition, you may make it perform the effect which suggests a set value (set value suggestion effect) according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game, the number of winnings in the small hit, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge unit having 6 scales 1600d of 1 to 6 on the effect display device 1600 as the set value suggesting effect so as to correspond to the 6-step set values, The scale of the gauge part is colored according to the number of prize balls (payout number) obtained by winning the second big winning opening 2006A, and the gauge part changes from the initial display mode as the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit increases. It is also possible to indicate the high set value by coloring all the graduations of the gauge section by coloring (increase the coloring display between the graduations). Specifically, in the case of controlling to a high-probability state after the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the scale 1600d in the initial display mode, the character 1600b, and the balloon 1600c in which the dialogue of the character is displayed are displayed. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, on the assumption that the number of acquired award balls is “0”, only the leftmost one of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to the “set value”. "1 or more" and indicates "the set value is ...?" On the blowout 1600c to indicate to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge section suggests the set value. .

  Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 1 and falls within the range of the expected value in the set value 2. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 2nd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first and second scales from the left side are colored and displayed), so that it is "set value 2 or more". In addition to the suggestion, “2 or more?” Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 246 (B)).

  Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 2 and falls within the range of the expected value in the set value 3. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 3rd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 3rd scale from the left side is colored and displayed), so that it is "set value 3 or more". In addition to suggesting, “3 or more?” Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 246 (C)).

  Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 3 and falls within the range of the expected value in the set value 4. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the color from the left side to the 4th scale is further displayed (the 1st to 4th scale from the left side is colored and displayed) to confirm that the setting value is 4 or more. In addition to suggesting, “4 or more !?” is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 246 (D)).

  Further, it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 4 and falls within the range of the expected value in the set value 5. By displaying the 5th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section with coloring (displaying the 1st to 5th scales from the left side with coloring), it is possible to confirm that the setting value is 5 or more. In addition to the suggestion, “5 over ??” is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 246 (E)).

  Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 5 and falls within the range of the expected value in the set value 6. , Of the six scales in the gauge section are further colored and displayed from the left side to the sixth scale (a state in which all the scales are colored and displayed) to indicate that "the set value is 6" and the character 1600b is displayed. As a dialogue, "I did it!

  And, after the state where the 6th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is displayed in color (state in which all the scales are displayed in color), the final stage display has already been reached, so it is a big hit. Without changing the display of the gauge section according to the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the game, the next big hit game will be started, or if there is an end condition for the probability variation state, that end condition will be satisfied Until then, all the scales are colored and displayed.

  It should be noted that, in a state where all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, further setting suggestion may be separately provided. For example, in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are colorized and displayed, a jackpot game When paying out the prize balls in the subsequent small hit game, based on the detection of the entrance into the second big winning opening 2006A, the player is definitely notified that the maximum setting (setting value 6) is the highest setting. You may make it perform the special production lottery for performing production. Specifically, in a state where all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in color, a special production lottery for winning at 1/1000 is performed each time a ball is detected at the second special winning opening 2006A. By winning, a special mode voice output (congratulations for setting 6 congratulations! Message), various lamp lights of the door frame 3 in the special mode (rainbow light emission using 7 colors), performance display device 1600. It is possible to exemplify that the highest setting finalization effect consisting of a special display (displaying a message of congratulations on setting 6!) Is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting confirmation effect with all the scales displayed in color, the effect related to the setting suggestion given earlier is given a sense of satisfaction, and the player is further updated without making the player tedious. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction and further improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs before displaying all the scales in a colored manner, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big hit, whereby a big hit occurs and a big hit game. The set value suggestion effect is executed every time after the transition control to the probability change state is performed to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the actual set value is estimated by statistics of the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect. You will be able to. That is, if the probability variation state is executed only once, the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained depending on the number of prize balls obtained by the small hit and the setting value during the probability variation state may differ from the set value. It is difficult to determine, but when the number of prize balls obtained by small hits is counted for each probability variation state between big hits, the ratio near the specific prize ball number increases, so the specific prize ball number becomes the expected value. By comparing, it becomes possible to infer the set value. In this example, it can be inferred that the set value that has been most suggested in the set value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual set value.

  Note that the display mode of the gauge unit may be continued until the probability variation state ends, without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit when a big hit occurs. Further, in this case, the six scales in the gauge section are set to be equal to or larger than the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probability variation state or the number of small hits that can be generated in one probability variation state, depending on the set value. All the scales may not be colored in the probability change state of the times. As a result, the set value can be suggested based on the number of prize balls, the number of small hits, and the like that have been obtained in the probability variation state over a long period of time, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

  Further, the various set value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize balls obtained by the small hit game executed in the probability change state of the period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. Since it is based on numbers and not on actual set values, the suggested and actual set values may differ. It should be noted that the main control board 1310 may transmit information (setting value information) about the setting value to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, as a setting value suggesting effect, the prize won in the small hit game after the big hit game. In addition to the number of balls, the set value may be suggested based on the set value information. Specifically, if the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, do not change the suggestion mode of the set value suggestive effect. If the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value indicated by the set value information by lottery or the set value information You may make it change to the suggestion mode of the set value suggestive production according to the set value below the set value shown by. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the reliability of the set value suggestion effect and to pay attention to the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and it is determined that the total number of the prize balls exceeds the expected value at each set value. When it is determined that the display of the gauge portion is changed to suggest the setting in the probability changing state, the setting suggestion in the probability changing state is not limited to such a form, and may be performed as follows.

  For example, in the case where there is a six-stage gauge section as described above, one scale 1600d is colored every time the peripheral control section 1511 determines that the prize ball paid out by the small hit has reached a certain value. The player may be informed that the setting is high by achieving the coloring of the scale 1600d at the final stage. In this case, it is preferable that the coloring of the final scale 1600d is achieved by using the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the hit game with the set value 6 as a guide, for example, the setting When the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hitting game after the hitting game with a value of 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α <195)" is colored on the scale 1600d at the final stage. The achievement timing can be exemplified.

  In addition, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of times the result of the second special lottery has reached the small hit result reaches a certain value, not based on the prize balls paid out by the small hit. Color the one scale 1600d and achieve the final scale 1600d coloring (for example, the number of times that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit result reaches 80 times) with a high setting. It may be suggested to the player that there is. In this case, the difficulty of achievement changes depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the probability change state in the set value actually set. Then, depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale, etc.), the result of the second special lottery may be a small hit rather than a big hit in expectation of the set value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game property of paying attention to.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a new game in which the set value is estimated in accordance with the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of wins in the small hit game when controlled in the probability variation state Sex can be provided.

[28. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The contact detection sensor main body 392 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the sensor main body of the present invention, and the contact detection body 393, the first contact detection body 393a, and the second contact detection body 393b of the present embodiment are the same. The detection unit of the present invention, the switching unit 394 in the present embodiment is the switching unit of the present invention, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in the present embodiment are the present invention. To the control means.

[29. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at positions different from each other in the pachinko machine 1 are provided at desired portions where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player. By switching the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the static electricity of the contact detection body 393 is generated. Since the capacitance changes, the change in electrostatic capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, and thus the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion is detected. According to the detection of the contact detection sensor body 392, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1 can be performed. It is possible to perform a predetermined control by the control means 12 or the like. On the other hand, in the state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 at a desired portion are connected by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other portion. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detection body 393 is Since the connection is cut off by the switching unit 394, it is possible to reliably detect only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion without detecting a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393. Therefore, false detection can be prevented. As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, and the like. The control means can reduce the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player, and can relatively increase the number of channels that can be used for the effect. Therefore, it is possible to control more effect means (for example, the movable decoration body, the light emitting decoration body, the effect display device, etc.) by the control means, and the player can be provided with a variety of effects by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, and the player can be prevented from getting tired, and the player can be fully entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are respectively provided at a plurality of portions of the pachinko machine 1 which are not desired to be touched by the player, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired portions by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, etc. by connecting the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. Since it becomes possible to leave predetermined cautions and alarms by means, it is possible to relatively monitor the number of channels that can be used for performance while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392. The number can be increased, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  In addition, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the electrostatic capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having the electronic parts such as the sensor IC and the output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 looks good and appeals to the player. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has a connection terminal for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily assembled. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

  Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and only by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 are connected. Since it is possible to connect with the contact detection sensor main body 392, a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode, and the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 393 is connected via the conductive member. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the arrangement of the conductive member for connecting with the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom in disposing the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  Further, since the switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact sensor main body 392 is provided and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are selected. When the player participation type production in which the plurality of distributed contact-disposed contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order is executed, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player sequentially contacts. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 to be connected, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order, and a player participation type effect having a high game property can be obtained by one touch. This can be realized by the detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like is attached to the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. When the player approaches or comes into contact with the player, the player comes closer to the contact detector 352 made of a metal plate, which is a metal plate covered on the player side by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. Therefore, the button body via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit ascend / descend. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board 364, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350, a predetermined effect is output, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 is controlled by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. It can function as a contact operation unit. Since the player can press the production operation unit unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when the production operation unit unit 350 is projected, the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the press operation by the production operation unit unit 350. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making a distinction from the machine.

  In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the electrostatic capacitance is the contact detection body 352 (button main body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and output different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple stages, and thus to produce an effect corresponding to each stage. By doing so, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection including electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the effect operation unit unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, since various operation operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, the player participation type effect that enables the player operation operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, it is possible to make the player less tired, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the player participation type production, which reduces the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the contact detection body 352 whose electrostatic capacity is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can attach the button main body 351 by the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state where the contact detection body 352 is not approaching or in contact, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the electrostatic capacitance, and thus the button by the contact detection body 352 can be increased. It is possible to widen the range of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, the button body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged. When the contact detection body 352 has the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be operated quickly, and the operation timing in the player participation type effect is improved. It is possible to hardly, the player can reliably be joined to participatory effect, a decrease in the interest entertained player by the effect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. A light emission effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the light emission effect can be surely enjoyed by the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch detection body 352 is provided in the production operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed, the touch detection body made of punching metal that is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The production operation unit unit 350 can be reinforced by 352, and even when the production operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or struck when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit unit It is possible to make it difficult for 350 to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since it is possible to make the production operation unit unit 350 less likely to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to allow the player to press the production operation unit unit 350 without being distracted and operate the production operation unit unit 350. It is possible to make the player participation type production more entertaining and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made smaller than in the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same plate thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to facilitate the installation of the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

  Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detection body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to make the shape suitable for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350), and to realize the above-described operational effects reliably.

  Further, in the effect operation unit unit 350, the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching it, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed, and at the same time, the button main body 351. It is possible to operate the button main body 351 without a feeling of strangeness in the player participation type production in which is used as the operation unit, and it is possible to entertain the production and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button main body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink is attached to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean.

  In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section raising / lowering mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit unit 350. It is possible to surely entertain the production output through (through) the operation unit unit 350 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact detection body 352 covers the rendering means because it is provided, the contact detection body 352 (rendering operation unit unit 350) and the rendering means can be compactly assembled, and thus, the above-described configuration is provided. Provided is a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can easily provide the effect operation unit unit 350 and effect means having the above-described effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1, and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be done easily.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward. As a result, the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit unit 350 changes, so by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, The approach or contact of the player can be detected. Then, when the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, when the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, if the effect operation unit unit 350 projects, the player comes into contact (collision) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by an effect which has not been available in the past pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to make sure that the projection of the effect operation unit unit 350 is noticed.

  When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, if the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side of the elevating spring 365 (upward), the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. The biasing force can be increased, and when the lifting spring 365 is moved in the direction away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 is weakened, and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be projected with various projecting outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by physical force, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to effect the operation. The effect due to the protrusion of the unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit unit is strongly pressed. When 350 abuts, a strong impact is given to the player, so that it is possible to strongly think that something good (for example, an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is the press operation unit 303 capable of performing a press operation, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player is caused to press the effect operation unit unit 350, thereby playing the game. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the player-participating type production, and to entertain the pressing operation of the production operation unit unit 350 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed, a player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) can be pressed at any time. Then, when the player participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed, by causing the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to project the effect operation unit unit 350, the player participation type by effect images, sounds, etc. It is possible to promptly let the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type effect without guiding the execution start of the effect, and increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 to realize the player participation type effect. Can be even more entertaining.

  Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to project by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, as compared with the case where the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude using the drive motor. As a result, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

  In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350, and the electrostatic charge of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and cause the effect operation unit unit 350 to project with a different projection output for each threshold value. Becomes Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 to the contact in multi-steps, so that it can be detected in accordance with each step. By projecting with a sudden output, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, by popping up by executing the player participation type effect, the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can move forward and backward. When the player approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button main body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit unit 350 contacts changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the contact by the approach or contact of the player is made. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can be detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 or moving (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration substrate. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, a predetermined effect is executed by the player moving the production operation unit unit 350 back and forth or approaching or contacting the production operation unit unit 350, so that the production can entertain the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by the player.

  At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit or contact operation unit). Can be made to work. On the other hand, when the player moves (presses) the production operation unit unit 350, the production is executed, so that the production operation unit unit 350 can function as a production operation unit (press operation unit). Because of this, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of effect operations, so by performing a player participation type effect that allows the player to perform an effect operation, entertaining a variety of effect operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player participation type production, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided in the vicinity of the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 with which the player comes into contact (below the upper surface 351a). Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and each of them is provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach to the contact of the player's finger or the like to the rendering operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and thus to present the rendering according to each stage. Thus, it is possible to present the player with a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, an operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to (touch operation), and to make the player more entertaining the effect operation.

  Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit unit 350 that can be moved forward and backward (pushable), a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player has an operation (pushing operation) to move the production operation unit unit 350 forward and backward, or an operation (a non-contact operation, a contact operation) to bring the production operation unit unit 350 closer or in contact with a finger or the like. ) And other various operations can be requested, and the various operations can increase the player's willingness to participate in the player-participating performance, and facilitate the participation in the player-participating performance. You can Then, when the player participates in the player participation type effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired by various operations using the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit unit 350 is locked so that it cannot be moved back and forth. Therefore, the effect operation unit unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retracting by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371 until an effect that moves the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed. It is possible to prevent the 350 from freely moving or shaking. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel a sense of distrust or anxiety by the production operation unit unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, and to make the production by the production operation unit unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be set.

  Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided at a position distant from the contact detection body 352. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the contact detection body 352 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, and the like are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be replaced by the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the button body 351 or the surface member which covers the decoration body 395. When a player approaches or contacts a finger or the like with 396, a contact detection body 352 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 395, or The capacitance of the contact detection body 397 changes, and a predetermined effect of irradiating the player with light is executed by the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 395 according to the change. , The player's interest is strongly attracted to the outside-button decoration board 355, the inside-button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 by the light emitted to the player side. It is possible, it is possible to entertain the player by directing executed. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 395 is the button body 351 or Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is like a part of the decoration portion. It can be made unrecognizable to the player that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player. In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is compared to the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 395 (production) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a good effect by the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the ornamental body 395, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, by detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the effect of irradiating the player with light is executed on the decorative board 355, the button-internal decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302), and at the same time, the player can be given a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or touches the fingers or the like. When the touch is detected, the effect is executed by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player participation. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like. Since it is possible to change the effect by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 in accordance with the distance from the button outside decoration board 355 by the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. It is possible to change the effect by the or button middle decoration substrate 364 or the ornamental body 395, and to show a player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  Further, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button middle decoration substrate 364, and the decoration body 395 changes, the game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects.

  Further, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and by making the vapor deposition film thick to have metallic luster, it looks like a part of decoration. You can Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punched metal having an outer shape having a design property such as a star shape and a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made to look like a part of the decoration. be able to. Because of this, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397 that cannot be recognized by the player can be provided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). The capacitance changes, and due to the change, the effect presentation means such as the button outside decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact detection body 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397) for presenting a predetermined effect by the design Since it is formed in a predetermined outer peripheral shape having the property, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, which makes it look good and is suitable for the player. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Further, the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and presentation is presented in accordance with a change in electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented by the means via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, the predetermined effect is presented according to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like with the button body 351. As a result, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like having a design property, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. As the pachinko machine 1 including the operation unit 301, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detection body 395 or the like having a design property can give a strong impact to the player, the contact detection body 395 or the like (button body 351) can be strongly interested. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect for operating the button body 351 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the decoration detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 is formed in the outer peripheral shape having a design, at the first glance, depending on the player, the presentation presentation is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is first effected by the contact detection body 395 or the like by prompting the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It can be noticed that the operation unit 301 is provided, and the player can be given unexpectedness to further enjoy the player participation type effect. Alternatively, when a player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing the production operation unit 301, the contact detection body 359 or the like is stopped. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to easily detect the approach and the contact, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player touches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like from the approach of the finger or the like of the player. Since it is possible to detect up to (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a more diverse production to the player by presenting the production according to each stage, and the player can be presented. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the outer circumference of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the contact detection body 395 or the like having conductivity, The contact detection body 395 and the like can be provided with a design property, the appearance of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above-described action and effect can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having a design property without forming the contact detection body 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can have a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost required for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

  Further, since the transparent button body 351 covers the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 or the like, dust or food or dirt is not attached to the contact detection body 395 or the like, and cleaning work is easy. It can be anything. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that have irregularities such as punching metal are used, dust and food and other stains are likely to adhere to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 or the like having irregularities such as punching metal is used, By doing so, it is possible to prevent the attachment of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as an item that can be easily cleaned.

  Further, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection body 359 etc., a metal vapor deposition film or the like as the contact detection body 395 etc. In the case of using a material such as a foil stamping which can improve the design, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing the touch sensor early and to improve the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

  Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, since the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 etc. with the transparent button body 351, the contact Since it is possible to use a detection object 395 or the like that does not feel comfortable to the player or one that causes the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detection object 395 or the like and meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed of a suitable material.

  Further, when the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like is changed by bringing the finger or the like of the player close to or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the buttons, etc., the player has brought fingers or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 by the effects presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the action of fingers and the like.

  In addition, an effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, and the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 is executed, the button body 351 can be made to function like a touch operation unit, and the operation feeling can be provided by the presented effect. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers close to or in contact with the button body 351, When the contact detection body 352 (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects entry of a finger or the like into the detection region, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 emit light to cause the button to emit light. A light emitting effect in which the player is illuminated with light through the main body 351, a vibrating effect of vibrating the player's fingers or the like in contact with (through) the button main body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and a button main body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Through the button body 351 by projecting upward, to give impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player, etc. To be executed, it is possible to function button body 351 as the contact operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player. Further, at this time, since effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, the effect can surprise the player and entertain the player. Therefore, the motivation for operating the button body 351 can be increased. Then, when the player's finger or the like is in contact with the button body 351, the button body 351 functions downward as the button body 351 by appropriately moving the finger or the like to push the button body 351 downward. By the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, it is possible to entertain the player with a variety of effect operations, which makes the player less likely to get tired and entertaining. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 separated from the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 prevents the button body 351 from moving. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

  Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 which is separated from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be disposed on a less noticeable portion, and the pachinko machine can be used. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

  In addition, since the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, and the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (downward) of the button body 351, the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. It is possible to easily apply effects such as vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[30-1. Main control unit (2)]
Another main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 247, 248, 249, 250 to 268, and 269.
The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board box 1320 that is a housing that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ing.

[30-1-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIG. 252, the main control board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and molded of transparent synthetic resin. The main controller 1310 can be housed in an internal space 1320s formed by stacking the cover 1301 on the base 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded with a synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification is performed, or unauthorized) Whether the IC chip is mounted or not) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320.
Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy one of the sealing mechanisms 1320z, and a trace of opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing remaining on the sealing mechanism 1320z, and the deterrent to the main control unit 1310 against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

[30-1-2. Main controller]
The main control unit 1310 controls the progress of the game, the payout of the game ball B, etc. (see FIGS. 252 and 269), and the winning probability of a lottery described later and an area advantageous to the player. It is roughly configured from a setting change board 1310Y (see FIG. 252 and FIG. 269) capable of setting a game setting relating to a distribution rate or the like to one of a plurality of setting values.

[30-1-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. The main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2406, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening sensor. 3001, a first starting port sensor 3002, a magnetic sensor 3003, an out port left sensor 1008a, and an out port right sensor 1008b are connected.

[30-1-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 includes a setting switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value and checking the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value, The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value is permitted.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is a harness. Via, may be electrically connected). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y is substantially the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right side and left side of the main control board 1310X. A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and passes through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X and a centerline that passes through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is Along the left side of the control board 1310X, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line.
The setting change board 1310Y is provided with a setting switch 1311a having an operation section 1311j for rotating the setting key K1 inserted below the center line of the setting change board 1310Y, and is pressed above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting switch button 1311b having 1311p is arranged so that a single color (for example, red) can be emitted to the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switch button 1311b) on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A change permission lamp 1311c is arranged.
A setting display 1310g composed of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged near the connector MSCN above the center line of the main control board 1310X, and the center line of the main control board 1310X is arranged. A base monitor 1310h, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called with dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged at a position closer to the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a push operation portion similar to the push operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is arranged at the bottom.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting switch 1311a is turned off. When the operation unit 1311j is in the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key K1 can be removed from the insertion port.

The setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the operation unit 1311j by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the signal of this setting key ON changes the setting. It is inputted from the board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Further, the operation switch 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be turned on a second time, whereby the setting switch 1311a can be turned on. Input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In addition, the operation unit 1311j moves counterclockwise so as to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting switch 1311a by turning the setting switch 1311a by 60 degrees in the direction and turning the setting switch 1311a to the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j. It is possible to turn off the setting switch 1311a by rotating the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a). it can. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON and the enter key ON, can be realized by only the setting switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the operation unit 1311j is rotated, and only the setting switch 1311a alone. Thus, the operation of setting key ON and decision key ON can be performed collectively.

The front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are openings formed in the corresponding cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although exposed to the outside through 1301h, the front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the corresponding opening 1301h. In order to prevent the foreign matter such as wire from entering through the "gap" formed in and to modify the setting change substrate 1310Y and the main control substrate 1310X, the portions corresponding to these openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 are set. Switch 1311 A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (for example, fitting of the cylindrical bodies 1301c shown in FIG. 264) for preventing foreign matter such as wire from entering is formed between the setting switch button 1311b and the RAM clear switch 1310f. .
The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, but the cover body 1301 is molded transparent as described above. Therefore, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body 1301.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting switch 1311a OFF. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other) on the setting change substrate 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted to the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key O of the setting switch 1311a Of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the OFF of the setting switch 1311a) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are transmitted. The wiring pattern is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also not close to each other. (Separated from each other).

[30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switch button, setting display]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, the case of changing the setting value of the game setting will be briefly described first, and the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. Since the setting key K1 is an important key that can be used to confirm the current setting value that has been set, in addition to changing the setting value, it can be used by two to three people including the manager of the game hall. Only possessed by limited people.

When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the main frame. 4 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on by the first ON operation. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on.
That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, and then the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion opening of the operation unit 1311j of the device, the setting key K1 is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning on the setting switch 1311a, and then again. The power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a has a current setting value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (of the setting values 1 to 6 among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

  Next, when the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switch button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Every time the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the value increases by 1 and reaches the maximum setting value 6, the setting value 1 returns to the initial value, increases by 1 again, and the setting display 1310g displays the setting value.

  Next, when the set value is determined, the operation portion 1311j is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting switch 1311a is the original position from the rotational position of the operation portion 1311j when the setting key is turned on). Second, rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), perform OFF operation, and further rotate counterclockwise by 60 degrees) Second The setting switch 1311a is turned on by pressing the enter key. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  Next, the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the decision key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is OFF). The setting switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the switch and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

  Next, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the work of changing the setting of the set value is completed.

In addition, when confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs) The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first operation. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation of.
In other words, the person who actually performs the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). , The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and subsequently, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion opening of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first ON. By operating the setting switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.
This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a current setting value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (of the setting values 1 to 6 among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if the person who confirms the setting value presses the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value corresponding to this pressing operation is changed. It is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  Then, when the confirmation of the currently set set value is completed, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned ON is changed to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). To return it, rotate counterclockwise 60 degrees and turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the set value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

  Finally, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion opening of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the work for closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the work for confirming and displaying the currently set setting value is completed. To do.

In addition, as described above, the preset setting change permission condition is an outer frame at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed. By doing so, the setting key must be turned on, whereas the preset set value display permission condition is that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or outaged (instantaneous outage as described above). After the power is restored after a momentary power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a. operation 1311j it is necessary that it is set the key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation in the clockwise direction.
In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are set such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and that the setting switch 1311a has the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j. There is a common requirement in that the setting key K1 is inserted, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and then the first ON operation is performed, whereby the setting key ON operation is performed, and the predetermined setting is performed. The difference is that the value change permission condition requires “at the time of power recovery”, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

  Here, explaining the setting value of the game setting, "setting value", in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or whether it is a small hit, from the probability change time Probability for judging lottery when shifting to normal time (these are also collectively referred to as “probability of winning lottery”), a distribution ratio to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (advantage level) of being advantageous to the player (that is, increasing the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set values 1, set values 2, set values 3, set values 4, set values 5, and set values 6 are prepared in advance as the set values of a plurality of stages, and the set values 1 to 6 are changed. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern). Big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of determination values, small hit determination table that defines the percentage of small hit determination values that indicates that you have won a small hit, ratio of determination values that determine small hit symbols The small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability change time to the normal time is specified) is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids) To or. Various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio in various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. It should be noted that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used at various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. Some of them may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, the six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set, but the set values may be set in a smaller range or set in a larger range. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a when the power is restored to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side does not end normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM incorporated in itself (or you trust it). Cannot be done), and an error message is displayed to inform that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls shot in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Among the game balls that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls that have been collected by the out port 1008 are detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is displayed on the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. Has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on from the initial position. Setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range extending up to It may be. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ is rotated counterclockwise from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a ′ can be turned on by the decision key ON by rotating the setting switch 1311a ′ by turning it by 60 degrees, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be described as “modification example (1) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, although not shown, the setting change board 1310Y has a press key having a press operation portion. May be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed to the outside through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button, Preventing foreign matter from entering the setting switch button 1311b so that foreign matter such as wire cannot enter the opening corresponding to this and modify the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The setting key button may be arranged on the setting change board 1310Y near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320, a sticker printed with the name of each button is attached to the decision key button and the setting change button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting change button 1311b are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation part of either the enter key button or the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the wiring pattern for the determination key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switching button 1311b are laid out to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the setting change board 1310Y, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also kept close to each other ( (Separated from each other). When the enter key button is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “enter key modification (2)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, whether the palm or finger touches the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. A game ball depending on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting the game and the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not to forcibly stop the ejection is branched in the payout control board 633 and is sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on these detection signals input. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is not touching the handle 182. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON when not touching, and / or the decision key is ON when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194. On the other hand, when it is possible to determine that there is, the determination key is not ON when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) Good)) may be referred to as a “variation example (3) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a firing timing control circuit provided in a firing control section 633b of a payout control board 633 described later. The emission reference pulse is branched from the payout control board 633 from the Is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310X, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B per minute to be launched toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification of decision key (4)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The detection signal from the distance measuring sensor provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board. In this case, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the relay board, and it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this detection signal. You may. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension, The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, whereby the motion of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no motion, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (5)”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key 1311a by rotating the operation portion 1311j by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be set by the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on with the enter key, the signal of this enter key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j with the set switch 1311a turned on. The initial position which is the original position from the rotational position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned off and the setting switch 1311a can be determined by turning the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the operation unit 1311j that is turned off. The setting key cylinder is rotated by 60 degrees in the clockwise direction so as to return from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j which is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the original position. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by an OFF operation, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Serialize the information that tells the decision key ON and OFF As broadcast, the serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310X or on the payout control board 633. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the received serial information from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having the serial circuit may be described as a "variation example (6) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key 1311a by rotating the operation portion 1311j by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be set by the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on with the enter key, the signal of this enter key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j with the set switch 1311a turned on. The initial position which is the original position from the rotational position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned off and the setting switch 1311a can be determined by rotating the operation portion 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the setting key cylinder turning position). The operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotated position of the operation unit 1311j that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by an OFF operation, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Information to send the ON / OFF of the decision key As the pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1310Y, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310X or in the payout control board 633. The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width of 1 ms when it is information for transmitting the setting key ON, and a pulse width of 3 ms when it is information for transmitting the determination key ON. If the information is OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the decision key ON from the input pulse signal, It is possible to determine which of the two is OFF or OFF (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (7) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key 1311a by rotating the operation portion 1311j by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be set by the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on with the enter key, the signal of this enter key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j with the set switch 1311a turned on. The initial position which is the original position from the rotational position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned off and the setting switch 1311a can be determined by turning the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the operation unit 1311j that is turned off. The operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotated position of the operation unit 1311j that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by an OFF operation, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Voltage level of signal, voltage level of signal of decision key ON The main control of the voltage levels of the OFF signal and the OFF signal is performed by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V among zero V to 5V) between the substrates from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control substrate 1310X. By providing a comparator circuit on the substrate 1310X and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON / OFF the setting key ON signal, ON / OFF the decision key ON signal, and You may judge ON / OFF of the signal of OFF. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a (the mode of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as “variation example (8) of the determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 may be provided with a decision key button having a pressing operation portion. Good. In this case, the press operation section of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation section of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent the wire or the like from entering the opening and the open control part to modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The position of the determination key button on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch 633d so that the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused with each other. Affixed (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover that covers the push operation portion of either the decision key button or the error release switch 633d (for pressing the push operation portion, It is necessary to open the cover.), Or the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, and the outer shape of the decision key button and the error release switch 633d or the pressing operation. It is possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, in the case of providing the decision key button and the error release switch 633d on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error release switch 633d are laid out. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should also be kept close to each other (mutually). Are formed separately. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the Enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “Enter key modification (9)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion on the payout control board 633. However, the main control board 131 is branched at the payout control board 633 and is passed through the payout control board 633. Is input to X of the main control MPU1310a, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error canceling switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power supply of various control boards is completed). If the pachinko machine 1 is in an interrupting state after completion of the power-on processing and the interrupt processing is being performed), the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the main control MPU 1310a outputs the signal from the error release switch 633d. Based on the signal, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (10)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by a second ON operation by rotating it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating counterclockwise 60 degrees by this key. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion on the payout control board 633. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs a process at power-on of a payout control unit, which will be described later. Of the main control board 1310X which has received the command by monitoring the command in the port input processing and creating a command, transmitting the command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later to the main control board 1310X. The control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error canceling switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power supply of various control boards is completed). If the pachinko machine 1 is in an interrupting state after completion of the power-on processing and the interrupt processing is being performed), the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the command to transmit is received, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, and a command to notify that effect. It is possible to determine that the decision key is not ON when the message is received. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant (11) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is set to the original position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on). The setting switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the turning position of the operation unit 1311j which is turned off, and then turned off by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The decision key ON can be turned ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used. The RAM clear switch 13 is equipped with the payout control board 633. The operation signal from 0f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, is branched in the payout control board 633, is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and is controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. The presence / absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input with. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can turn on the enter key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. In That. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f. Foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v described above so that wire or the like cannot intrude through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding thereto to modify the payout control board 633. Parts are formed.

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion described later. The names of the buttons are printed on the cover body of the payout control board 633 at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused with each other. A sticker is attached (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover (a pressing operation of the push operation unit is performed to cover one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d). It is necessary to open the cover in order to do so.), The color of the pressing operation portion may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d. Alternatively, the pressing operation unit having a different shape may be adopted, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d, a wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and a wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are provided in order to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other) in the payout control board 633 as a routing of the wire, and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also separated In the main control board 1310X as well, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should not come close to each other. (Separated from each other). When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The setting switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “decision key modification (12)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is set to the original position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on). The setting switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it back to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and then turned off by 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The decision key ON can be turned ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used. The RAM clear switch 13 is equipped with the payout control board 633. The logic of the operation signal from 0f is monitored by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the command of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command created in the transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is provided. It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine RAM clear switch 1310f depressing operation portion is unmanipulated the payout control MPU633aa of based on et operation signal. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) is referred to as “modification example (13) of the enter key”). May be stated).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-out left sensor 1008a and the out-out right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to the ON key. From the original position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the OFF operation, and further rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. By operating the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, instead of the left outlet sensor 1008a and the outer sensor, The mouth right sensor 1008b is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (through) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input from the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b. Whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on the detection signal of. The game balls shot in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball collected by the out-port 1008 is detected by one of the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is in the case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the left outlet 1008a and the left outlet 1008a. Based on a detection signal from either one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, while the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4. When it is not opened (that is, it is closed) and / or based on the detection signals of the out-out left sensor 1008a and the out-out right sensor 1008b, none of the out-ports 1008 collects the game ball. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to the ON position. The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “variation (14) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-out left sensor 1008a and the out-out right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to the ON key. From the original position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), rotate counterclockwise by 60 degrees, turn it off, and rotate counterclockwise by 60 degrees. By operating the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, instead of the left outlet sensor 1008a and the outer sensor, When the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signal from the mouth right sensor 1008b in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and when the payout control unit power-on described below is performed. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X which receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. The game balls shot in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball collected by the out-port 1008 is detected by one of the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, collects the game ball by the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the command is received, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected through the outlet 1008. When the command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode 2 of the outlet switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be referred to as “variation (15) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal from is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and the payout control is performed. It may be branched in the board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. The logic of the detection signal from the tongue detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 is monitored and commanded by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. And sends the command created in the command sending process of the pay-out control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X which receives this command determines whether or not the enter key is ON. You may judge. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the payout unit (setting The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation (16) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the enter key is ON. , It can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a mode of the main frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “variation (17) of decision key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a. While the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON. It can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a mode of the door frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “variation (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn the decision key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again and remove the setting key from the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a to close the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position that is the original position (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that sets the setting switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1310Y to the setting key ON state). Position) to turn the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON by turning the setting switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees again. Although the decision key ON signal is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a may be provided in the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch may be described as "a modification of the enter key (18)". .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position that is the original position (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that sets the setting switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1310Y to the setting key ON state). Position) to turn the setting switch 1311a to the decision key ON by turning the setting switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees again. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310X and the setting switch 1311a is provided. From the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned on The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the switch to the OFF position and turning it off. By inputting this OFF signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a turns off. When the signal is input, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while when the OFF signal is not input, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on. The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “variation (19) of the enter key”).

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control board 1310X may be provided with an enter key button having a pressing operation portion. Good. In this case, the press operation section of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation section of the enter key button and Between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion so that the wire or the like cannot be penetrated through the "gap" formed in the corresponding opening and the main control board 1310X cannot be modified. Further, a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (see FIG. 264) is formed. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  The position of the enter key button on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation part. It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for the determination key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are laid out to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the main control board 1310X. When the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “variation example (20) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the decision key ON may be determined. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), In the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM contained in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. Can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode 3 of the RAM clear switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “variation (21) of the enter key”). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is output from the payout control board 633 as described later. Since the payout control MPU 633aa is input, when the RAM clear switch 1310f also functions as an error canceling switch 633d described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch 633d.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the gate sensor 2401 of the gate section 2003 provided in the game board 5 and various winning prizes. Various mouth sensors (for example, second starting mouth sensor 2402, special winning opening sensor 2403, first entrance sensor) 2406, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002), a main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out opening left sensor 1008a and the out opening right sensor 1008b of the out opening 1008 are input, based on these detection signals. The presence / absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (modes of various sensors ( The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “variation (22) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 or various prizes to turn the decision key ON. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid. Drive control of the movable body (feature) to control the optical sensor (photo sensor or When determining the original position or operating position of the movable body (feature) based on the detection signal from the distance sensor or the like), the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. May be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (for the optical accessory sensor). The mode (the mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "a modification example (23) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor causes the optical sensor to move to its original position. It is necessary to move the movable body (feature) so as to detect the operation position and the like.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, detection from the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the signal is input determines based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. The presence or absence of the ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “variation (24) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed and provided on the game board 5. When a vibration sensor 3006 (see FIG. 241, FIG. 242, FIG. 245) for detecting a fraudulent act of entering a seed winning opening or a gate portion (gate) is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a uses the vibration sensor 3006. The presence or absence of fraudulent activity may be determined based on the detection signal of 1, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on. The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “variation (25) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the enter key.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, various winning prizes provided on the game board 5 by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves. Misconduct of illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing various sensors of the mouth and various sensors provided in the payout device 580 to malfunction When the known radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and determines based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. The presence / absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation (26) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave in order to turn on the enter key.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a can be turned to the enter key by operating the second ON operation by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and further by rotating the counterclockwise by 60 degrees. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is detected. Detection signal from the detection sensor 381, rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 The detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 to be detected are input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (aspect operation button unit mode) (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “variation (27) of the enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are housed in the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The 1310Y may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimp portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism 1320z and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with the one-way screw of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism 1320z, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. In order to do so, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism 1320z. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism 1320z is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 as described above can be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each, In order to prevent alteration of the setting change board 1310Y by inserting wire or the like through "clearances" formed on the front surface of the operation section 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation section of the decision key button. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (see FIG. 265) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation unit. As the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, when the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, An opening / closing switch for the setting change substrate cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. It may be configured to be performed. Based on the detection signal from the opening / closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the fact that the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box The mode may be described as "variation of decision key (28)").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is set. A wiring pattern in which an ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a signal from the setting switch button 1311b Is formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other) in the setting change board 1310Y as a wiring between the wiring pattern to be transmitted and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (of the main control board 1310X). The connection to the connector MSCN terminal) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern in which various signals are transmitted from the setting switch 1311a (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted. The wiring pattern to be set and the wiring pattern to which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are also close to each other (separated from each other). ) Although it is formed, either one of the wiring pattern in which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted This is different from the connector SMCN on the setting change board 1310Y. Via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X may be separately connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X (inter-board connection), The other connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310X may be electrically connected via a harness. Modified example (29) "of".

  Further, among the modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key described above, a mode in which they are appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the modification combination mode of the modification example is referred to as “modification example of determination key (30) May be stated).

[30-2. Other forms of main control unit]
[30-1-2. In the main control unit 1310 described in [Main control unit], the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separate bodies (hereinafter referred to as “divided board structure”), but both control boards 1310X and 1310Y are one. It may be formed of a single substrate (hereinafter referred to as “single substrate structure”).
The main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 has a main control unit 1310 having a single substrate structure having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of the game, and the main control unit 1310 is housed and attached to the substrate holder 1200. And a main control board box 1320 which is a container.
The elements such as parts and members provided in the main control unit 1310 having a single board structure are provided in the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y having a divided board structure, except for the structural features described below. And the functions and operating methods are the same. Therefore, the functions and operating methods of each element are mainly described in [30-1. Main control unit (2)] to [30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting display] is used.
On the contrary, the structural features of each element described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having the divided board structure including the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y described above.

[30-2-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, the main control board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, and has an internal space 1320s formed by stacking the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. The main controller 1310 is housed.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded from a transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate), which allows the front side and the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, Can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320.

[30-2-2. Main controller]
In the divided board structure, the main control unit 1310 controls the progress of the game, the payout of the game balls B, and the like, and the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, and the like. Can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values. For example, electronic parts (main control MPU 1310a, setting display 1310g or resistor 1310r, etc.) and setting switch 1311a provided on each of the setting change boards 1310Y. The circuit components including the setting switch button 1311b and the like are appropriately arranged on one board (hereinafter also referred to as "print board") 1310t.
Note that the main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 254 for convenience of description, but in reality, it is provided at an intermediate position between the four corners of the cover body 1301 and the long side. The screw cylinder 1301n is screwed with a screw (not shown).

[30-2-2-1. Layout of circuit components]
Here, the arrangement of circuit components on the printed circuit board 1310t will be described.
As shown in FIG. 254, the printed circuit board 1310t has a substantially rectangular shape, the main control MPU 1310a, which is an electronic component, is attached to the substantially center thereof, and the setting switch 1311a is attached to the corner (details of the attachment of the setting switch 1311a). Will be described later), and other electronic components such as an IC 1310i, a resistor 1310t, and a capacitor, and other circuit components are arranged all over the area. The setting switch 1311a attached to the printed circuit board 1310t has a top portion fitted into an opening 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 as will be described later, and in this state, the setting switch 1311a faces the outside.

  As is well known, the main control MPU 1310a includes a plate-shaped resin package 1310ab and a plurality of pins 1310ap (hereinafter, a plurality of pins 1310ap arranged in a line) provided in a row on the front and rear surfaces of the lower edge of the package 1310ab. Are collectively referred to as "pin group"). The main control MPU 1310a is arranged substantially in the center of the printed circuit board 1310t in a state where the row of pin groups is substantially parallel to the long side of the printed circuit board 1310t, and the pin groups before and after the printed circuit board 1310t are arranged at that position. Soldered to.

  Note that [30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switch button, setting indicator], the ON / OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a and the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are input to the main control MPU 1310a, and further the main control MPU 1310a. Inside, the control for changing the set value of the game setting is performed. Therefore, by accessing the specific pin 1310aq connected to the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b in the pin group of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to change the setting value of the game setting from the outside, therefore. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component that can be a target of unauthorized work, and the specific pin 1310ap of the pin group is a specific pin 1310aq that can be a target of unauthorized work.

[30-2-3. Setting switch]
As shown in FIG. 254, FIG. 255, and FIG. 256, the setting switch 1311a is a substantially cubic mounting portion 1311d mounted on the substrate of the main control portion 1310, and a circle that can be inscribed in the square top portion of the mounting portion 1311d. A setting key cylinder 1311e having a smaller diameter and a cylinder shape smaller than the height of the mounting portion 1311d, and a step in which an upper step portion (setting key cylinder 1311e) is superposed on a lower step portion (mounting portion 1311d) in appearance. It is a stacking form.

[30-2-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly configured by a resin main body portion 1311f having an electric functional portion inside, and a mounting bracket 1311g that covers the upper surface and the side surface of the resin main body portion 1311f. An insertion piece 1311h protruding from the bottom of 1311g is inserted into the substrate of the main control unit 1310 and fixedly attached on the circuit.
The mounting bracket 1311g is provided with cutouts 1311i substantially at the centers of the four sides of the top. Therefore, the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the setting key cylinder 1311e and the center of each side is notched by the notches 1311i. It has become.

[30-2-3-2. Setting key cylinder]
The setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a has an operating portion 1311j at its top, and an opening for inserting the setting key K1 into the operating portion 1311j is opened. By inserting the proper key body K10 of the setting key K1 into the insertion opening of the operation portion 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be confirmed as described above.

[30-2-4. Main control board box cover and setting switch]
As shown in the sectional view of FIG. 255, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is provided with an opening 1301h for exposing the operation portion 1311j of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to the outside. A receiving cylinder portion 1301i is provided so as to project toward the inner space 1320s side so as to surround the opening 1301h.
The inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e so that the setting key cylinder 1311e can be easily inserted / removed when the main control portion 1310 is attached / detached to / from the cover body 1301. Approximately 7% to 8% in design size), and therefore, the setting key cylinder 1311e is loosely fitted by the gap t1 shown in the enlarged view of FIG.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that the position of the operating portion 1311j at the top is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body 1301 when the setting key cylinder 1311e is fitted in the receiving cylinder portion 1301i as shown in FIGS. 255 and 256. The operation portion 1311j and the opening 1301h of the cover body 1301 form a recess 1301k.

Note that FIG. 259 shows another form of the depression 1301k, and the depression 1301k has a tapered surface 1301p that is inclined downward toward the center. Reflection of the room illumination by the tapered surface 1301p of the depression 1301k makes a part of the periphery of the setting switch 1311a noticeable, which makes it easy to intuitively understand. Therefore, the setting switch 1311a of the main control board box 1320 can be arranged also on the hinge side of the door frame or the like that is difficult to see and shy away from common sense, and conversely, the door frame and the like can be opened wide. If not, fraud can be prevented and crime prevention performance can be improved. In this case, if the main control unit 1310 has a divided board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are divided, the setting change board 1310Y is arranged at the above-mentioned advantageous position for crime prevention, and the tapered surface of the depression 1301k. It is also possible to make the above-mentioned effect by 1301p larger.
Although the radial size and the inclination angle of the tapered surface 1301p are arbitrary, the visibility of the bent portion is generally reduced in a molded product of a transparent synthetic resin, which makes it difficult to detect an improper work on the circuit component parts below. Therefore, for example, other circuit component parts (electronic parts) themselves or the circuit part (electronic part) check-needed parts (part number) arranged near the setting switch 1311a and below the tapered surface 1301p It is conceivable to make the tapered surface 1301p larger than the size of the display portion) to secure necessary visibility. Further, the size of the tapered surface 1301p may be associated with the steepness of the inclination angle such that the inclination angle is made gentle in order to increase the tapered surface 1301p.
Further, FIG. 260 shows another form of the depression 1301k, in which an inner flange piece 1301q is provided in the opening 1301h to further bend the entry path of the foreign matter. As a result, it is possible to remarkably increase the difficulty of inserting the foreign matter and the subsequent operation, so that it is possible to further improve the crime prevention performance against the foreign matter. Although the tapered surface 1301p is formed in the recess 1301k in FIG. 260 together with the inner flange piece 1301q, the inner flange piece 1301q may be provided in the recess 1301k without the tapered surface 1301p as shown in FIGS. 255 and 256. Good.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the distance t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is set to the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e. The length of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set so as to be less than the gap t1. Thus, the radial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e, and the axial distance t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are t1 ≧ t2. By doing so, it is possible to effectively prevent improper insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire through the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e.
This is because the radial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is usually set to the minimum width (clearance) required to pass the setting key cylinder 1311e through the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Since the foreign matter passing through here is limited to an extremely thin one, even if such a thin foreign matter passes through the gap t1, the direction is changed after hitting the top of the mounting portion, and in that state, a portion with a gap t2 that is equal to or smaller than the gap t1. It is not easy to break through, and even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign matter toward the target point (for example, the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a that is the specific electronic component described above). Is.

Particularly, in the embodiment, the mounting portion 1311d that is the lower step has a higher height in the internal space 1320s than the setting key cylinder 1311e that is the upper step, and therefore the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the mounting portion of the setting switch 1311a. The position of the axial distance t2 from the top of 1311d is a relatively high place in the internal space 1320s. Therefore, for example, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 258, the fraudulent person sends out the foreign matter W that has penetrated the narrow gap t1 and the narrow gap t2 into the internal space 1320s and causes the tip thereof to abut against the printed circuit board 1310t by bending due to its own weight. It is necessary to perform the operation of switching the direction of the tip in the abutting state to the aimed direction, but with the foreign matter W that is bent and has a long drip due to its own weight and force is not transmitted well to the tip, It is difficult to perform various operations.
257 and 258 in the vicinity of such a setting switch 1311a are difficult because the foreign matter W that is hanging down from a high place on the side surface of the setting switch 1311a is less likely to wrap around to the vicinity (foot) of the setting switch 1311a. As described above, the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a (specific electronic component) may be arranged. By setting the unauthorized access guard of the foreign object W at a high place in the internal space 1320s in this manner, an important part of the main control MPU can be arranged in the vicinity of the unauthorized access guard. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the arrangement of.

By the way, the main control unit 1310, which is a support base of the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-shaped printed board, and can bend when the setting switch 1311a is pushed. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the setting switch 1311a to bend the main control unit 1310, the space t2 between the above-mentioned tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is forcibly widened. In such a case, there is a possibility that the linear foreign matter W will break through as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 258.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is attached to the vicinity (corner portion) of the screw control portion (joint portion) of the main control portion 1310 to suppress the deflection of the main control portion 1310 and reduce the interval t2. The fraud of forcibly expanding cannot be done. Further, suppressing the bending of the main control unit 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is also effective in preventing the main control unit 1310 from cracking or the like when used for a long period of time.

  Further, as described above, the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a has irregularities on each side due to the work of the mounting metal fitting 1311g due to the notches 1311i. The tube end portion 1301z of the portion 1301i is also uneven. Specifically, by providing a projection 1301m on the tube end portion 1301z corresponding to the notch 1311i of the mounting portion 1311d, the relationship of t1 ≧ t2 as a whole. Is maintained.

  As described above, the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e, and the interval t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are set to be t1 ≧ t2. Alternatively, the configuration in which the interval t2 is located at a high place in the internal space 1320s and the configuration in which the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h is provided with the tapered surface 1301p are one of the foreign matter intrusion prevention portions 1301v for preventing foreign matter such as wire from entering. This foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v has a stepped structure in which the lower operation part 1311f such as the setting switch button 1311b and the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided with the pressing operation part 1311p as the upper step. The push-button type switch member or the slide type switch member, etc., in a stacked form are different from each other as shown in FIG. The cylindrical body 1301c like intrusion preventing portion 1301v can be applied to a low cost without separately added.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, in the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i, the thickness of the convex portion 1301m is made smaller than the thickness of the receiving tube portion 1301i so that the interval between the opposing convex portions 1301m is small. It is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Further, a taper 1301j is provided at the boundary between the inner surface of the convex portion 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, and the convex portion 1301m and the taper 1301j capture and guide the top portion of the setting key cylinder 1311e. It is possible to smoothly fit the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set to the minimum necessary for crime prevention. Therefore, it is difficult to directly insert the setting key cylinder 1311e into the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, but the convex portions 1301m The workability can be remarkably improved by setting the interval of wider than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Moreover, in the configuration in which the convex portion 1301m is used as the introduction guide of the setting key cylinder 1311e, the fitting between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is easier than in the case where the cylinder end inner circumference of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is chamfered. Since the length can be increased, the crime prevention performance against foreign object insertion can be improved.
In addition, in the embodiment, the shape of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is cylindrical according to the setting key cylinder 1311e, but it may be a rectangular cylinder shape corresponding to the top shape of the square mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. In that case, the inner dimension of the rectangular tube is made smaller than the top contour shape of the mounting portion 1311d, and a space t2 is formed between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. You should do so.

[30-2-5. Back cover of main control unit and main frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as described above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above, and the rear surface of the main body frame 4 is, as shown in FIG. It is covered with the game board 5 by the back cover 640. In the embodiment, by covering the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300 with the back cover 640 of the main body 4, even if the opening 1301h is not intentionally provided with a crime prevention cover, the setting key cylinder 1311e can be moved to the setting key cylinder 1311e by a keypad or the like. It is designed to prevent unauthorized access to. This eliminates the need to project an extra cover in the opening 1301h, which makes it easy to fit the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the regulation without pressing other elements.
Further, as shown in an enlarged view of an imaginary line box in FIG. 255, a bulging portion 640b that can be fitted (i.e., loosely fitted) into the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 may be provided on the inner surface of the back cover 640. .. By doing so, when the dent 1301k of the cover body 1301 and the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 do not match, the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 does not interfere and does not close normally. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the installation defect of the main control unit 1300.
In the embodiment, the rotation center of the back cover 640 is provided on the side opposite to the rotation center of the body frame 4, but the rotation center is the rotation center of the back cover 640 with respect to the body frame 4. It may be provided on the same side as. Then, the back cover 640 can be opened without turning the main body frame 4 largely, and the game setting value of the control unit 1300 can be changed in that state, so that the efficiency of the work of changing the game setting value can be improved. Can be up.

[30-3. Security structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is provided with the game settings relating to the profit of the player as the setting values of a plurality of stages, and the setting values are set switch 1311a, the setting switch button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, etc. Can be changed by changing operation means, and a crime prevention structure is provided for preventing such illegal setting change of the game setting. A specific example of the crime prevention structure will be described below.

[30-3-1. Crime prevention structure of main control unit (1)]
As described above, in the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the arrangement of the opening 1301h through which the setting switch 1311a is inserted and the main control MPU 1310a that is the specific electronic component T is arranged in the column direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (the one-dot chain line in FIG. 254). (See L2), a virtual straight line L1 that connects the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h intersects obliquely.
In the main control unit 1300, provisionally, no foreign matter countermeasure such as the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v of the embodiment is provided between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a which is a circuit component, and as a result, the opening 1301h. Even if a wire-like foreign substance is inserted into the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 through the gap between the setting switch 1311a and the setting switch 1311a and reaches the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, the foreign substance and the specific pin 1310aq are electrically connected. Since it is difficult to apply the contact load necessary for stable connection, it is impossible to electrically access the main control MPU 1310a after all. Therefore, fraud caused by a foreign substance can be prevented.
Further, if the opening 1301h is on an extension line in the column direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (see the alternate long and short dash line L2 in FIG. 254), that is, the alternate long and short dash line L2 connects the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h. When the straight line L1 and the straight line L1 are overlapped with each other, the other pin 1310ap can be used as a shield to protect the specific pin 1310aq.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the substantially center of the rectangle so that the long side of the substantially rectangular printed board 1310t and the column direction of the pin group are substantially parallel to each other as in the embodiment, and the opening 1301h, That is, if the setting switch 1311a is arranged on the shorter side of the printed circuit board 1310t, more preferably on the corner portion, the distance between the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h is increased and the angle of the straight line L1 connecting the two is made acute. It is possible to effectively prevent fraud caused by foreign matter.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a may arrange the specific pin 1310aq on the opposite side of the opening 1301h with the package 1310ab interposed therebetween. In this case, since the specific pin 1310aq is located on the rear side of the package 1310ab of the main control MPU 1310a when viewed from the opening 1310h, even if the foreign matter is inserted through the gap between the opening 1301h and the circuit component, the foreign matter is identified. It is practically difficult to make contact with the pin 1310aq, and thus fraud caused by foreign matter can be prevented.

[30-3-2. Crime prevention structure of main control unit (2)]
In the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component T that can be a target of illegal manipulation, but in reality, an input circuit is formed between the main control MPU 1310a and the setting switch 1311a with an electronic component such as a resistor. In some cases, the electronic component that constitutes this input circuit also corresponds to the specific electronic component T that may be subject to tampering.
Therefore, in the embodiment, as the crime prevention structure (2) of the main control unit 1300, the setting switch button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, the resistor 1310r, and the like are specified between the circuit component corresponding to the opening 1301h and the specific electronic component T. Circuit components other than the electronic component are arranged in a barricade as the obstacle portion 1310s, whereby the foreign matter can be prevented from reaching the specific electronic component T. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud caused by a foreign object aimed at the specific electronic component T.
By using the crime prevention structure (2) together with the crime prevention structure (1), a higher crime prevention effect can be obtained.
Specifically, by arranging circuit components in a barricade between the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h of the crime prevention structure (1) to form an obstacle 1310s, it is possible to more effectively prevent fraud caused by a foreign substance. You can
For example, like the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a shown by the solid lines in FIG. 250, the connectors SMCN and MSCN (electronic parts) for connecting the setting change board 1310Y of the divided board structure and the main control board 1310X are sandwiched between them. Deploy. In this case, the connectors SMCN and MSCN can function as obstacles 1310s with respect to foreign matter inserted from the setting switch 1311a side toward the main control MPU 1310a. The instability overcoming the portion 1310s and the instability of slanting contact with the main control MPU 1310a are combined to make fraud by foreign matter very difficult. This effect is the same when the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position shown by the imaginary line in FIG.
Further, the setting switch 1311a is shown in the position of the imaginary line in FIG. 250 (in the figure, the setting switch 1311a is drawn in a sideways state, but the explanation here is that it is in the same direction as the solid line setting switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position of the imaginary line so that the setting display 1310g is sandwiched between the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the setting indicator 1310g can be caused to function as an obstacle 1310s with respect to a foreign object inserted from the side of the imaginary line setting switch 1311a toward the main control MPU 1310a of the imaginary line. Even if it is broken through, the instability of overcoming the obstacle 1310s and the instability of obliquely contacting the main control MPU 1310a are combined, and thus fraud caused by foreign matter becomes extremely difficult.

  Note that the obstacle portion 1310s of the crime prevention structure (2) does not necessarily have to be a circuit component, and for example, the main control portion 1310 has the above-described divided board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated, A partition wall for partitioning the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y (a partition wall 1302b shown in FIG. 266 is integrally molded on the cover body 1301 side) is provided inside the cover body 1301 and the partition wall serves as an obstacle 1310s. Good. In this case, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be connected by the connectors SMCN and MSCN as described above, but each of them is provided with a connector having a connection structure for inserting and removing in a direction orthogonal to the board surface. It is good to connect with a harness. Foreign matter that moves along the printed circuit board 1310t with respect to the connector having such a coupling structure cannot intrude at all due to a difference in traveling direction. Therefore, even if the connector is a specific electronic component connected to the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, it cannot be illegally performed. ..

  The crime prevention structures (1) and (2) of the main control unit 1300 have been described above. Of course, in these crime prevention structures (1) and (2), the clearance t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e described above. And a configuration in which the interval t2 between the tube end part 1301z of the receiving tube part 1301i and the top of the mounting part 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is t1 ≧ t2, or the interval t2 is located at a high place in the internal space 1320s. Further, a high crime prevention effect can be obtained by combining a configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the depression 1301k of the opening 1301h.

[30-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (A)]
The first crime prevention structure (A) for preventing the illegal operation of the change operation means is, as described above with respect to the embodiment of FIGS. It is configured by a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion portion on the tip surface portion) for turning on the operation portion by the setting key K1. As a result, the setting value of the game setting can be changed by the changing operation means only to a specific person including the manager of the game hall having the setting key K1.

  The change operation means is for changing the set value, and in the embodiment, it is configured by a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, of which the setting switch 1311a is the main. The control unit 1310 is a specific operation unit that controls the start of setting change, and the setting switch button 1311b is provided in the main control unit 1310 and is another operation unit that performs a setting operation other than the setting change start. . No crime prevention measures have been taken with respect to the separate operation unit other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v for preventing foreign matter such as wire from entering, and therefore, an external input operation (press operation of the setting switch button 1311b) is performed. Although it is possible for anyone other than a specific person to press the portion 1311p), the "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation portion, is turned on by the setting key K1 is satisfied. Since the input in the non-activated state is invalid for control, there is almost no problem in crime prevention.

  The axis of the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit of the changing operation unit, is oriented in the direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 as shown in FIG. 250 to FIG. 252. The tip portion is protruding to the outer surface of the cover body 1301, but the protruding portion may be an obstacle depending on the depth of the island facility in the game hall, and may also be an obstacle during storage.

  In such a case, as shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 250 and B, the axis of the change operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having a key insertion portion) operated by the setting key K1 is set on the substrate of the main control unit 1310. For example, it may be set so as to be substantially parallel to the surface, and the front end surface (key insertion surface) thereof may face the side surface side of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the change operation means is arranged so that the key insertion portion projects from the left end (hinge portion side) of the board surface of the main control portion 1310 in front view (so as to protrude from the board end). And a semi-circular cutout formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 which is a container so as to fit in the setting switch 1311a and the main control board. It can be illustrated that both the cutout portion formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320 accommodates the protruding portion of the changing operation means with the key insertion portion exposed to the outside. When projecting the key insertion part from the left end of the main control part 1310 in the front view of the board surface, the operation part provided with the key insertion part may be substantially the same surface as the side surface part of the main control board box 1320. The surface portion on which the key insertion portion is provided may be made to project more than the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320, but preferably the depression 1301k is formed as described above.

  Thereby, the protrusion of the changing operation means to the rear side (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) of the main control board box 1320 can be almost eliminated or reduced. When the board of the main control unit 1310 is placed on the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the key insertion portion protruding from the end of the board is housed in the cutout portion. It is also possible to facilitate the positioning (positioning) of the board of the control unit 1310 and reduce the load of the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1.

[30-3-4. Security structure of change operation means (B)]
The second crime prevention structure (B) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operating means is, as shown in FIGS. 261-266, a change suppressing means 1312 which covers at least a part of the change operating means, and A first state holding unit (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock unit) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppressing unit 1312.

  The change operation means of the crime prevention structure (B) includes a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, of which the main control unit 1310 is provided. The change operation means provided include a setting switch 1311a (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific operation section 1311a”) and a setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter, “separate operation”, except for the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c. Section 1311b ") and a setting display 1310g for displaying the set value. In this security structure (B), the setting switch 1311a as a specific operation unit and the setting switching button 1311b as a different operation unit are both small push button switches that can be turned ON / OFF by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p. The device itself does not include a crime prevention structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents foreign matter such as wire from entering.

The change prevention means 1312 of the security structure (B) covers at least a part of the change operation means in order to make the change operation of the game setting difficult, and at least one of the change operation means will be described later with respect to a specific configuration. The state is changed to a first state in which it is difficult to change the game setting by covering the part, and a second state in which the change operation means covered in the first state is exposed to enable the operation for changing the game setting. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that not only the case where the change operation means is made up of a plurality of elements but also one element involved in the change operation indispensable in the game setting among the plurality of elements To do. It also means that even if one element of the changing operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gap as long as it is difficult to change the game setting. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the changing operation means includes both the numerical ones and the qualitative ones described above.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (B) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding), although a specific configuration will be described later. The change suppressing means 1312 is released by the release operation of the above, and the change of the change suppressing means 1312 from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state are switched.

[30-3-4-1. Change suppressing means and lock portion (first state holding means)]
A concrete change prevention means 1312 and a lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261 has a flat plate shape that covers almost one side half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 (that is, a part of the containing body), and The specific operation section 1311a (setting switch 1311a), the separate operation section 1311b (setting switching button 1311b), and the RAM clear switch 1310f of the provided change operation means can be collectively covered. The change suppressing means 1312 can be pivoted like a single-opening door by pivotally attaching one end side to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover body 1301, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 261, the specific operation portion 1311a. The first state in which the game setting change operation is difficult to cover by covering the above, and the second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the like are exposed to enable the game setting change operation as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. It can change (rotate) to and.

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. 261 is a cylinder lock 1313a integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and the rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313a. By engaging the lock member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with the lock receiving member 1301b protruding from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the change restraining means 1312 (D) in the first state and the cover body 1301. To lock the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a by using the unlock key K2, and thus the lock receiving member 1301b of the cover body 1301 to the lock member. By the specific release operation of removing 1313c, the lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is released to enable the change to the second state, and further the second state is changed to the first state. The change suppressing means 1312 (D) thus set can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 including the crime prevention structure (B) of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. Since the change can be performed only by a specific person who has the unlocking key K2, even if the change operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, there is almost no crime problem like the crime prevention structure (A). ..

  The change suppressing unit 1312 (D) is made of a synthetic resin having transparency (for example, transparent), and even if the change operating unit is covered in the first state, the visibility of the change operating unit is not hindered. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301, each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a management number or a predetermined explanation at a position where they do not overlap each other. The information display unit 1314 in which sentences are written is provided. As a result, it is possible to easily find the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) (collection of parts in good condition), which is performed for the purpose of concealing illegal activities. It is possible to easily visually confirm an illegal operation on the 1311a.

  Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size / shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301. However, for example, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size / shape that can cover the entire main control unit 1300. In addition to the formation, the bearing portion 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on the fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the entire main control unit 1300 can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 261, the crime prevention performance of the change restraining means 1312 (D) is tentatively determined by providing the center of rotation (bearing portion 1301a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 so that the lock portion (first state) can be obtained. Even if the holding means) 1313 (D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. That is, as shown by an imaginary line in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in a partition shape in the opened state, and the vicinity of the left side of the change operating means (specific operation portion 1311a, another operation portion 1311b) is a wall. It is configured to play a role of guarding likewise, and the change restraining means 1312 (D) which is in an open state for the act of illicitly changing the change operating means from the free end side of the main body frame 4. It can be blocked by itself. That is, by thus providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4, the change operating means can be protected in the first state and the partition state in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized change operation on the change operation means. Further, in order to maximize the effect, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261 has a length (distance from the bearing portion 1301a that projects toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when in the open state (distance). ) Is configured to be larger than the length (distance) from the bearing portion 1301a to the position where the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation portion 1311b) is arranged, and the change suppressing means 1312 (in the open state) The change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is arranged to the immediate right of D). Further, the position where the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation portion 1311b) is arranged is located near the center of the vertical length of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation). It is difficult to access the portion 1311b) from above and below, and the rotation of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is stopped (fixed) in a state of standing upright in a partition. Although the security performance can be improved by having a part of each of these configurations, it is most preferable that all of them are satisfied.

  On the contrary, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) may be made small so that only the specific operation section 1311a is covered, and the separate operation section 1311b may not be covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the targets of change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation part and separate operation part) to those with high security importance, those with low security importance are opened to the outside. By doing so, the workability of changing the settings can be improved.

  The axis of the changing operation means described in the security structure (A) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip end of the changing operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea of the above can be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) and the like.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (E) of FIG. 262 is almost the same as the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) of FIG. 262 is provided on the cover body 1301 side with the perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (E). A padlock 1313d that connects the projecting perforated lock receiving member 1316 with an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c. By engaging both perforated lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c, The change restraining means 1312 (E) in one state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change restraining means 1312 (E) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) changes the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction by using the unlocking key K2, and then the change suppressing means 1312 (E) is opened. The lock (holding) in the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) is released by a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the lock receiving member 1315 and the perforated lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301. The change suppressing means 1312 (E), which is capable of changing to the two states and is changed from the second state to the first state, can be locked (held) by the padlock 1313d.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d, and therefore, in the unlocked state, it is detached from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301. . Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is detached from the cover body 1301 (container) in the unlocked state by connecting to the cover body 1301 by the wire-shaped or chain-shaped support portion 1317. It is supposed not to. As a result, there is no risk that the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) will drop into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the removed lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E). You can avoid wasting your place and looking for it in the lock stage.

  Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) of FIGS. 257 to 263 is swingable by axially attaching a portion corresponding to the essential part of the fan in a substantially lateral fan shape to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. In this case, as shown in FIG. 263, the first state of covering the specific operation portion 1311a of the change operation means can be changed to the second state of exposing the specific operation portion 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. 265. Further, the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when the specific operation unit 1311a is in the first state, and does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when the specific operation unit 1311a is changed to the second state. It is configured to cover the operation unit 1311b. By selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) in this manner, an erroneous operation of operating the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b at the same time is unlikely to occur.

  The change suppressing means 1312 (F) is constantly biased in a direction to cover the separate operation portion 1311b by a winding spring (not shown) provided at the swing center, and a lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 ( When the lock (holding) in the first state by F) is released, the elasticity of the winding spring changes the state to the second state. By thus urging the change suppressing means 1312 (F) toward the second state, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) will stop at a halfway position, and operability is improved. The change restraining means 1312 (F) may be biased in either the first state or the second state, but preferably, the change restraining means 1312 (F) is biased toward the second state. When the lock (holding) of is released, the special operation portion 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the changing operation is easy to understand.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) in FIGS. 263 to 265 includes a mounting base 1301d protruding from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313a fixed to the mounting base 1301d, and A cam 1313e attached to the tip of the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change suppressing means by sliding the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e to the upper side surface of the change suppressing means 1312 (F). 1312 is pushed down against the bias of the winding spring to lock (hold) in the first state of covering the specific operation portion 1311a.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a by using the unlocking key K2, and the change suppressing means by the change of the peripheral surface shape of the cam 1313e. The lock (hold) of 1312 (F) is unlocked by a specific unlocking operation to release the lock (hold) of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) in the first state, thereby enabling the change to the second state (embodiment). The change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged in the direction toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), and therefore, when the lock (holding) in the first state is released, it slides on the peripheral surface of the cam 1313e. It automatically changes to the second state while coming into contact with each other.) Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2. .

  In the operation of changing the set value, when the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the different operation unit 1311b, if it is necessary to operate the different operation unit 1311b, the change suppression unit The separate operation portion 1311b may be exposed by manually pushing down the operation protrusion 1312m provided on 1312 (F) by putting a finger or the like.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the crime prevention structure (B) of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 263 and 265 is based on the change operation means. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person who has the unlock key K2, even if the changing operation means itself does not have the crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the crime prevention structure (A) is the same as the crime prevention structure. There are few problems above.

  Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) in FIG. 266 is of a form in which the portion of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the setting change board 1310X is separated and made independent. The key type hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302 is engaged with the key type hinge portion 1312b of the base body 1302 so as to be rotatable with respect to the base body 1302 and provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y. It is possible to change to a first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b that are present are collectively covered, and a second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are exposed to allow a change operation. The cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to the partition wall 1302b which is erected from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) in FIG. 266 is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) on the cover body 1301 side, and the advance / retreat shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip of 1313g with the lock shaft thread 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change restraining means 1312 (I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to each other and the change restraining means 1312 ( Lock (hold) I) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates a plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313f according to the unlocking numbers to retract the advance / retreat shaft 1313g, and thus the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change restraining means 1312 (I) is released by a specific releasing operation of removing the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313g from the through 1301f to enable the change to the second state, and further the second state. It is possible to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (I) changed from the first state to the first state with the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 including the crime prevention structure (B) of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. Since the change can be made only to a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself does not have the crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the same crime prevention problem as the crime prevention structure (A) does. There is almost no. The first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the crime prevention structure (B) employs a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, a dial lock 1313f having relatively high crime prevention performance, but the crime prevention performance is lower than these. Any structure may be used as long as the change suppressing unit 1312 held in the first state can be released by a specific release operation.
Further, since the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 266 is independent of the cover body 1301, even if the cover body 1301 needs to be replaced, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can be reused as it is. is there. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person breaks the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized operation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the tampering prevention function of the cover body 1301 can be improved by the change suppressing unit 1312 (I).

[30-3-5. Security structure of change operation means (C)]
The third crime prevention structure (C) for preventing the illegal operation of the change operation means is such that the crime prevention structure (B) exposes the change operation means to the outside by setting the change suppressing means 1312 to the second state. In contrast to directly operating the change operating means, the change suppressing means 1312 is provided at a position on the container (main control board box 1320) side so as to cover the change operating means, and the change operating means itself is operated. While making it difficult, the change suppressing means 1312 is made to operate the change operation means instead.
That is, as shown in FIG. 267, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of the crime prevention structure (C) is on the side of the cover body 1301 which is the container and on the specific operation part 1311a (may be another operation part 1311b). A cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a covering position, that is, a position in a first state for covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation part 1311a is provided, and the specific operation part 1311a can be directly exposed to the outside. Make the change operation difficult.
Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) presses the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so as to enable the switch input mediating operation by a specific operation from the outside. The motion converting mechanism is provided to make the linear motion of the pendulum 1313h, that is, the motion capable of a switch input motion.
Then, when a specific operation of inserting the unlocking key K2 into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) and rotating the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation portion 1311a is caused by the action of the motion conversion mechanism. The change operation means 1312 (J) of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) substitutes a direct change operation from the outside, in other words, a direct change operation of the specific operation portion 1311 a from the outside is performed by the change suppressing means. 1312 (J) pressing operation slider 1313h.

According to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), the operation for changing the game setting from the outside by the change operating means is fixed by the change suppressing means fixedly provided at the position covered by the change operating means on the cover body 1301 side. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the game setting is properly changed by the change operation means, as a specific operation from the outside with respect to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), for example, an operation of inserting and unlocking the unlock key K2 from the outside is performed. Then, by the operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (J), a direct change operation for the change operating means is performed on behalf of (intermediate execution), so that the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by ending the specific operation for the change suppressing means 1312 (J), it is possible to return to a state where it is difficult to directly change the change operating means from the outside.

Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (J) may, for example, rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a with the unlocking key K2, but also change the dial lock 1313f of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) to the advancing / retreating shaft 1313g. Is arranged so that the axis line of the specific operation part 1311a and the axis of the pressing operation part 1311p of the specific operation part 1311a are aligned, and each dial of the dial lock 1313f is aligned with the unlocking number. The pressing operation portion 1311p may be pressed.
Further, when a shutter plate 1319 that covers another operation portion 1311b is integrally projectingly provided on the end cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) as shown in FIG. 268, and the end cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose the separate operation unit 1311b. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b and also prevent dust from entering the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (C) of the change restraining means 1312 (J) of FIGS. 267 and 268 has the unlock key K2 for changing the set value of the game setting by the change operating means. Or, since it can be performed only by a specific person who knows the unlocking number, even if the changing operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the same crime prevention problem as that of the crime prevention structure (A) occurs. Almost never.

  The axis of the changing operation means described in the security structure (A) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip end of the changing operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea that has been applied can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppressing means 1312 (J).

[30-4. About technical ideas]
As is clear from the above description, the above [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 including the main control unit 1300 described in [Security Structure of Main Control Unit (2)] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
"A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit;
And a setting switch which is provided in the main control board box and which can change the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder which is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body.
Further, in the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the position of the operating portion is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body, and a concave recess is formed by the operating portion and the opening. ,
Further, the recess has a tapered surface that is inclined downward toward the center.
According to such a gaming machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the set value with the setting key, it is necessary to open the front door frame etc. for quick work, but first open the door frame etc. and then change the position of the setting switch of the main control board box. It will take some time to find. Also, if you press the work key and fail to insert the setting key, the setting key may slip on the operation part and stick out to the resin part of the cover body.There is a streak on the surface of the cover body at the tip of the hard setting key. There is a risk of scratching.
On the other hand, the main control board box of the gaming machine of the above technical idea has a concave depression due to the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, and further, a taper with an inclination descending toward the center of the depression. Since it has a surface, first, it is easy to intuitively understand because a part of the periphery of the setting switch is conspicuously visible due to the reflection of the room illumination by the recessed tapered surface. Therefore, the setting switch of the main control board box can be arranged on the hinge side of the door frame or the like that is difficult to see and shy away from common sense, and conversely, unless the door frame or the like is opened wide. It is possible to improve crime prevention performance by preventing fraud.
Further, even if the setting key is missed, the setting key does not stick to the surface of the cover body by hitting the tapered surface of the depression of the opening, or jumps up along the tapered surface and is unlikely to rub against the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no risk of the surface of the cover body being damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time (see, for example, paragraphs 2556 to 2578, FIG. 259, FIG. 260, etc.). ).
Although the tapered surface of the depression may be a factor that reduces the visibility due to the refraction of light, the size of the tapered surface and the inclination angle of the circuit component itself or the check required part of the circuit component The necessary visibility can be obtained by making the size larger than the size (display part such as the product number) or setting the inclination angle gradually (for example, the inclination angle is made gentle to widen the taper surface). Can be secured.

In addition, the above [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 including the main control unit 1300 described in [Security Structure of Main Control Unit (2)] also includes the following technical idea. In addition to the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control unit 1500, the payout control unit 620d, and the like are included in the control unit of the following technical idea.
Further, the specific electronic component T includes a main control MPU 1310a in which two rows of pin groups are provided on the front and rear surfaces of a plate-shaped package 1310ab, as well as one in which four rows of pin groups are provided on four sides of a square package, for example. Is also included.
[Claim A1]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a control board for a game is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
Printed circuit board,
A circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box is
Base body,
A cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the base body and the base body, and has an opening formed to expose a part of the circuit component from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is a specific electronic component and a specific pin of the specific electronic component is a specific pin, the opening and the specific electronic component are The arrangement is such that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening can substantially overlap or obliquely intersect in a row direction of a pin group including the specific pin.
According to such a gaming machine, even if an illegal person inserts a foreign object into the internal space of the control board box through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, and aims at the specific pin of the specific electronic component from there. When the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening (see reference numeral L1 in FIG. 254) overlaps with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin (see reference numeral L2 in FIG. 254), the other pin is used as a shield to identify the specific pin. It is possible to protect from foreign matter, and when the straight line intersects the pin group at an angle, a sufficient contact load cannot be obtained even if the foreign matter touches the specific pin, so that the contact resistance increases and the specific electron Electrical access to the parts becomes difficult. Therefore, fraud caused by a foreign substance can be prevented.

[Claim A2]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a control board for a game is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
Printed circuit board,
A circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box is
Base body,
A cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the base body and the base body, and has an opening formed to expose a part of the circuit component from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is a specific pin, the package of the specific electronic component is sandwiched. A game machine in which the specific pin is arranged on the opposite side of the opening.
According to such a gaming machine, since the specific pin is located on the rear side of the package of the specific electronic component when viewed from the opening, even if the foreign matter is inserted through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, the foreign matter can be identified. It is practically difficult to make contact with the pin, and thus fraud caused by foreign matter can be prevented.

[Claim A3]
The printed board of the control board box is formed into a substantially rectangular shape, the row of pin groups of the specific electronic component is arranged substantially parallel to the long side of the printed board, and the opening is provided on the short side of the printed board. The gaming machine according to claim A1, wherein the gaming machine is arranged in the.
In such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the degree to which the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening intersects obliquely with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin, and increase the distance from the opening to the specific pin. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to control the foreign matter in the internal space.

[Claim A4]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a control board for a game is housed in a control board box,
The control board includes circuit components including electronic components,
The control board box is
Base body,
A cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the base body and the base body, and has an opening formed to expose a part of the circuit component from the internal space to the outside. ,
Provided is a gaming machine in which, when a specific one of the electronic components is a specific electronic component, the circuit component other than the specific electronic component is arranged between the specific electronic component and the opening. Examples of the specific electronic component include electronic components that can be a target of tampering.
According to such a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), since the circuit components other than the specific electronic component are arranged in a barricade between the opening and the specific electronic component, the circuit component is inserted from the opening to the specific electronic component. The directed foreign matter hits a circuit component in between. Therefore, since the foreign matter is prevented from reaching the specific electronic component, it is possible to prevent fraud caused by the foreign matter aiming at the specific electronic component.

Further, the main control unit 1300 further includes the following technical idea.
[Claim B1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a winning,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit;
And a setting switch which is provided in the main control board box and which can change the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body.
Further, in the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the position of the operating portion is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body, and a concave recess is formed by the operating portion and the opening. A gaming machine characterized by.
According to such a gaming machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the set value with the setting key, the setting key that did not insert it too quickly could slip on the operation part and stick out to the resin part of the cover body, so the cover There is a risk of streaky scratches on the surface of.
On the other hand, in the main control board box of the gaming machine of the present invention, since the concave portion is formed by the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening portion of the cover body, the setting key cannot be inserted without fail. However, the setting key hits the edge of the opening and does not stick out to the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover body is damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time.
[Claim B2]
The gaming machine according to claim B1,
A back cover that can be opened and closed and the main control board box are attached to the rear side of the main body frame having a game board, and the main control board box is not provided with a cover for the opening, and the opening is provided in the main frame. It is characterized in that it can be covered with a back cover.
In such a gaming machine, even if a crime prevention cover is not provided in the opening of the main control board box, the back cover of the main body frame enables the crime prevention performance of the setting key cylinder (prevention of unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder by a matching key). In addition, since there is no protrusion of the setting key cylinder or extra protrusion of the cover from the opening of the main control board box, it is possible to fit the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the specifications without pressing other elements. it can.
[Claim B3]
The gaming machine according to claim B2, wherein a bulging portion that can be fitted (played into) the recess of the cover body is provided on the inner surface of the back cover.
In such a gaming machine, when the recess of the cover body and the bulging portion of the back cover do not match, the bulging portion of the back cover interferes and does not close normally, so that an unauthorized modification product is found or the main control unit is installed. The above defects can be prevented.

[Claim C1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a winning,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit;
And a setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
The setting switch has a mounting portion to be mounted on the main control portion, and a setting key cylinder having a cylinder shape having a diameter smaller than the top of the mounting portion and which is pivotally operated by a setting key, and is provided on the cover body. The opening of the setting key cylinder is formed so as to face the outside,
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted to a receiving cylinder portion projectingly provided on the inner space side of the cover body,
On the other hand, by bringing the tube end portion of the receiving cylinder portion on the side opposite to the opening portion close to the top of the mounting portion protruding to the outside of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the portion between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder is provided. A game machine characterized in that it can block passage of a foreign object inserted into a gap into the internal space.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a wire-like foreign object is inserted into the gap between the receiving cylinder section and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body, the foreign matter hits the top of the mounting section at the tip in the traveling direction of the foreign matter, and ends. Even if it is possible to change the direction of the tip of the foreign substance there, it is difficult to pass because it is blocked by the narrow gap between the tube end of the receiving tube and the top of the mounting part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act due to a wire-shaped foreign object aiming at a gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body.
Moreover, since such an illegality preventing effect can be achieved by utilizing the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, almost no special cost is required.

[Claim C2]
In the gaming machine according to claim C1, the distance between the tube end of the receiving cylinder and the top of the mounting portion of the setting switch is less than or equal to the size of the gap between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder. A game machine characterized by being formed into a size.
The gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder is usually set to the minimum width (clearance) required to pass the setting key cylinder through the receiving cylinder portion, and foreign matter passing therethrough is extremely thin. However, even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is not easy to change its direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and to break through the part of the gap t2 that is equal to or smaller than the gap t1 in that state. Moreover, even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign matter toward the target point after that.

[Claim C3]
The gaming machine according to claim C1 or C2, wherein the setting switch is mounted on a surface of the main control unit near a joint with the main control board box.
The vicinity of the joint of the main control unit with the main control board box is difficult to bend due to the rigidity of the main control board box even if the main control unit is pressed in the surface direction. Therefore, by providing a setting switch at that portion, it is difficult to sink even if it is pressed from the outside. Therefore, it is illegal to press the setting switch to forcibly push down the main control unit and forcibly increase the interval t2. It's hard to get rid of. In addition, suppressing the bending of the main control unit when the setting switch is operated is effective in preventing cracks and the like of the main control unit when used for a long period of time.

[Claim D]
A gaming machine having a control unit in which a control board for a game is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
Printed circuit board,
A plurality of circuit components attached to the printed circuit board,
The control board box is
Base body,
A cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between the base body and the base body, and has an opening formed to expose a part of the circuit component from the internal space to the outside. ,
At least one of the circuit components includes a lower step portion attached to the printed circuit board, an upper step portion having a bottom shape smaller than a top shape of the lower step portion, and a height to the opening is smaller than a height of the lower step portion. And is formed in a stepped overlapping form consisting of, and is formed so that the upper step portion faces the outside from an opening formed in the cover body,
The opening portion of the cover body has a receiving cylinder portion that is provided so as to project toward the inner space side of the cover body and that surrounds the upper step portion of the circuit component.
A gaming machine, characterized in that a cylinder end portion of the receiving cylinder portion on the side opposite to the opening portion and a top portion of the lower step portion of the circuit component are arranged close to each other.
Here, the bottom of the upper stage does not mean the absolute bottom of the upper stage, but when the upper stage is inserted into the lower stage, the side surface of the upper stage and the top of the lower stage are The apparent part that intersects.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a linear foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the upper stage portion of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body, the top portion of the lower stage portion ahead of the foreign matter in the traveling direction. It hits and ends. Even if the direction of the tip of the foreign matter were changed from this direction and the narrow space between the tube end of the receiving tube and the top of the lower step was forcibly widened and broken through, the location would be high in the internal space. Because of the position, the cheating person, for example, sends out a foreign object that has penetrated a narrow space into the internal space, causes the tip to contact the printed circuit board by bending due to its own weight, and aims the direction of the tip in the contact state. It is necessary to perform an operation of switching to the direction, but it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign substance that is bent and has a long hanging length due to its own weight and a force is not well transmitted to the tip.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act due to a linear foreign object aiming at the gap between the receiving tube portion and the upper portion of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body.
The circuit components include a setting switch including a lower mounting portion and an upper setting key cylinder, a setting switch button including a lower mounting portion and an upper pressing operation portion, and a RAM clear switch. Is mentioned.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments and other forms, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments and the like, and as shown below, within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. , Various improvements and design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiments and the like, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused together is provided. , And in this case also, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 551a Top plate part of dispensing base 551 (tank unit mounting part)
551ah Opening notch 551c Right side plate part of dispensing base 551 (tank unit mounting part)
551d Upper part of back plate of dispensing base 551 (tank unit mounting part)
551t ridge 551z passage seat 552 ball tank (tank unit)
553, 553A Tank rail (tank unit, payout ball passage)
553h Falling port 553l Foreign object discharge bypass passage portion 553m Support cylinder 553p Rail outlet 553q Inverted bulging portion 553r Arcuate portion 553s Short cylinder portion 553t Corner portion 553u Step 553v Ball stopper slit 553w Passage sidewall 553x Trough front wall 553y Trough rear wall 553z Bottom wall 555b Protective wall 556, 556A Straightening member 556a Straightening piece 556b Swing shaft 557, 557A Ball stop member 557b Long hole 557c Sliding base portion 557d Ball stop piece 557e Operation knob portion 557f Elastic lock piece 557g Anchor portion 557h Flow-out space Part 557i Detour part 570a Guidance passage (dispensing ball passage part)
570p Induction inlet 580 Discharge device 5530 Discharge outlet K Bent portion SS Gap Y Electric wire

Claims (1)

Door frame,
A main body frame located after the door frame,
A tank rail portion connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame,
An opening / closing member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the tank rail portion,
The bottom of the tank rail is provided with a hole for dropping foreign matter,
In association with the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, the opening mode of the hole changes.
The tank rail portion is composed of a colorless member,
The game machine, wherein the opening / closing member is composed of a colored member.